Transactions of the Literary & Historical Society of Quebec

4

re tN et, ad, Oe ee i 4 i RES dats od OY ee ie ee ee rae ey, FL, aes ws
> oe : a, y $e! : Ewa > oe es Sa
‘ ‘ - ‘ Ld
at ’ « . a : r §
» ’ : » y 5
F
‘ } ; ‘
-
‘
»/ :
‘- : as
,' ‘
~ ’
* ?
-
ot 7 se :
7 P r

“ebat.
=44

DP we +
Vesitre ss

ee eng ey, / on Yee a ya
44) iccmmmanal \/ temamammal tanned 6 Me A eee (|) (ey

TRANSACTIONS

uP THE

ka SOCIETY
QUEBEC:

FOUNDED, JANUARY 6, 1824,

QUEBEC.
PUENTED FOR THE LIT#RARY AND MISTOMICAL SOCIETY,
BY THOMAS CARY & Co.
Freemasons’ Halt, Buate Stret.

1831,
— a bh
* ’ / eat hs

si ae

‘

=)
7

"* Badd -

EST i IGkOR St ee yee

Re aa a =e
Pa 5 W * ¥
oi RNEBMOs)) LeTRARY MBAS oF em

al 4 i . R
il ~ *
‘ at > > £
; J =" tn ‘
+ @ « Ps —
‘ a’
: =
z :
J »
J
oe me
ii
“dates _ A c= |
_ . [~ .
<< Lass
§ ~~, ~ ee, *
~ } rf ~~ S 7]
* Wi < ag + 4 i
Hs Zz - » ; pry - : -
- Pa) : oe he ,
~ ° 4 -“. oad
0 id >
"a = Fra
rh yi lors ae Craigs” te eee ° ae
: ig
; ‘

abt pte inane > Prninirc desi
NW peokiencalh

TRANSACTIONS

OF THE

LITERARY AND HISTORICAL

SOCIETY

or

QUEBEC:

FOUNDED, JANUARY 6, 1824,

QUEBEC:
PRINTED YOR THE LITERARY AND HISTORICAL SOCIETY,
BY THOMAS CARY & Co.
Freemasons’ Hall, Buade Street.

1831,

Asp 3e MO

~ Fee) \
( rata os |
~e. Ba Te

\ : 56/
\ ~ a . Ww
; ee, es 9

er
[i
cr . axT 40
FADISOTAUI OVA YAAASERE
¥TELO Oss
a ~
f oi siabat atti des As ay Ne
: o* . SO er an
“Peer |, FHAU CAR aaavuer
’ x
; p

} -

, RTO : aaa

yansority ake ¥aianatl. ABR, SOe CAIIET

ol & CAD CAMONT Te, jo ae
Sov. sho Se ‘gregh - ‘ fy

LIST OF

OFFICERS

FOR 1830.

PRESIDENT,
THE HONORABLE MR. CHIEF JUSTICE SEWELL,

VICE+PRESIDENTS,

ANDREW STUART, Esq. M.P.P.
WILLIAM SHEPPARD, Esq.
HONORABLE SIR JOHN CALDWELL, Bart,
REV. MESSIRE DEMERS.

RECORDING SECRETARY,
WILLIAM HENDERSON, Esquire.

CORRESPONDING SECRETARY,
JONATHAN WURTELE, Esquire, M.P.P.

COUNCIL SECRETARY,
WILLIAM LYONS, Esquire, M.D.

TREASURER,
ARCHIBALD CAMPBELL, Esquire.

CHAIRMEN OF CLASSES,

Literature....... JOHN C, FISHER, Esq. L.L.D.
Natural History.. JOSEPH SKEY, Esq. M.D.
Science......... REV. D, WILKIE,

Arts .scseeseeee G. W, WICKSTEED, Esquire,

PREFACE.

In committing to the press a second volume of the
« TRANSACTIONS OF THE LITERARY AND Historica Socrery
or QuesBEc,” it seems necessary to state some particulars
respecting the origin and progress of the Society, which
have not appeared in the first volume. We may thus
account for the discrepancy apparently existing between
the name adopted by the Society, and its published Trans-
actions, which, with few exceptions, are not devoted to
what is strictly considered literary or historical research.

It is generally known here, that numerous documents
exist in the Public Offices, in the Convents, and in the
Possession of Individuals, containing valuable and curious
matter, hitherto inedited, respecting the Aborigines and
early settlers of Canada. The Earl of Dalhousie, in found«
ing a society in Quebec, in the year 1824, had chiefly in
view tbe collection and arrangement of these papers, from
which it was expected that much historical information would
be gleaned, and fresh light thrown on the state of society,
customs, &e. of the Indians in their primitive state, before
they were corrupted by their intercourse with Europeans,
—Natural History, and other departments of Science, held
only a secondary place in the researches about to be insti-
tuted. But either from want of inclination, or sufficient

il PREFACE.

leisure for such pursuits, or froma difficulty of obtaining
the documents referred to, from those in whose possession
they are, the Society has not as yet made any considerable
progress in these primary objects. Matter however of
another, and perhaps not less valuable kind, has been
brought forward ; and it is hoped that the papers contained
in this volume, on the language ofa race that is rapidly
passing away, and on the productions and capabilities of a
country hitherto, in a great measure unknown, will be
received with some interest.

The former volume of Transactions consisted principally:
of papers presented to the Literary and Historical Society,
between the time of its first foundation, and the year 1829,
During this period another society was formed in Quebec.
for the promotion of Arts and Sciences in Canada. His
Excellency Sir James Kempt, who at this time became
the Patron of both societies, and to whom, in their separate
and united states, they are indebted for constant and
liberal support, suggested the advantage that must accrue
by bringing together whatever talent or resources either
possessed. Under his auspices an union was subsequently
formed between them, and the present volume is the first
result of their united efforts.

Though the acquisition of information on subjects con-
nected with the Canadas, is a leading object with the present
society, that object is not the only one it has in view. Of
equal importance, in its estimation, is the endeavour to
excite in the rising generation, a taste for scientific know-
ledge and pursuits, and at the same time to afford facilities
for their cultivation, With these views, a grant of £250,
supplied by the liberality of the Provincial Parliament,
together with a considerable sum from the Society’s private

aa

PREFACE. il

funds, has been laid out in the purchase of Books on useful
and Scientific subjects, and of Instruments and Materials
for Chemical Analysis and experiments, for demonstrations
in Natural Philosophy, and for Practical Astronomy. The
Mineralogical Cabinet, and the collections of native
Botanical, and Geological specimens, which are daily
increasing by the kindness of various contributors, will
tend much towards forwarding the same purpose. And the
Society expects soon to possess sufficient materials to form
the subjects of lectures on different sciences, to be delivered
either by some of its own members, or by occasional
visitants.

In accordance with these objects; with the desire of
giving publication to matters of general interest, and, at
the same time, of exciting those persons, who possess
talents and opportunities for observing, to record and
transmit the result of their observations, the present volume
is submitted to the Canadian reader.

Quebec, 30th December, 1830.

wi Sr:
ut 5) AAaT a
‘=< ha eee a
Fito «toot to gendoiug ood ai 10 fiabiood ged -
aaiaoiat Bis iol [% Bat yokoa nfilinaine
eo this base 9 lasimadd 30

ait aarti qo! bak “eqtiqdeolia sane ai oe re
| . psd ‘Bah saHtWeO Tesigolesaibl

Sia. in date” 9K YearAGldoD) "baa teainaloll 5 wi

ott HHA Seo >
bettind af abatiasniis soho aaneoog Oi tn as :

“of eSon92 seo shily i10 Pas iliwsat 1 aoopdee
sre miner’ a0 ei te ag ed om ’ sits

imotae30 - unl a

ae | e

Ao gaya’ Dodie’ > att iti” rr a

ee bee | a@ernothi Ts19ts2 fo Prd} bur ay” fobietl wait TRA aha
y<) Salt

Eeeernogorter™ anc sport” gitist
: iv retio tor" otsieartbga Bil

ot sarong Si gaohte
peer yen vein este aay af bal
- ae bs = Zs y 4 \
aay oe, ing an08, pares
Apts. qa “aia 7
». Aa a a ii sos% tpt LAF rues : :
wAredir’ er. ‘~"* #* ‘ ;
| ™ aes Aree quicee Bf), AUN yaa pee ae
o. : Aan), . OFrs ehh: {Aer . Ae Vac Stee xa Ny
a en ; . f P
a scr ee f *ehhe gar BUTE Deak Was
ae “ + < “ Tt.
: q e sa wie vet quilt > vad poet ‘ TH
ely P ae a . “hed
awe or | nye ta i,
erent! eo tke ee
. Haier joo oq
“~
ee! ol, eas)? 5 3 ;
“Hncie B! ase iain ’
: ad
err. Urt ai i eta 8
\a
» ie

i ¥ % ,

—ee————————

Remarks on Corat AnIMAts in the Gulf of
St. Lawrence, by Capt. Bayrisip, R.N.

a

Tue rapid growth of Corals in Tropical climates, is a
fact which has attracted the attention of naturalists in all
ages, but it was not until the end of the sixteenth or
beginning of the seventeenth century that their true nature
appears to have been suspected, From the time of Pliny,
up to the period I have mentioned, they were considered
to be marine plants. A French naturalist, I believe, first
observed that the various ramifications of the coral were
inhabited by numerous tribes of insects or minute animals.
These animals were observed to have the power of protrud-
ing themselves from, and receding into small apertures. It
has also been noticed, that when first taken out of the sea,
the points which are protruded are soft, and that they are
filled with a milky fluid; hence it has been inferred that
nature has not been deficient in this any more than in every
other case with which we are acquainted, in providing
these animals both with the means of subsistence, and of
forming their peculiar abode in the ocean.

It will be unnecessary for me to trespass on the time of
the society, by entering into a description of the stupendous
operation of the coral animals in seas between, or in the
vicinity of the Tropics.—They are best described in the
writings of Dr. Foster, and in the voyages of Flinders and

A

2 Coral Animals in the

Kotzebue ; more recently still by the French naturalists,
M.M. Guoi and Gaimard. These last writers have stated
that the works of these animals do not commence at such
amazing depths as has been supposed, but that they carry
on their operations around and on the summit of submarine
rocks, generally at a depth not exceeding twenty-five or
thirty feet below the surface of the sea. This depth, 1 have
little doubt is underrated, for I have seen coral in the West
Indies at much greater depths, and the specimens which I
now present, were obtained from the bottom between
twenty and thirty fathoms below the surface.

The various kinds of coral are now stated by naturalists
to be the work of various tribes of lithophytic animals, all
more or less minute, of which the different species of
madrepores are by far the most numerous.

The specimen No. 1, was obtained by accident, a fish-
hook having fastened in one of its cavities, by which it was
drawn up from the bottom ; the depth was between twenty
and thirty fathoms, and we were then off the north
coast of the island of Anticosti, and within the 50th degree
of north latitude. 1 at first imagined that it was something
new to find corals in a latitude so far north, but I have
now my doubts of its being anything very uncommon, from
finding that Cuvier makes the following observation res-
pecting some of the genera of lithophytes, viz.—“ It occurs
most frequently in tropical climates, and decreases in
number and variety as we approach the poles.”

This specimen is composed of a mass of Anticosti lime-
stone, around the sides and upper parts of which is a sort
of cement, the produce and the abode of the animals which
I have next to mention.

It will readily be perceived that there are a number of

Gulf of St. Lawrence. 3

points of a dull red colour protruding from the mass.—
These, when first taken out of the water, were all living,
moving with a rapid vibratory motion, as if distressed by
the change from their own to another element, They were
then soft, to a degree sufficient to admit of bending, and
the points were of a much deeper red. When touched by
the finger, they instantly withdrew themselves into their
apertures, emitting at the same time, a milk-like fluid,
with so much force as to indicate considerable muscular
power; one of them was drawn out, and appeared to be
attached to the bottom of its cavity by a fibrous root.

Subsequent examination has, however, made me doubt
this last inference, and I am now of opinion, that what we
took for a root was the torn fragments of the animal itself,
as will appear probable from the following observations :—

A piece of the coral matter was placed in muriatic acid
diluted with about twice its quantity of water, The acid
took up the whole of the calcareous matter—There
remained floating in the solution a mass of animal matter,
gelatinous in appearance, but nevertheless possessed of
eonsiderable tenacity.

It retained in some degree its former shape, and the
points still remained attached and distinct, as in the coral
State.

We could not distinguish the structure of the animal,
which, perhaps, could only be perceived by means of a
highly magnifying power, at atime when the animal is
living or very recently dead.

That these animals contain a head, muscular system,
and alimentary canal, appears nearly certain from the
preceding observations. I am therefore of opinion, that
each of the points which has been mentioned as haying the

4 Coral Animals in the

power of protruding and withdrawing itself, and also of
secreting and ejecting a milk-like ftuid, apparently for the
purpose of forming its habitation, isa distinct, but not a
separate animal.

It is known that some of the zoophyta multiply life by
throwing out animated branches, or polypes, which possess
the power of spontaneous motion, and of throwing out new
shoots in their turn.

These shoots, or branches, thus possessing the powers
of the original animal, may be said to be distinct although
not separate.

It is from a consideration of the preceding observations
respecting zoophytic animals, joined to what I have
observed and related respecting the animals now under
consideration, that I have formed the opinion above given,
viz.—that the animated points are distinct, yet not separate
animals. I think that they are shoots thrown out by the
original animal.—At any rate three or four of them were
found united to the general animal mass, after the carbo-
nate of lime had been separated by the process before
mentioned.

One hundred grains of the coral yielded eight of animal
matter when perfectly dried. Small as this quantity
appears, it occupies a very large comparative space when
wet, and probably also in its living state.

I regret that our engrossing duties did not admit of our
examining the animals before death. They died soon after
being taken from the sea, and when next looked at, which
was not until some time afterwards, were found to be
consolidated into their present coral state.

Besides the animals which I have been speaking of, there
was a species of marine polypi on the surface of the coral

Gulf of St. Lawrence. 5

mass which, at first, we mistook for sea-weed, and were
only aware of our mistake when we observed them to
shrink from the touch. These were perfectly flexible, like
sea-weed, and appeared to have nothing to do with the
formation of coral. They have becomeso brittle, that they
could not easily be preserved, and only one or two remained
on the specimen, but several others I have placed in the
accompanying scallop shell. There are also several small
shells agglutinated to the coral, and one or two minute
and radiated crustaceous animals.

The specimen No, 2, is a small sprig or branch of perfect
coral, also from the coast of Anticosti. 1t was brought up
from a depth exceeding twenty fathoms, sticking to the
tallow at the bottom of the sounding lead.

From its radiated structure, which may be discovered by
inspecting it with a lens, it was in all probability the abode
and the produce of a species of madrepore.

The specimen No, 3, was submitted to my inspection by
our worthy President, the Chief Justice, it was also brought
up from the bottom, adhering to a sounding lead, and with
the exception of the polypi at its top, appears similar to
No. 1; but as I did not see it living I cannot speak parti-
cularly respecting it.

The specimen No. 4, was hooked up from a depth of
thirty fathoms, in the bay of Gaspé. ‘There are traces of
coral-like concretions on it, but I give it principally on
account of the crustaceous animals which were living in
its cavities, and which still remain.

In presenting these specimens and accompanying remarks
to the society, 1 have been actuated, less by a hope of
communicating a uew fact, than by a conviction of the
utility of putting thus upon record, the existence of coral

6 Coral Animals in the

animals in the sea around the island of Anticosti. The
species are probably far from numerous, and their opera-
tions insignificant, when compared with the labours of
similar though infinitely more numerous tribes in tropical
seas. Yet every thing relating to a department of Natural
History, as yet only imperfectly known, must be interesting,
and I am not aware that any one has before noticed the
existence of corals in the Gulf of St. Lawrence.

I cannot conclude these remarks without communicating
to the society, those reflections which have been forced
upon my mind by the consideration of the foregoing facts. —
Geology teaches us that the numerous fossil corals and
remains of testaceous animals found in the limestone strata
must have lived and died in ancient seas. These once sub-
marine strata have been laid bare either by the recession of
the primeval ocean, or have been upheaved by a force from
beneath, which has formed our present continents and
islands at some extremely remote period, probably antece-
dent to the creation of man.

Turning from the consideration of the past, to that of the
present, do we not perceive that numerous tribes of coral
animals are still existing in our present ocean—that
numerous tribes of testacea and crustacea still live and die
in it ; all of which contribute to create, or collect together
an immense quantity of calcareous matter? The rivers,
too, constantly carry down to the ocean great quantities of
the various earths, which are for a time held in suspension,
and finally deposited at the bottom of our seas. Similar
causes are therfore still at work. New strata are imper-
ceptibly forming, and it appears to be no extravagant
supposition, that they may hereafter be destined for the
support of vegetable or animal life, or even that the various

Gulf of St. Lawrence. 7

phenomena attending their future state, their organic
remains, &c. may exercise the reasoning powers of a future
race of mankind.

Remarks on the Disrrict traversed by the
Sr. Maurice Expepition, in the Summer
of 1629, by Lieut. Incaty, 15th Regt.

Tue intention of the few following pages is to
give a concise account of the component parts of
the rock and soil forming the shores of the rivers
and lakes explored, and to establish the probability
of the same formation extending over the inter-
vening: area,

—_—————

The impossibility of ascertaining the agricultural re-
sources of a country, from merely passing up a river, is
avery prevalent opinion, and one that would in the main
be just, were the ascent pursued in a direct line, for it
does sometimes occur that the shores of a river are low and
covered with sand for a considerable distance back,
although on further examination, the soil may be found to
improve and the timber become of a finer description : but
by making lateral excursions up smaller streams and closely
examining the rock and soil on their shores, a pretty cor-
rect judgement of the country forming the area between
those streams and rivers may be arrived at,

8 District traversed by the

From the great sameness prevailing in the primitive
formation met with on the route pursued, but little can
be said on the rocks constituting the range which divide
the waters flowing into Hudson’s Bay and the River St.
Lawrence, except accurately describing their occurrence ;
but it will be necessary to bring before the society one
concise and general view of the country bordering the
Rivers St. Maurice and aux Lievres, and also on the great
chain of lakes lying between those two rivers; in order
to prove the probability of the area comprised within their
limits being of the same primitive formation, and covered
with the same description of silecious sand, as that found
constituting the shores of those waters.

At Three Rivers there exists an alluvial deposit of
silecious sand extending about nine miles to the north-
ward, forming a moderate sized hill on the south side of
the St. Maurice. This hill abruptly terminates at the
village of the Forges, and a lower and more level track
stretches several miles farther to the north. This flat,
although lower than the hill, is considerably higher than
the river, and contains one or two extensive swamps ;
but the soil is of the same silecious sand as that found at
Three Rivers.

Near the Gabelle Rapids, and on the south side of the
river is a formation of limestone, containing embedded
organic remains. At the Rapid Grais this limestone gives
place to a sandstone, apparently fit for mill purposes:
both these formations rest on the sienitic rock which forms
the bed of the river. Where the sandstone terminates
are large deposits of white clay bearing a thick covering of
silecious sand. This clay ceases a little above Pigeon
Island; and excepting at the Portage of the Shewanahegan,

St. Maurice Expedition. 9

and on the north shore near Cape le Blane, where a small
deposit of clay again makes its appearance, nothing but a
light silecious sand is met with, resting to various depths
on the primitive rock, as far as Wemontachinque.

In some places, particularly at the lower Caribou Moun-
tain, and immediately above Rat River, the sand hills are
from eighty to upwards of one hundred feet in height.

On the west side of Lake Manjeamagouth, a bed of clay
is again found stretching towards the south; and this
clayey deposit is fallen in with on the middle and lower
parts of the River aux Lievres.

The sienitic rock which is found as low as the Grais
Rapids, and probably extending below the Gabelle, con-
tains a little black mica, but not sufficient to alter the
character of the rock. On the shores are immense bowl-
ders of quartz, containing abundance of common garnet,
in some respects similar to the manganesian garnet, and
possibly owing their violaceous hue to the presence of
oxide of manganise.

At the junction of the Shewanahegan with the St.
Maurice, we observe that remarkable subsidence of the
Jand which forms the extensive basin, receiving the waters
of the St. Maurice and Shewanahegan in one blended
stream. On the north side of the basin is the almost perpen-
dicular precipice of sienite, down which rush the waters of
the St. Maurice in two separate falls, the river being divided
by an island nearly a quarter of a mile in width. These
falls are estimated at one hundred and fifty feet in height.
At the foot of the precipice lye confusedly heaped together
the debris of the rock, and opposite on the north shore are
large blocks of a similar garnet-rock, as that before des-
eribed at the Rapid Grais ; except that they contain a very

B

10 District traversed by the

small quantity of mica in thin layers. Itis not improbable
that the waters of the St. Maurice, may in time, force for
themselves another channel through the clayey neck of
land, over which now runs the portage, and thus form a
third fall to the southward of the other two, and nearer the
Shewanahegan River.

Another subsidence in the bed of the river occurs at
the falls of the Grande Mere, about eleven miles above the
Shewanahegan, ‘These are near sixty feet in height, and
pour over a rock of sienite, forming at their foot a similar
basin and nearly of the same extent as that at the Shewa-
nahegan. Here the river, in its course to the St. Lawrence,
takes a turn almost at right angles; a circumstance com-
mon at all the falls and most of the rapids, not only. on this,
but many other rivers.

The rock from hence as far as Cape le Blanc, a high
perpendicular precipice near seven miles higher up theriver,
continues to be a sienite with hornblende in excess ; but at
that Cape the hornblende diminishes in quantity, and ‘the
quartz and light red felspar occur in large sized crystals.
This rock is much stained with the oxide of iron, particu-
larly near the summit. Immense fissures intersect the
rock in various directions, and bear evident marks of the
excessive violence of that awful concussion which has
thus torn asunder large mountains.

The sienitic formation continues without intermission as
high as Wemontachinque. Occasionally, and for a short
distance, it passes by regular gradation into gniess and
very coarse granite, frequently containing crystals of
garnet.

Large blocks of red felspar were seeen lying on the
shores of the river and embeded in the rock in. situ,.—

St. Maurice Expedition. 1h

Sometimes from the total absence of mica and hornblende
the formation consisted of only two simple crystalline
minerals, quartz and felspar, occasionally containing large
masses of pure rock-crystal; and in one or two instances
small portions of common magnetic iron ore.

On the River Nawartnoo, above the falls of Kanowdy,
which lye some miles to the west of Rat River Post, the
rock parts with its hornblende for some distance, and the
place is supplied by small specks of black mica, and a
little shorl. On the east shore of one of the lakes in this
neighborhood, there occurred some common magnetic
iron ore,

At the upper end of one of the small lakes of the Coo-
coo-cash, communicating between the Rivers Vermilion
and St. Maurice, was a strong chalybeate spring running
through a bed of ferruginous clay, leaving a thick deposit
of oxide of iron ‘This stream seems to pass under a bank
of gravel and coarse sand about thirty feet high, and two
hundred and fifty feet wide, dividing this lake from another.

At Wemontachinque, and some other parts of the river,
the rocks frequently contain smaJl embedded crystals of
deep red garnet ; and sometimes was observed a compound
rock of considerable extent, composed of common quartz,
small crystals of flesh-red felspar, mica, hornblende and
minute crystals of garnet. On the north shore of lake
Malowin, we noticed crystals of iron glance and shorl
embedded in coarse granite ; these minerals we occasionally
met with on other parts of the route.

About fifty miles above Lac du Sable on the River aux
Lievres, is first seen a formation of caleareous spar. This
rock occurs in small rhomboidal crystals, closely aggre.
gated, its external structure much resembling tabular spar.

12 District traversed by the

A vein of granular limestone nearly approaching in
appearance to dolamite, runs through the calcareous
formation, which is also intersected with broad veins of
quartz and hornblende. This hornblende in many instances
is vesicular, the vesicles filled with crystals of calcareous
spar; there also occurred masses of quartz, containing
nodules of the calcareous rock. At one place was observed
a broad vien of epidote, running through the calcareous
spar with an upper strata of quartz resting upon it; thin
veins of calcareous spar passed through this epidote.

We occasionally fell in with the calcareous formation,
until we reached Lac du Sable, where we again noticed it
en the north shore, underlying a rock of light grey lime-
stone containing in its composition an admixture of silecious
matter, andsome small orbicular crystals of milk colored
quartz. These rocks are situate close to the edge of the
lakes and rising immediately above them is a hill of sienite
thinly covered with sand. The sienite is of a dark color,
apparently stained with the oxide of iron.

Between Lac du Sable and the River Ottawa, we alter-
nately fell in with the calcareous spar, and sienite, the
hills being invariably composed of the latter. At the foot
of the Cedar Portage, a few miles below Lac du Sable, the
calcareous spar occurred, forming the bed of the river,
but intersected with broad veins of silecious limestone,
abounding in large crystals of talcy mica and white iron
pyrites. The portage, which is rather above the level of
the river, runs over a rock of sienite. About ten yards
from the west shore rises a small hill of sienite, about two
hundred feet in circumference, covered with moss and
trees: the channel between it and the main shore consists
of the calcareous spar, abounding with mica; near the

St. Maurice Expedition. 13

summit of the hill, about twenty feet above the water-mark,
was procured a specimen of what, at first, appeared to be
fluate of lime, but upon examination we have reason to
believe it to be azurite. Immense quantities of apatite
(phosphat of lime) was aggregated in yeims, running
through the calcareous spar, which formed the dry channel
between the small sienitic hill and the main land.

On the shores of the * Little Lake of White Fish,” about
half a mile to the west of the post near Lac du Sable, and
also on the shore of the *‘ Great Lake of White Fish,” to
the southward of the post, were noticed large blocks of
calcareous spar, containing small portions of carburet of
iron. In one block, from which a specimen was procured,
were found crystals of epidote. The portages leading to
these lakes ran over hills of sienite.

At the foot of the Mill Portage, three or four miles
above the Ottawa, the rock consists of red felspar, of an
earthy appearance, with quartz and specks of serpentine.
Overlying this rock is a broad vein of calcareous spar
containing some carburet of iron.

In the vallies lying between the broken ranges of hills,
are found deposits of silecious sand to great depths; but on
the tops of those hills the covering of sand is scanty.—
Where the beds of caleareous spar occur in the vallies, a
different species of timber is generally found, from that
covering the sides and summits of the adjacent mountains.
In no instance, except near the Gabelle Rapids on the south
side of the River St. Maurice, was seen the slightest trace of
fossil organic remains ; nor could the closest scrutiny dis-
cover among the sand, any fragments of shells; but in all
the lakes were abundance of the genus mya.

The vast chain of lakes found on the lands height, and

14 District traversed by the

constantly supplied, not only with living springs, but by
the melting of the great quantities of snow which fall in
these regions, find their outlet through the vallies occa-
sioned by the dip of the mountains towards the south and
S.S.W. and meeting in their course with the extensive
basins formed by the subsidence of the rocky strata, spread
themselves over the hollows; thus constituting the smaller
lakes, which cover nearly one-third of the country lying
between the lands height and valley of the St. Lawrence.
These lakes discharge themselves by innumerable shallow
streams, into the St. Maurice and aux Lievres Rivers, and
ultimately blend with the waters of the St. Lawrence ; in
one or two instances the streams swell into large and rapid
rivers and discharge into the Ottawa and Lake St. Peter
in a direct course. The beds of all these lakes and rivers
are of primitive formation, usually covered with sand, the
debris of the neighboring rocks. Some of the lakes
explored, were evidently once of much greater extent ;
while on the other hand some are annually encreasing in
size, by the spring floods carrying away portions of their
sandy banks.

On the summits and sides of the hills were seen immense
angular fragments of rock, their edges but little worn;
many are thickly covered with moss. These fragments
lye embedded in sand; and doubtiess owe the origin of
their present situation to that great internal convulsion
which has caused the stupendous precipices, so frequently
seen in these mountain lands.

At what period this catastrophe took place it is not now
easy to conjecture, whether at the retiring of the great
waters which once covered this continent, or whether it
was the effect of some subsequent earthquake, can be of no

St. Maurice Expedition. 15

immediate consequence to our present object to determine ;
our only desire is to point out the positions in which those
rocks are found, and the nature of the materials of which
they are composed.

Having thus given a summary sketch of the rocky
strata, it becomes our next business to describe the general
direction of the mountain belt now under examination.
At the falls of the Shewanahegan the mountain formation
may be said to commence. ‘This range runs in a direction
towards the River Ottawa; and from all the information
obtained, passes between the Lake Masquinongé and the
River St. Lawrence ; running a few miles in the rear of
Montreal, until it joins those hills which branch off near
Grenville towards the east north-east. The country
lying at the foot of these hills, between Three Rivers and
the Ottawa extending to the River St. Lawrence, as well
as that flat district forming the north shore of the Ottawa
from the mouth of the River aux Lievres to the Lake of the
Two Mountains, is, generally speaking, a good description
of land, and bears fine timber. In this vast extent of low
land, are found horizontal beds of limestone, containing
remains of organized beings; and in some places there
exist beds of a yellowish loamy clay. A great part of this
tract is strewed with bowlders of various sizes ; consisting
of sienite and sienitic granite, similar to the rocks which
form the hilly barrier to these low lands. The bowlders
being found scattered over the stratum of secondary
limestone is in unison with what Professor Buckland met
with in many parts of Europe; and their occurrence in
America is quoted by that able geologist as a confirmation
of the fact, that the habitable portion of the world, in all
quarters, has undergone a second and very recent general

16 District traversed by the

deluge, certainly from the circumstance of these bowlders
being commonly found lying on the secondary limestone,
and the great size of many of them, it would appear that a
body of water more powerful in its effects than the mere
overflowing of a river; must have been the agent employed
in conveying them to their present position :—and in this
district there is abundant evidence of those waters having
retired through the two great vallies of the Ottawa and St.
Lawrence, of course subsequent to the deposit of the
secondary strata. But to resume our description of the
mountain range.

From the Shewanahegan falls, a hilly country continues
to form tlie shores of the St. Maurice as high as Wemon-
tachinque, with occasional intervening vallies of sand.
In general an alluvial sandy flat extends from the foot of
the hills to the margin of the river, varying in width.

By ascending the chain of lakes running in rear of Rat
River Post, towards the westward, and branching off to the
N. E. towards the River Vermilion, we ascertained the
existance of the same primitive range as that forming the
shores of the St. Maurice, and covered with a similar
silecious sand. As far as the eye could command a view
towards the west and south-west, we observed broken
ranges of hill, generally dipping towards the St. Lawrence.
On ascending the River Vermilion we again distinguished
the same description of hilly country extending to the
south-west for a considerable distance. On our right hand
was a coresponding formation stretching to the east and
north-east beyond the shores of the St. Maurice. Frequently
the hills were fractured in an awful manner, exhibiting
the bare and rugged front of stupendous perpendicular
cliffs, several hundred feet in height. The summits of

St. Maurice Expedition. AT

these cliffs aré covered with sand, and at their feet lay
the large angular fragments of the rock, their angles
slightly worn by the action of the air. From out of the
crevices of these fallen masses grew small sized spruce,
birch and poplar trees. One of these precipices, near a
mile in length, was particularly remarked on the portage
to Black Beaver Lake ; and another was noticed near the
Great Lake of the Coo-coo-cash, in a direction nearly
south and east.

From the Coo-coo-cash to Wemontachinque, we could
distinguish, on the west shore of the St. Maurice, similarly
formed hills, with occasional precipices reaching far to
the westward.

From Wemontachinque we crossed in nearly a direct
western course, to the River aux Lievres. Our route
generally lay at the northern end of the lakes which over-
spread the vast basins formed between the spurs of the
mountains. ‘These spurs have an almost uniform direction
to the S.S. W.; although occasionally small ridges were
seen torun in a contrary direction. Some of the lakes
afforded an opportunity of examining that portion of the
country seen from the River Vermilion: invariably it
appeared to possess the same features as those portions we
were traversing. It may not be unnecessary to remark
that this chain of lakes lie in the mountain ridge forming
a part of the lands height.

At length we descended the River aux Lievres in a
generally south direction, and observed the mountain lands
extending to the south and 8. S. E., also on our right hand
towards the north-west. In the descent of this river which
wound its tortuous course through the vallies formed by
the broken ridges of hills, we were again struck with the

(

18 District traversed by the

appearance of immense inland precipices of sienite, frac-
tured in the like extraordinary manner as those seen on
the rivers and lakes explored in the first portion of the
journey. At Lac du Sable we could clearly distinguish that
the country to east and south-east was hilly and broken, and
it was found the same for a distance of twenty miles below
that lake. Here a subsidence in the rock occurs and the
river falls over a precipice of about one hundred feet in
height. From hence the hills appear to stretch more to
the E. S. E. and we lost sight of them altogether a few
miles below the falls ; and the east shore of the river from
thence, in general consisted of a flat sandy tract spreading
in a direction towards Grenville.

About nine miles above its junction with the Ottawa
the aux Lievres rushes over a bed of sienite, forming a
series of splendid falls and rapids, surpassing in pictu-
resque beauty, any thing of the kind we had before seen.

On the north shore of the River Ottawa we again fell in
with the mountain range running parallel with the river in
a south-east direction. These hills varied from several miles
to a few hundred yards distance from the water side. Near
Grenville this range appears to run towards the E. N. E.
ina direction (as before stated) to join those hills which
branch off from the River St. Maurice. It is between this
mountain line and the St. Lawrence and Ottawa that the
limestone formation is met with, covered with a good soil
bearing fine timber. The principal places where the
secondary strata was seen, were Grenville, on the Ottawa,
and near the Gabelle Rapids on the St. Maurice ; it is also
known to exist at the back of Montreal.

Having thus shewn that the primftive range of hills,
covered with sand extends far into the interior from the

we

St. Maurice Expedition. 19

Rivers aux Lievres and St. Maurice; that it also dips deep
to the southward from the shores of the great chain of
Jakes lying between those rivers; and that it runs parallel
with the Ottawa as far as Grenville, from whence it joins
the chain extending from the Shewanahegan ; we think it
can scarcely admit of a doubt, but that the whole extent of
country lying within that area, is of the same primitive for-
mation covered with a silecious sand, as that which con-
stitutes the mountain belt already described.

Were it necessary we could adduce many instances of a
country similarly formed. We particularly remember one
in Devonshire, England ; in the district locally called the
South Hams: this tract of country lies between the sea and
the Dartmoor Hills, and is remarkable for its fertility. —
About fourteen miles from Exeter is a flat called Bovey
Heath, famed for the submerged wood, or Boyey coal.—
This heath consists of an extensive bed of pipe-clay over-
Jying the wood coal, and covered with a deposit of sand
which forms the upper surface ; if we except the thin layer
of peat earth, the gradual accumulation of ages. Numer-
ous flint quarries are found on the surface abounding in
organic remains.

This extensive level is situated at the foot of the Dart-
moor Hills, about five miles distant from the sea coast,
and the intermediate space is occupied by a hilly country
called Haldon, partly formed of sandstone and partly of
lime rock, covered with a rich red loam.

The whole extent of the South Hams is about forty miles

in length and of varied width, lying, as above observed,

at the foot ofa range of barren hills, and bearing a striking
resemblance, in many of its most important features, to the
country lying on the borders of the St. Lawrence and

20 District traversed by the

Ottawa. It is likewise well known that the interior of the
Dartmoor Hills, is equally barren as the external ridge,
corresponding in that respect, with what we have endea-
voured to prove as being the case, in the regions now
under notice.

It only remains to say a few words on the agricultural
nature of the soil prevailing in the district explored.
The sand which has been mentioned consists of minute
crystals of quartz, felspar of different colors (generally
white or red), with, now and then, a small portion o¢
hornblende, or mica, but no garnets except in the recent
deposits round the shores of the lakes. The felspar some-
times occurs in a state of decomposition. This sand is
mostly covered with a very slight layer of vegetable
mould.

Sand, by itself, is well known as the very worst
description of soil that can be met with, and totally unfit
for agricultural purposes. From its loose silecious nature,
it allows water to filter through it, and soon becomes dry;
consequently the seeds, which have germinated while the
soil was wet from the spring showers, become parched up,
and perish during the summer heats. But sand mixed with
calcareous earth, becomes more tenacious, and retains moist-
ure for a greater length of time. On the other hand, if sand
js mixed with clay, it renders it more loose, each correcting
the faults of the other,—the sand by itself not retaining
sufficient moisture for vegetables, and clay not allowing
the small fibres of their roots to expand freely in search of
nourishment. It must also be remarked, that a calcareous
soil (like one composed entirely of sand or clay) is not in
itself a good soil, but only so in proportion to the degree
with which it is mixed with decomposed vegetable matter,

St. Maurice Expedition. 21

This we found fully exemplified in the beds of calcareous
spar lying in most of the vallies in the lower parts of the
River aux Lievres, where, owing principally to the
deciduous nature of the trees, the vegetable mould occurs
to a greater depth.

The decomposed particles of this calcareous rock, blend-
ing with the sand, has improved the soil so much, that it
gives nourishment to afiner description of wood than is seen
on the mountain heights; but still vastly inferior to the
timber found on the alluvial deposits of rich land reaching
from the foot of the mountains to the shores of the Ottawa
and St. Lawrence.

When lime is mixed with clay (which constitutes marle)
it is highly useful in the decomposition of decaying vege-
table substances ; hence its presence is necessary in the
decayed animal and vegetable matter, which forms the
upper stratum in the forests of America. It is ascertained
that a very small proportion of vegetable mould is necessary
to form a calcareous strata into good soil, as is sufficiently
proved in the numerous instances of sand abounding with
fragments of shells, bearing fine crops, with scarcely any
covering of vegetable earth. From nearly a similar cause,
the timber on the lower parts of the aux Lievres is so much
finer than on the shores of the St. Maurice, or Great Lakes,
where no calcareous spar made its appearance.

Yet after all the depth of vegetable mould is of primary
importance ; and in this particular the district in question
was miserably poor, for it was rarely a strata of mould was
found more than half an inch in depth and frequently not
so much. This is to be attributed to the peculiar nature
of the spruce and other trees of the pine species not being
deciduous :—but where the young groves of birch and

22 District traversed by the

poplar abound, the annual accumulation of their decayed
leaves, mixed with the putrid remains of the myriads of
insects and animals, all of which assist in the decomposition
of vegetable matter, a thick and rich strata of earth, closely
resembling, what by horticulturists, is termed garden mould,
will in time be formed. But even in the richest districts
of Canada we find the virgin soil soon become exhausted,
and requiring an admixture of calcareous matter to assist
in the decomposition of the stalks and other remains of
vegetables it hasformerly borne. It is well known that
vegetables buried in a green state, remain in the ground
inert for a greater length of time than when mixed with
some more active decomposing matter.

At the posts of Rat River, Wemontachinque and Lac du
Sable, where a portion of land has been some years in
cultivation, the soil is nearly exhausted ; so much so, that
out of a large field of dndian corn which was sown two
years since, at the first mentioned post; not more than
twenty stalks have made their appearance, although the
seed was said to be excelJent. At Lac du Sable the corn
bore only one ear on each stalk : and all other vegetables,
(except pease,) have yeilded but poor crops for the last two
or three years ; however, by a judicious application of lime
the quality of the upper surface may be restored.

Unfortunately the prevailing timber in these sandy
regions being evergreen, the accumulation of vegetable
mould must of necessity be remarkably slow; and an
incalculable period will elapse, ere the land in this district
can be fit to receive the needy settler who depends upon
the produce of his land alone, for subsistence.

We now beg leave to conclude, only regretting that a
limited experieyee prevents our treating this interesting

°° | EEE

St. Maurice Expedition. 23

and important subject with the science it deserves; and
resting in hopes that some future explorer will throw a
more beneficial and instructive light on this branch of
agricultural gevlogy, as far as concerns the interior of
this Province.

On some PROCESSES tn use among the Huron
INDIANS in DyEine, by W. GREEN, Esq.

Amone the Hurons of Lorette, the females exclusively
practice the art of dyeing.

The substances which are the subjects of their art are
chiefly porcupine-quills, elk-hair and leather.

Their red is extracted from the root of tsa-voo-yan,
(galium). The spike which consists of the seeds of the
sumach with their pericarp and the stalks to which they
are attached, are washed in cold water to clean them.
They are then boiled in soft water. When this water has
become of a deep brownish red, it is strained through
flannel. The root of tsa-voo-yan pulverized is infused in
the sumach water, The poreupine-quill or elk-hair is
then introduced, and the temperature gradually raised to
the boiling point, and there sustained a quarter of an
hour. It is then taken out and rinced in soft water, and
then it is soaked fur a short time in weak soap and water.
itis then washed in pure water watm. The red thus dyed
isa deep scarlet and durable, For lighter tints the time

24 Processes used in Dyeing

of infusion is shorter. The’subject is then wrapped up itt
flannel and dried. Whenso dried it retains its roundness.
Had it been dried in the open air, even without light, it
would have become flattened and contorted.

Their yellow is of a pure hue, rather pale and very
durable. The seeds of ootsigooara osookwa, (myrica gale,)
are pounded and mixed with water, and boiled for a
quarter of an hour. The porcupine-quill or elk-hair is
then introduced and the ebullition continued for another
quarter ofan hour. Itis then withdrawn and washed in
soap and water and then in pure water. It is then dried
with the precaution mentioned in the former case.

Their blue is extracted from green baize. The baize is
boiled in pure water. When the water has become of a deep
blue the subject is introduced together with a little alum in
powder. They are then brought to the boiling point, and the
boiling is continued a quarter of an hour, when the subject
is washed in pure water. It is essential that the baize be
old, or have been much worn. It then retains its yellow
and parts with its blue in this process. But if the stuff be
new, it parts with both these colours. The blue dyed by
the Indians of the interior is deeper than the above, and
is said by the Hurons to be derived from indigenous plants,
no longer known to the latter.

Green is dyed by boiling a subject previously dyed
yellow, as above, in the blue decoction above described.

Brown is dyed with the husk of the butter-nut, (juglans
cathartica.)

Black, with the husk of that nut, or with the bark of
alder or of maple, with sulphate of iron. If with the first
the black inclines to brown, if with the second it is pur-
plish, and bluish with the last,

among the Huron Indians. 25

In all their dying processes the Hurons avoid bringing
iron into contact with their materials, and use vessels of
polished copper.

Sketches of the Tete pe Boure INDIANS,
River St. Maurice, by J. Avams, Esq.

Ayy information relating to the primitive manners and
pursuits of the aborigines of this country, which are now
fast giving way before the strides of civilization, must in
some degree be interesting to the society which I have the
honor of addressing ; and however incomplete and _ partial
those notices, which the brief opportunities of a very hurried
progress through the tract to be spoken of, alone permitted
me to make, particularly as another and paramount duty
necessarily occupied nearly the whole of my attention.—
Still, I consider that in some degree, the few scanty facts,
which chance or enquiry threw before me, will not) prove
unacceptable ; especially as the race. to which they apply
is now nearly extinct, as a nation, and what yet remains
of their habits, is fast fading away into that obscurity which
has excluded the histories of many early people from the
book of record, and thereby deprived philosophy of the
means of tracing the moral progress of man from his savage
infancy, through the periods of improvement, maturity
and decline, to the last melancholy state of consummated
social decay.

Such, in so far as relates to the earliest portion of their

history, has been the fate of Greece and Rome, not to uscend
Db

26 Sketches of the

_ to the remoter eras of African and Asiatic national infaney,
or even to the meridian splendor of many of their empires.
The efforts of gigantic learning have been foiled in attempts
to tear away the veil of concealment from the picture of
the early times of even these comparatively modern states ;
and in lieu of a well defined though distant view of what
they were, and how they had risen gradually from barbar-
ism to perfection, it is altogether confused or lost ; and our
earliest historical records place them before us in a situation
elevated far above primeeval habits :—barbarous and rude,
it is true, in their customs, but builders of ships and of
palaces ; skilful fabricators of steel and of clothing, and
organized, at the time of our first acquaintance with them,
into monarchies and political combinations much advanced
beyond what we can imagine to have been then, as is now,
the condition of primitive natural man.

What an interesting relique would it not have been to
after ages, had some traveller—some eastern Strabo or
Herodotus visited Greece or Italy ere they had emerged
from a state of savage life ; observed closely their customs ;
gathered their religious or historical legends, and disclosed
them to the world in the Hebrew Janguage. What light
would not such a single work have thrown upon the naked
outline of their splendid mythology; and what volumes
of condensed laborious research and conjecture have been
spared by the bare recital) of perhaps a dozen facts, upon
which were subsequently heaped the gorgeous apparel and
imagery of immortal poetry—delighting and dazzling the
mind, it is true, with fine imaginings, but at the same
time hindering, or distracting it from the less pleasing
contemplation of plain unornamented historic reality.

But, it may be enquired, would the advantage derivable

Téte de Boule Indians. 27

from such an acquaintance with truth have been commen-
surate with the gratification afforded by the perusal of the
sublime poetical perversion in part founded on it; or of
the yet more enticing aberrations of eloquent historians,
glad to make it the vehicle of more imposing, because less
suspected, naratives? I should answer yes ;—and if called
upon to substantiate the assertion, point out as an example,
the historical dramas of Shakspeare; which, however
known to the critic to be false history, possess not the less
influence over his imagination, even in the closet. The
interest excited in the mind by the desire of learning plain
truth, and that caused by the semi-transparent fictions of
fine poetry, grounded on reality, are different passions
congenial with the same mind. Nor, to illustrate the
sentiment by a remark somewhat bearing upon our subject,
do we less admire the fine poetical draught of Indian
character developed in “The last of the Mohicans,”
because we may have closely seen, in some of our excur-
sions, the real native savage in his homely, dirty blanket
garb, and perhaps at atime when labouring under the
effects of the least poetical of his customary inclinations.
Passing immediately to our subject, the nation of the Téte
de Boule Indians, inhabiting the country around the upper
part of the River St. Maurice, and concentrating towards We-
montachinque, as the mart for their hunting produce, is that
on which these observations are principally intended to be
made. These people, once a formidable race, are now
reduced by small-pox, and more especially by the baneful
effects of rum, toa miserable remnant of some twenty or
twenty-five families, spread over an extent of country,
measuring probably seven or cight hundred square leagues,
and considering all this great tract as their own lawlul

28 Sketches of the

hunting ground; the lakes and rivers intersecting which,
are portioned out amongst them, partly by the exertion of
their own individual strength, and partly by a kind of
feudal grantage from those of their own tribe, in whom
they acknowledge some undefinable superiority. This
latter at least I suppose, as a young Indian who, at one
time, accompanied the St. Maurice exploring expedition
as a guide, seemed desirous of obtaining an allotment of
hunting ground for himself, and informed the party that it
was a necessary preliminary to secure the permission of
some chief, who he named, as a paramount Lord of the soil.
I believe this young man himself was not a Téte de Boule,
but the same custom prevails among the Indians of that
nation.

Whatever rank they may formerly have held as a tribe
of hunters and warriors, the Téte de Boules of the present
day exhibit a melancholy portraiture of degraded human
nature. Slaves of the fur traders, by the expenses inci-
dental to their acquired taste for ardent spirits, they are
seldom so independent as to be able to carry their furs to
other markets than the neighboring posts ; and indeed, are
generally so much in debt for clothing, arms, ammunition,
and provision, independently of rum, to both companies,
where there is an opposition between the Hudson’s Bay
and King’s Post agents, that each of these companies have
their parties of people constantly engaged running about
in small, light birch canoes, searching for Indian encamp-
ments, and taking from them whatever peltries they find
them in possession of, giving them, in return, some rude
token or tally, wel! understood by both parties as a receipt
for the value; nor does it appear that the Indians often
make opposition to this rather arbitrary method of trading,

Téte de Boule Indians. 29

I was even informed that should these engagés of the fur
companies, find parcels of furs at an encampment when
the owners are absent, they will seldom scruple to take them,
and leave a tally for the amount, indicating to which of
the posts they are indebted for the kindness of saving them
the trouble of carrying their own goods to market. The
men employed to visit the Indians in this manner are
always Canadians, or half-breeds, and mostly daring
fellows and skilful voyageurs; they are known by the
(patois) appellation of Gens Derrouine, and they always
put me in mind of bees returning to their hives, or posts,
laden with plunder, and ready for another excursion, as
soon as they have safely deposited the treasure with which
they were laden.

From the personally distinctive title bestowed upon this
race, I had expected to see their heads very remarkably
shaped.—This is not the case. I do, indeed, acknowledge
that the prominent parts of their cheek bones are some-
what more broadly apart than usual, but by no means so
conspicuously as to authorize the peculiar nick-name by
which they are distinguished. The young people are
generally good looking ; and a family of children which we
met with were, I believe, unanimously considered by the
party, to have fine intelligent countenances. Nor did
advanced age seem to destroy their claim to general
appearance. We saw men and women of twenty, forty,
sixty, ninety, and one hundred and ten years, and to the
best of my judgment, as personable at those respective
ages, as other classes of Indians, at least such as it has
been my chance to fall in with. I cannot help quarrelling
with this ridiculous title of Téte de Boule, as in the first
place, it led me astray, in supposing that | was about to

30 Sketches of the

behold a set of people with heads as round as pumpkins,
and because, if intended originally as a caricature, its merit
is very mean, from its failure in off-hand resemblance to
reality.

it is difficult to say what are the distinguishing moral
traits which separate the Téte de Boule tribe from other
Canadian Indians, and create them a peculiar race from
natural habits. So much has, and so ever will, an inter-
course with white traders tend to annihilate or deface the
delicate differences of Indian caste, only to be discerned
where

“ Man, a NoBLE Savage, walks the woods.”

The general impression made upon my mind from
accounts of the most apparently uninftuenced and natural
actions of the Tétes de Boule was unfavourable. Manifold
instances of rapine, treachery and murder in their social
intercourse were related to us with stoical indifference by
our guides and other informants, who only seemed aston-
ished that we should expect to hear any thing better of arace
of people, which they themselves so much despise and look
down upon. The actions to which Iallude were suchas were
performed amongst themselves (of which 1 mean to relate
two or three in the sequel, ) and may therefore be considered,
as rather more accurate tracings of their native savage
character, than excesses occasioned by immediate drunken-
ness, or conflicts between them and the emissaries of
trading posts may be supposed to exhibit. But few redeem-
ing traits were made known tous, nor can I call to mind
more than one instance which was calculated to convey an
impression of Indian single heartcdness or untutored kind-
ness such as we often meet with in Hearne and in the books
of other travellers, who have described the more distatn

Téte de Boule Indians. 3

and more independent tribes of savages : that one shall be
mentioned in its proper place.

Their religion is a Paganism, the leading features of
which I did not learn; neither from the ignorance or
indifference of our guide on such matters, could I ascertain
whether they have any idea of a future state. The good
and bad spirit, and probably a plurality of each, they
acknowledge in common with other Indians, Superstitious,
they undoubtedly are, for beside the graves of their dead,
which are very neatly enclosed by walls and covers of birch
bark, we always found, independently of the representation
of their weapons (if a chief) sword, spear, bow, arrows, &c.
a parcel of firewood lying, ready for the use of the occupant
could he require it. Of another kind of superstition, we
also witnessed some amusing specimens developed before
us by Robert M‘Vicar, Esq. a partner of the Hudson’s Bay
company, at his post of Wemontachinque. This gentleman
(the friend of Captain Franklin,) besides a very long ex-
perience of Indian habits in the N.W. country possesses the
advantage of considerable dexterity in slight of hand per-
formances ; and has established his fame as a great conjurer
in the minds of these poor savages. The manner in which
he one evening worked upon the feelings of two women and
aboy, by some displays of this kind, and the absolute
command he apparently possessed over their faculties from
superstitious awe of his power, though it made us smile,
yet I believe affected every one of us at the same time with
pity approaching to sadness, that the human mind should
even any where be found so prostrated as to be duped by
such flimsy deceptions.

But these poor Indians themselves are possessed of no
mean talent as masqueraders, of which IL will relate an

32 . Sketches of the

instance. One evening while residing at the same post,
the party were intruded upon by two of the most frightfully
distorted and disgusting figures I have ever seen, in the
persons of two old men—lame, hump-backed, blackened
with gun-powder, and with white teeth protruding from
the upper jaw downwards, at least two inches; they were
represented to us as idiots and brothers, and seated them~
selves in the room, making viclent gestures, expressive of
anger or impatience, and at intervals furiously striking
the floor with their paddles. Having been previously
prepared to expect a singular arrival at the post on that
evening, and the agents of the conspiracy against our
discernment having well performed their parts, two of us
were deceived, Mr. Ingall alone being sceptical. I myself
doubted them at first, but in the end I confess myseli to
have been taken in by their inimitable acting, as on one of
the servants of the post pretending great alarm after they
had retired into the next room, and running into ours’, appa-
rently for protection, I seriously asked him whether he was
so cowardly as to be afraid of such poor decripid creatures,
These two worthies were handsome. lads, the eldest not
more than seventeen, and sons of an old Canadian hunter,
named Flamand, by his wife, a Téte de Boule woman.—
The teeth they had cut out of wood, and.so fixed them as
to resemble the long, curved upper cutting teeth of a
beaver. Never was deception more admirably managed.
The Tétes de Boule Indians are very dirty in their
domestic habits, and in respect to their cookery, I shall
not easily forget peeping into one of their kettles, and
observing a large pike, so nearly done, that the bowels
and bladder had forced their way through the body; but
this mode of boiling fish is, 1 believe, not particularly

Téte de Boule Indians. 33

confined to their tribe. I saw no specimens of fine Indian
work done by the women; their moccasins and clothing
were quite tinornamented; nor did 1 notice any of those
fine dyes or extracts which have been brought to so much
perfection amongst other Indians. The needle work of the
sguaws is, however, strong and good, and a blanket coat,
which was made for me by one of them, is by no means
devoid of neat taste, in the ornamental blue seaming which
she thought proper to introduce. The materials of their
own clothing are always obtained at the posts, and are made
up by them in a plain but not unbecoming fashion. I saw
only one display of extra finery, and that was on the person
ofa lady about forty. She was the wife or daughter, (I
forget which) of an old chief named Majeshk, and on
paying us an introductory visit at one of the lakes, came
enveloped in a dashing green table cover, with yellow
centre and edges. But alas! on returning this visit rather
unexpectedly, we found this laid aside, and the same
personage wrapped up in one of the filthiest blankets it has
been my lot to behold, even on Téte de Boule shoulders,

it would be unjust to omit mentioning here, that, from
the family just spoken of, (the only one we met with “ at
home,”’ as it were,) the party experienced great hospitality.
Thrice they made us acceptable presents of fine fish, suffi-
cient, on two occasions, for all the people; and as they
knew we had no rum, the first article they enquired after
on visiting us, [ am happy in believing that these supplies
were given to us from a motive of disinterested kindness,
which we repaid to the best of our ability. This is what
alluded toa page or two back.

It now remains for me to endeavour to sketch the
characters of two remarkable chiels, one of whom alone we

b

54 Skeiches of thé

inet with. The other, & very extraordinary man, who
seems to stand distinguished from all his tribe, we only
heard of through the medium of our guide, who had long
known him personally.

Old Majeshk, the first of these chiefs, is supposed to have
reached the age of one hundred and ten ; he is nearly blind;
but othei‘wise in the possession of his faculties, and still
paddles in the bow of his canoe. He has been a tall strong
built man, but is now considerably bent, and appears to
walk feebly, although this may be merely a natural hesita-
tion, occasioned by the defect of his eyes. Of this man we
had heard much while ascending the River St. Maurice,
and even that he was a cannibal; this last, however, the
same guide afterwards recanted, asserting that we had not
understood him, but repeating that he had at different
times destroyed several Canadian hunters. This chief, in
his prime, was an ambitious and successful warrior. By
his personal enterprize and bravery, he conquered all the
Indians who had settled on the parts comprehended between
the aux Lievres lakes and the Lake Shosawatasi, an extent
from west to east, of about seventy miles, and at a time
when the numbers of the Téte de Boule nation were much
more respectable than they are at present. It is impossible
to ascertain how many he destroyed in these invasions, but
tradition makes the loss of lives very serious. All these
lakes and waters he has since kept firm possession of,
‘portioning off parcels of them at different times to the
members of his family, as they grew old enough to hunt
for themselves: but it appears that he has never been
disturbed by an enemy invading his acquired dominion.—
We endeavoured to fix his real age, but for want of numer-
ical calculation among these people, our nearest approach

Téte de Boule Indians. 3)

to accuracy was learning that he remembered the English
conquest, and that he had then been some years a married
man. Indian tradition gives him about one hundred and
ten years, as before remarked, and his appearance does not
disprove the estimate. He now lives on the borders of
Lake Mangemagooz, and is taken care of by his daughter
and son-in-law, and by a wife about forty years of age, to
whom the old gentleman was, as we learned, wedded about
twelve months before we met with him. A fine boy, of
about seven, we were informed was his son by a former
wife; but we observed no appearance of any farther proba-
ble increase to his establishment.

The other chief of whom I have tospeak, is a much more
extraordinary person, and the accounts which we were
continually listening to, had greatly excited our curiosity
to see him, in which expectation, as I before noticed, we
were disappointed, but have since had good reason to
believe that he was not unobservant of our motions. This
man’s name (almost Italian) is Menessino, and he is son
to old Majeshk. His usual residence is on the shores of
Lake Kempt, the largest expanse we discovered, and
almost a water labyrinth, from the extraordinary shapes of
its deep bays, its narrow straits, and numerous large
islands. Here lives Menessino, with his wives and children,
in solitude, for he is a murderer proscribed by the law,
and seldom ventures to leave his haunts to visit the
post of Wemontachingue. At one time he was pursued
and secured, by an officer sent up purposely from Three
Rivers, and who was conveying him down the St. Maurice
for trial, when, at La Tuque (1 believe), on that river, he
seized an opportunity, although handcuffed, of plunging
in below the rapid, and swam over to the other side jn

86 Sketches of the

safety, leaving the constable only able to wonder at hig
escape; as the canoe had not been brought over the portage,
and he in consequence could not pursue him, Menessino
easily found his way back to his lakes.

In person, he is described as a tall, active, athletic man,
with an expression of countenance not unpleasing, but
even indicative of mildness and quietude. Under this calm
exterior is, however, concealed a disposition to cruelty
and violent passions, which renders him fearful to all when
excited by anger or jealousy. Our guide’s rude draught
of him, reminded me somewhat of Byron’s Corsair, dark
and dangerous. Two wives have died by his hand; the
grave of one we visited on the shores of Lake Kempt—he
killed her in a paroxysm of anger, by cleaving her head
with an axe. The manner in which he destroyed the other
Ido not remember. Strange to relate, the place where he
has chosen to bury ‘the first unfortunate woman, seems. to
be a favorite spot of the murderer, for there we found his
bath and summer cabin, which the guide told us he is
accustomed to inhabit. On the same spot are also two
other graves, one filled by his own mother, who was mur-
dered on a sand-beach of Lake Malawin, by the hands of
Menessino’s daughter, her own grand-child. Our guide
was present when this unnatural murder was perpetrated.
He and another were crossing Lake Malawin, ona ‘‘der-
rouine”’ excursion, when observing two women fighting
on the sand, they approached in their canoe, and found
they were the mother and daughter of Menessino, who
himself was seated by coolly looking on and smoking.—
The Canadians expressed a desire to separate them, but
Menessino forbade them, and said ‘let the women fight.”
The next minute, our guide saw the young girl get the

Téte de Boule Indians. 37

head of her antagonist under her arm, and twist it round,
when the old woman fell dead. Her body was then con-
veyed more than forty miles by Menessino to the burial
place which we visited. The remaining grave there found
is that of a child who died naturally. Nothing can surpass
the neatness and care with which these graves are covered
and defended from the attacks of wild beasts.

Another striking characteristic of this Indian, is, that he
never, like others, was in the habit of intoxicating himself
at the posts with ardent spirits. Whatever he required he
took with him to his lakes. Among his other peculiar
whims, Meuessino at one time insisted on haying a wooden
boarded real house, built for him by the Hudson’s Bay
Company, on a point of Lake Kempt, under penalty of
earrying his furs elsewhere ; and this was actually done,
all the timbers, &c. being conveyed from Wemontachingue,
if I remember rightly. This building we had a great
desire to see, but the guide pretended that he could not
find it while in Lake Kempt, though he said he had several
times been at it, and really had so. Since our return to
Quebec, this mystery has been cleared up by M. Vassal, of
the K. P. C. who arrived after us. He said at once that
the guide must have known the spot, and was probably
afraid of offending Menessino by discovering to us his
retreat, as from our description we must have dined on, or
very near the point where the house is standing, some way
back among the trees. Here, then, is another proof of the
reverential awe which this chief has spread around him,—
Why the fur traders have so long refrained from securing
and delivering him up to justice, 1 know not—it may be
no concern of theirs’, and Menessino is the best hunter of
all the tribe of Téte de Boules. On one occasion two

38 Sketches of the

Canadians undertook to seize and carry off Menessino from
his lake. They tracked him into one of its deep bays,
which we were shown, and whence they concluded he
could not escape. Menessino was, however, aware of
their intention; he left his canoe, and stealing along among
the trees, the wary Indian took deliberate aim at the men,
as they were cautiously passing, and killed either one or both
on the spot; at all events, neither returned from the lake,
if my memory is correct.

But it is now time for me to leave this extraordinary
character and indeed to close this paper. 1 will, how-
ever add, that for several years no communication has
existed between this lone man and old Majeshk, his father.
He had some years ago a half brother, whose grave we
visited on Lake Nemicachingue, a murderer also, whose
catalogue of crime exceeds in horror even that of Menes-
sino, and who himself was at length destroyed by another
Indian, whose wife he had repeatedly endeavoured to carry
off, and three times attempted to murder the husband.—
In the last of these encounters (a dreadful one) Menessino’s
brother was at last killed by a blow from the axe of his
enemy, and the ruffian lies buried on the very spot where,
seven years before, he had shot a Canadian woman in cool
blood, and afterwards dashed out the brains of a poor child
on arock hard by, who had witnessed the deed; the little
fellow lies buried very near the grave of his brutal murderer.
Fear of Menessino obliged the Indian who, in self defence,
had killed his brother, to leave that part of the country,
and he has ever since remained an engagé at Lac du Sable
post, whither the other has never thought fit to follow him,

Such are some of the lawless acts that have been perpe-
trated in that wild region, where human life seems scarcely

OCR Ey

Téte de Boule Indians. 39

to be valued at “a button in a man’s cap.” Nor will they
probably be the last of the same kind. There is no exag-
geration in this sketch—I have merely repeated what I
heard, and which, for the most part, the corresponding
testimony of different persons tended to corroborate.—
Indeed what I have penned bears so small a proportion to
the mass of information of the kind given to us, that my
most difficult task has been to condense what I have heard
related, so as not to run the risk of proving very tiresome
to the society, and in consequence I have been obliged to
omit much of what, to myself, appeared interesting
enough. Iwill conclude by observing that, should these
slight remarks on the Téte de Boule Indians, induce a
desire for more particular information concerning them, I
know no one so well qualified to complete a more perfect
account of them, from constant and well directed enquiry,
as another member of this society, my respected companion
on the late expedition, Mr. Nixon, of the 66th regiment.

Notes on some of the PLANTS of Lower C anada,
by W. Suepparn, of Woodfield, Esq. V.P.

Read 19th December, 1829, and 19th January, 1830.

In laying before the society, a few observations made on
some of the vegetable productions of our neighbourhood, I
have to crave your indulgence for taking up your time ona
subject of but partial interest. The acquisition of knowledge
in the various branches of Natural History, I regret to say,

40 Notes on some of the

has not hitherto been pursued ‘here so generally as iid
Europe, and elsewhere. From the establishment of this,
and our sister society in Montreal, I doubt not will date a
new era in knowledge in these provinces. To these
societies, as centres, will naturally converge, from various
quarters, facts in science, ‘and discoveries in-the arts,
which might otherwise never be made known to the world,
Encreased facilities in the acquirement of useful knowledge,
will necessarily grow out of these establishments.

In these notices I do not profess to follow the regular
order of succession of the vegetable families, but will select
them so as to create, if possible, some interest, by contrast-
ing trees with grasses—the useful with the ornamental. 1 ~
do not presume to write for your instruction, much less do
I expect that the notices which 1 am about to offer will
excite any interest beyond what I may hope from your
indulgence. If I succeed in creating in the younger part
of my friends, a taste for this pleasant branch of Natural
History, I will be quite satisfied—it is my only aim. An
opportunity will soon be given them, I fully trust, to
follow up the pursuit, by attending the lectures about to
be instituted under the auspices of this society. Summer
is, beyond doubt, the most suitable season for pursuing
these enquiries, and will in all probability be chosen for
the lectures. The trees and shrubs are, for the most part,
now divested of their ornamental clothing, and the humble
herbaceous plant is retired out of sight, for a long ang
necessary repose after the summer’s excitement and exercise
of functions. Few living plants can therefore be produced
in illustration of these notes. I am induced by this
circumstance, to make choice of a natural family to begin
with, composed principally of evergreens.

- 2aawa~

Plants of Canada. 41

Family—CONIFERE.—Jussizv.
Genus—PINUS.—L.
Section—SPpruces. Leaves solitary.

Pinus balsamea—L. Abies balsamifera—Micnaux.
Balsam Spruce. Sapiv.
* Leaves flat, grey beneath. Cones cylindrical, erect.”

This is a beautiful evergreen tree, rising in a pyramidal
shape to the height of thirty feet or more. In open and
cultivated grounds, it becomes feathered down to the
surface, and is a very pleasing object to contemplate ; it is
in consequence, in much request for shrubberies and park
scevery in Britain. This is the tree which produces the
Canada Balsam, well known to practitioners in the healing
art. It is found in small blisters in the bark, whence it is
extracted by incision, and received in a limpid state
into a shell or cup. The best varnish for water-colour
paintings is prepared fromthis liquid resin. This spruce is
common about Quebec, and throughout Canada; but 1 do
not find that the timber is applied to any useful purpose.

Pinus Canadensis—L. Abies Canadensis—Mx.
Hemlock Spruce. Pruche.

“ Leaves flat, denticulate, two-ranked. Cones ovate, terminal, as long

as the leaves.”

A large tree, with beautiful foliage, vying in magnitude
with the white pine. The timber enters not into com-
merce, except inthe shape of lathwood, of which a consi-
derable quantity is yearly shipped to Britain and Ireland :
it is however, sparingly used here in rural architecture for
coverings of roofs and for weather boardings. ‘The bark is
used by the country tanners in the manufacturing of
leather; it is said to possess a large proportion of the

tanning principle. The leaves have the flavour of juniper
,

A2 Notes on some of the

berries; they are sometimes used by the country people to
make a ptisanne. The tree is ornamental and might be
admitted into park scenery with advantage. It is not
common about Quebec, but abounds in various parts of
Canada, in dry sandy soils.

Pinus nigra—Ls. Abies nigra—Mx. Black Spruce.
Double Spruce. Epinette noire.

“ Leaves four-sided, scattered on all sides of the branches, erect, straight.
Cones ovate; scales oval, with undulated margins, close-toothed at
the apex.”

A middle sized tree, tall, straight and taper. The
foliage dense and having a very dark appearance. Whole
tracts of swampy country are frequently covered with this
and some other evergreens, which give them a dismal
cast compared with adjoining growths of trees on undu-
lating grounds: those tracts are hence called blackwood
lands. From the spray of this tree is extracted the essence
with which that wholesome beverage spruce beer is made.
Of the timber is manufactured deals for exportation ; large
quantities are yearly shipped at the port of Quebec,
principally to the Irish market.

Pinus alba—Ls. Abies alba—Mx. White Spruce.
Epinette blanche.

‘“* Leaves four-sided, incurved. Cones nearly cylindrical, lax ; scales

obovate, entire.”

A tree similar in appearance to the preceding, except
that the leaves are of lighter green, and not so thickly set.
It grows on dryer soils. The timber is white and is also
manufactured into deals, scarcely to be distinguished from
those of the black spruce. Manufacturers are acquainted
with several varieties of this tree, occasioned by the different
nature of the soil: such as epinette grise and epinette

Plants of Canada. AS

fremblante ; the latter is preferred in point of quality.
The timber of the black and the white spruce resembles in
appearance, and probably in quality, the white deal of the
north of Europe, which is made from Pinus Abies ; whence,
no doubt, arises the foreign demand for our spruce deals.
Spars for the higher yards and for top-gallant masts, are
frequently taken of this timber by reason of its comparative
strength and lightness. The Indians collect from this tree
principally, the gum with which they pay the seams of their
bark canoes: it exudes on the surface, at the knots
and wounds, whence it is taken and melted to free it
from impurities,

Lambert makes another species of spruce here, which he
names Pinus rubra; but Michaux is not willing to adopt it,
and says it is only a variety of the alba; perhaps one of
those mentioned.

Section—Prn es. Leaves in twos, threes, or fives in a sheath.
Pinus resinosa—Air. Pinus rubra—Mx. Red Pine.
Pin rouge.

“ Leaves in pairs, elongated. Cones ovate-conic, rounded at the base, about
half as long as the leaves ; scales dilated in the middle, unarmed.”

A handsome tree of large growth. Bark scaly and of a
reddish colour. The timber of this pine enters largely into
commerce, principally as squared logs of from ten to sixteen
inches, or more, of aside; also as spars for masts and
yards, for which purposes it is in great request. Some
deals are also manufactured from it, and great quantities of
lathwood ; for the latter purpose it is well suited, its great
strength enabling it to support the weight of the slate and
tile roofs of Britain. This wood is much used here in
ship-building, for planks, spars, &c. being strong and
durable.

44 Notes on some of the

Towards the sources of the Ottawa large tracts of sandy
land are entirely covered with red pine; from which
country we principally derive our supplies of that kind of
timber. It also grows about Quebec, and is more or less
scattered throughout the country.

Pinus banksiana—Le. Pinus rupestris—Mx. Gray
Pine. Chipré?
“© Leaves in pairs, short, rigid, devaricate, oblique, recurved, twisted ; scales
without prickles.”

Asmall tree varying from a few feet in height to thirty
feet, according to the nature of the soil. It is rare in the
suuthern parts of the province, but abounds in the north.
Capt. Franklin mentions it as growing in a high latitude.
There is a solitary locality of this tree at Sillery; near the
highway to Cap Rouge : it is also found at Three Rivers and
at St. Paul’s Bay.

Pinus rigida—Ls. Pitch Pine.

“ Leaves in threes, in short sheaths. Cones ovate; scales with reflexed spines.”

A tree about the size of red pine; found very sparingly
in Canada, but grows in abundance on the shores of Lake
Champlain. No locality is known near Quebec. The
timber resembles red pine, but abounds more in resin; it
is sought after by pump-makers. Tar and lampblack are
manufactured in Vermont by very simple processes. . The
knots being incorruptible, are found abundantly in groves
of this pine, frequently under ground, where they have
lain for ages ; these are collected and piled upon a stone
hearth, covered over with sod and earth, and set on fire,
in the manner of making charcoal. The heat produced in
burning causes the tar to leave the knots, and flow over the
hearth by a groove cut in it for that purpose, Lampblack

eS 9 ©

Plants of Canada. 45

is nothing more than the condensed smoke of the same fires,

collected in large wooden receptacles.
Pinus serotina—Mx. Pond Pine.

“ Leaves elongated, in threes, Cones ovate ; prickles of the scales straight
and very slender.”

Not having seen this pine, 1 merely record it as a native

of Canada, on the authority of Purch, who says, in amanu-

script note in my possession, that it grows at Anticosti.

Pinus Strobus—L. White Pine. Pin blanc. Yellow Pine
' of commerce in England, and Weymouth Pine there in

its growing state.
“* Leaves in fives.”

This is the most majestic of aJl our pines; in suitable
soils attaining a great size, and towering over all the other
trees of the forest. When growing in open situations; it is
usually feathered down to the ground, assuming a pictur-
esque appearance, especially when loaded with its large
pendulous cones. White pine is easily wrought, compar-
atively free from knots, and durable in all situations : it is,
in consequence, used by our carpenters and joiners almost
exclusively in the construction of housesand other buildings.
Masts of large ships are usually made of this timber, and
frequently their decks also; the property of not splitting
by the sun in warm climates fitting it for the latter purpose,
its great size and lightness for the other. This wood is an
extensive article of commerce, and of export from these
provinces ; being shipped in the shape of masts, plank,
boards, shingles, square logs, and sawed scantling. The
quantity of this timber exported yearly, far exceeds that of
any other kind. It is the most useful, and fortunately the
most plentiful timber we possess, being found generally
throughout the province,

A6 Noies on some of the

Section—LaArcHeES. Leaves in bundles.
Pinus pendula—Ls. Black Larch. Tamarack. Epinette
Rouge.
‘* Leaves deciduous. Cones oblong; margin of the scales bent in; bracts
fiddle-shaped.”

A tall taper tree, growing about Quebec, and throughout
Canada. The timber is straight grained and strong, fitting,
it for the spars of ships, but inferior to white and black
spruce for this purpose, on account of its greater weight.
It is also used in ship-building, principally for knees to
fasten the beams; the but of the stem and one of the
principal roots, forming together the angle required, are
taken for that purpose—these knees are strong and very
durable. The wood burns briskly and furnishes a great
and sudden heat; for which qualities it is in request as
fuel for the steam engines on the St. Lawrence.

Pinus microcarpa—Ls. Red Larch or Tamarack.
Epinette rouge.

‘* Leaves deciduous. Cones roundish, few-flowered ; scales reflected ;

bracts eliptical.”’

This larch so closely resembles the preceding in habit
and qualities, as scarcely to be distinguished from it ;
except botanically. Michaux makes but one species of
them, under the name of Larix Americana.

JUNIPERUS.—L.

Juniperus virginiana—Wn. Red Cedar. Cédre rouge.
“ Leaves in threes, adnate at their bases; in the young state they are
imbricate; older, they become spreading.”

A small evergreen tree, growing abundantly on the
shores and islands of Lake Ontario; but very sparingly in
Lower Canada; the only localities of its growth in this
province, that I know of, are at the falls of the Chats and

Plants of Canada. AT

the Chaudiére on the River Ottawa. In Upper Canada and
in the States where it is plentiful, it is used for fences;
being superior to every other kind of wood in point
of durability in such exposed situations. It is occasionally
brought to this market in round logs of about twenty feet
long, and eight to twelve inches in diameter : but is seldom
exported to Great Britain, owing to an enormous duty
levied on it by weight.

Juniperus communis depressa—L. Juniper. Genevrier.

“* Leaves in threes, spreading, mucronate, longer than'the berry.”

A low spreading shrub, about two feet high and extend-
ing over a large surface. The berries might be collected
for the use of the distiller, as are those of the European
variety of this species. Grows on the shores of the St.
Lawrence below Quebec, and at the falls of the Ottawa.

Juniperus sabina—L. Savine. Savin.

“ Leaves opposite, obtuse, glandular in the middle, imbricate four ways,

delicate, acute, opposite.”

A low decumbent shrub, about six inches high. The
elder Michaux found it growing in clifts of rocks, from
Hudson’s Bay to the mouth of the Saguenay.

THUY A.—L.
Thuya occidentalis—L. Arbor vite. White Cedar.
Cedre blanc.

“ Branchlets two-edged ; leaves imbricate four ways, rhomboid -ovate, closely
pressed, naked, tubercled. Cones obovate ; inner scales truncate,
gibbous below the apex.”

Grows generally in moist grounds, and on the sides
of hills; attaining a large size in favorable situations. The
timber has the lowest specific gravity of all our Canadian
kinds of wood, and is remarkable for its durability; on
these accounts it is in great request here for fencing: thus

48 Notes on some of the

exposed to all weathers, the timber will last half a century.
Builders use large logs of this wood for cellar beams, being
little acted on by the moisture of such situations. It
likewise rives freely, and is much used here for shingles
and laths. The Indian uses it for the ribs of his frail
bark canoe.

LTAXUS.—L.
Taxus Canadensis—Wmn. ‘Taxus baccata minor—Mx.
Canadian Yew. Buts. Dwarf Hemlock.
“ Leaves linear, two-ranked, margin revolute.”

A recumbent evergreen shrub, rising obliquely to the
height of four or five feet. In foliage it resembles spruce,
from which circumstance the Americans call it Dwarf
Hemlock : a reason for the Canadian name of Buis is not
apparent ; it certainly has little resemblance to box. The
berry is quite similar to the fruit of the European species ;
and there is a variety with berries perfectly white, growing
in the ravine between Wolfesfield and Spencerwood.—
Common in shady woods and north sides of hills.

The recumbent habit of this plant and of our variety of
the common juniper, may possibly be occasioned by the
weight of snow lying on them, during nearly one half of

the year.
LILIACE:—J uss.
LILIUM.—L.

Lilium Philadelphicum—W. Philadelphian Lily.
‘© Leaves in whorls, lance-linear. Flowers erect, bell-shaped, spreading ;
petals with claws.”

A handsome bulbous plant, about two feet high, bearing
one or two erect flowers at the summit: petals red, and
marked below with dark spots. This lily resembles in some
degree the common orange lily of the gardens, but is not

Plants of Canada. 49

so strong a plant, and seldom bears more than two flowers.
It grows in the upper part of the Province, and on the
shores of Lake Huron.

Lilium superbum—L. Superb Lily.

** Leaves lance-linear, three-nerved, smooth ; lower ones in whorls, upper
ones scattered. Flowers in a pyramidal raceme, reflexed. Petals rolled

back.”’

A stately plant, five or six feet high, bearing a large
pyramidal bunch of flowers at the summit, frequently as
many as thirty on a plant. The flowers are orange-coloured
with dark purple spots. This plant grows in overflown
grounds in Upper Canada, and on the Island of Montreal.
It is one of the most showy of our natives and merits a place
in all collections of flowers.

Lilium Canadense—L. Canadian Lily. Lis des
prairies.

“ Leaves remotely whorled, lanceolate, three-nerved. Peduncles long,
terminal, mostly in threes. Corollaspreading. Raceme spreading,”

This lily is about three to four feet high, and bears
a loose cluster of yellow or red flowers at top, marked
inside with dark spots. The petals are not rolled back,
but merely bent out towards the points, by which character
it may be readily distinguished from the preceding one.—
It grows in the meadows about Quebec, and very generally
throughout the country, on lands liable to be overfiown.
Although not such an elegant plant as the superb lily,
it is highly ornamental in the flower border, and it improves

by culture,
G

50 Notes on some of the

ERYTHRONIUM—L.

Erythronium Americanum—Sm. Yellow dogstooth
Violet.

‘€ Leaves lanceolate, spotted. Petals oblong lanceolate, obtuse at the point.

Asmall bulbous plant, bearing a scape six or eight inches
high, terminated by one handsome nodding flower; petals
yellow, beautifully veined and rolled back. Leaves
generally two or three from the root, smooth and marked
with numerous dark spots, which afterwards disappear.
Bulb smal] and deeply seated in the ground,

This beautiful little plant is found in great abundance
about Quebec, in moist shady situations, shewing its hand-
some flower among the first in spring.

UVULARIA.—L.

Uvularia perfoliata—L. Perfoliate Bellwort.
f¢ Leaves perfoliate, elliptic, obtuse. Corolla campanulate, granular, scabrous
within. Anthers cuspidate.’’

A herbaceous perennial plant, about fifteen inches high :
stem simple, forked at top; bearing a single pendulous
flower from the end of one of the branches; petals pale
yellow, narrow, not spreading out. Leaves closely veined
and ending in a small point. Flowers in May. Grows on
the side of the hill at Marchmont.

Uvularia grandiflora—Sm. Great Bellwort.
§ Leayes perfoliate, oblong, acute. Petals smooth within. Anthers
without awns.”’
This species resembles the preceding one, but the flowers
are much larger and of a deeper yellow, Grows about
Montreal.

a tiie amelie ha

Plants of Canada. 51

Uvularia sessilifolia—L. Sessile-leaved Bellwort.
“ Leaves sessile, oval-lanceolate, glaucous beneath. Petals flat; smooth
within. Capsules stipitate.”

A delicate perennial plant eight to ten inches high ;
stem simple, or forked at the summit, slender, with a few
scattered leaves ; flowers close bell-shaped, nodding, pale
yellow. Common on dry ground about Quebec.

ASPHODELEZX.—Juss.
PONTEDERIA.—L.

Pontederia cordata—L. Heart-leaved Pontederia.
Pickerel Weed.

“€ Leaves oblong cordate. Flowers in crowded spikes.”

A strong herbaceous perennial, growing in ponds and
on the borders of lakes. Stalk about two feet high, bearing
at the summit a close spike of blue flowers. Leaves few,
four to five inches long, on a foot-stalk about one inch
and ahalf in length. Grows abundantly round Lake St.
Peter, and sparingly at the outlet of the River Etchemin.

ALLIUM.—L.

Allium Sibericum—L. Siberian Onion.
* Scape nearly naked, round. Leaves semicylindrical. Stamina subulate.
Petals lanceolate, acute.”

Leaves two, sheathing a third part up the stem, keeled.
Outer leaf, four inches long above the sheath; inner one,
one inch long, membranaceous. Flowers in a crowded
head, light crimson ; divisions of the petals broad lanceolate,
and somewhat distorted at the extremity. Common on the
rocky shores of the St. Lawrence near Quebec. This
plant is not mentioned by writers on American botany.

Allium Canadense—L. Tree Onion.
* Scape naked, terete. Leaves linear. Head bulbiferous.”’

Native of the shores of Lake Ontario. This onion is
esculent and cultivated,

52 Notes on some of the

Allium tricoccum—Arr.

“Scape naked, nearly terete. Leaves lanceolate-oblong, flat, smooth.—
Umbel globose. Seeds solitary.”

“ Balblarge oblong. Leaves about four inches long, and an inch or more
in breadth. Scape a foot high, striate. Umbel spreading. Corolla white.
Capsule obtusely triangular. Cells one-seeded.”—TorREY.

This plant on the authority of Pursh, grows about the

River Ottawa; and, if I am rightly informed, is called by

the country people, dil sauvage. Esculent.

SMILACEZ.—R. Brown.
CONVALLARIA.—L.

Convallaria bifolia—L. Least Solomon’s Seal.
“‘ Stem two-leaved. Leaveson short petioles, cordate oblong, very smooth
on both sides. Raceme simple, terminal, Flowers tetrandrous.”

A small upright plant, about six inches high, with two,
and sometimes three heart-shaped leaves. Flowers small,
white, deeply four-parted. Growsplentifully about Quebec,
on dry ground.

Convallaria stellata—L. Star-flowered Solomon’s Seal.

“ Leaves numerous, alternate, oval-lanceolate, amplexicaule. Raceme

simple, terminal.”

A perennial plant about a foot high. Flowers small, white,
deeply six-parted. Grows in moist ground ; plentifully on
the banks overlooking the falls of the Chaudiére, and
among the rocks below high-water mark, at Pointe Levi.

Convallaria trifolia—L. Three-leaved Solomon’sSeal.
‘ Stem about three-leaved. Leaves alternate, oval-lanceolate, contracted
atthe base. Raceme simple, terminal, few-flowered.”
A pretty little plant, four or five inches high. Raceme
six to ten-flowered, followed by small red berries. Grows
in moss swamps about Quebec.

_-

Plants of Canada. 53

Convallaria racemosa—L. Great Solomon’s Seal.
Sceau de Solomon.

“ Leaves numerous, alternate, sessile, oblong-oval, acuminate, nerved,

pubescent. Flowers in a terminal racemose-panicle.”

A perennial plant ; stem two feet high, arched, smooth,
angular. Raceme terminal, compound. Flowers small,
six-parted, yellowish green. Berries red. Flowers in
June. Found commonly about Quebec.

Convallaria pubescens—WI Lp.

“ Stem nearly terete, furrowed. Leaves alternate, amplexicaul, ovate,

pubescent beneath. Peduncles axillary, generally two-flowered.”

A herbaceous perennial, one to two feet high; stem
arched. Flowers cylindrical, yellowish green, pendulous
by fine foot-stalks. Berries blue. Grows on the banks of
the St. Lawrence, near Quebec.

DRACZENA.—L.
Dracena borealis—L. Wild Lily of the Valley.

“ Subcaulescent. Leaves oval-obovate, margin ciliate. Scape pubescent.

Umbel corymbed, sometimes proliferous. Pedicels naked, nodding.”

A perennial plant, with three or four large radical leaves,
six inches long, and two inches broad, ending in an abrupt
sharp point. Stem a foot or more in height, angular,
bearing four or six flowers towards the extremity, disposed
by twos on upright foot-stalks, sometimes having the
appearance of an umbel, Flowers yellow, large, divided
nearly to the base. Berries a beautiful blue. ‘This isa
handsome plant, and grows in moist woods about Quebec.

There appears to be a strong disposition among late
authors to remove this plant from the genus Dracena.—
Torrey has put it in Conyallaria, and Pursh among his
Smilacine.

54 Notes on some of the

STREPTOPUS.—Mx.

Streptopus roseus--Mx. Rose Bellwort.

“ Smooth and shining. Leaves amplexicaul, serrulate-ciliate. Anthers

short, two-horned.”

A handsome perennial plant, about a foot and a half high,
with a forked stem. Flowers axillary, single, pendulous
on ashortslender stalk, bell-shaped, rose-coloured. Grows
on the banks of the St. Lawrence near Quebec. It deserves
a place in the flower border.

Streptopus distortus—Mx. Heart-leaved Bellwort.
“Smooth. Leaves amplexicaule, smooth on the margin. Pedicels
distorted, and geniculated in the middle.”

A perennial plant, resembling the preceding. Stem two
feet high, with several forked branches. Leaves two to
four inches long, ovate-lanceolate, many-nerved, acumi-
nate. Flowers solitary, on slender foot-stalks an inch and
ahalflong. Flowers greenish yellow. Grows about the
river Ottawa. 1 have not observed it yet in this neigh-
bourhood.

SMILAX.—L.

Smilax peduncularis—Wrtip. Jacob’s Ladder.
“Stem terete, climbing, or arched. Leaves round-oyate, cordate,
acuminate, about nine-nerved. Umbels long peduncled.”

A herbaceous perennial. Stem three to five feet high,
branched. Leaves ending abruptly in a sharp stiff point,
irregularly placed, on short foot-stalks, with tendrils at
the axils. Flowers in a globular radiated head, about two
inches diameter, on a stalk six inches long, issuing from
the joints of the stem. Fruit, small black berries in a
crowded cluster. This plant has a very unpleasant scent
when bruised. It grows in moist meadows about Quebec,
and throughout Canada,

Plants of Canada. 55

GYROMIA.—Norratr.

Gyromia virginica—Ncrr. Medeola virginica—L,
Indian Cucumber.

Herbaceous. Stem simple, smooth, furrowed, woolly
at the joints, about eighteen inches high. Leaves in two
whorls, one at the summit, of three or four leaves, the
other lower down, of six or seven leaves, sessile; the
upper ones lance-ovate, the others lance-oval, thin, smooth,
entire, paler beneath. Flowers, three or four at the
summit, yellow, on short foot-stalks, pendulous between
the leaves. Berries dark blue. Grows in moist woods,
near the falls of the Chauditre, and frequently throughout
the province. The root is succulent, has the flavour of
cucumbers, and is said to be eaten by the Indians.

TRILLIUM —L.

Trillium pictum—Pursu. Painted Herb truelove.
“ Peduncle somewhat erect. Petals oval-lanceolate, acute, recurved {nearly
as long as the narrow calyx. Leaves ovate, acuminate, rounded at the
base, abruptly contracted into a short petiole.”’

A pretty herbaceous perennial. Stem simple, about
eight inches high, with three leaves at the summit.—
Flower on a short stalk from the centre of the three leaves.
Petals narrow, white, with a transverse crimson bar near

the base. Berry, bright red. Grows plentifully about
Quebec in dry woods,

Trillium erectum—L, Purple Herb truelove.
“ Peduncle inclined. Flower nodding. Petals ovate acuminate, flat,

spreading, broader and a little longer than the calyx. Leaves broad-
rhomboid, acuminate. sessile.”

A herbaceous perennial plant, a foot high, stem simple.
Flowers large and showy, generally of a brown purple

56 Notes on some of the

colour, but sometimes red, pink, yellow, and even
white. Berries purple. This is an ornamental plant,
frequently found in gardens : but it will not bear handling
on account of a disagreeable dog-like scent. Grows very
commonly in this neighbourhood, especially on the steep
banks of the St. Lawrence.

Trillium grandiflorum—Satiss. Large-flowered
Trillium.

“ Peduncle inclined. Flower somewhaterect. Petals spathulate-lanceolate,
connivent at the base, much longer than the calyx. Leaves broadly
rhomboid-ovate.”

A beautiful perennial herbaceous plant, having much
the habit of the preceding one. Petals large, white,
changing gradually to red. Berries dark purple. Grows
on Montreal Mountain. I have not observed it in this
neighbourhood. This showy plant ought to be more
generally introduced into flower gardens. The whole of
this genus is now in great request in Britain.

IRIDEZ..—VENTENAT.
IRIS.—L.

Iris versicolor—L. Various-coloured Iris. Common Flag.

“‘ Flowers beardless. Stem terete, more orless flexuose, Germen
somewhat triangular. Leaves ensiform,”

A herbaceous perennial plant, about two feet high.—
Flowers three or four at the summit. Petals purple and
blue, inner ones paler. Leaves about three quarters of an
inch wide, and generally equaling the stem in height. This
is the common Iris of our brooks and swamps.

Plants of Canada. 57

Iris tridentata—Watr. Three-toothed Iris.
© Beardless. Stem terete, longer than the leaves. Leaves ensiforme.
Rudiments of the interior petals three-toothed, the centre tooth acuminate.

Capsule three-sided.”

Stem about two feet high, bent at top. Leaves sheathing,
double, smooth and shining within, two-edged towards the
point. Petals three, blue, marked with purple veins.
Grows on the Island of Anticosti.

Iris Siberica—L. Siberian Iris.
® Beardless. Stem hollow, terete, passing the leaves. Leaves linear.
Capsule short, three-sided, both ends obtuse.”

Flowers blue, about three on the stem. Grows near the
River Ottawa, on the authority of Pursh. I have not
seen it.

Iris cuculata—Pursu, MS.

Pursh, in his visit to Anticosti in 1818, discovered anew
species of Iris, which he thus named in a manuscript note.
I have no specimen nor description of it.

STISYRINCHIUM.—L.
Sisyrinchium anceps—Cavan. Blue-eyed Grass.

“ Scape two-edged, winged, simple, nearly leafless. Spath about four-
flowered, unequal, shorter than the flowers. Petals mucronate.”
Plant perennial. Stem simple, about a foot high.—
Leaves few, linear, half the length of the stem. Flowers
deep blue, small, handsome. Common in meadows
everywhere.

Sisyrinchium mucronatum—Mx.
“ Scape simple, winged. Spath coloured, one of the valves extending into
along marcescent point.”

Stem cespitose, about a foot high. Spath consisting of
two very unequal valves, one of them about as long as the
i

58 Notes on some of the

peduncles, the other continued half an inch or more
beyond the flowers, and ending in a rigid point; both of
them strongly coloured, generally violet, by which
character it is easily distinguished from the preceding
species. Grows on the shores of Lake Huron, according
to Pursh.

CORYLIDEA—S. F. Gray.
CARPINUS —L.

Carpinus Americana—W. Hornbeam. Blue Beech.
Charme.
“ Leaves oblong-ovate, acuminate, unequally sawed. Scales of the ament
three-parted, the middle division with a lateral tooth.”

A small tree, about the size of an apple-tree ; having a
smooth bark like that of the beech. The wood is extremely
hard and close grained, resembling boxwood in texture.
Raftsmen make withes of the sappling trees to bind their
timber together into rafts. It grows on the Island of Mont-
real and in other parts of the province; but as far as I
know has not been found near Quebec.

OSTRYA—Mx.

Ostrya Virginica—W. MHophornbeam. Ironwood.
Leverwood. Bois dur.

“ Leaves ovate-oblong, subcordate, acuminate, unequally serrate. |
Strobiles, oblong ovate, erect.”

This tree is of larger and more upright growth than the
hornbeam. It has a rough scaly bark, and the stem fre-
quently assumes a knotty irregular appearance. The wood
is heavy and tough in the extreme; these properties render
it very suitable for levers, axletrees and other purposes
requiring great strength. The centre of the wood is extre-

— ee

ee —

»

Plants of Canada. 59

mely bitter, and has been found a powerful remedy for
intermittent fevers, in form of decoction.

The fruit resembles hops, whence its English name,—
This tree is very common about Quebec on stony land,

CORYLUS.—L,
Corylus Americana—W. Hazle. Coudrier.
Noisettier.

** Leaves broad, heart-shaped, acuminate, doubly-sawed. Ribs strongly
prominent beneath, woolly where they join the midrib. Calyx of the
fruit hispid, with glandular heads at the ends of the hairs, longer than
the roundish nut, limb spreading, tooth-serrate.”’

A shrub six to eight feet high, producing a well flavoured
nut. It grows very abundantly in the upper parts of the
province. I have not observed it near Quebee,

Corylus rostrata—W.. Beaked Hazlenut tree.
Coudrier.

“ Leaves oblong-ovate, acuminate. Stipules lance-linear. Calyx of the
fruit bell-form, two-parted, Divisions gash-toothed, lengthened out
beyond the nut into a beak.”

A smaller shrub than the preceding one ; also producing
a pleasant fruit. The foliage resembles that of the common
elm. This plant may be readily distinguished from the
other by the long beaked calyx covering the nut; whereas
the fruit of the americana is exposed to view when ripe.
Grows very commonly about Quebec in dry woods,

QUERCUS.—L.

Quercus coccinea—Wn. Scarlet Oak.
* Leaves long-petioled, oblong, deeply sinuate, glabrous, Lobes divaricate,
toothed acute, setaceons-mucronate, Calyx turbinate, marked with

scales. Acorn short-ovate,”’

This oak I have not seen—it is a Canadian tree on the
authority of Pursh, who says, in a MS, note, it grows on
the Ottawa,

60. Notes on some of the

Quercus ambigua—Mx. Grey Oak.
‘* Leaves sinuate acute. Bays acutish. Cups somewhat saucer-shaped.
Acorn turgid, egg-shaped.”’

The grey oak of Michaud grows about Quebec in com-
pany with the red oak, which it closely resembles; so much
so that some writers will not allow them to be specifically
distinct. The timber is not in request.

Quercus rubra—W. Red Oak. Chéne rouge.

*¢ Leaves long petioled, oblong, glabrous, obtusely-sinuate. Lobes acutish,
toothed, ending by abristle. Calyx saucer-form, smoothish. Acorn
subovate, turgid.”

The red oak is a very ornamental tree for parks and
kept grounds, growing toa large size on goed land. Little,
however, can be said in favour of the timber; being but
of indifferent quality ; it is only used for staves for sugar
hogsheads, and other dry casks ; large quantities of which
are annually exported to the West Indies, and rate’
at about two thirds the price of white oak staves of the
same size,

Quercus macrocarpa—Mx. Overcup Oak.

“Leaves downy beneath, deeply lyrate-sinuate-lobed. Lobes obtuse,
repand, upper ones dilated. Calyx bowl-form. Upper scales setose,
Acorn turgid, ovate, large,”

A large tree producing timber of excellent quality.—
Pursh had a Canadian specimen of this tree; but it does
not appear where he found it,—very probably in the upper
province,

Quercus lyrata—W. White water Oak.

‘* Leaves with very short petioles, smooth, lyrate-sinuate, widened at the top.

Lobes oblong, acute, upper ones truncate-angled. Cup depressed globular,

the scales ending in short firm points. Acorn globular, almost covered
by the cup.”

This oak grows on the borders of the St. Lawrence in

Plants of Canada. 6h

the upper parts of the province; but it does not attain a
large size.—The timber is said to be of good quality.

Quercus alba—W. White Oak. Chéne blanc.

** Leaves oblong, sinuate=pinnatifid, pubescent beneath. Lobes sublinear,
obtuse, entire, narrowed at their bases. Fruit peduncled. Calyx
somewhat bowl-formed, tubercled. flattened at the base. Acorn ovate.”
White oak grows in the southern and western parts of

this province, and abundantly in Upper Canada. In rich
alluvial soils it attains very large dimensions, sometimes
measuring five feet in diameter at the base. Great quan-
tities of squared timber and of staves made of this species
of oak, are annually floated down the St. Lawrence, and
shipped to Britain, Ireland, and the West Indias. The
timber is also extensively used here in ship-building.

Quercus bicolor?—W. Swamp white Oak.

** Leaves long petiole, oblong-evate, white downy beneath, coarsely-
toothed, entire at the base. Teeth unequal, spreading, acutish, callous
atthe point. Fruitin pairs, long peduncled, the peduncle terminating
ina bristle. Calyx hemispheric. Acorn oblong-ovate,”’

A large wee growing sparingly in this province. Leaves
resembling those of the beech. Acorn sweet. Native of
the island of Montreal.

FAGUS —L.

Fagus sylvatica—W. White Beech, Hétre blanc.
Leaves ovate, acuminate, slightly toothed, ciliate, acute at the base,
Nut ovate, three-sided, obtuse, mucronate.”

A beautiful tree, with a smooth gray bark, growing
usually on stony land, and in favorable situations, attaining
a large size. The timber is not much used in this country,
except by plane-makers, It ig excellent fuel, being only
inferior to sugar-maple and black birch in that respect.—

62 Notes on some of the

This is an European tree, and said to be the only one
indigenous to Canada. It is found abundantly about
Quebec,

Fagus ferruginea—W. Red beech. Heétre rouge
‘¢ Leaves ovate-oblong, acuminate, pubescent beneath, coarsely toothed,
at the base obtuse-subcordate-oblique. Nuts ovate, three-sided, very
acute,””

This tree very much resembles the preceding one, and
is equally ornamental. ‘The timber is of a reddish colour,
whence its name, and is said to be of a superior quality ;
more closely resembling English beech in this respect than
the other; it is therefore entitled to a preference for those
purposes in which this timber is used, such as shoe-lasts,
plane stocks, and turnery wares, Grows in similar situations
with the former species.

CELTIS.—L.
Celtis occidentalis—L. Nettle tree. Bots inconnu.
« Leaves ovate, acuminate, generally serrated, except near the base ;
scabrous above, rough-haired beneath. Fruit solitary.”

A large tree, growing usually in alluvial soils. The
timber is hard, rives freely, and resembles ash in texture ;
it is sometimes used by chair-makers and wheelwrights.—
In Lower Canada rather scarce, but grows in company
with elm, ash, and red maple, on the low shores of the
Ottawa, and on the islands in Lake St. Peter.

PLATANUS.—L.
Platanus occidentalis—L. American Plane-tree.
Buttonwood. | Cotonier.

‘© Leaves five-angled, obtusely lobed, toothed. Stem and branches
becoming white.”

The plane, said to be the largest tree in the North

— a

Plants of Canada. 63

American forests, does not appear to be a native of this
province; yet borders very closely upon it, as I have
observed it growing naturally near Burlington, on Lake
Champlain, about half a degree south of our boundary line.
It is very common in Upper Canada.

This tree is ornamental, and is successfully cultivated
at Montreal. I doubt not it would succeed here in the
alluvial soils, which it naturally prefers.

MYRIC.E.—Ricuarp.
MYRICA.—L.

Myrica Gale—L. Sweet Gale. Dutch Myrtle.
Galé. Piment Royale.

“ Leaves wedge-lanceolate, obtuse, sawed at the end. Staminate aments
imbricate. Scales acuminate, ciliate. Fruit ina dry head.

A bushy shrub about three feet high, of handsome
appearance. The foliage is dark green above, and very
fragrant. This shrub, according to Miller, has numerous
good and useful qualities; for a description of which, that
author may be consulted, From the number, it may not be
improper to quote from him that—* 'The cones boiled in
water, throw up ascum resembling beeswax, and gathered
in sufficient quantities, would make candles. It is used to
tan calf-skins. Gathered in the autumn, it dies wool yellow,
and is used for that purpose both in Sweden and Wales.”

The Myrica Gale appears to have long been held in
esteem for its various good qualities, that of producing wax
might be tried here with little trouble, as the plant is very
abundant with us. This pretty shrub grows on the mar-
gins of lakes and rivers, and is found near Quebec, at
Cap Rouge and on the low shores of the St. Charles,

64 Notes on some of the

Myrica caroliniensis—W. Bayberry bush. Candleberry
Myrtle. Myrte a Chandelle. Galé cirier.

‘« Leaves wedge-oblong, coarsely toothed. Staminate aments lax.
Scales acute. Berries globular, large.”

A shrub, three or four feet high, bearing berries covered
with a substance resembling wax or tallow, as is also the
‘fruit of two other American species, the cerifera and the
pennsylvanica, from which candles have been made: en
this subject an article in the first volume of the Society’s
Transactions, compiled by a member, may be consulted.
This species grows along the seaboard from the Gulph of
St. Lawrance to Florida, keeping within the influence of
the sea atmosphere. I am informed by one of our Vice-
Presidents,* that it is found in the Gulph of St. Lawrence,
as high up as Hare Island.

{ End of the first part.]

On LenetH and Space, by the Rev.
D. WILKIE.

Lenetu of time, is the continuance of any sensation,
and is perceived by all the senses. It is measurable only
in one way, that is, T™z has only one dimension.

Length, properly so called, that is, ExTENsIoN, is first
perceived and accurately measured by the sense of Touch
only. It is roughly judged of by the eye, and perceived by

* Andrew Stuart, Esqr.

Length and Space. 65,

no other sense whatever. It is measurable in three ways ;
that is, has three dimensions,—length, breadth, and thick-
ness. Bodies can be measured in these three respects.

1.—If one body is laid upon my finger, and I feel the
impression from the tip of the finger to the middle, and if
another is laid upon it, so that I feel the impression from
the one end of the finger to the other; there is, then, a
manifest difference between the two impressions. I know
not in what this difference consists; but, to make known
to my companions that 1 perceive a difference, I call the
object from which | receive the former impression snort,
or sHorTeR, and that from which I receive the latter
impression LonG, or LONGER. By applying the same objects
to different parts of the body, corresponding impressions
wil] be received. Thus, it will appear, that objects which
are short in one case, are so in every case ; and that those
which are Jong in one case, are long always. A belief is
thus induced, that nature is uniform in her operations ;
and we never doubt, that objects that seemed longer at one
time, will be found so atanother. By directing the eye to
the two objects, different impressions are received through
this sense; and after a multitude of trials, we learn to
distinguish long from short objects by their different
appearances. In some bodies, namely, sonorous ones,
long from short ones, may be distinguished by the ear, in
consequence of the different sounds which they emit when
struck. ‘This information is generally very indefinite, but
it admits of considerable improvement by practice and
study.

Thus, it appears that our ideas of length, imply merely
the perception of a difference between the impressions made

upon them by long and short objects, All we know of the
I

66 Length and Space.

subject is, that long and short objects make different
impressions upon the senses both of touch and sight. We
feel that difference, but know nothing of the cause of it,
nor is it at all necessary that we should. We invent the
terms long and short, to make known to others the differ-
ence that we feel. We agree with them respecting the
words thus proper to be employed for our mutualadvantage.

2.—It does not appear that the senses of tasting and
smelling, furnish us with any ideas of length; that is to
say, they do not distinguish between long bodies from short
ones. For, though a difference may be perceived between
a long and a short substance, when placed within the
mouth or within the nose, this difference is discovered
solely by the sense of touch diffused over these parts, as
over the rest of the body, and not in the least by the
different tastes or smells afforded by these substances.—
Nor does our perception of the presence of electri¢ sub-
stances give us any information on this subject.

Thus, it appears that our knowledge of the properties of
long and short objects, is first received, and principally
acquired by touch, greatly promoted by the eye, and in
some cases, slightly assisted by the ear; and that by no
other senses whatever, is any information received on this
subject. |

3.—From comparing together more than two objects,
we acquire the ideas of long, longer, longest, and short,
shorter, shortest; and the purpose of social converse
requires, in all languages, the invention of terms corres-
ponding to those ideas. The meaning of these terms, is
settled by convention, and cannot be conveyed by logical
definition. On meeting a stranger to these words, we
‘must show him examples of the objects, before we can

Length and Space. 67

communicate to him our impression, or, in other words,
make him understand what we mean by the terms thus
employed. The word xevat is explained in the same
manner,

4.—As a Jong substance exceeds a short in some respects,
or is greater than it, the frequent application of these
terms, would at least require the use of another. It would
be natural to ask, in what way does it exceed ?—and in
what respect is it greater? To answer this question,
as well as to suit other purposes in discourse, the invention
of the abstract term LeNern would be found convenient —
In what does your rod exceed mine? In length.

The introduction of this general and abstract term, must
have been long posterior to the use of the words long and
shors : A further refinement in language required the use

sithe corresponding abstract term—snorrness. But this

being resorted to on much fewer occasions, and for much
less important purposes, would be introduced much later in
the progress of language. For the word length is applied to
all objects whether comparatively long or short: but
shortness is only applied when deficiency in length is
intended. The further wants of society, introduced into
their discourse, the verbs—ro LENGTHEN and 10 SHORTEN.

5,—To ascertain whether one object was longer or shorter
than another, the method that would most obviously present
itself to those who had distinct ideas of length, or of long
and short, would be to apply the one object to the other.
it would then be preceived either by touching them or
looking at them, whether they were equal, and if not,
which was longer, and how much it was Jonger. If the
idea of the number two had been previously familiarised
tothe mind, then by applying the short one twice to the

68 Length and Space.

longer, it would be perceived whether the one was equal
to two of the other. If the mind had been familiarised to
higher numbers it could, in like manner, be ascertained,
whether the one contained three or four times the other,
or contained it any number of times whatever. Thus, the
idea of a MEAsuRE would be acquired, and its name
required in conversation.

6.—The utility ofa measure would be still more apparent,
when the mind came to compare two immoveable objects,
which could not be brought together, for the purpose of
determining which was longer or shorter. The application
to them both successively, of the measure, the one being
longer than itself, though it appears to usa simple expedient,
was undoubtedly the fruit of much reasoning in the infancy
of human intellect, and must have been hailed as a beau-
tiful and useful invention. It appears, however, to be
known in the rudest states of society ; and may be consi-
dered as the common property of the species. It does not
appear that the inferior animals ever attempt to measure,
or determine the comparative length or size of objects in
any other way, than by looking at them, and touching
them, though they must have acquired these impressions
first by touch, as well as ourselves; yet, it is demonstrable
that they judge much more frequently by the eye than by
the other sense. We invariably consider it as a mark of
extraordinary sagacity in an animal, when we see it turn
over an object with its foot for the purpose of perceiving
its size and form.

7.—When two things are severally equal to the measure
employed we see intuitively, that they are equal to another.
By contemplating a number of conclusions of this sort, we
come to this general conclusion that, “ things which are

Length and Space. 69

“ equal to the same thing,are equal to each other.” This
general truth, we call an Axiom.or FIRST TRUTH ; because
it is certain, and cannot be called in question. Yet its
evidence arises entirely from the view of particular instan-
ces taken in detail; and not from any quality in the
general proposition. This axiom is as applicable to num-
bers as to length, and its evidence there also arises from
a view of particular instances. By the application of
numbers to measures of length, we obtain another set of
axioms. Thus, things which are severaly double of one
thing, are equal. Things which are severally treble of one
thing, are equal. Things which are halves of the same
thing, are equal. These axioms are obviously innumerable,
all undeniable, and of great utility.

8.—Material objects may be considered as longer and
shorter, not only in regard to the distance of the one end from
the other, but also in regard to the distance of one side from
the other. For the sake of distinction, the former distance
is called the Leneru, properly so called, of the object, and
the latter is termed its Breapru. The two ideas are
obtained in perfectly the same way from touch, improved
in the same way by the sight, and perfected in the same
way by an accurate measure—they admit of the same
axioms. In fact, they differ in nothing except this single
circumstance, that the one is the distance of the ends, the
other of the sides. Whenever the length and breadth are
unequal, the less is considered as the breadth, and the
greater as the length. Mathematicians correct the loose
ideas of mankind on this subject. But their definition of
breadth pre-supposes that of a perpendicular, and previoug
even to that, the knowledge of the properties of a straight
line, which cannot be defined,

70 Length and Space.

9.—But further, material objects are found to be longer
or shorter not only in their distance from end to end, and
from side to side, but also from top to bottom, or from the
upper surface to the lower. This introduces the idea of
height, depth, or rHickness. Our ideas of this quality
are obtained precisely in the same way as those of length
and breadth, are improved in the same manner, and
explained to others in the same way. The property itself
is measured in the same way, and admits of a similar
mathematical definition with breadth.

10.—Such are the three dimensions, or measurable
properties of bodies, and they are not known to possess any
others. Of these three, the primary is length. This is the
first which the infant, or rude mind contemplates; and it
is that which occurs most frequently in human life. What-
ever measure, therefore is adopted for it, is used also for
the other two. An accurate measure of it pre-supposes the
knowledge of the properties of aline, and of a straight
line, the exact meaning of both which terms, must be
communicated by example and explanation, as no logical
definition of them can be obtained. The measure of length
is the foundation of all other measures whatever, of time,
motion, weight, price, power, heat, electricity, moisture,
&c. No accurate measure is known to exist which has not
this for its foundation. Yet measures of length are adopted
by the individual only by arbitrary assumption, and used
by different individuals by convention or by imitation.

1].—Some objects have a sensible breadth in every part
of them; others are so thin and narrow, that, to the
untutored mind, they appear to have no breadth at all, and
to possess only length. ‘The former impression, when we
would speak of it, comes to be denoted by the various

Length and Space. val

terms, SPACE, ROOM, EXTENT, SURFACE, SUPERFICIES. The
meaning of these terms is usually explained to children,
by showing that the room in which they are, contains more
space than the table, the table more than the paper on
which they write, the paper more than one’s hand, and
the hand more than the blade of a knife. It is no solid
objection to this account, that the ideas thus furnished are
inaccurate, and that we afterwards discover, by mathemat-
ical contemplation, that there are no material objects
without breadth. This correction of our ideas is long
posterior to the origin of them, and pre-supposes much
experience in thinking and reasoning. We learn, then,
after all this aid to think of those creatures of imagination
called tines, that is length without breadth or thickness,
and inquire into their properties. We thus also acquire
correct ideas of surface, and learn the art of measuring it.
Neither let it be objected that, if nature did not give us the
idea of a mathematical line, no effort of imagination could.
This may probably be true. Children, and very ignorant
persons, have nearly the same, probably the very same
conception of a hair, a thread, a fibre, and other long thin
substances, that a mathematician has of aline. Experience
and reflection afterwards discover, that no body can be felt
which has not sensible breadth and thickness; and the
mathematician transfers to the creatures of his imagination,
the properties which he had formerly, but erroneously,
attributed to certain material objects. That is, he thinks
certain things, namely lines, to be long and not broad ;
which is exactly the distinction made by inexperienced
persons, between substances that have surface or breadth,
and those that are thought to have none. ‘The distinction
between surfaces and solids, is rudely introduced, and

%2 Length and Space.

afterwards corrected, in precisely the same manner.

12.—It is evident that the idea of length, upon which all
these which we are here concerned with depend, cannot be
acquired without the assistance of memory. Without this
power, the length of no objects can be compared, which
do not present themselves to the senses at the same instant
of time. Even when two objects are felt by the hand, or
seen by the eye, at the same time, it is doubtful whether
the mind attends to them both atonce. It is more probable,
that they are felt and seen successively ; and that the mind
attends first to the one and then to the other. Consequently
the exercise of memory must be necessary even for the
comparison of objects immediately perceived.

13.—When the mind has been well accustomed to the
view of lines, and has actually felt and seen many of them ;
it will readily perceive that they are of different kinds. In
viewing many different lines, or many different objects
that possess length, memory will soon suggest to us, that
these lines are not all of the samenature. Thus arainbow,
a coiled rope, and an arrow present appearances extremely
different from one another. The impressions which the
two latter produce upon the sense of touch are as different
as those produced by them upon the sight. A number of
trials, while memory compares the present with the past,
convinces us, that the impression made by the coil of ropes
upon the touch is uniform: and that that upon the sight is
also uniform. The impressions made by the arrow upon
the same sense are equally uniform. The effects arising
from perceiving these two objects by either sense, are per-
fectly distinct ; and, though we can never tell in which
that difference consists, the difference is so striking, that
so Jong as memory remains, we are never in any danger

Length and Space. 73

of confounding those two objects. But it is not enough
to perceive this difference. We wish to communicate our
perceptions to others with whom we have already conversed
on other subjects. We wish to tell some other persons
which object it is we perceive, or which description of
objects. For this purpose we apply the word srraicar to
the one, and the word rounp to the other. When still
greater precision of language was required, all lines which
are not straight were called curves, and the word round
appropriated to circular bodies, or circular lines.

Mathematicians have been at vast pains to discover an
appropriate and logical definition of the word straight,
but hitherto with very little success. Whether a logical
definition of it may be obtained, I shall enquire afterwards.
What I mean to state at present is, that mankind in
general, learn the meaning of this term solely from exem-
plification: We teach children the distinction, by placing
a straight and a curve object before them, and telling
them that the one is named the one way, and the other the
other way. It is certain that they all learn the distinction
very quickly in this way, and understand very clearly what
is meant by these two words. But if they were left to be
taught the distinction by logical definition, millions must
certainly remain for ever jgnorant of it ; and it is extremely
doubtful, whether any could, ever by this means, become
acquainted with it.

14.—The acience of geometry is founded on our know-
ledge of lines. Before men can study geometry, they must
be agreed about the meaning of certain terms which lie at
the foundation of that science, but which do not admit of
any logical definition, ‘The following appear to be the
principal terms used in geometry, which fall under this

K

74 Length and Space.

description: Length, breadth, thickness; a body, a surface,
aline, apoint; a straight line, a curve, an angle. The
meaning of these terms must be settled by description,
and by exhibiting examples to the eye. When this is done,
all the other terms used in geometry may be logically
defined, so that their precise application can never be
mistaken, nor admit of any ambiguity. But, besides
determining by convention and example, the meaning of
the abovementioned terms, it is further necessary, before
proceeding to teach the science of geometry, to assume
some property of a straight line. For this purpose, differ-
ent properties of the straight line, have been assumed by
different geometers. One of the properties most commonly
assumed for this purpose is, that “if two straight lines
coincide in two points, they will coincide throughout.”’—
This property, though not assumed by Euclid, is implied
in the fourth proposition of the first book; for, if it be not
presupposed, the bases of the two triangles, though coin-
ciding in the two angular points, may not coincide in other
points, and consequently may not be equal. Another
property sometimes employed for this purpose is, that a
straight line is the shortest distance between two points.—
But each of these is a theorem, and nota definition. They
are indeed both theorems which cannot be demonstrated or
proved, and therefore I have said, they must be assumed.
What I have said of the impossibility of defining the terms
straight line and angle, refers only to the present state of
the science, and does not preclude the possibility of discoy-
ering definitions of one or both of them. A logical definition
of an angle, would add a new beauty, and anew degree of
simplicity to the subject; but a correctly logical definition
ofa straight line would greatly elucidate the elements of

Length and Space. 75

the science, and remove the principal obstacles that lie in
the way of the young student’s advancement. Besides these
assumptions, a new one has been usually found necessary
to the illustration of parallel lines. Legendre is said to
have removed the necessity of this assumption in two ways.
—Leslie professes to have removed the difficulty, in
prop. 23d, book I. of his Elements of Geometry, but
has not entirely succeeded. If logical definitions could
be found for a straight line and angle, which would
lead to direct proofs of the different properties of these
two objects, as well as of parallel lines; it appears to
me, that the theory of geometry would be complete.—
Our notions of length, breadth, thickness; of a body, a
surface, a line; are derived from the senses, and cannot,
in all probability, be derived from any other source.

Number is derived from all the senses, and is a property
of all objects whatever, even of such as are incorporeal.
Arithmetic is therefore the simplest of all sciences. The
only terms which it requires to be understood without
definition are, one, sum, difference. When the import of
these terms is settled by convention, and by reference to
the senses, all the others required, may be defined; and
thus, the science is erected by the contemplations of the
mind itself.

In this imperfect Essay, I have endeavoured to investigate,

1.—How ideas of length and shortness are introduced, and what we
understand of these qualities, and the rise of the words denoting
them.

2.—By what senses they are conveyed to us,
3.—How our language on this subject to further improvement,

76 Additional Notes on the

4.—The introduction of the abstract terms, length, lengthen, and their
opposites.

5.—The application of a measure to one object.

6.—The application of it to two immoveable objects at a distance.

7.—The reasonings founded on this invention.

8.—The idea of breadth.

9.—That of depth or thickness.
10.—Extensive application and use of measures of length.
11.—Introduction of the abstract terms, space, solidity, &c.
12.—The mental faculties concerned in acquiring these ideas,
13.—The different kinds of lines, straight and curve.
14.—The principles assumed in geometry.

Additional Notes on the GEOGNosY of SAINT
Pauw’s Bay, by Lieut. BADDELEY, R.H,

THERE is no spot in Canada more likely to become the
resort of the invalid and of the admirer of beautiful scenery
than St. Paul’s Bay and its captivating valley ; nor is there
any river in Canada more likely to have a flourishing
manufacture established upon its shores than the Gouffre,
which, intersecting the above mentioned valley on a course
from the westward of north, enters the St. Lawrence at
St. Paul’s Bay.

The iron mines, mineral springs, and earthquakes
which characterize this section of Lower Canada, are
objects, the pursuit of which will not fail to gratify the
scientific taste of the tourist, while his admiration of the
picturesque will be unceasingly excited, as he wanders
through the neighbourhood. It is scarcely possible to
conceive a more beautiful drive than is afforded by both

Geognosy of St. Paul’s Bay. 77

banks of the Gouffre, over an excellent road for four or
five leagues into the interior. In England this valley would
be as celebrated as that of the Dove or Clywd: to the latter
it bears astriking resemblance. Hitherto visitors have
contented themselves in general with a view of the bay
merely, and to this is partly owing the little information
We possess respecting the interior; had it been otherwise,
this place would not have experienced the neglect it has,
but would, at least as a watering place, have rivalled
Kamouraska, on the opposite shore, which can bear no
comparison with it in point of scenery.

To those who may have a week’s or a fortnight’s leisure
during the summer we strongly recommend the tour of this
valley, the only drawback to which is the uncertainty of
reaching or leaving St. Paul’s Bay on account of
contrary winds, and the probability which exists in
consequence, of being confined to a boat or schooner for
an unwelcome period; of the misery of which, as it has
been twice our lot to incur it, we speak feelingly. If
sufficient encouragement were given, a steam-boat would
run between Quebec and St. Paul’s Bay at stated periods,
and then the difficulty would vanish; at all events, to those
who possess a stout pair of legs and the desire to use them,
the task of reaching the spot is an easy one.—For horses
and carriages the road either is or was impassable. As to
houses of entertainment at St. Paul’s Bay, in the popular
sense of the word, we know of none. There are, however,
as elsewhere, many respectable Canadians who would not
object to receive en pension. For ourselves, while there,
we had the good luck, (which few must hope for, as it
would be a breach of politeness to intrude,) to experience
the hospitality of Mr. Chaperon and his family, and the

78 Additional Notes on the

extreme attention and kindness of every member of it;
made us all feel how much more there is in the manner of
conferring a favor than even in the favor itself.

The mineral springs of St. Paul’s Bay, &c. which will be
among the first objects to attract the notice of the stranger,
are of three kinds, saline, sulphuretted, and chalybeate.
—The first the least abundant, the last the most so. The
saline and sulphuretted springs are confined to the alluvial
land of the valley of the Gouffre and principally, if not
entirely, to the almost immediate neighbourhood of St.
Paul’s Bay.* This land consists of a very plastic marly
clay, overlying carboniferous limestone, and underlying
loamy, sandy, and vegetable deposits. Sandy ridges are
also very characteristic of the valley. This valley, perhaps,
half a league wide in its widest part, is enclosed on all
sides, except towards the Bay, by a chain of mountains
consisting of primary rocks. These rocks, towards the
lower end of the valley, have large deposits of carbonifer-
ous limestone at their feet, while those at the upper end
are characterised by being the matrices of large quantities
of magnetic iron. Such is a short geological sketch of this
valley, intended as explanatory of the geological position
of these mineral springs to which we again return. The
sulphuretted waters, which are found in many places in the
lower part of ‘the bay, are remarkable for a white slimy
scum, or curd, which covers them. Pieces of wood, and
the stones lying in the stream have often a coating of the
same substance. When dried, these pieces, over the flame
of a candle, burn with a weak, blue, and almost lambent
flame, giving out the odour of sulphur. This coating has

* In the Eboulemens sulphuretted waters are said to be more abundant,

——-

.

Geognosy of St. Paul’s Bay. 79

a tufaceous aspect, and is evidently not sulphur, neither is it
a carbonate, as it does not effervesce in acid. It is more pro-
bable that it is a sulphate of lime containing a small portion
of sulphur ina free state—the chemist, however, must
decide this. The first intimation the stranger receives of
being in the immediate vicinity of these springs is the
strong disagreeable smell of sulphuretted hydrogen, which
he liberally inhales, and if not satisfied with the proof
which his nose affords, he requires the further evidence of
his palate, the unwelcome flavour of spoilt eggs will
convince him of the presence of sulphur under its most
offensive form.

The iron, or chalybeate waters are very abundant, and
are often found associated with the sulphuretted springs as
if they had had one common origin, which indeed is very
possible, as the decomposition of beds of iron pyrites would
afford them both. Whatever may be the origin of the
sulphuretted waters, however, we think that those con-
taining iron are generally attributed to a partial solution
of the magnetic oxide of iron of the neighbourhood ; what
the solvent may be, (if any other solvent than water be
required,) we can only conjecture. Decaying vegetation
affords the phosphoric acid, and it is well worthy of remark
that bog ore, which is evidently a precipitation from
waters holding iron in solution, always contains the
‘phosphate of iron.

‘The astringent ink-like flavor of these waters is a suffi-
cient distinction to the taste, and when stagnant, or nearly
80, a scum or a deposit of a red colour, which is in fact the

‘rust of iron, marks their course. An irised pellicle floating
‘on the surface of such waters is also an indication of the

presence of iron,

80 Additional Noles on the

Salt springs, as has been said, are not abundant, nor
have any been observed, as we think, at such heights as
to preclude the possibility of their having their origin in
the St. Lawrence. It must not be omitted to mention,
however, that there is a close association in nature between
sulphuretted and saline waters.

The salt and sulphurised waters appear to spring from
the plastic clay before mentioned, while the chalybeates
usually traverse the surface of the ground.

Of the mineral springs we shall soon have an analysis by
an able hand, which, if it shall not give us the exact
proportion, in which their several constituents enter, (a
manipulation requiring considerable labour and skill) will
at least make us acquainted with those constituents.

While at Mr. Chaperon’s, we visited two sets of sulphur-
etted waters occurring on opposite sides of the bay, in low
swampy ground, and near, or at the foot of the carboniferous
limestone before mentioned.

On the western side of the bay, one of these springs was
observed to enter into water of a remarkable blackness,
and this water was observed in one or two other places.—
Upon digging in several places a black gritty substance
was thrown up, which bore a strong resemblance to a
mixture of sand and lignite, and the occurrence of much
rotten wood, appeared to account for the presence of the
latter. However, upon exposing it to heat it neither formed
a cinder nor gave out any inflammable gas, but appears
to be composed almost entirely of common sand. In a wet
state the sand possessed almost the inky blackness of the
water. We feel much inclined to think that the spring
here, containing sulphuretted hydrogen, meets with other
waters containing lead antimony, or some other metallic

Geognosy of St. Paul's Bay. 81

oxide in solution, and produces the phenomenon described.
But this is a chemical question which we approach with
extreme diffidence. Mr. Gagnon, the priest, informed us
that he had detected antimony in the waters hereabouts,
and to that circumstance he attributed the poor condition
of the sheep in this neighbourhood.

The limestone on the eastern side of the bay, dips to the
westward, while that to the westward dips eastward. This
limestone is of a dark shade of colour, fetid odor, compact
structure, and is destitute of organic remains, at least we
saw none. ‘The last character, together with its high dip
(about 45°) and contact with rocks esteemed to be of the
primary order, induces us to consider it as belonging to
that portion of the carboniferous order of Phillips, called
transition limestone by some authors. The position of this
limestone dipping away, at a high angle, from the base of
the primary rocks on both sides of the valley, induces the
belief that the latter have been elevated since the deposition
of the former.*

Kalm has mentioned the occurrence of an argentiferous
galena in some of the rocks of St. Paul’s Bay. We have
seen several specimens, and have tested successfully the
presence of silver, which indeed is common cnough in lead
ores, every where.

We searched in vain for the actual position of the rock

* Analogous appearances indicating the same cyent are not wanting in
other places in Canada. Capt. Bayfield, R.N. has given instances at page
18, pl. dand 5, vol. I. of these Transactions; and the left bank of the St,
Maurice near the falls of the Greys, offers another, where the old red sand-
stone below the falls, dips down the river, while above the falls it dips Ina
contrary direction, A thick stratum of grey wacke lies above the sandstone
and granite or gueiss below, the whole surmounted hy a fetid and fossilizec
limestone, of the carbouiferous order, covered by a deep alluvium, first
of clay and then of sand, the latter uppermost.

L

82 Additional Notes on the

in which it is found. But in a field at the foot of some
felspathose rocks on the eastern side of the bay, a large
block or two were found of a white laminar carbonate of
lime much mixed up with a beautiful light green fluate of
lime, (colorophane?) having disseminated through the
mass threads and seams of galena, the lamine of which are
small and brilliant. These blocks were angular, and could
not have travelled far. We ascended the hill in search of
the vein or bed, but found nothing but bare and whitened
surfaces of primary rocks projecting from the ground. A
more particular examination, however, would probably
be attended with success, for the matrix of the ore is of too
remarkable and beautiful an appearance to be easily
concealed. It should be sought for in the transition or
corboniferous limestone of the place, which is in other
countries its usual position. In the specimens we saw, the
quantity of ore is small, but its matrix is a promising one:
much of the lead ore of England is found in a vein of
carbonate and fluate of lime, &c. traversing the same
formation of limestone. It is worthy of remark that a vein
precisely agreeing with the one now the subject of discus-
sion, (with the exception of its not showing any traces of lead,)
was observed at Cape Maillard by Mr. Nixon, 66th Regt.
for a description of which see page 166 of the first volume of
these Transactions. Veins of this description are considered
to be very metalliferous, and are often explored with great
advantage.

The predominating rock on the western side of the bay
appears to be a felspathic granite, or one in which the
felspar is in excess, the quartz less abundant and the mica
very subordinate. It is often characterized by containing
garnets, and this, in the estimation of Maculloch, isa proof,

ep ea er oa

>
y
i
f

Geognosy of St. Paul's Bay. 83

if any were wanting, of its being primary.

In our Geognostical Essay on a portion of the Saguenay
country, &e. just referred to, allusion has been frequently
made to the deeply decomposed surface of these rocks, by
which they have acquired their remarkably whitened aspect.
In this therefore we will pass it over, as well as other facts
therein stated, our object being to confine ourselves almost
entirely to any new matter collected during our second visit
to St. Paul’s Bay, in the Spring of 1829, leaving the first
report to speak for itself.

On our former visit to this place, we obtained from Mr.
Gagnon, priest, some interesting information respecting a
voleanic eruption which he appears to have witnessed at
the latter end of the year 1791. In the account of this
event given in the Geognostical Report, an error or two
appears, which we here correct; it was in the month of
December and not October that this phenomenon was
observed. Also for 11° au dessous du thermometre de
Reaumur, (plus 7} of Fahr.) read 11° au dessus, &c.
(plus 56.7. of Fahr.) Neither did the 6th of December,
of that year, fall on Saturday, but on Tuesday, as appears
from the following extract from the journals of the period.*

Extract of a Letter from St. Paul’s Bay, dated lth
December, \791.
“On Tuesday, the 6th instant, about half after seven
o'clock in the evening, we had one of the most violent

* The printed letter was rightly copied from the original manuscript,
but wap ne been written by an old gentleman, it contains a few discrepan-
cles, originating in the failure of his memory, but which deduct nothing
ads accuracy of the essential facts, He corrected the temperature

n our second visit, In entering these corrections in the errata
to the first volome of these Transactions, a most absurd blunder has been
» which our absence from Quebee prevented the suppression of,

84 Additional Notes on the

shocks of an earthquake ever remembered to have been felt
here; it came on like the explosion of a cannon against
the back of our house, which made us imagine that the
roof was falling in, it was followed by the shaking of the
whole frame which fairly rocked about the furniture, &c.
on which we took the children in our arms and ran out of
doors, expecting, as is usual, three successive shocks, but
this was not the case, there came two more moderate
shocks at about a minute distance from each other, after
which we returned into the house expecting all was over ;
but we had not been long in when another most violent
shock came on, and though not accompanied with the
same explosion as the first, continued much longer, for we
had time to leave the house again before it was ended ;
when without, we perceived the earth rocking under our
feet—thinking it not safe to remain in the house during the
night, in the intervals of the shocks we went into it, and
after extinguishing all the fires and lights, retired, eighteen
in number, on board the sloop, where we remained till
eight o’clock next morning, in which space we felt upwards
of thirty shocks,—only nine of them were severe—the
heavens and the earth seemed to be convulsed ; it continued
alternately snowing, raining, hailing, and blowing gusts
of wind from the south-west and north-east.

** The weather still continued in that state, and the earth
trembling at intervals both by day and night, ever since,
though none have been so severe as those of the first night.
One chimney and part of another have been shook down in
the parish.

AT THE EBOULEMENS,

“It was most severely felt—the church is very much

damaged, only one end of it remaining sound—the crucifix

Se

Geognosy of St. Paul’s Bay. 85

on the altar was broken by the fall, as was also the lamp,
which was thrown down by the rocking of the building—
three chimneys have been thrown down, but happily no
lives lost, a poor woman has lost her senses by the fright,
being obliged to run out naked.

AT MALBAY,

“It was not so violently felt, and we hear of no damage
being sustained. No advices have been received since from
the Little River.

ON THE ISLE AUX COUDRES,
_ © The different shocks were severely felt, but we do not
learn that any accident happened.

* Every where the shocks were felt more violently in
stone than in wooden houses.

A frightful rumbling noise was heard in the mountains
both in the intervals and during the shocks, which still
continued when the last accounts came away, (the 16th).”

29th December.
EARTHQUKE AT ST. PAUL’S BAY, EBOULEMENS, &e. —

(Accounts received since our last.)

When the latest advices came off from these places on
Monday the 19th inst. the earthquake still continued to the
great alarm of the inhabitants. An ingenious correspon-
dent on the spot has favoured us with a circumstantial
account, from its commencement up to that date. The
following is an extract :

“All the different shocks were felt from west to east,
and did most damage within the breadth of two leagues,
comprehending in their course (the length of which is yet
unknown) the lower part of St. Paul’s Bay, striking north
and south, the lower end of the Island of Coudres, and the
lower part of the Eboulemens. -

86 Additional Notes on the

‘Within the above space, twenty-one chimnies have
been thrown down or damaged. One stone house almost
entirely demolished, several others split, and many stoves
and ovens broke down, besides the damage done to the
church of the Eboulemens, (mentioned in our last).

“It is remarkable that during the first days the shock
came on regularly at the same hour, morning and evening,
—and since the 6th till now, (the 19th,) we have had at
least four or five shocks every day.

“ The 17th, about half after five o’clock in the evening,
a globe of fire, appearing to the eye of the size of a forty-
eight pound cannon ball, was observed coming from the
south-west, striking towards the north-east, and at the
height of about one hundred and forty toises, disappeared
in its perpendicular descent, above St. Paul’s Bay, after
bursting with an explosion.

“Many old people remark that for several quarter-
centuries back, earthquakes similar to the present have
happened; which lasted forty days, and find their return
tolerably exact every twenty-five years, to a year or two of
variation, and that the present is the third which to their
recollection has taken place in the same season, within
the difference of a month or two.

“In the history of Canada mention is made of a more
violent earthquake, in the month of July, 1663, than any
felt since, having then lasted six months, and began in the
preceding January.

* Dating from that period there appears to have hap-
pened one regularly every twenty-five years—for since
1663 to the present year, five quarter-centuries and three
years have elapsed.

* Previous to and ever since the 6th inst. the weather

Geognosy of St. Paul's Bay. 87

has been clouded and gloomy, particularly west and east,
and whenever it cleared up (which was very seldom) it
always began to darken from thence.”

The existence of iron mines in the rear of St. Paul’s Bay,
was known in the time of Charlevoix ; but the public is in
possession of few facts respecting them, up to the present
day. In the summer of 1827, the Surveyor General
reported favourably of them, after a personal inspection.
And upon our return from the Saguenay country last year,
we visited these mines at the request of Mr. Andrew Stuart,
(one of the Commissioners for exploring unsettled lands,)
the report respecting which may be seen in the Essay before
alluded to. On our departure, instructions were left for
further exploring these mines, and in consequence, very
favourable reports were received during the following
winter. It was to test the truth of these reports, and to
take additional researches, that having finished our obser-
vations at St. Paul’s Bay, we commenced a tour of the
valley. Ascending, as before, on the western shore of the
Gouffre, we shortly reached a saw mill, situated at the
foot of a fall occasioned bya branch of the river tumbling
over the carboniferous limestone, dipping to the eastward.
Plastic clay was observed to be in contact with the limestone,
and the latter is known to succeed to primary formations
here.*

In a deep section of the plastic clay near at hand,
sulphuretted water was seen oozing from it. It is worthy of

* We are not in this country, at least in the Lower Province, per-
"en -aend by the presence of the secondary formation lying above the
niferous limestone of England, salt springs and gypsum occur in the
Upper Province, but it seems to be doubtful whether they are not there
associated with rocks whose analogies in Europe are considered to be of

‘eurlier formation.

88 Additional Notes on the

remark that these springs almost always appear to be
issuing from the body of the clay, a fact not consonant with
the character of the clays in general, which usually throw
off waters. This phenomenon may, perhaps, be accounted
for thus: The fetid carbonate of lime is probably the
source from whence the sulphuretted hydrogen is derived,
which, rising in the state of gas is absorbed by the clay, and
finding an outlet, is partially converted into water, by its
hydrogen attracting oxygen from the atmosphere. It may
however, be explained more simply, by supposing that the
sulphuretted hydrogen combines with the water in the
clay.—Both cases, indeed, may occur. There appears
also to be something contradictory in saying that clays
(notoriously so absorbent when dry) throw off water; butit
is well know that they do, and the reason appears to be,
that in consequence of their absorbent qualities, they soon
become saturated with water, in which case they will
receive no more, but oblige it to traverse their surfaces.—
Near this place, there is also a salt spring, situated in the
lower part of the valley.

Wishing to ascertain a little more respecting the geology
of the valley, we left the road to the right, and ascending
an alluvial ridge, came once more upon the carboniferous
lime stone. Our view from hence was magnificent. Before
us lay the whitened and rounded summits of the primary
chain which, bending eastward, encloses the valley to the
northwards, and makes of it a species of Cul-de-Sac.—
Behind us the graceful sweep of the bay, the Isle aux
Coudres, and the far away blue of the south shore. Below,
a singularly undulated and well cultivated alluvial country,
intersected by the Gouffre.

Crossing a field or two we came upon the junction of the

SS Gerben

——

ee

Geognosy of St. Paul's Bay. 89

primary and secondary (ineluding the transition himestone
under the latter term) rocks. This had been before
observed near the second mill, on the western side of the
bay. The specimens of primary rocks we collected, were,
first—an aggregate composed of blackish brown mica, red
felspar, and grey quartz; secondly, of felspar and quartz
alone, both of a pale colour; thirdly, a trapp containing
much hornblend ; fourthly, micaceous schist. The lime-
stone was the same as has been described.

Descending again into the road, we pursued our journey
over alluvium, until reaching a bluff, or precipice by the
read side, we stopped to dine. This bluff, which is caused
by a spur from the primary chain here meeting the road,
is of granite.

Some distance beyond this bluff, we crossed a plentiful
stream of water, strongly impregnated with iron, and
which had its source in some hills on our left hand.

The next thing that particularly attracted our notice was
a species of cboulement, by which a part of the road had
been broken away and thrown into the river, an event
evidently of common occurrence, as many portions of the
western bank attest.

It appears that the river is rapidly gaining on this bank,
and receding from the eastern, a fact which is owing to the
deep alluvial section that the former presents in many
places, while the Jatter forms in general a gradual slope to
the foot of the mountains, which on the eastern side is
much nearer the river than on the western.

Against this section, already weakened by the general
thaw, the spring torrents rush with such impetuosity as to
tear away a portion of the feeble barrier opposed to them,
particularly at the sudden bends of the river, where their

M

90 Additional Notes on the

effect is greatest. These torrents, by undermining the
bank, soon make it top heavy, and the superincumbent
mass falling, is gradually removed to the bay, where a
species of delta is forming. The operation of this cause is
constant throughout the year, but with diminished effect,
nor does there appear any prospect of its being arrested,
until a decided change is effected in the course of the river,
by which a large portion of the property belonging to
proprietors on the western shore will be cut off and bestowed,
(if the river be considered a Jegal boundary here,) upon their
neighbours on the eastern shore. May we not expect to
hear of an action being instituted one of these days, by the
Seminary versus the heirs of Madame Drapeau ?—What
would be the judicial decision in such a case? In equity
the Seminary hasa right to its land; but so has the other
party to its water lot. To sink piles or construct other
expensive works in order to resist these encroaching waters,
appears to be out of the question in the present state of the
country, but something of the kind must eventually
be done.* On the bank of this river are often seen
prostrate trees deeply embedded in its sandy alluvium, and
this is characteristic of much of the alluvial land of the
Lower Province. In a deep section formed by a river
which crosses the Charlesbourg road, near Quebec, they
may be seen in some abundance. It is remarkable that

these trees are generally cedars, which are now rare in
these parts.

* Captain B. Hall describes similar encrcachments of the Mississippi near
New Orleans, but of course on a much more extensive scale. There the
river, whatever alteration in its course may take place, appears to be the
boundary on one side, and the inhabitants are said, in consequence, to use
attiocial means to increase the encroachment, although at the risk of losing
more than they had previously gained.

“ , wae.

Geognosy of St. Paul’s Bay. 91

We arrived about six o’clock at St. Urbin’s, which js
between four and five leagues northward of St. Paul’s Bay,
Where passing the night, we made preparations in the
morning to visit some deposites of iron ore said to occur in
the mountain chain to the northward, and to test the truth
of a report which had been brought to Quebee respecting
the occurrence of coal hereabouts.

We had many reasons, geological as well as other, to
question the accuracy of this latter report ; but none of them
were of so positive a nature as to render our visit to the
Spot unnecessary, particularly as if we had not done so,

‘some doubt would always have existed on the subject, as it

was only from seeing the total discredit with which their
Story was received by us, after having visited the place, and
the utter hopelessness which existed of imposing upon us
‘that we obtained from one of the conspirators the following
account.

They purchased a bushel of good Neweastle coal about
three weeks befure our arrival, and deposited the same in
a small stream in rear of St. Paul’s Bay.

Fortunately there was not a geologist among them and
their bituminous coal was deposited in defiance of the
beautiful laws of nature, upou the sides, and in close con-
tact with primary rocks, with not a vestige of a secondary
or transition formation within several miles, To see was
therefore to be satisfied, or rather dissatisfied, and we
turned our backs upon the beautiful but meretricious
charms of the wanton sparkling with all her jetty blackness
at the bottom, of a pellucid stream gurgling over a fine
felspathose sand, wp which we were invited to walk, under
the plea of collecting more of this artificial deposit, but
probably with the real intention of extinguishing the lame

92 Additional Notes on the

raised in-our breasts by the view of this intrusive combus-
tible. We returned to St. Urbin’s after two days absence,
having seen only one new bed of ore about twenty feet long
by ten feet wide.

The little expectation which was entertained of finding
coal in these parts had previously been expressed in the
printed report of our former visit, and that little entirely
vanished when we examined the nature of the country
through which our guides conducted us in order to find it.
Having bestowed some attention on the rocks in this
neighbourhood, it appears to us barely possible that coal
in abundance should be found towards the mouth of the
river ; but to seek for it towards the upper end of the valley
would be waste of time. The very circumstance of the
abundance of the magnetic oxide of iron in those parts is
against the probability of finding it. That we failed in
finding much of this ore in our trip northwards is to be
attributed to the lying duplicity of our guides, who per-
suaded us that they knew of several localities. We are
satisfied, however, that a strict search in the neighbourhood
of the chain at the upper end of the valley where we were
would be attended with success. Some detached fragments
and small insignificant veins and embedded pieces were
frequently seen.

If the motive which these men had for deceiving us were
a pecuniary one, (and it is scarcely possible to conceive any
other,) they must have been greatly disappointed, as they
were not even paid for the days they were with us.

On the first of April, (ominous day,) 1829, two of these
men communicated to several gentlemen in Quebee, the
story of the abundance of coal in rear of St. Paul’s Bay, and
endeayoured to extort money in consequence; but we are

a ai ate sa

oe a a. a

Geognosy of St. Paul’s Bay. — 93

pleased in being able to edd that their attempts were vain.
It was fortunate that one of our party, (Mr. Bowen,) staid
behind to explore in the neighbourhood of St. Urbin’s,
otherwise the two days of our absence would have proved
a loss of time of some importance, as the period of our stay
was limited. This gentleman exerted himself so success-
fully during these two days, as to confirm all former reports
respecting the abundance of ore, and to discover new
localities: to his journal, we refer our readers for the
details.

The position of these mines situated near both banks of
the Gouffre, a river which at its shallowest periods might
easily be rendered navigable for bateaux ;—the abundance
of limestone as a flux for the ore ;—the ample supply of —
wood for making charcoal, render this spot well deserving
the notice of government, or of some private capitalists.—
The ore is of that excellent description called magnetic
oxide of iron by mineralogists, or reck ore by miners. It
sonretimes occurs solid and free from admixture, at others
it is mixed up with fusible minerals, so that if the latter
is not so richin metal, neither is itso difficult to fuse ;
there is also, as might be expected, bog ore in the low
grounds, but how much has not been ascertained. On
both sides of the river there is an excellent road, and the
occasional occurrence of small streams descending from the
hills affords the opportunity of working machinery, by
water. In short the only thing which occurs to us as want-
ing to render the position complete, is the discovery of a
good fire stone, such as is found near Mr. Bell’s establish-
menton the St. Maurice river. LUven this might be found,
to the probability of which there is no geological objection ;
that at the forges belonging to the old xed sandstone

94 Grammar of the

formation which might be expected to occur amongst the
rocks enclosing the bay.

By assuming only two feet for the depth of the ore,
(and the depth is just as likely to be fifty,) and computing
from the extent of the surface of that alone which has been
seen,—we obtained seven thousand tons as the result,
which, if multiplied by one hundred will, in our opinion,
produce an amount which will fall short of the number of
tons of magnetic iron, of which this neighbourhood is ‘the
depository. As we have hinted before, the eastern side of
the river belongs to Madame Drapeau, the western to the
Seminary ;—the latter possesses, by virtue of its title
deeds, the absolute controul over all mines and minerals
whatsoever.

GRAMMAR of the Huron Lancuace, by a
Missionary of the Village of Huron Indians
at LoRETTE, near Quebec, found amongst
the papers of the Mission, and Translated
from the Latin, by Mr. Joun WikKik.

ACK Ch X D'E G H TON 'O o8eoR
rg

Nore 1.—K X and 4 are pronounced as in Greek.—

G and Y are almost the same as to pronunciation ; this

last is sounded like the vowel i, and is thus written—

.andatara, as if it were iandatara—bread ; ,andatar,.a, as

if it were read tandutaraie—to eat bread.

ee Pete ee

f

Huron Language, 95

Norse 2.—Ch is sometimes pronounced as in French in
this word chaste, cha-ha—thou assentest ; oftener, however,
as the Italian C, thus—chieons—thou art sick. .

Norge 3.—D in the beginning of a word is sounded as
nd; as ndis for dis; but in the end of a word, like the
Greek u, as Ihrend, asif it were Ihrenu—he was coming
here.

Norse 4.—E may be marked by three accents, acute,
circumflex, and grave, and varies in sound according to
the various sound of the accents. When it has the acute,
it is sounded as the French masculine e in divinité, as ié—I
come. If circumflected, it sounds as the French word dais,
monnoie; example, ondé, as if it were ondaie—he or she
that. And if it has the grave accent, it has a middle
sound between both, as ay in French, example—i,erho—
I wish, I think.

Nore 5.—H is always a consonant, and is always sounded
with an aspiration. I is never a consonant.

Nort 6.—N, when it is written alone, does not sound
with the following vowel, as omse—man.

Nore 7.—R is duplicate, as in Greek, viz. R lenis
and R aspirate. The lenis is that which is marked with
alight or no spiritus, as ,a’ronta—a tree, arenda—ceremony ;
but the aspirate is that which is marked with the spiritus
asper, and gives a rough sound, as .ar‘onta, ,ar‘enda—
a rock.

Nore 8.—S is never pronounced as z, but as ss, ex.
asara—a handle of a kettle.

Nore 9.—I and 8 often make but one syllable, with a
vowel or diphthong following; as kyaraskva—let us go;
chionwesen—you are liberal ; tionsessan—we are liberal ; all
which are trisyllables ; and when they are marked with two

96 Grammar of the

points, they do not make one syllable but two, with a
’ vowel or diphthong following, as hotiai—they have cut; a
quadrisyllable, while hotiage is a trisyllable, signifying he
is cut. So eskion signifies I will enter; and eskion, a
trisyllable, these two will enter.

The Parts of this Grammar are three.

The first part contains Nouns, Pronouns, and Adverbs.
The second part contains Verbs. The third and last
Syntax.

OF NOUNS.

Nouns are not declined by cases, and therefore do not
suffer any alteration by another noun or verb, unless they
enter into composition with them, as onnenha—wheat ;
whether prefixed, or placed after the verb, .aiéhsas—I
have need, it is always the same, and remains in the same
mood ; and you may say onnenha a,iehsas—I want corn; or
ajiehsas onnenha. To express the plural, s is often added,
chie,annen tonnenhas, or onnen hsannens—these are large
grains of wheat. But in the singular chie,annen ionnenha
—it is a large grain of wheat. So ha,sannen—he is an
old man; and /ati,sannens—they are o]d men.

OF PRONOUNS.

They are not declined, but are put in all numbers. and
genders without variation ; as, end, signifying 1, we both,
we all. Sa, or isa, signify ye, ye both, and ye many.—
Ondaie, signifies he, she, that, they, those; va, or dexa,
or decha—this, that, these, those ; won‘daie—he, the, that ;
chondaie—it is just that; 2»de—who, which, what ; ¢sinnen, or
tsa‘teniaon, or xaisend?—who comes here? ann‘enr‘onnon
—-of whom, or, of which are you; you both, or, all of

you?

Huron Language. 97

Of the possessive pronouns, my, thy, his.

They ave thus expressed: endianda hiasan—my knife,
I possess that knife ; isa sandahiasan—your knife; ondaie
hondahiasan—his knife, or, he possesses this knife. A final
is added to uncompounded syllables, as, endi aennaoa—my
kettle; isa sannaoa—thy kettle; on‘daie onnaoa—his
kettle ; endia itsi chia—my net. They are often made
possessives without the addition of the a final, only by
using the example s in the place of example chi; for exam-
ple, sannon chiasasti—thy house is fine 3 sandschachen—
your coat is bad; except ondaon—to have a hut, a house,
because it is conjugated by the example chi, and may have
& possessive signification, as endi,endaon—my house $
isa chiondaon—thy house ; andaie ondaon—his house; but
what belongs to parts of the body, as the hand, arm , &e. we
use the paradigma cA, or s, just as they are from their nature
of the paradigma s, or ch. Thus because .@,onresa—the
hand; ,aiachia—the arm; ,a,ondia—the nose, &c. are of
the paradigma chi, we say chie,onrSesa—thy hand ; chiciachia
—thy arm. But because aserochia—the hair; oskota—the
head ; oachia—the breast, &c. are of the paradigma $3; we
say sero chia—thy hair; saskota—thy head ; saachia.e, or
saaske—thy breast does not pain thee.

Norr. —These possessives, my, thy, his, their, are often
expressed by the word aon/sa, of the fifth conjugation ; for
example, a,atondot ontion d’a,onhsa a,atondotasan—lI have
thrown off my clothes; satondotontion desonhsa satondota san
—thou hast thrown off thy clothes; hotondotontion d’ahonhwa
hotondotavan—he hasthrown off his clothes; from tondota,
clothes, and oxtion—to throw. In composition we say
ontion, not in composition ation.

But these possessive pronouns, I me, thou thee, he him,

N

98 Grammar of the

joined with verbs, take the passive voice; example, for chien-
nionronniak—you make snow shoes, say chiatennionronniak
—you are making snow shoes for yourself; for achishar
ichien—you are making a coat, say achien disharichien, from
enon‘hara—cloth, and ichiai—to make. When by neuter
passives is signified any thing which is to the loss of the
possessor, then the end of the word is changed into the parti-
cle sennik, which always gives to the word, the paradigma s.
ex. from a‘ksentas—the shoes are wearing out, say a,a‘ksenta
sennik, as if it were, my shoes are wearing out. In like
manner, instead of ondschdtewa—the gown burns, say
ondschdte, asennik—her gown burns; andschate,asennik—
mine, &c.; sandschate,asennik—thine, &c.

The same thing happens in possessives, when their final
is changed into a figurative mark of relation ex. from
otaseti—that is hid, say otdse‘tandi—that is hid from her ;
a,ata‘se‘tandi—from me ; satase‘tandi—from thee ; hota‘s-
e‘ntandi—from him.

OF ADVERBS.
ADVERBS OF PLACE, are:

An‘nen, Where, whither, which way
whence.

Xa, or exa, or dexa, Here, hither, this way, hence.

bo, There, that way, thither, from

thence, &c.
As for example :
An‘nena‘ota,eisachiatorha 2? Where hast thou pain?

Xaao‘ta.ea.echiatorha, It is here that I have pain.
(From—Achiatorha, ndeheren—At a distance, it is far.)

Troskenhen, Near.

Aro, On this side.

Endes,a e‘chi, On the further side.

ee ae ee

Huron Language. 99

By inserting the s—As for example :

Chiasatenr“at ec, On the other side of the wall.
Andasa, A river.
Henee—Chia,an‘dasati, On the other side of the river.

Chi, or echia, takes a after it, and requires ¢i after
the substantive.
Itskati, On the other side, (as, on the
other side of the water.)
Itskati a,andasati, or, chia
a‘ndasati, or a,andasateksi,
from andasa, and ennenti, To descend.

On‘daonnentaksi, The Cote de Beaupré.
Tiondiondi, Where there is a point.
Eka‘nda otralhsi, At the Falls of Montmorency.
(From—Otrahsi, At the rock.)

Andat ae, At the country town, at the

town, or, at the deserted
village.

Ateondeche, Tn each country.

ADVERBS OF TIME,
‘Onnianni, Long.
Eonniannik, it will require much time.
And—So‘nniannika, In a short time, in a little,
Onhesa {at, Immediately.
Chie ‘annen aondesa, That will last a long time.
Aondasaha, That will last me but a very

short time.
Taondasandihajo onhsa, Now.
Onhwaotia,ion, or eksa,ion, 1 came long ago,
Achia, or onhwa achia, Now for the first time,
Aon, To arrive.
Onhsaaonihoon, He is newly arrived.

100

Achia, or achiato ahar‘one,

From—Ar‘on.e,

For—Rona onhsati chihoon, He has arrived a long time

Grammar of the

It is the first time he has

heard it.
To hear.

ago.

Achietek, Yesterday, or tomorrow.

Chiachietek, Three days ago.

Ennhiek, Last year.

Chiennhie,k, Two years ago.

Xa,en‘de, At the hour or season that itis.

Goha,on.e, It was in that time or that

season.

Boinnonhsa, It might be in that place, or
with at that time.

Innonhsa, signifies Doubt.

‘Annenha,on,e ahatonnia, When was he born?

From—Otondi, To be made.

Xa,ende thotondi, He was born at that time.
Goichienihotondi sondatieron- Was he born then, (he may be
tiend ? named) when the victorious
soldiers returned?

Asonorahsion, In the morning.
Ason, Again,

Orahsi, Night.

Asonorahsik, Tomorrow morning.
Asonorahsinnen, In the morning.
Enticki.ar, It is noon.

Tar, The sun.

Entiek, Noon.

Askatie aroksi, lt is after noon.
Askatie araksik, It will be afternoon.

Onna,aratie, See how late it is-

Huron Language.

101

Tie is added after a vowel, Aatie, after a consonant.

De aratie,

Tetenre,
Etibran‘di,
Asonienk,
For—Asonteahenk:,
Ontaotratie,
Onta—siguifies

Onnéi er,
Aondechenhaon,

To night.

Some time during the night.

Very early in the night.

Midnight,

The middle.

The sun will soon rise.

Proximity to a future or com-
ing event.

The sun is up.

Always, perpetually, as long
as the world shall last.

Enhaon, In composition, out of composition.

A on.

Aondechenhaon afatien,

Asontenhaon,

Axentenhaon,

Ate,on,

O,ennhenhaon,

Ko ,enrati, or, e,a,ennhi‘kei,

Ao jenhaon,

Atenenta ec,

Atentasenrabe’, or, onvar-
hen‘ehe, or, esaonsa, or,
henhaserhe onhsaiones‘on

Annhenhaon,e,

Achietekaon,

Teventa.ck,

Achin kaventa,ek,

Iso‘onhaon,

O,enr‘are,

To carry.

He was from all eternity.

All the night.

All the day.

At each time.

All the summer.

Continual summer.

The whole length of winter.

Daily.

From day to day we think he
he will arrive today. .

When?

Since yesterday.
Two days hence,
Three days hence.
Since his return,
In spring.

102 Grammar of the ;

O'che,

De,a,enra,
O.enraken‘de,
De,ochat,
Ochendeteontendashas,
dSa,ennhe,e,
Annenda,e,
Aiostore‘ska,

Ason,

Onnehioon,

Achietek eksa,ein‘nen,

Sehsen,

Eskenhatie,
Asatichien i,enhatie.
Chi and Sorhenha,

In winter,

When spring will have come.

During spring.

When winter shall arrive.

We go to hunt during winter.

During summer.

During autumn.

It will be soon.

Not yet.

He is already arrived.

I have not eaten since yester-
day.

Wait.

Ever and anon.

A little after.

After tomorrow.

ADVERBS OF NUMBER.

Skat,

Skiatat,

Skenonharaa‘ti,

Skasen daratietieshis tonta
ba,

Sksentaratiehon a,orasksati
hatie,

Tenditehoté chen‘ 9i,

Achink,

Once.
I am alone.
A single coat.

We ring a bell by tolling it.

We walk each day without
resting.

He struck it twice.

Thrice.

(From Atocha—Struck, and Enti—To make fall )

Etsa‘kifo, or, Etsak, or
etrakaio,

Soraahatatia,

Boiabo,

Often.
He often spoke.
Seldom.

:

Huron Language.

Sabo,
O.onno‘ndaie,
Aonde‘chon for aondecha,on,

Onsentroneke,

Aon,
Chiata.on,

Osieta.on,

103

Once more.

There is but that. (Hence)

The country is destitute of
people.

In adesert place, where there
was nobody.

Within.

In your belly, or, in the
belly of. (ez. ch.)

An empty bottle.

ADVERBS OF QUALITY.

Andeia aonnianni, or‘asan,
orihierichen,

skaot,

Onnianni, te or‘asan,

Araifoti andeiaa, or, onni-
anni,

On daicon, endier‘aten,

Ondaieondierasa, or, ekan-
dera‘ta‘ kxa,

Ondaie endie raga,

Ondi onhia,i,

Tiasennonti, D
He enkichienonek,

Hovendsskononek hatatiak,

Tihatatiaka onekarai $och«
ien tihatatiak,

Well, rightly.
Standing.
Badly.

That is altogether well.
That is what augments my
pain.

That which is worse,

There is what augments the
pain.

Useless, that which serves for
no purpose,

By a snare.

Only to appearance; up to
the mouth.

He speaks to the extent of his
voice.

He speaks at random.

104 Grammar of the

Or—Hatatiak ichien onek

hastra,e onek, Only to the lips,
Ka_.oni §achien hasendaratie, He speaks of this and of that.
Atonditenr, It is through compassion.
serian'di aonda,on,e, Or, Os-

atso,on.e, Upon the bare flesh.
Etisrati, It is dark.
Teorhabek, It is day.

Sten, in composition with a substantive, signifies
measure or quality, as,

Taoten tia ,arihsten, Which is your book ?

Teonnianniti chiatsten, or, Ido not approve of his man-
chiesendsten, ner of acting.

Taotichiatsten, How art thou made?

ADVERBS OF AFFIRMING AND DENYING.

Staan—not ; but when it is joined to the word following
we use stante, or teonly. The personal mood often has the
power of denying, when pronounced interrogatively ; as,

Ahentrontai, He is not there.

Tesasteso, or, Okrito, The voice of one who is indig-
nant,—I will not.

Ndioharon, Away.

Ennon, A word of prohibition.

T*a.aketaska, or, A,aket-

atatichien, For the future negative.

Te aketuge, I have much to do.

Aoo, Yes,

Kesadet, For fear that. It governs the
aorist.

As—Kvadet anvanderai, That I may not sin.

Huron Language. 105

ADVERBS OF DESIRING AND ENCOURAGING.

Te uto.ensen,

Te,ake‘tas asen,

Teake‘tasksasen, tesa aket-
atisen,
Ta sente, aketas,

fo,

60 $0 to‘tik,
Ndiohvieia,
Ndiosen, *
Etsaeon,
Estennia,on,

Is not that true ?
I wish that I may or might
carry it.

That I did not carry it.*

God grant that I do not carry
it.

That I may see.

That that may be thus.

Come, or, come ye.

I pray, as a favor.

Prosper, I say.

Be ye prosperous, I say.

ADVERBS OF INTERROGATION AND DOUBT.
Aon, or, ksaio‘ti ndiaseron, Whether.

Troten, or, taot hao‘ten,

Taotioti,

Taotasten, or taoti,aristen,

Sator‘onton taotio‘ti de,an-
data.e,

Saolexio'ti tesatonde,

Za,onioska, or, tatichien
ta‘ onioska,

Tsaten, or, tsinnenxaisend,

Endiatichiena,enk,

‘Onhwa de ahaont

Etsa,onsen ehotieronk,

Stanito chien haoten,

When?

Wherefore ?

What is the matter ?

Inquire what is going on in
the village.

Why can it not be done ?

Why should 1 kill thee ?

Who comes here ?

Should it be mine?

He might come today.

He might have made the
attempt.

I know not what it is.

* Que ne portais-je.

0

106 Grammar of the

Anni‘aten igochien, or tsaten.1 know not who it is.
ijochien,

Stan ibochien easenk, By chance.
Stanigochien eo‘tik ehaon, He will come by chance.
Stanigochien haatsi, I know not how he may be
cilled.
Anniaten ifochien asaska- Give me that in what quan-
tannont, tity you please.
Anno‘aten igochien ionhi, I do not know what length.
Chieske, What do I know?
A .ato.enk, That might be, that may be
true.
Taier engo, Why not?
Hechon non hsa a,enk, Perhaps it was.
Hechon, ato,ennonhsa a,o-
ksasti, He is, perhaps, at his ease.

ADVERBS OF COLLECTING.

Chiate hotion, if the aorist is used, say, chia§ation,—they
came at the same time. Zsinnen teste,—with whom are
you? It is answered, hechonte andi,—I am with Hechon.
—But in the plural, is said @oitson,—how many are
there of you? Answer, aki,aion,—we are four; or,
GAsAseci.

Ondaie e.iseik ,enshara, That will be with the cloth.

Titsatont, Put yourselves together you
two.

Titsatrande,en, Seat yourselves near each
other.

Tsihsechatia, Go from the company.

Ondatonr‘onton, or, onda- There are many bustards.
kate .ahonk,

O,otio‘keannen, There is much people.

— ore

Huron Language. 107

ADVERBS OF LIKENESS AND SAMENESS.

Bvio‘ti,

®oeo‘tik,

99 ai‘otin‘nen,

Iion‘di,

Chiate.arihsten,

Chia,at, or chia,arihsat, or
skarihvat,

Chiateo‘ti,

Chiate, arihsan,
Chiateon indionrsten,

Chiaa iatat,
Tson indi onrat,

Hechon,e ira,
Ahaatsten,
Ahonnon dechsten,

As if.

Thus it will be,
Thus the thing was.
Alike.

It is the same.

It is the same thing.

It is all one; the one is worth
the other; the one is worth
as much as the other.

It is the same thing.

We have both of us the same
thought; we are of the
same mind.

We are the same.

We have both of us the same
thought.

He is as big as Hechon.

That is his custom,

It is the custom of their coun-
try ; the fashion.

ADVERBS OF QUANTITY AND EXCESS. .
Okenie,—a little; or, isaia,—moderately.

A‘soniskoia di,aen,

Onne, or onnaion,

A‘son,

Skata‘son,

Otonr‘onton, or, sannen,
As—tannen, aiotiendiska,

There is still a little.

There is enough,

There is not enough.

There is still a little wanting.

Much,

That should give a good deal ;
or, should satisfy so much
as to have something re-
maining.

108 Grammar of the

A sannenk,
Atrondi,
Atrondihaienhsi,
Goir’ati chia,
Ooisa,

Xaiontst,

Skatenchat,

Achink ate,aten,

Ocntasksi,

Aentasak,

Atiaondi,andasate,

Sandesate, otenrondt,

Onder‘ati,

Daat echi etsonder‘ati,

Ekender‘ataksa,

Iskandeia,

Ttsskaot,

Iso‘ki sannen,

Ondaieaat ekarontio,
elaxendio,

Enebo onek,

A_.atieron xsaska,

(They use this phrase when they resist any thing intended.)
That must last a long time.
Should I be content with so

Aiotendiska,
Aiokenieska,

There must be a good deal.

That is honestly.
He knows well enough,
He is as tall as you.
How large is it?

The size of that (showing for

example a hut.)
A fathom.
Three fathoms.
A little stick.
A short stick.
Not.
Not at all.
Too much.
Much more.
That is still worse.
That is but too good. *
That is but too bad.

He is too rich.

It is the great master.

It is but grease.
I would be too strong.

little.

ADVERBS OF NEARNESS AND DISTANCE.

Tioskehen, or, oskehen,

Achennonk,

Tioskeken atejatre desa

sksan,

Quite near.
In the middle.

be

To give,

Huron Language. 109

Chia de (let it be a name)

handare,
Teonsan datande,en,
Teou,iondes been,

Teon sennons be,en,
Te hiende hoxen,

Te ksendihoka,
Eoonti,
Eokaksi,
Skato tosan,

Te otrto.eti onnont>t,
Etionte ro ketaidé eiai,

Teondo,en,
Teonvandato.en,
Teon ionhsent so,en,
Chiato.annen,

Teon itsenhia,

- Tea,iatakannr‘a,
Tea ,iatrandi,enk,

Tioskehenichiede chrihesiost,

Your town is near that of N.

Our town is near your’s.

Our country is bordering upon
your’s,

Our house is nigh your s.
The doors of the two houses
are opposite to each other.
Let us put our doors opposite

to each other.

We are going there ina day.

It isin sight; we see it from
this place.

There is but one sleeping
place on the road.

There is a mountain opposite,

In firing from the bastion we
shall have opposite to us
those who are along the
curtain ; we shall graze all
the curtain in firing.

In the middle of the place.

In the middle of our towns.

In the middle of our country,

In thy bosom.

We are both of us opposite
each other, having the fire
between us.

Face to face.

We are near enough to each
other.

You will believe soon.

110 Grammar of the

Asoni hochiente SksaZerichen, 1 am not wholly cured yet.

Observe, ]o.—Adverbs for the most part are declined by

tenses as impersonal verbs. So from the adverb onder‘ati
—greatly, is made onder‘atinnen—it was very much ;

A anderat, It will be very much.

Aionderatik, It might be very much.

Aionder‘atinnen, It might have been quite
another thing.

Atrondi,ehen, It was enough. .

Qoio‘ti, Thus the thing is.

Goeo‘tik, Thus the thing will be.

90 tostinn‘en, Thus the thing had been.

80 aio‘tinn‘en, Thus the thing might have
been.

Eo‘tis, All those things are (for ex-
ample) of the same price.

Ndeheren, At a distance.

Ndeherennen, It was, or it had been at a
distance.

Tioskehen, Near.

Tioskehen .ehen, It is, or, it was near.

Itsoskehen, He is but too near.

Tsieheren, It is too far; (from mdeheren.)

Iskandeiaa, That is but too well.

Tisskaot, That is too bad.

20.—Some adverbs pass into nouns, and are conjugated
thus :— :

Sander‘at, Thou art troublesome, inso-
lent.

Honderat, He is impertinent.

Standesander‘at, I am not excessive, be it to

ask or to take all.

a ee ee is

Huron Language. Hil

From the adverb arderati. From io‘ti, in the same

manner.
Eonzsatis, We are equal.
Esksatis, Ye are equal,
Chiateondi‘té, They are of the same quality.
From—Ets,aon, Courage.
E.ets,aon, I will take courage.
Echietsa,on, Thou wilt take courage.
Ehatsa,on, He will take courage.
Ea istenni,a, We two take courage.

Etsistennia.on, and Esksas- Let you and us take courage.
tennia,on,
Ahatisten nia.on, Let them take courage.
30.—They sometimes enter into composition, as
Harihsander‘atannonk, He exaggerates.

4o.—Some require the future after them ; as,

Sehsen,* Wait, or, wait ye.
Chieskechien, In order to.
Tse, or, ennonne, A word of prohibition.
Tesastago, A word of refusal.
Ato,en, In order to.
Sehsen echiarasksa, Expect to go.
Ennochien, or, tesastajo Do not depart.
echiarasksa,
Hesehets aron dedis,atoen Pray to God that he may have
eorhientenr, or pity onyou,

Chieskechien ehientenr de dis, (Let it be a name.)

Ehaon andiare, chiadesa After that (the name) will
echiaraskea, have come, thou shalt go.
50.—Some require the aorist ; as,

Kuede, For fear that; in order to;

perhaps.

112 Grammar of the

Aro andes,a, After.

Chiandeta, Before (that is a name).
Hesenditan‘da ksade t’ahi- Go away and pray (N) perhaps
entenr, he will have pity on you.
Ennon chrisanderai, ksenon- Do not sin for fear you be

dechon tachiatet sin‘at, damned.
Chia,andasati andesa, Some water.
‘Aroa‘andaksati, After the baptism.
Chiaa,iatat, Iand he.
Chietiatat, I and you, we two are but one.

In the same manner is construed achasi, as
Achasiaao‘chinotati, Above the knee.

60.—When there are two adverbs, or a noun with an
adverb, they are put before the verb ; but which of them
ought immediately to precede the verb will be shown by
the following examples :—
Stanisaia te‘onraksa, I do not fear at all.
Sannentesaien askatenraha, If you had much you would
give me part.

Stango te,aeren, That was not done so.

Stanxatesate‘saien, I have not the bigness of that,
(that is the point of my fin-
ger).

Te.ato.en te soon, It isnot true that he was re-
turned.

In which, you see, ¢e, whether it signifies not, or if,
adheres immediately to the verb; except when the
negative te agrees with chi, signifying before; for then
chi closely adheres to the verb, and ¢e is changed into
ta, aS:—

Stanta chisa,ien, I never had any.

Huron Language. 113

Stanta chia, a‘keronchend 1 should not have even fear,
d@ ason tesarihsiosti, thougk I had not thy faith.
But cAé in a concurse with the affirmative ¢e, goes before

it and intermingles a with it, as ;

Chiateha‘sen Xsasksa, He was crying before.

In like manner when chi, signifying far, meets with te
whether affirmative or negative, it does not adhere closely
to the verb; as,

Stanchitesa,eti, 1 will not go far.
Stanchite «4a, I am not going far.

When the negative ¢e meets with the affirmative ¢e, or
with ge signifying if, then it goes before it, and changes
its ¢ final into a, as ;

A oniohatechache, 1 kill you if you do not consent.

Onde‘chon echia tetserattate It is not for a little that he
chri hsiostan‘di, or ontate cries, or, if he cries incon-
sarihsosti stanteo,enr‘on- solably.

tate ha‘senxsach, or stan-

teo,enr‘on statehasen

kesach,
When (i or sti precede te they change the final 7 into
a, as;
_ Stanbo te eerhatatebisten- We do so no more at the age
tondi, you two are.

When thé negative ¢e meets with the verb chi,entaksi,
to do on purpose, it is thus placed after it;
Chisa istaksite,en, I did not do that on purpose.
When any verb wants the negative tense, then we make
use of the personal affirmative, as I will not do it on purpose.
Chia itakatechien, Would I do it on purpose ?
Chia,on,itaksikati chien, Would I have done it on pur-
pose r

ilA Grammar of the

Tsinnen and tsaten which are always of the feminine
gender and singular number, as ;

Tsinnen ontase endesa, Who is that who comes ?
Anner‘onnon can be of both genders and numbers, as ;
Anner‘onnon d‘ahaonsac- Of what country are those

hien,; who have killed us.
Some particles are always put after, as ; asen, skenretasken,
ati, ondaieati; as
Ta,iten‘rasen, or, tajiten- Pray have pity on me.
rasken,
Tatichien, And why then ?
Thatonkati, He says then.
Sen and onek sometimes precede, and sometimes are
put after ;

Tasente, uketas, God grant that I may not carry.
Te .aketasksa, That I do not carry.
Onekharihoniak, He tells a story at pleasure.
Ene¥‘onek, It is only grease.

Orihsskon onekhatendot, He relates the affair without

reason.
Many French adverbs are expressed by verbs, as ;

Sabg‘rat tarihsurinsten, Instruct me well.

When agar‘ati supplies the place of the adverb, well.
Saksichoton xahatser, Do that briskly.
Sateiennondia, or, tiseheta- Act rightly.

ton.

Sateia‘tahadechiatrio, Fight generously.
Hatiso,ihatié, They go together.
Achinkihennonhatie, They are all three together.

A atetsirti‘a,endi,onr‘san- —_{ have a fearful mind.
nen,
Okidechate ondi,onr“annen, She has a great mind.

—

oe

Re

Huron Language. 115

Efaonda,enea‘ti, or, efoton He has no spirit, he is altoge-
dore hondi on r‘asksi, or, ther a poor spirited man.
otentondi te hondi.ont, or,

,andesate tehondiont,

Ondéhaoten hiatsten d’dset- He is worthy of compassion,
enrhai, d’ dsennon hseha, or of affection.

The word s¢en joined to a substantive signifies the manner,
or the quality, or the material from which, as,

Taotichi atsten, How art thou made ?
Teonnianniti chiatsten, or, 1 donotapprove of his manner
chiesendsten, of acting or of speaking.

Taotenti a.arihsten desarih- How is your book made ?
va van,
Ovhista a,asetsten, A metal bottle, as of brass.
Some words are taken declinable and indeclinable,
ex. onse, oki :— Etsihenstatsi, as,

Oki satatonnia, Deeds of the devil.
Onse saton, Make vourself a man.
Etsihenstatsi et hoton, He has since become a Jesuit.

Nouns signifying animated things are conjugated ; those
signifying other things are not; thus we do not say
Achink atinnonchia, but Three males.
achink i,annon chia.e, or
rather, i,annonske achink
ihatindiahaon,
We say—Achink iaata.e- Three eels, or how many eels ?
tiatennon 0,

116 Grammar of the

The second part of this Grammar contains Verbs, whether
simple or relative. There are five conjugations of simple
verbs, which are distinguished by the initial syllable of the
infinitive.

The first is in a—as akétati—to carry.

The second in ga—as ,afe¢i—to pound, to grind.
The third in e—as ehiarandi—to remember.
The fourth in ge—as geneon—to die.

The fifth in o—as oriti—to season.

The Hurons want the infinitive, but we take the perfect
for the infinitive.

Verbs are of two kinds, as among the Latins, the personal
and impersonal. .

There is a double paradigma, or method of declining a
whole verb, or atleast some of its tenses. The one is called
the paradigma chi, when the second person singular begins
by ch. The other is called the paradigma s, when the
same person begins with s.

There are three numbers as among the Greeks.

The personal verb is manifold, namely, the active, the
relative, the passive, the neuter reciprocal, the common,
the deponent; add the relative passive, the neuter acqui-
sitive, and verbs signifying motion.

The simple and active verb is that which signifies action
without respect to any person, as ,ahiaton—to write.

The relative is that which regards any person, as ,achien-
daen—to cultivate any one’s acquaintance ; and is twofold,
namely, the one from its nature regarding any person, as
achiendaen ; the other, which from being absolute becomes

relative by the addition of a final increment, as ,a)e§andi—
to grind for any person, from afeli—to grind. It is also
relative when derived from another relative, as ,aatia indi

Huron Language. 17

—to cut a piece of an animal for any one, derived from the
relative, ,aatva,i—to cut an animal into pieces. Moreover
the verb is not said to be relative unless it regards a living
object, but is of either paradigma, according to the idea to
be expressed by it, whether passive or active. When
active, it does not require the paradigma ch, as ha,hien-
daenk—he cultivates her acquaintance ; but when passive,
the paradigma s, as hochiendaenk—his acquaintance is
cultivated by her.

The passive is formed from the active, either by the
encrease of the initial at, or end; or by changing the con-
jugation of the active verb into another. Thus ata‘seti—to
be concealed, from ase‘ti—to conceal. Endisharic‘hiai,
from erisharic‘heai—to make a garment ; i‘chondi—to dress
one’s self, or, to be dressed. Of the first conjugation,
aachondi. Of the second, to accommodate.

The reciprocal is formed from the passive by the addition
of the initial encrease at, atata‘se‘ti—to be hid between,
to hide one’s self.

The neuter is that which does not signify action, as,
annonhsandi—to be sick ; of the paradigma s, enheon—to
die.

The common is that which bas a double signification ;
one simple, the other relative, as, onnhe—to live, and to
give life to any one.

The deponent is that which having a passive sound, has
an active signification as atennhandi—to hire work-
men ; from annhandi—to govern, in like manner aleiensti
—to learn ; a,aiensti—to teach.

The relative-passive is that which may have a relative
signification having a passive sound, as, aten‘doton—to
relate, from ,andoton—to relate ; ala‘ronton—to be inform-

i18 Grammar of the

ed of the condition of any one, from arenton—to interrogate
any one.—Thus atiatontasandi—to escape from some one,
from ,adtontasandi—to take prisoners from any one.

The neuter-acquisitive is a verb derived from the neuter
which signifies any thing that may happen to the advantage
or disadvantage of any one, as from ate,en—to burn, is
derived ate,asenni—to burn for any one. These verbs are
of the paradigma s.

Add to these some impersonal verbs, as iondss—it rains ;
ianhsens—it snows, and similar ones, which when they are
said to happen to the advantage or disadvantage of man
become personal of the paradigma s, as eon, iondst—it will
rain upon us; eon,sahsenha—it will snow upon us; a,ondss
—it rains upon me.

The Hurons may derive from one primitive verb many
others which add a new signification to the primitive one,
as from oten,en—to burn, are derived the following :—

Ate,asenne, To burn for any one.

Ateati To light a fire.

Ate atandi, To light a fire for any one.

Aatate atandi,—from To burn some animal for any
one.

A alate ati, To burn some animal.

_Aatate ajaksi, To make use of something, to

to burn a living thing.
The impersonal verb is double. The first signifies any
thing not depending upon the will, and co-operation of
man, as;

Joksas, It blows.
Ondennon, It is calm.
O§oré, It is cold.

Otarihati, It is warm,

Huron Language. Ii9

These are declined like the third person singular
feminine, as ;

Tondss, It rains.

Ondssksa, , It was raining.

Aondsti, It rained.

Aondstinnen, It had rained.

Eondst, It will rain.

Aondsst, It will rain immediately.
Orast aiondsskea, It would rain again.

The second involves in its signification one or some
men indeterminately, as, he is rubbed, e§ega, and formed
altogether from the personal by preserving its conjugation
and the paradigma of its tense, as, efe§ak—he was rubbed,
like the paradigma ch, and a,o¢eti—it hath been rubbed, of,
the paradigma s.

Verbs signifying motion are of two kinds, some take
after them one of the particles hor, non, won, ron, son, gon.
Others add ¢ion or hation to the termination of the infini-
tive as, ,ahiatontion, a,iher‘ation aras keanhation.

OF THE MOODS AND TENSES OF VERBS.

There are six moods ; the indicative, the imperative, the
optative, the subjunctive, the personal, and the infinitive.

We call the personal or conditional mood that which an-
swers to the French termination in Rois, as ;

A bet, 1 should bruise.
Aon,chetinnen, I should have bruised.

The personal mood is often used to signify negation, as ;
Ahaiennron, Would he be bad? for
Tehaiennron, He is not bad.

_ In like manner, it is often used for the future negative ;
as ahaon ati chien, or, tatichien dhaon, for stanatiaondi

120 Grammar of the

te haon de—he will not arrive for certain; or tatichien
tahaon honi.

There are nine tenses—the present, the imperfect, the
perfect, the future affirmative, the future negative, the
future of continuation, and the first and second aorist.

There are four primitive tenses from which the others
are formed, namely—the present infirmitive, the present
indicative, the future affirmative, and the future negative.
From the present infinitive are formed, the present indic-
ative and perfect, whose final is the same as the infinitive.
From the present indicative is formed the imperfect, by
the addition of some final increment. From the imperfect
is formed the future of continuation ; as e,e§e fai—I will
continue to pound, from the imperfect e,ebe jak ; & passing
into the diminutive g. Also, e,arasksasksa—I will con-
tinue to walk, from arasksasksa, sksa passing into ska,

Moreover, the present indicative, the imperfect, the
future of continuation, and the second aorist, are allied
tenses, both because the latter are derived from the former,
and because they are of the same paradigma. From the
perfect are formed the pluperfect. They are also allied
tenses for the reasons just explained.

The pluperfect, for the most part, takes nen after the
final of the perfect.

The future is mixed with the preterite, and the preterite
conditional adds only k. Thus, from

A eheti, I have rubbed—are formed
A chetinnen esa,chetik, I shall have rubbed.
Aon,egetik, I might have rubbed.

From whose second person, having taken away the aug-
ment, is made the imperative, mixed with the preterite
sabetik.

a lt le il alg A

Huron Language. 121

The future affirmative, the first aorist, the imperative and
the present of the personal mood, are allied tenses because
they are of the same termination ; as e,aget, a,cbet, delet,
se8et ; wherefore, from the future six others are thus derived,
as the first aorist changes e into @ short; but the personal
mood into a long or a dipthong, resolvable into ae or ai.—
But the imperative is formed from the second future or the
first aorist by taking away the increment, and changing,
for the most part, ch into s, Thus from achiebet, or, e,hie-
Get, is made se$et.

The future negative is twofold, the one which is the
same as the perfect indicative ; this is the negative before
which is put the negative particle stante; as stante sa.ake=
tati. The other, which is formed from the present, by
taking the augment and adding some of the particles
denoting emotion, namely, nde, he, che, we, se, and §e;
as tae eje Gande—I will not rub; or rather, te,cbe Qande.

But if the negative particles te, or stante be omitted, it
will become the future of continuation, both in the indic-
ative, as e,e§efande, and in the imperative, sa§e§ande—
continue to pound.

From this negative future is formed the personal nega-
tive mood by the addition of nd, or xn to the end of it,
which is the same ; as ¢e,ebeba‘ndend.

All verbs want the participles, supines, and gerunds,
which are thus supplied :

The infinitive supplies the place of—first, the past par-
ticiple, as achonde—the thing happened ; whence achon-
dinnen, e,achondik,

Secondly—It supplies sometimes the signification by the
addition of the yowel e, or the syllable ke ; as,

Q

122 Grammar of the

Achiens tie, In making a feast.

-Annnchi.e, Whilst we were assembled.

Atrendaenke, Whilst we were praying to
God.

Thirdly—Supines are supplied by adding one of the

particles of motion to the verb; as,

A ara bon‘be, I go to bed.

A atsalaion‘de, I go to dine.

A aketabe, or, a,aketatihatie, I go to carry.

Fourthly—Supines in w, as mirum dictu, are supplied by
the final particles s or ¢i, x or k, or kst, which signify
quality; as, a,adsat—to gather for dressing; or, by the
present infinitive itself; as,

Andorond aketati, or, dai- Difficult to carry.

onke‘tat,

Fifthly—The future participle passive as, amandus, is
supplied by the relative with the personal mood as asechien- —
daen, ahonachiendaen, or by the addition of ti, sti, kei ; as,
FHondera‘sati, Admired.

Sixthly—The preterite participle amatus, is supplied
by the relative; as,

Honannonhse, or, sennonhse, We love him.

When the French particle gve comes between two verbs,

it is thus expressed,
LT erhejoahaer, I wish that he may do that,
in the place of thou mayst do that, asif it were, I wish your
decision would do that, as the Italians say. But it is said
Isa i,onnhas, i,atonk saras 1 order you to depart.
ksa,
A onehien tsihon, I command you to speak.
OF THE FORMATION OF TENSES.

Verbs whose infinitive ends in a, do not form their tensés

in the same manner.

- Huron Language. 123

The following have the present in a, the imperfect in ak,
the future in en, the future negative in andi ; as,

Aksenra, To say something.

Ara, To put upon.

Arihsa‘ra, To put upon a table, (i.e. a
book).

Or‘a, To haft, to put an handle to.

Kannhontra, To put end to end.

Of the Paradigma ch.

Ka,an‘nra, To look at. ,

Some relatives however, in tra, as ,aatra—to paint
actively ; kaerontra—to resemble, to represent actively.
Relatives that have the future in aren, and the negative in
ar‘ande, at,annontra or ennontra—to follow any one, have .
the future in tren, the negative in ¢rande ; but chier‘a—to
be upon one’s guard, of the paradigma ch, has the future
in raha, or rai: the negative in ra,enk-,aatra, neuter to
be present, to assist the future in ¢raha, the negative in
trahei ; in like manner, §oi,a—l am as tall as that, and
anneatenti a—to be lying, from onnea—a bone, and atentra
—to be extended.

Aksa—to lie, is thus declined :

Present, Notaxa, He lies,
Imperfect,

Perfect, & } §oihoksak He has lain there.
Pluperfect,

Future, Ehoksa,
Negative, Stante hota‘nde He will not lie down.
Verbs in ¢ have the following :—The present ine, the
imperfect in ek, the future in ei, the negative in e,eenk.
- Haatate, He is present there.
Havendate, His word is staked in it,

124 Grammar of the

Arihsate, That affair is comprised in it.
Onnhe, To be alive.
Honnonste, He is stingy.

Of the paradigma s, of the second conjugation.
Ondechate, There is a country.

Of the paradigma ch, of the fifth conjugation.
.Aronhiate, There is a heaven.
,Ontare, There is a lake.
Arhate, There is a forest.

Toste, That weighs.

Of the paradigma s, of the second conjugation.

Hoti rastie, He is patient.

Of the second paradigma s.
A enre, There is a scarcity.
Astore, She makes haste.
Te orhatek, It is light.

The paradigma s, of the imperfect.
Orhaube‘hak .atshenie, To burn the field.
Imperfect, Eniehek.

Future, Enie.

Negative, Eniche,
Present, Tek.
Ohare,—To wash.

Imperfect, Rehek.
Future, Rei,
Negative, Rende.
Present, ek.

Ekonnhek,—I help you.
Imperfect, Hehek.
Future, He.
Negative, Hehe, I forbid you.

Huron Language. 128

A ,axe,—To row.

Present, Sek.

Imperfect, Sehek.

Future, Ave.

Negative, Ehe.

Teorhaie,—To be light.

Present, ek.

Imperfect, 6ehek.

Future, ber.

The following have only the present and imperfect in
use :—J1o,ete—he carries ; tek of the second paradigma s ;
hotrihote—he is attentive ; tek of the first. Oore—it is
cold; sforek, of the paradigma s; axen‘che—the snow
bears ; chek handare—it remains, of the paradigma ch, ek.
Other tenses are changed from afrihotati—to listen,.—
Aborate, enchate, endarate.

The following have the present in ech, the imperfect in
eskea, the future in a,e, the negative in eche.

Atia,e, To make water.

Tia.ech an‘sae, To thresh corn.

An,saech ahsak, To strike (i.e. with a hammer

upon a nail.)

Ahwaech etar‘e, To put fresh earth upon corn,
From eta—field, and a‘e—to push.

Atsistar‘e, To stir the fire.

A.e, To be awakened.

Stante iech,

Jeskea, e.iek, or ehaek, negative ae,ch a.e when it is
joined to the end of numeral words, is thus declined:

Tenditeventa,e, Two days.
Imperfect—Texenta,ennen, He had two days.
Puture—7Teventaek, Two days hence.

126 Grammar of the

Achink, rsenta,ek, Three days hence.

Achink e,aata,e, Three moons. | :
Ndak i,a,onnha.e, Four summers.
sichihatonniene, They are five in a canoe,
Asen thatiata,e, They are ten.

It must be remarked that some verbs of this termination
have no perfect and pluperfect ; but they take their perfect
by putting the initial of the preterite.

Verbs ending in 7, compounded of 7 signifying plenty
have the following tenses—the present in 7, the imperfect
in‘nen, the future 74, the negative eche or chinidi ; as,
Annonchi, Your hut is full.

Those ending in ai as ,achiai and its compounds have the
present: in éach ; as, ‘
Tehiaich, I finish, I consume.
_Echia‘ksa, echien,te,echia- To make a hut.

' tae: also annon chichai,
And—A4e iendichiai, To do properly.

Those ending a‘ndi, e‘ndi, i‘ndi, o‘ndi, with the long
penult; form all their tenses almost in the same manner~-
namely, the present, in as, es, is, osksa—as

Annhandi, To command.
Atenrandi, To divide.
Katandi, To be standing.
Aesandi, To be poor.
Chiarandi, To recollect.

The future in aha, the negative ache. .
Atentandi—to sleep, has the future in ¢a, the negative
tasache or stante hotandi of the paradigma s, senta—sleep,
—Thus:
Aa.endi, To go out.
Andia,endi, To escape,

Huron Language. 127

Aatinendi, To go out of a place where
one has been hid. -

A.endi, To clean one’s self.

Onnhon,endi, To punish,

Haye in the present, .ens, the imperfect, enskea, the
future, ,enha, the negative, enche.
Some have enf in the future, but not ,erha, as ;

Atehendi, To be ashamed.
Aterendi, To leave something by forget-
fulness.

Of the paradigma s; ksahendi—to hate; of the para-
digma ch ; ,andi,onr‘ato,endi—to know ; ofthe paradigma s ;

‘eiachendi—to put one’s self in a passion ; of the paradigma
's; at,a‘chia torendi—to feel pain; of the paradigma

s; has the present, a’echiatorka, torhak, toren, torande,

and onrhendi—to forget ; of the paradigmas ; has hen-
‘eenk, henche, aienhsendi—to know ; hvis, hs, cha, hsiche,

arindi, to be spill’t (it is spoken of liquor,) ris riha,
riche.
~ Notre.—When the speech is concerning an actual thing
we say ,eienhsi, but if concerning an habitual matter, or of
many ; we say ,eienhsis.
The following have % instead of fa in the future ;°

Anniainindi, To delay.

Eva,enniannik, I will delay, or, I will delay a

long time, (i. e. to come.)
Of the paradigma s, aerendi—to be furnished.

E,aerik, There will be enough.

It is said ASonnianni, not honneannis—he delays ; h‘onnian-
ninnen, not honnnianniskea—he delayed ; of the para-

‘digma s.
~~ Entondi—to increase ; of the paradigma s ; tos, toha,

128 Grammar of the

toche, askondi—to fall into the water (it is spoken ofan
animated thing,) skos, skoha, skocheondi, (of an inanimate
thing,) to fall into water. Os oha, oche, anna, ondi—
the fish gives; ,annaos, naoha, naoche, a,a,ondi—to wear
out one’s self; a,ons, a,oncha, a.onche.

Those ending in andi, endi, indi, ondi, with the short
penult, differ from the aforesaid, and for the most part are
relative.

But all relatives in andi have the present dik, dihik,
dien, andihe, thus annondandi—to wish, to love. The
present, nondandik—I love; stondandik—thou lovest ; the
future ennonnen, the negative stantennondandihe. Ala‘rd-
tandi—to oblige ; the present ¢andik, the future ¢en, the
negative tandihe ,aesksandi of the paradigma s, the present
dik, future, ksen ; kyandiche—to laugh. Onesksandi—to
be quite glad. Kxandek, ksen, ksaandihe. But endihendi—
to borrow from some one ; future, endehas, have the rest
as the former.

From these, however, are excepted those verbs which
have one future in indi, with the short penult which are,
for the most part, relatives. Thus—,on‘a,indik—I cut for
you; e,on asen, having changed indi, of the infinitive into

sen.

Aierthndi, To satisfy any one.

Eskierisen, You will satisfy me.

Ontrahsendi, To put something in a bag for
some one.

Eskontrasen, You will put for me.

Ennonhsendi, To be hurried,to be in haste.

Though it be not relative, it has esa,ennon sen of the
paradigma s, Endeshsindi, relative, to communicate his
sickness to any one, has eskendeohas—you will infect me

Huron Language. 129

with your sickness.

The relative in ondi has for the most part the future in
onhons, the rest as the relative in andi, endi, indi. Thus
ahiatondi—to write for any one; e,onhiatonhons—
atendotondi is excepted ; it has however, in the future, c.on=
atendoton. Onde—to finish, present, ondech, future, on dei,
negative on‘de‘che. Ondi—to do, and its compounds have
onniak, onniahak, future, onnia, negative, oniande—
Thus achondi, to accomodate of the paradigma ch—
ksatronhiondi-—to quarrel with any ; of the paradigma ch,
aterennondi—to do properly, of paradigma ch. Its termi-
nations in gi’a,i—to eat; present z,ech, i,esksu, eet, nega-
tive, stante,exe.—,Arihsanderai—to fish ; rach, rai, rave.
Annona,i—to have a desire to eat any thing. AskaraheaZ
—to broom. Enda‘tiai—to eat to excess; ,aai—to break,
to cut: AZ.a,rii—to overturn, present, ris, future, rik.
And ,ennoni—to go to seek, present, nonch, future, noni,
negative, nonche.

Verbs in sennias well relative as absolute form the future
by taking away enni, of the infinitive as, eiachisenni—to
hate any one ; eskeiachias—thou wilt hate me. The others
as verbs in andi, endi, &c. with the short penult, in pre-
sent, ik, imperfect, chik, future negative, ihe.

From asensenni—to fall to any one, of the paradigma s.

A asensenni, That is fallen to me.
Eua,asens, That will fall to me.

Verbs in ri onder‘i—a thing secured, and its compounds,
as, horihan‘diri—a thing secured; future eorihva‘ndirha,
negative stanté orihgandiche. Ori—to be perplexed, and its
compounds, have the present in oiak, or vies, the imperfect
in oiahak, the future in oia, the negative in oia‘nde ; thus,
Annonhearori, To sing his death song.

Rn

130 Grammar of the

Ansor%, To stu la sagamité.
Atori, To hunt, to start game.
Atontarori, The lake is agitated.
,Entenri, To have pity.

Present, xetenrha—lI have pity on people ; future, exetenr ;
negative, tenra‘nde.

Enri—to leave, omitting the par items s; present enrha,
future enr, negative tenran‘de. Thus the compound ,ari-
Asenri—to omit any thing.

Verbs ending in ste, ti, tsi—Arihsiosti—to believe, to
think, to esteem; chrihsiosga—thou believest; future,
echrihsiost ; negative, techrihsio‘sta‘nde. .Asti—to serve
one’s self with something, of the paradigma ch—to deliver
some one, to do or suffer for him.

What the Hurons call .askorasti, has the present rasga ;
future, rast; negative, rastan‘de.

Asti has in the present, thas§a—he serves himself with
it; in the future, ehast—he will serve himself with it; in
the negative, stant‘e hastan‘de.

Atestenti—to descend ; chiatestenba, future, echiatestent ;
negative, ¢e,hiatestentan‘de.

Endaon nénti—to descend the river, of the paradigma
ch. §aereda onnent, nentan‘de, .a,onda‘ti—to augment ;
chi2.ondaba, the future, gives the negative, da‘tan‘de ate
eti—to light fire, of the paradigma ch. A’Qa, at, atan‘de,
and so all the compounds, from éi final, signifying quality.

But verbs whose éi final does not signify quality, and
whose penult is short, form their tenses thus; as, at, abe;
thus :

Aforati, To be cold, of the paradigmas.
Atrihotati, To listen, of the paradigma ch.
Andasati, To dig, of the paradigma ch.

Atsenti, ‘To dress a wound,to give physie

3
}

Huron Language. 131

Aeriti,

Ksatonti,
Tehontons,
Skannonti

Onsahannont,
Stante sa,esendannons,

Endarati,
Ochate,
Onnhonti,

Andiatenstli,
Chiendatens,

lia, tiande.

ach, ak, ashe ; as,
Otrahsi,

Ariho'trahsi,
— Annontrahsi,
,Annenchonhsi,

> |
Askétralhei,

To finish, to accomplish, of
the paradigma ch.

To put themselves together,
of the paradigma ch.

They are togethtr, that is, at
the same dish,

To miss his aim, it always
reduplicates.

He has missed his aim.
None of my words have es-
caped him, he hears all.
To inhabit, of the paradigma
ch,

The winter comes, of the pa-
radigma ch.

To give life.

To call.

You call him.

the future, echiendiatens ; negative, techiendiatense’. So
onatsi—to gather ; 3 present, chionas+-thou gatherest ; si
ture, echionas ; negative, onase‘. Atati—to speak ; tiak,

Verbs in hsi, si, Avi, and xsi, and terminating in hwi, have

To travel over, o‘trach, otrak,
otrahve,

To repeat a prayer.

To bury.

To cover something, that is,
a trunk.

To paint, or make of different
colours, as a gown.

132 Grammar of the

A aenhsi, To put some utensil out, as,
of a hut.

(but .a,aendi—to go out, is called neuter, and follows verbs

in endi, with the long penult), .aatin.enhsi—to puta man

out of the hut; (,aatin,endi—to go out, neuter, and follows

verbs in endi, with the long penult.)

Atitrahsi, To put one’s self in a canoe, of
the paradigma ch.

Asohsi, To stain something, of the
paradigma ch.

Atonrohsi, To plunge.

Verbs ending in ast, have ach, future; negative, ashe,
—thus: Achiendiasi—to disdain. Chiéchiendiach, future,
endia, &c,

‘Okasi—to spoil any thing ; chiokach ; future, echi‘oka %
negative, ashe.

Ate‘rakasi—to_ mark, to draw, of the paradigma ch,—
But ,ondasi—to fish, of the paradigma s.. Andasi—I have
fished, future esandasi—I will fish. Ksi, final signifying
quality, ,andero‘nksi—to value, storonksa—thou valuest;
future, estoro“nkea, negative, testoro‘nksan‘de. Xvse final,
has present vsach, future, xsa, negative, vvache, thus ;

Aenrsi, To make or to have fields.
Annhonasi, To put in the mouth.
Askonxsi, ‘Lo put in the fire.
Ksatoxsi, The sun sets.

Ksasenxsi, To ery.

Verbs ending in 0; Mo for .ario—to strike, to wound,
present, rios; imperfect, riosksa 5 future, rio ; negative,
rioche. Sometimes and oftner riohe in the second person,
chr aro for ,arao—to fell » to prepare wood ; raoch, raoskea,

Huron Language. 133

rao, raoche ; the second person chao ; the third haroch—to
spring ; ,a‘ndio, to grow; dios, dioskea, ndiok, ndioche. Io—
there is something liquid, imperfect ,iok—there was, e,oha—
there will be (that is water,) signifying also, he will fall (that
is into the water,) vide ,ondi—to fall into water, concerning
an inanimate object, as though it were oondi—to distin.
guish, ,ondi—to do. .Andio—to pass somebody in a canoe.
It is always joined ta the verb of motion hon, in this
manner, ,andiohon—to go and pass some one in a canoe,
present he ; imperfect henn ; future ha; negative hese‘.
Asendio—to be master, is thus declined, stanchiesandiote,en
—thou art not master. Stanchieeendiote.en‘nen ; future, is-
achiesendioe.enk, or esaton; negative te‘satun‘de.

Verbs ending in san are pronounced as if they were sen.
Those verbs in an have ach or as, future a, negative ahe.
Thus, ,a‘x‘san—to steal, to plunder, of the paradigma ch,
wsach, xsa; negative xeache. Askosan, of the paradigma
ch—to draw a manor an animal out of the water, ,an‘nra-
san, of the paradigma ch—to dance, nravasn‘rasa, ‘nrasache.
Astaksan—to promise, of the paradigma ch; present
ksas. Entasan—-to pass a day, of the paradigma ch; pre-
sent, fasas. Except kakvan—to lift up, future ¢e,ek—I will
lift up, not, teeksa; negative’ ksan‘de. In like manner
askasan—to chew, chiaskashas ; future echiaska ; negative
tesaskavan, or t’echias kaohande, but this is less in use.

Verbs ending in ‘en, ten, ennen, &c.

Verbs in en have the present in wa, the negative in ande.
Thus ar‘on,en—to listen, paradigma ch; ar‘onxa, e,aroni
—they will hear; negative, stante,ar‘on,ande, ateen—to
burn, to have fire, of the paradigma s; present, sleixa—
there is fire ; future, elei; negative ('eote,an‘de. Atro,en—to
make love, of the paradigma ch; atroxe, future, tro;

i34 Grammar of the

negative, te,atro,an‘de. ,Ato,en—tv perceive, of the paradig-
ma ch; etoxa, future, e,efoi; negative, o,an‘de. ,Andden
—to sow, of the paradigma ch, indara—l sow; future,
endai, negative, stantenda,an‘de. But o,en—to make water,
(it is spoken of a canoe) is excepted present, 7,0,as—it
makes water; future, ,cova; negative, stante,o,dchez-,En
—to be made, or to become, is put after some words which
cannot be conjugated. Thus, chieyindioteien—thou art
not master. Stan,arihsate,ennen—it was not a thing of
consequence; future, ,arihsae .enk, or esaton—that will
become an affair, or, it will be a subject of quarrel ; nega-
tive, stan,arihsa tesatonde—that will not be, or will not
become a subject of dispute. Endiesendio dioton‘nen, or,
den‘nen—I would have been master of it; .aen—to be,
of the paradigma ch; e,aen—there is; imperfect, ,aentak
there was; future, ea,entai—there will be ; negative, stan-
te .aentaie,enk—there will not be. And thus in composition,
andahiaen—there is a knife; ,andahiaentak; future, e,anda-
hiaentai. Some compounds from aen, add ¢ to the infinitive;
as, atrendaent—to pray to God ; for atrendaen, atrendaen-
hak, from the present, ,atrendaenk.

Perfect, A atrendaen,
Pluperfect, Aatrendaentak,
Future, E,atrendaen.

Negative. Ze,alrendaende.

It is thus said atient—to sit, for atien, and ,ahaehent—to
hold a council, for ,achachen, they form their tenses as
atrendaent. ,Aarihen—to be better,of the paradigma s, a iert-
ha‘ch ; future esa,ienk ; negative tesa ieriha‘se. Ohiahen—to
split wood, of the paradigma ch, ohiahas. Ohsichatihen, of the
second conjugation of the paradigma s—she is feeble;
imperfect hennen ; future cohsi chatihenk ; negativetSeohsi

/

Huron Language: 135

chatiha‘se. ,An‘nien—to bark,of the paradigma ch, i,an‘diatk
—the dog barks, future e,andia ; negative té,andian‘de.
Ataien—to smoke, of the paradigma ch. etaiak—I smoke,
future e,etaia ; negative te etaian‘de. Buta,aien—to eat, of the
paradigma ch, present tas; future ia ; negative iahe ; is only
in use when compounded. ,Andatara,aien—to eatbead,
present ‘ndatara,aias; future endataraaia ; negative t‘en-
datara aiahe. Acha,ennen—to quarrel about an ax, to
fight who will have it, of the paradigma ch, present
@cha,ennha ; future e,acha.enn ; negative stanté,acha,en-
na‘nde. Akcaannen—to speak a foreign language; oft the
paradigma ch present, akva,annha future, e,aksa,ann;
negative (e,aksa,anna‘nde. Asa,annen, of the paradigma ch
to speak, to pronounce in the manner of strangers ; ,asa-
yannha ; future, i,asaann. Atiatoxsannen—to swallow an
animal, of the paradigma ch, present xsannha, .a,andennen
of the paradigma s in composition as aonde‘cha, andennen
—the earth trembled, present ,andennha ; future eaondecha,
andenn, teaonde‘cha, andenna‘nde aeren—to make, terha—
I make, e,ier—I shall make, ¢e,iarande—I shall not make.
Aatannen—to be delicate, of the paradigma ch; present
Jiatannen, jiatannennen—I was delicate, future chaatannenk.
Annr‘en—to bind, of the paradigma ch ; present ,ennren,
imperfeet onnrennen, eenrenn—I shall bind, negative ¢e,en-
n'renche. Orannonen—that is wet, imperfect orannonennen
that was wet; future, eorannonenk, only, osen—to dress a
skin, of the paradigma ch ; present, os ; future, os ; nega-
tive, Slant‘esa, osen, or, te,ose. Atonsen—to thank,

‘

of the paradigma ch; present, ,atones ; future, e,atones ;

> negative, fe,atonese, or t’exa,atonesen. Kaxen—to be double ;

tehixen—they are double; tehixen‘nen, in composition, as,

kandehsaxen—to join two skins together, of the paradigma
J b=] ? | o

136 Grammar of the

ch; tendehsavas—I join; tendehsava—1 shall join.—
Stantatendehsaxa‘se—I shall not join. ,An‘dotan—to relate;
relative, present, perfect, pluperfect, tonk, ton —l will
relate; ton‘de—I will not relate. Thus, ahiaton—to
write; atsaron, to cry; aronton—to interrogate, all of
the paradigma ch. But aton—to be possible, preterite on-
onnen. Anon—to enter ; onk—l enter ; on—lI have entered

both of the paradigma ch. Aton—to be lost, of the para-
digma ch; stantesa‘tonk this does not perish ; ,andoron—to
be of importance ; present, on; imperfect, ronk, Aen-
daon—to receive ; tendaons—I receive, I take; aon—I will
take ; on‘de—I will not take, both of the paradigma ch.—
Those change on into a, for the future which follow :—
<aenchon—to flay, of the paradigma ch; present, chons;
future, cha; negative, chonhe. Thus the following—ahs-
chennion, ka,ennion, both of the paradigma ch ; ,aarennion
turned away, of the paradigma ch ; ,aten‘taron—to hang
out for sale, of the paradigma ch; future, ¢entra, for
tentara ; sskaton—to detach, to pull; sskra, for wska.ra ;
onharon—to weed, paradigma ch; future, onhra, for on-
hara. Kandi,onkennion—to deceive, paradigma ch; ksen-
di,on‘te,aron—to have wit, paradigma ch ; future, on‘tera,
for onte.ara; ex:——

Ate,endicntera, I shall have a frank mind.

Keenton, To go and return in a day,
paradigma ch.

Ate,.enta, I shall return today (said I in
parting.)

Kaentaton, To bend a stick.

Teientasa, I shall bend.

Ennion—to pass, has erdi in the future.—Thus :—

er ae Nw py

ee

Huron Language. 137
,Atennion, To change, paradigma cA.
Setendi, Change, turn the dish,
Endi/ennion, To blame, paradigma ch,
Enheon, To die, paradigma ch.

Future eihei ; negative f‘eiheon‘ehe. Ation—to quit, to
throw, of the paradigma s, is irregular, present @,aties—I
quit, future esa.ati; negative tesa atie‘se ; and is similarly
compounded with ontion, as ,aatontion—to abandon any
one.

The relative on in verbs of motion in which there is a
double present, the one in e, as. when one is actually
going onajourney, or atthe end of it; the other in es to
signify custom and habit ; whence the imperfect is also
two fold, the one in enn answering to the present ine,
and the other in esksa answering to the present in es.

Verbs of motion, (as for the most, in the aorist,) differ from
the termination of the future affirmative, and have e not a,
as, ahatrendae‘nde—he goes to pray to God, when either he
is on the road or at least is in readiness for the journey.—
Atrendaennen, present—,atrendaende—I| come to pray to
God, or I arrive at the place where | ought to pray to God ;
or, ,atrendaen‘de—I go habitually to pray to God, or, I am
accustomed to go to pray to God, imperfect da‘endennt, or,
daeskea ; future e,atrendaen‘da ; negative, e,atrendae‘nde‘se
ant‘notration—to follow some one. Relative, present
traties ; future tratia ; negative tratie‘se. dtannon—to go
to bed, paradigma s. andes or tan‘de, negatiye tandese.
Kyaten‘dasachou—to go to hunt, of paradigma ch ; endia-
chion—to borrow, of the paradigma eh. , Ennonchion—to
go and fetch some one. Relative, ,enronnon-to go to
take any one. Relative from ,entron. The following
differ in the future affirmative as ahenton—to go before, of

5

138 Grammar of the

the paradigma ch; future e,ehent. Annionnon—to take ;
future e.ennionn; annentraienton—to go along the
edge of the water, of the paradigma ch; future ¢raient.
Asksinnon—to cover, future ehasksindet. I.fer—lIt is the sun,
imperfect ¢.arak; future e,arai. .Arihsar—that is the thing,
imperfect .arihsarak ; future e,arihsarai. Ka,akarent—to
have two eyes, of the paradigma ch ; te,e,a‘karent—my two
eyes, imperfect ,te,ea‘kar‘entak; future t‘e,a‘kar‘euten.
Negative, stanta‘te,e,aka‘rent a‘nde. .Eskarent--my mouth,
eskarentak e.eskarenten, te eska‘renta‘nde, ,ehekarent—my
bottom, ,eheka‘rentak ; future e,ehekaren‘ten &c. Askont—
to be roasted, ofthe paradigma ch ; perfect ,askont—that is
roasted ; e,askontaha—that will be roasted ; negative tache.
At sesta,e aontaha—that has just fallen into the fire ; but
itis said hoskontandi—it is burnt; ,aatont—to be bound,
to be a captive, of the paradigma ch; haatont—he is bound,
eha‘atontaha—he will fall into snares; negative tehaaton-
tache, but it is said haatontandi—he has fallen, &c.

When these and like verbs are taken actively, as ,andiont
or ,a‘akont—to suspend in the air any thing, they have in
the future ,ehaatunten—he will bend him, ehaaskonten—
he will roast the eel, as ehandionten or ehaa‘konten—he
will suspend that above ; and then in the preterite it is not
said hoskontandi, hoatontandi, but hoskontak, hoatontak—
he has or he had roasted it. A,endi,ont—I have spirit,
paradigma s ; imperfect a,endi,ontak ; future esa,endi,on-
taha tesa,endi,ontache, but it is said a,endi,ontundi—sense
came to me.

Neuter, ,annont—to be in the sepulchre, paradigma ch ;
present thannont ; imperfect annonlak ; future annontai ;
negative nontache, anhont ; neuter—to have something in
his mouth, hondatarannhont—he has bread in his mouth,

i ot

- ee a

>

Huron Language. 139

hondatarannhontatie—he goes carrying bread in his mouth.
But ,annontandi—to make good cheer ; future hontache,
paradigma s. Negative, stante‘sa,e,annhontache. Atiront
—to draw something, paradigma ch; present, hatiront, or
hatiron§a, ‘

Zsat—there is something inside ; isatak—there was ; the
other tenses are not in use, thus: onneat—there are bones
there inside; onneatak. Hondiat—he has set an osier fish
net; hondiatak. Hakon‘chiat—he holds it before; hakon-
chiatak, .A.enrat—that is white; i,a,enratak ; future,
e.a,enrataha—that will whiten; negative, staxte.a,ren
raiachei.

Atsat—to show; active, paradigma ch ; iho‘tsat—he
shows now ; ethatsata—he is accustomed to show ; future,
ehatsaten ; negative, t‘eha‘tsatan‘de. *

Endaksandet—to commit fornication, paradigma ch;
the active present is twofold, namely, ondaksandet—he is
in the flagrant sin of fornication, and endaksandega—he is
wont to commit fornication. Aksant—to embark pacquets,

- actively ofthe paradigmach; ha‘keariga ; future, ehaSkyari-

ten; negative, “ehaksarilan‘de.

Atit—to embark one’s self, passive of the paradigma ch ;
present, ihotit, or, hatija, but it has a double imperfect ;
hotitak—he was now embarked; —hatitak, habitually.—

,Aentsi—to have a stick there, or, to fix a stick in the

ground, like the former signification, it is said aentstak,
future, e,aenfstaha—the stick will stick in (i.e.in falling ;)
future of continuation, e’aentstai; negative, te,aentstache.
The neuter, like the last signification, is said haentja
—he plants; tak, future, tsten; negative, tstan‘de.—

Aleiachivt—to be in trouble, (i. e. about absent persons),

neuter, of the paradigma ch, a,ateia‘chist, or, ,ateiacthivba,

140 Grammar of the

chistak ; future, e,atnia‘chisten ; negative, chistan‘de.

Atiatst--to be sentry, of the paradigma ch; thus:

onnenhst—there is corn formed in the ear ; future, e,annen
hsten ; negative, tan‘de, has ga in the present.
» In many verbs the actual action is expressed by the prete-
rite, and the action as if habitual by the present; as, he is
now cooking, ho,annon. Habitually, or, his office is to cook,
a,annion. He dines, hotsataion. It is not his dinner
hour, or, he is not accustomed to dine at this hour
stanthatsa taionk xa,en‘de.

Notre.—The termination of the future negative in ehe, is
written by the larger k, and the penult is either long
or aspirate, as, stante stonseche—thou wilt not love me.
Stantoesa,onnhéche—1 shall not be ignorant of that. The
termination of the same future in se, is always aspirated,
as, stante.ese‘—I will not go.

Rules common to all the Verbs.

From the present indicative ending in a, e, or o, is
formed the imperfect by adding 4, as,

got‘i.erha—I\ speak or [ act in that manner. Imperfect

Gott erhak.
A.c,ete—I carry, a.eetek.
I onnhe—I laugk, z.onnhek.
Haatate—he is there, haatatek.

Except words which are joined to numerals, as, tendite,sen-
ta,e.—two days; teyenia enne‘n—it was two days ago;
achink i.arihsa,e,—there are three things ;achink i .arihsa,en-
nen—there were three things ; achink itson, or,itsonn‘en—
they are, or, they were all three together.

Achink iaion—there are three of us, they two and I, &c.
‘a.ion, ition, itson, ndak ihonsen—they are forty—ihons-
ennen. Tendi atesendiase—there are two hundred, ten-

Huron Language. 141

diate sendiasennen ; T,o—there is some liquor, imperfect i,ok.
‘Aronto—there is a tree in the water, imperfect a‘rontok.

When the present tenses end in 7, the imperfect is formed
by adding innen, as jentenri ,iennentenrinnen—I know, I
knew; ,eizhsi—l am skilled in; ,einhsinne‘n, ondiri—that
is strong ; o‘ndirinne‘n' Tendi—they are two; tendinnen
—they were two. Thus certain infinitives, which are
used to signify the third person passive, as, ,ae‘hondi—that
is done, or, prepared; ae‘hondi, .acthondinne'n. Stangote
@eren—that is not done thus; imperfect .aerenn‘en ont
@rihondi—tbat is a story ; imperfect ,arihondi echan—it was
in vain.

From the present in ak, ek, enk, ik, onk, the imperfect
is formed by inserting ha’ he, hi, hon, before k, as hae*-
honniak—he prepares ; hae‘honniahak, ha‘trendaenk—he
prays God; hatrardaenhak, hatsiheniekK—he burns the
earth; hatsiheniehauk, hasennonhsindik—he has hurried.—
The paradigma of the third conjugation is s, hasennon-
hsindehik, hatiatonk—he writes; hahiatuonhonk. The
termination of the present in ch ors, is changed for the
imperfect into shva,as haraskeach—he is going away ; haras-
keaskea, ,aketas—\ carry ; ,ake‘taskea. From the present
in ¢ is formed the imperfect by adding ak, ivat—there is
something in it; is‘atak, haatont—he isa captive; haatoniah,
bigs is ina canoe; haatitak.

_ From the imperfect ending in & is formed the future of
continuance by changing *& into the minor g, ,gesak—I
bruised ; e,e6e0ai—1 shall continue to bruise or break.—
Chiehiatonhonk—you wrote ; sehiatonhoni—come write on;
¢,chonniahak—I arranged ; e,echonuiahai—I shall continue
to arrange, i. e¢. to-day ; to-morrow when spoken thus,
¢,at—1 will break ; it is then understood to mean at one

142 Grammar of the

time. But when one speaks e.e§ai, it is then understood
of many times. —

From the imperfect termination in sksa, is formed the
future of continuance in ska, ha‘chiasksa—he consumed ;
eha‘chias‘ka. That which is in French spoken thus, j’ai
pensé il ne s’en est guéres fallu, j’ai présque, on, j’ai
été sur le point de faire, de dire, &c., is by the Hurons
thus spoken in the present indicative, by adding ska,
a,iheonska—I thought of dying ; achikeonoka—you thought
of dying ; shaota,onnioska—I thought I was spoiling the
whole; a,itaraska—I thought I was falling. And when
one replies to any thing distant and past they use the plu-
perfect of the personal mood, as, aon iheon‘nen, or tioske-
hensehen d‘aon ihionn‘en—I was near dying of it.

When the negative future is unknown, then the perfect
is to be used with the negative particle, stante placed before.
Moreover the preterite and praeter pluperfect have the
same termination as the future. Stante‘korasksache, or
stantehorasksan—he will not go.

The negative personal mood is formed from the future
negative, stante harasksahenn—he would not go, thus

by adding mn to the future ; stante harasksahe. There is»

another tense which is expressed by these words, I go
doing, I go speaking, and is the same as the future nega-
tive, omitting the negative particle, stante, harasksahe—
he goes walking, he continues to walk; hahiatonde—
he goes writing ; sehiatonde—you have continued to write.
When a continued action is joined to motion, it is expressed
by hatie or tie added to the final syllable of the infinitive,
as; hotrendaentatie—he continues his prayers walking ;
imperfect hotrendaentalien ; perfect hotrendaentation ; plu-
perfect Aatrendaentationn‘en ; future ehotrendaentatia ;

—

Ot oa

Sat rye py Ce hem Bede 0: te ei tee ie ete

TG RE eR ate eons oof ew

eee

Huron Language. 143

negative stante hotrendaentatiese, or tehotrendaantation.—
Thus shotierontie—he is returning having taken some of
the enemy, imperfect shotierontienn, &c. hohatitatie—he is
going to take it in a canoe; a,iheonhatie—I come nearly
dead ; a.a‘kero‘ndihatie—I come in great fear. But these
verbs are always ofthe paradigma s, a few excepted.
Verbs whose infinitives end ¢, as ,ahachent, atrendaent,
atont andiont, ,akont, take hatie. Verbs ending in on
take the augment fie, as ,ahiaton, atendoton, except has-
enheonhatie, ihennonhatie. But with verbs of motion there
is subjoined, ontie, as ,aentontie—the stick goes; ariho-
ntie—the discourse continues; the others add hatie.—
Thus one says hatixeihatie—they always go together, and
achinkihennonhatie—they three go in company, when one
would speak of a single act; but if repeated acts are
intended then they would be expressed thus, Aatiseihaties,
hativeihateisksa, ehatiseihatieska, &c.—which is also in use
with certain verbs of motion, as, ,atrendaendes—l am used
to go and pray to God, I go every day to pray to God ; but
atrendaende—I| come to pray to God ; is understood of only
once. This additional letter s not only signifies frequency
of action, but also plurality, as, hatirihsannens—they are
great; hatindachiabens—they are thirsty ; hatindacheannens—
they are delicate, and if used in the singular, harixannen,
handachiathen, handachisannen, haatannen, thus, boegan
datsasasate—these kettles are all of that size ; 90i,andnsha
the kettle is like that. That which amoung the Latins is
expressed by these words, imminet, impendet, mibi
periculum mortis impendet, vel alterius ; is expressed by
particles of locality joined to the future negative, the
particle negative stante been omitted. Onta,iheonche—
death hangs over me; onta,onriohe—I foresee, 1 have a

144 Grammar of the

presentiment that they will kill me, thus in a favorable
signification, ontaweiohenonse—I foresee that I shall do
much in battle, that Ishall kill men ; hatitowak’ hotiatato-
eljesys onse etho tonhatien—the Prophets foresaw well that
Jesus would be incarnate, But these verbs are conjugated
like the other verbs of motion with the particles ¢, ont, &c.
Thus you would say, stante kiheonche—death does not yet
threaten me, and thus, ehiheonchen—death was then
threatening me, also, heonchenn. Many verbs which are
used to express as well the place, or the business, as the act,
ave placed in the present tense when they designate the
place or business, but in the perfect when they mean the
action, v. g. hatrendaenk—he is accustomed to pray to
God, he professes todo so; hatrendaenhak

Present. Imperfect.
He eats or dines usually

about noon, when he s/gtsationhonk.
goes away.

Ha,ann‘ionk —he is a cook—ha,annionhonte,

he is not a Priest, he wrt: stante haha‘.

Hatsationk entiek
Onna‘satren.

Stante hahachenk ;

not say Mass, chenhak.
Hotrendaen—he is at prayer now, hotrendaentak,
Plupertect.
Hotsitaion—he is dining hotsateien lags
he was dining.

Ho ,an‘nion—he is now cooking or boiling$ hovan*iionls
the kettle. ;

¢ —
Hohaehen—he is saying Mass now, haha‘entak—he

was saying Mass.

The contrary however, is done in some verbs, as,
aihsistadexa—I\ believe that fact; imperfect rihsistak, ari- —
hsiosti—l am faithful, and wienstannondete, aksas—\ do —
not cover myself from that ; ondea,aksatsi—l_ am covered

Care wets Ss ee ae a ey

ee te Ne? a i

Huron Language. 145

from that. Some verbs have a double future, oné prox-
imate, the other more remote—v. ¢.--If I am near the end
of my life | have no more need of medicine—désa‘atonhatai,
t‘eskasaonkeichias, this is an example of the proximate
future of the paradigma s. When I am at the end of my
life I shall repent of having sinned, esksa,endi,enrataksa
darihsandera ide, atonhaten. J is prefixed to certain words
as ie—I go; i,atonk—I say; iondss—it rains —To some
words xno is prefixed as to those before mentioned, to
others at the pleasure of the speaker, as one says, hatoxa

—he sees; or ihatora. Itis prefixed to the first and second

persons of the irregular verbs of the second conjugation in
are as indare, istare, handare—l remain, you remain, he
remains, unless it takes before it the augment, a. or e. or
the marks of relation, .aha, aehae, he, xe, &c. in one word.
It is always lost after ie, §e, we, avi, and other like marks
of relation ; also after the augments a, ai, e. Butitis pre-
fixed to the particles reduplicative, and to greater binary
numerals, unless motion be expressed, v. g. one says,
teudite skare, achnick, ih.enha, ekndak, isksatare—to
three years, add four months or moons, it is three years and
four months since. But one would say, shondennion or
skatshondenhion—it isa year ago. Tendite, skondennion—
it is two years ago; achinck, eshondennion—it is three years
ago. E. noti. (by reason of the motion, which is signified
by the word ,andannion—to wait, or ketch, which is joined
to the reduplicative,) signifies, to be a yearago. But if
you prefix to the latter alsoany other numbers it will have
the same signification as above—it is always placed after

a@seti, a8, asetiihato xai—he sees all things.

146 Grammar of the

OF THE CONJUGATIONS OF THE SIMPLE VERBS,
Of the personal mood—Ist Conjugation.

Nore !.—T“d,aketaska—why should I carry it? has the
same initials as the present affirmative of the personal mood,
a.apetat, and is taken for the negative future of the indi-
cative mood, apetabe.

Nore 2.—In the present affirmative of the personal mood,
the augment either not pure or followed by s is taken away,
as if ithad been a dipthong remaining from the letters az
or ae and therefore it is marked with a circumflex, as
G,ahetat.

Nore 3.—After 6e, ti, chi. A and E which are marks
of the aorist and future affirmative, the particle 8 is to be
inserted.

lo.—Before the first person singular of the paradigma s
in all the conjugations, except the personal mood.

20.—In the third person singular feminine of the para-
digma chi, of the Ist and 3d conjugations.

30.—In the third person plural, feminine of the 2d, 3d,
Ath and 5th conjugations of the paradigma chi, except the
third person of the verbs beginning enn and end, of the 3d
conjugation, which have ,on.

4o —The personal mood is often increased, by removing
the augment, as if it was the mark of the imperative, as,
ksatrendaen—let us pray God, for aksatrendaen.

50.—The personal mood of continuation is generally ex-
pressed thus, aon, ake‘tati kich—I would still continue to
carry, or, aon‘ ake‘tati, hatieska, oesaketati hatieska, &ce.—
But for the negative mood of continuance we say, aesak-
asank otesake‘tati hatiend—you should have ceased to carry,
or, you ought not to have continued to carry.

60.—When the French I had, or, might have, can be

Huron Language. 147

expressed by—I could, would, or should have, the personal
mood is used, v.g. I might have kneaded, if youhad not
stopped me. Aon, eletin‘nen onta te skenda seshandinn‘en ;
but when it cannot be expressed by I could, would, or
should have, the pluperfect of the indicative or subjunctive
is made use of, as, if I had kneaded, I should have made
some bread,—aondabaroniak be va,chetin‘nen.

70.—From the imperfect of the indicative is formed
another tense of the personal mood by prefixing to it the
marks of the personal mood 4, ae, ai, Sc. v. g. aontahonnhek
asonahonhek—he would be still here; a,entak—that will
be there.

80.—Two tenses of the personal mood, which are in use
in affirmative propositions, in wegatives are never known,
but in their place is used the negative personal mood, v. g.
Te,cetandenn—\ should not beat, or, I should not have
beaten ; although one might say a,e%et,et anou,eAetin‘nen—
I would beat, or, I might beat.

Of the Imperative Mood.

The imperative, properly speaking, is formed from the
second person singular of the future affirmative by taking
s in the place of the characteristic chi, without prefixing e,

as,

Imperative, 2d per. sing. fut. affirm.
Seget—pound ye, from echi edet.
Sarasksa—go ye away, echiarasksa.

If i follows s, then ¢ is to be prefixed to s, as tsihon—sny
ye, from echihon—you will say. If after s, i short and
pure is found, it is lost, as, ¢saanha——go ye out, from
echia,enha ; tson—come in, from echion; tsen—place, put
ye, from echien—you will put or place.

Verbs of the paradigma s, also irregulars of the second

148 Grammar of the

conjugation, beginning with ,ard, ,anr, and ar, have no
difference between the second person singular of the future
affirmative, and the second person singular of the impera-
tive, except that they lose the mark e, of the future, as
sakei‘ouha—fear ye, from esakei‘ouha—you will fear ;
sta §ara—examine ye, from estafara—you will examine ;
chiehsanderai—sin ye, from echihsanderai—you will sin.—

The second person dual and plural is formed from the
second dual, by taking the mark of the future e, as, ¢sife¢
—strike ye, from etsifet; stehiar‘aha—remember ye, from
estehia‘raha, When one speaks of two, ¢ is often prefixed,
as tsatont—place yourselve together ; ¢i stihei—die ye two.

They use moreover the personal or future conditional in
the place of the imperative, and they conjugate through all
the numbers and persons, as, d,clet—that I may strike ;
dchichet—strike then; dhafet. Imperatives are never used
in negative propositions, but in their place are used the
negative particles, ennon, or ennonehien, or tesastedo,
answering to the negative particle ne, and governing after
them the future, as, ennonsken echiarasksa—please not to
go away; tesasta$o eehiarasksa—I wish you would not go
away.

Of the Optative Mood.

The tenses of the optative mood do not differ from the
tenses of the indicative, except in the prefixing of the par-
ticle de, and taking after them the particles expressing
volition; sen, asen, sken, or asken, as, te,elehasen—why
had I not pounded? I would wish to pound. And thus this
proposition is affirmative of itself; but it is negative when
one says, I would not wish to pound, and thus it is to be
spoken in the negative proposition, as, da sen, te cheba, ta
sentes arihsandera, inen—I would that I had not sinned, ors —

Huron Language. 149

would to God that I had never sinned.
Of the Subjunctive Mood.

‘Lhe tenses of the subjunctive are not different from the
tenses of the indicative, except in the prefixed marks e, or
de§e, signifying if; as, ae§ete sannenhaen—I would pound
if I had any wheat.

When de is placed alone, it signifies when, and then it
governs the future, as, if I had, if I did; nor is it ever
rendered among the Hurons by the imperfect ; but it is for
the most part rendered either by the present or the aorist,
or by the personal mood, as, we may sin ; we may commit
fornication if we sleep with women—a,asarihsanderai bea~
sendak sandéja, or, taasendak sandeten.

The following negative propositions, if I did not pound
now you would scold me, and, you would scold me, if I do
not pound now, you would scold me some time from this,
are spoken, the first thus, as, kaksen dihoton onte,cbebae,
and the second thus, onta, ebetandenn, askaksen dihaten.

The perfect is mixed with the preterite, as is the perfect
indicative, by having the initial e affixed, and also the final
k. When the particle negative fe meets with the particle
ge, signifying if, then the first is changed into ¢a, or onta,
as, would you protect me if 1 should not wear your clothes;
as, kiatonnonstatatichientabe, aketas, or, ontadeaketas desa-

ton detasau, §echiaketas, Sc.

’ Of the Infinitive mood.

The infinitive has only the present. The participle of
the future passive is rendered by the personal mood of the
impersonal, v. g. indaie ,d,aionke‘tat—a thing to be car.
ried, or rather a thing which ought to be carried—
Observe that the infinitive mood of the Hurons is used in
the same manner as with the French,

150 Grammar of the

lo.—In itself signifying an indefinitive mood, as,
ope must eat.

20.—For the object, or for food and drink.

30.—For the act itself, as, for the act of mastication.

This phrase and similar ones, he will come to confess
me, are thus rendered ; he will come and he will confess
me, onhsaeskaon, §oatiesha, oronsas, or onhseeshaon,
chiaeska oroineas, or onne‘ichien, or orondeati.

Nore.—The futures which are used in affirmative
propositions are not used in negative propositions, but
only negative futures, v. g. teoa,ebebai, or te,eleandi—
I will not pound, though one might say, e,e%et—I will
pound. Butas to ,esae§etik—I should have pounded it, is
expressed in the negative, asontesachetinke,enk—I should
not yet have pounded. When the final of the future or
personal mood is without the temporal augment, it is the
mark of the imperative mood, v. g. sksatrendae‘nda—go
and pray to God; sksaierick—let me be carried ; tsisaenk,
shoerik, tooenk, of the paradigma s, because the verb is
of the paradigma s.

The aorists are not used in negative propositions, but in
the place of the aorist is used either the present or imper-
fect, or the future, because the aorist has sometimes the
signification of the present, sometimes of the perfect and
imperfect, and sometimes also of the future, as, aonriksesser
—I shut your mouth, I will shut your mouth. But in
negative propositions one says, stanteskriksh indi, or state-
skrikse nidi, or stanteskikse skrikse indi, or stanteskikseindehe
—you will not shut my mouth. The aorist is often expres-
sed in the place of the imperfect, and the present in the
place of theimperfect. Jesssasen charasksa—Jesus walked
upon the waters. Zhaasenkandiskeaen—as it would happen

Huron Language. 151

if one went upon the ice.

The aorist is never joined to a negative, as, one does
not say, tea,aketat—l have not carried ; but teca,aketak.

Nore lo.—In composition certain words beginning with
.@4@, change the first a into on thus one says, onnhon,an-
nondi—to plot against the life of any one, from onnhe—
life, and a,anondi—to labour.

20, In verbs of motion derived from the negative futures,
the present and aorist end in e but the future and the
personal and imperative moods in a, as, ,atrendaende,
atrenkaende, and heatrendaenda, satrendaenda, achiatren-
denda—I go, you will go, you go to pray to God, it is or it
was necessary that you should go to pray toGod. When
any verb immediately after a has / it is the sign of the
second conjugation, not of the first, as, ta sahetsatonhons
—pray for us, h which is immediately after a beginning
a word indicates that it is of the second conjugation,

30. The particle since, whether it is expressed in French
sentences, or understood, is expressed by the Hurons by
particles of locality, e¢ or est, and by the particle of redu-
plication. TZ. as, tetihtondechondi—since the earth was
made. Teksa,atonhonti—since | was resuscitated ; achinke
atonga, deventatetetiaxentato ‘ehirnen—to-day is the third
day after Sunday. Zeudi akentasati t‘annont, achnik
_atonga onsahatonnhont—he passed two days lying thus, and
on the third he revived. One may also say, achnik agentasate
fonaio onsaha tonhont—it is nine months since that,—
Entron onta a‘ataton.

4o.—Most substantives relative are rendered by corres-
ponding words of the infinitive mood, v. g. Love—ataten-
nonlwendi ; honor—~-atatechiendaen ; baptism——atatende-
kyaieste ; confirmation—atatendionnandile; confession

152 Grammar of the

onsasatatronsandi ; extreme unction—ssatatiatoreenhon ;
order—ataten di,enra‘chondi, (as if, d‘onna‘ontri honten
ahaehent d‘ahachato,eti,) marriage——atatendiatanki ;
communion—aiataivaristiannonxsi.

An indeterminate person with a relation is expressed
always by a corresponding one, as, stontatierha da, orths-
anderashon—that which was done to sinners.

The word séen joined to a substantive signifies the
manner, quality or material of a thing, as tahtichiatsten—
how art thou made? TYeonnianniti chiatsten, or, chiasen-
ksten—I do not approve of your manner of acting or
speaking. Tuaotenti a.arihsten desarihsasan—How is your
book made. Oxhista a,asetsten—a bottle made of metal.

50.—The Hurons express their conception with the
words to wish, to pray, as, I beseech you to pray to God
for me, sendiba Ondé di.erheahon, uatren da enhas—God
has made me to honor him. Ondehseridedie staha iatichien,
or, dehuiatichiai, aha,echien daen.

60.—A noun is of the masculine gender, when it begins
with h, ¢, §, &c. as, tichion—a star, fentenha sbia—the
morning star; but when it begins with a. e. z. 0. or g. it
is of the feminine gender, as, 7,ar—the sun; endiskara—
turning on the leg, (piroutte,) onnhetien—awife; .andicha
—a star.

Those which are expressed by words or rather by
persons indeterminate, are made determinate only by
joining particles to them, as, I have seen a horse, I have
seen horses, a,ee,en ao chiatens .a,een ondo toronton d‘a,-
ochiatens

7o.—Where a determinate person is joined to determinate
words it is to be considered as the marks of their dual or
plural number. as, she has met Peter—adintrahan; she

Huron Language. 153

has met Peter and John—afontraha. But when the person
which is as the case of the word it is undeterminate, it is
to be understood only as the mark of the person of whose
* nominative it holds the place, as, a,ondia,i istasksa—is it
with a married person that thou hast sinned, or that thou
hast lain? onriaksatraha ronse—she has met some one.

This rule is only for absolute and not relative words,

Remark in that sentence the use of the particle a
prefixed to words to signify a quality. taota.a atstend‘oki—
of what nature is a spirit? stan§ote aatstenti cai np
ag are not like us.

After the negative fe, after ¢, and other particles of this
mood the initial a is to be taken away. When the French
locution and similar ones, they say no more, (ils ne disent
plus, mean a repetition of actions, they are expressed by

e mark of reduplication with a negative, slante shontonk,
_ Frequently in words ending in #i sti, J final is omitted, as,
for dsandianndosti, they say kvandianndast—that which
surrounds the finger, a ring, from an,diea—a finger, «nd
<annhasti, or, kannhasti—to encircle.

S0.—The first and third conjugations have many things
similar, as have also the second and fourth. Observe that
verbs of the third conjugation beginning with exn or end,
jiffer from the manner of inflexion of e Aiaras in which the
ird plural of the paradigma chi and the third singular
of the paradigma s, take hon in the place of the initial of
the infinitive mood:—as hondi,onra‘enk—they resolve,
from endi, ,onratn--to resolve, and hondi onr‘aen—he has
Ived, not, hennonilionraen, nor, havendi,onraen—
bs ending in enn or end of this mood have sometimes
ionraenk, in the third person dual of the paradigma

U

154 Grammar of the

ch for hnendi,onrdenk. Thus honnen§fa—they hurry, from
ennonti—to hurry.

Of the second conjugation in the paradigma chi, the
vowel a of the infinitive is changed into e in the first and
second singular; but in all the persons of the dual, and in
the third persons of the plural it is changed into 7; it
remains indeed in the third person singular and in the first
and second plural, this is shewn in the paradigma
galeit.

Of the fourth Conjugation.

In the paradigma chi the vowel e of the infinitive is
changed into 7 in the firstand second persons singular, in
all the persons of the dual, and in the third persons of the
plural; but it remains in the third singular and in the first
and second plural; but in the paradigma s, e remains in
the second person singular, in the second and third person
plural. Itis changed into 7 in the first and second persons
dual, and in the third person dual and _ plural.

Nore.—That certain verbs of this conjugation in the
third person singular of the paradigma s, have haven in
place of the infinitive initial, but not ho, as, hasenheon—
he is dead, chihasentaksi—he has done it on purpose. In
the dual of verbs of this conjugation the affirmative Zée is
often prefixed, as te anditron—he andI are here. Tetitron,
testriton, len‘ditron, tenditron. Teandiheons—I and he
are sick, tetiheons, testiheons, ten“dihe‘ons, tendiheons.

Of the fifth Conjugation.

Verbs of this conjugation not begining with on, have in
the first person dual of the paradigma ch, an and not ann ;
in the third person plural of the paradigma ch, hend not
enn and in third person plural of the paradigma s, hond not

Huron Language. 155

onn, as, andor*ija—we two season ourselves, hendor‘ifa,
hondor“i§a.
Of Verbs of the Paradigma s.

There follow some verbs of the simple conjugations.
But it is enough to know how the perfect of each conjugation
of the paradigma chi, is conjugated, that one may know
how a verb of the paradigma s corresponding to such con-
jugation is inflected. See the examples in the simple
conjugations.

Verbs of the paradigma s, in the aorists have the augment
of the second person singular in e, as in the paradigma chi
in the dual and plural.

Of irregular Verbs.

In the first conjugation, the verb a is irregular, because
a of its first conjugation is retained in inflecting it, as if
it had been of the third conjugation, as, present indicative,
§0,i,a—I am as large, as, §vi.chia, gor ‘ia, goiva. Dual
chiatianda—l\ and he are of the same age, or of the same
quality and greatness, &c. chiatesta—I and you, &c. Chia-
testa, chiatenda, chiatenda. Plural, ea,sas.eksas, eskvas,
ehendas, esendas, they femenine are equal. Imperfect,
s,ak. The perfect and pluperfect are wanting. They are
supplied by means of the imperfect. The first aorist,
goann‘a aha—I| am going to be as large as that very soon,
achiaha, ar‘aha, asaha. Second aorist, a,aska, achiaska,
ar‘aska, asaska. Future, e,aha, echiaha, er‘aha, esaha.—
Negative, stunte, saento‘che, sento‘che, hasento‘che, aven-
toche, from the verb entondi—to increase, I shall not grow
anymore. Present of the personal mood, a,aha. Perfect,
§oa,askea—I shall be as great as that, achiaskwa. Impe-
rative is not used. Present optative, josente,a—Why am T
not as great as that? Gosentechia, &c. Dual, dosentateanda,

156 Grammar of the

fosentateta, or, chiasentate anda. Plural, §osenteasas, Se.
Imperfect, fosente,ak, chiah, dual. Gosentate, andak, or,
chia sentate andah. In the second conjugation the irregular
verbs, are :—

Ist —Verbs beginning with a double vowel, of which the
second is not i; for they change their inital a into7 for the
first and second persons singular, in the other persons they
follow ,ageti, ,aon, for example, to arrive, has, nae chionk,
haonk, .aonk—I am arriving, Xc.

2nd.—Verbs beginning with and, or ann both short, as an-
dajaron, .annonten, which have in the first person singular,
ndatane, innontenk, without the personal mark g, and in
the second person singular statane, isfontenk, in the other
persons they follow afeti, except in the first personal
singular of the perfect and pluperfect where they have
anda§aron, annonten. :

3d.—Those beginning in ar, which for the first person
singular change the initial .a of the infinitive into gr, and
for the second person only into chr, or ch, as, arasen—to
pick ; rasas—I pick; chrasas or chasas—thou pickest ;
harasas—he picks, in the perfect and pluperfect tenses
they have a,r in the first person singular, as, a@rasen,
a,rasannen, in which the diminutive g is not sensible.

4th.—Verbs of the paradigma s, beginning either with
the double vowel a, as, caatando,aron—to sustain a loss;
or, a,and, as, ,ande‘rasaro—to admire, or aann, as,
annonhsandi—to be sick, or, a,ar, as, ,arandi—something
to happen to any one, differ from ,abedi’, or in the first
person singular where they have a,iatando,ares, ande-
rasach, annonhsach, aras, ia the other persons are declined
as other verbs of the paradigma s.

Huron Language: 157

5th.—Aatandi—to stand up, in the dual is inflected as
if it were of the first conjugation ; in the plural and imper-
sonal it is inflected as verbs of the third conjugation by
retaining the letter a of the figure of its conjugation, as,
teet—I stand ; techiet—thou standest ; tehat, te’at. Dual,
tea iat, tetiat, tetsat, tehiat, teat. Plural, teasat, teksat,
tesksat, tehendat, tesendat. Imperfect, te,etak or etasksa—
I wasstanding, chietasksa. Perfect, tesa,etandi, tesatandi,
tehotandi, teotandi. Teoniatandi, tetsatandi, tehontatandi.
Aorist, akebaha. Future, te,etaha. Negative, te,etache.
Imperative, tisetaha—stand thou. Titsataha—stand ye.
Titeataha--we both. Tiksataha—we several. Optative,
tate,etasen, or xasentate.et, tatechietasen, or xasentatechiet.
_ Nore.—Also these two verbs, ,ario—to kill, to strike,
relative, and,aro—to chop, to fell wood, present, rioch—
I kill her, chrioch, haioch, for harioch. Dual, a,ioch,
tioch, tsioch, hiriock, plural, a,saioch. Keaioch, sksaioch,
hatioch. :
_ Present singular, raoch—I fell wood; chraoch, haroch,
garoch. Dual, a,iroch, tsiroch, hiroch, ,iroch. Plural,
asaroch, kearoch, sks,aroch, hatiroch, atiroch.

In the third conjugation, ennon—to go or come, sce that
verb through its tenses inflected in the third conjugation
of simple verbs.
In the fourth conjugation ,en—to say, present ii—I say,
ichi, then, i,en, it is not in use, but we use the verb,
iatonk, of the first conjugation, I say, ichiatonk, ihatonk,
iwatonk, &c. as, aketas. The imperfect is not in use, but
it is had thus, i,atonhonk—I did say, ichiatonhonk, &e.
. t, ixaen—I have said, isen, thaven, iaven. Dual,

» tsten, thonnen, ionnen. Plural, icnsen, isksen,

thonnen, ionnen, Aorist, aihon—I have been saying ;

158 Grammar of the

‘achihon, ahenhaon, a,enhaon. Dual, aandihon, etihon,
estihon, a‘ndihon, andihon. Plural, aasenhaon, eksenhaon,
esksenahon, ahendihon, asendihon, aa,enhaon—we say.—
Future, e,ihon, echihon, ehenhaon, eenhaon. Dual, ean-
dihon, etihon, estihon, en‘dihon, endihon. Plural, easenhaon,
eksenhaon, esksenhaon, ehendihon, esendihon. Imperative,
tsihon—say thou, stihon—say ye.

The present of the personal mood, a,ihon—I would say,
dchihon, ‘ahenhaon, denhaon. Dual, aiandihon, aetihon,
aestihon, dn‘dihon, dndihon. Plural, aiasenhaon, aeksen-
haon, aesksenhaon, ahendihon, asendihon. Perfect, aonenk
—I should have said, aesenk, ahasenk, aiasenk. Dual,
aionnenk, aestenk, ahonnenk, aionnenk. Plural, aionsenk,
aesksenk, &c. Pluperfect, aon,ennen—I might have said.
The optative wants the present in the place of which we
say, te,atonkdsen—that I may say ; techiatonkdsen. Perfect,
tesa,ensen—that I may not say; tesensen—what hast thou
not said? Tehasensen, &c. Pluperfect, tesa,ennensen,
tesennensen, tehasannensen—I wish to God that I had
said it?

In the fifth conjugation, on—to be together, is said of
many. When on is alone we make use of the verb a,onhsa
of the paradigma s—I am alone, or it isI alone. Sonhsa,
haonhsa, aonhsa. Dual, onnonhsa—we two only ; stonhsa,
honnonhsa, annonhsa. Plural, on,ionhsa, tsunhsa, honnhsa,
anronhsa—we three alone, or it is only we three. When
the speech is of two, it is thus said, teandi—we are two.—
Teti, testi, tendi, tendi, from the singular 7, signifying
me in Iroquois. But it is said, a,ise,i—I and he are together.
Tive,i, tsixei, hisei, ivei. Imperfect, teandinnen, tetinnen.
Future, teandik, tetik, testik, tendik, &c. The personal
mood, t.aiandik--we should be together, he and 1. Taetik,

Huron Language. 159

taestik, tan‘dik, tandik. When there are more than two
it is said thus, achinkiaion—we are three, ia,onn—we are
with Peter. It is thus inflected, attereiaion—we are eight ;
attereition—we and you are eight; attereitson, attereihennon,
attereisennon, Sc. Imperfect, attereiaionnen. Future,
attereeaionk.

Of verbs wanting tle crement.

Some verbs wanting the temporal crement, as well as
initial as final, distinguish their tenses by setting after
them, i,eniienn‘en, .ehen, or, isatonk—they are of this
sort; asan, ,asendiv, &c. which are inflected in the follow-
ing manner, present affirmative, endi,esendiot,en—I am the
master ; isachiesendi.en. Present negative, endi,esendiot‘e,en
—lam not master. Isachiexendiot‘e.en, &c.

Observe. J,en is often omitted in the affirmative, in the
negative never. Imperfect, ,exendio,ehen, chicsendio,ehen.

And the perfect and pluperfect, ,esendio i,enn‘en, or, ehen.
- The perfect and pluperfect negative, stannendi .esendio te
cenn‘en. Standesa chiesendio teennen. Aonst ,onneichien,
esendio i.en. Endio or endi,esendio onn‘asaton—here I am
become master. Future affirmative, endi,esendio esaton,
isa chiesendio esaton, or, e,enk—I shall become master.
Future negative, stannendi,esendio t’esato‘nde, standesa
chiesendio t'esatonde. Stannendi hasendio t’esaton‘de-—
Imperative, sasken chiewendio asaton, become master.
_ The personal mood affirmative, endi,ecendio a,enk—I would
be master of it. Perfect and pluperfect, endi,esendio, a,en-
nen, or, endi,esendio arotonn‘en—I would have been master
of it. Imperfect, perfect, pluperfect, negative, stannendi
vendio Cesatontend—1 should not be, or, I would not
have been master of it. Optative present, endisen,esendio
teen; iasen evendio teen—1 wish 1 were master, Lmper-

160 Grammar of the

fect, perfect, and pluperfect, endisen .esendio te,ennen, or,
endisen .esendio te otonn‘en—oh that I was not master.
Optative negative, ¢’asen nendi .esendio §e,en—I wish I
were not master. Subjunctive, present, and imperfect,
endi.esendio t’een—if I may or might be master. Perfect
and pluperfect, endinde ,esendio t’e,ennen—if I had been
master. Future preterite mixed, de endi,esendio e,enk, or,
eotonk—whilst I shall have been master.

Of impersonal Verbs.

From verbs of the paradigma s are formed impersonal
verbs from the third person singular feminine by prefixing
ag to it; as, a,onrasksan—they are gone; a,oteiensti—they
have learned ; a,ogar‘ato—they have done well; a,okerons
—it is feared; @,oatannonsandi—a fine rencounter has been
made; a,aveia chens—they are angry; a ene
are dead; a,aorite—the pot has been seasoned.

From verbs of the paradigma ch of the first and third
conjugation beginning with end or enn, are formed imper-
sonals from the third person plural feminine by taking
away g, as, onteiensta—they learn; orasksach—they go ;
onbasrata—they do well; ondi,on‘raenton—they think ;
anionches—they go and trade.

From verbs of the paradigma ch of the second conjugation
are formed impersonals from the first person singular formed
regularly in which a of the infinitive is changed into e by
taking away g, as, €8e0a—it is pounded; ehiatonk—they write;
endatare—they visit; enteri—we know; enhsanderach—
they fish. Many verbs of the fourth conjugation resemble
verbs of the second, by retaining the figure e of the
infinitive, as, ietron—some one is there ; de,entron, cbiach
they carry, the canoe is passed by land where there is a fall
of water ; de,enbiaci, ebo*as—they change their abode ;

Huron Language. 161

de.entosanetara—they are at rest; he.entara, eten‘ba—it
causes the hair to fall; de,ententi,esharonniak—they are
making cloth; deensharondi, e‘retsonniak—they make
snares ; de.en‘retsondi, ennonniak—they are making cloths
of skins ; de ‘ennondi.

In verbs of the paradigma ch of the third, fourth and
likewise the fifth are formed impersonals from the first per-
son singular by prefixing a, as, a,hiaras—we remember
ourselves, (on se souvient), acheon—they are sick; a.onta
they season, the pot. In the fourth, g is not pronounced.

All impersonal verbs have the same tenses altogether
which are found in the personal ones from which they are
derived.—Thus, from arasksan—to go, is made onraskeach.
And those which are single follow the personal verbs from
which they are formed, as well as to the final as the para-
digma, to wit: if they are in the present, they follow the
paradigma and termination of the present ; and those which
are of the preterite tense, follow the preterite of the
personal verb.

Of the formation of Relative Verbs.

Of relatives, some are relative by themselves, others
become relative by the addition of some syllables or letters,
and they are thus formed. From absolute verbs, they may

be made relative, by the addition of particles of quality.—
Ti, sti, kei; as from etesan—to flee; atisatimto make
some one flee ; a/ehendi—to be ashamed ; atehadi—to shame
any one; ,aalathendi—to be ugly; ,aatachati—to make
some one ugly.

- Those ending in particles of this sort may be made
: ve by changing i final into andi for the preterite, and
en for the future affirmative, as, from the verb ,abeéi,
ahetandi, future, e,cbeten, arihseo‘sti—to believe ; arihsi-

x

162 Grammar of the

ostandi—to believe something of somebody, whether in
good or in bad part ; ,avaksi—to put in a plate; as, ,ara-
kxandi—to put in a plate something for some one to eat.

Verbs in a, in order to become relative, add for the
preterite zdi, and has for the future affirmative, as ara—to
put on top; ,ar‘andi, e,er‘ahas. .Annontra—to join ends ;
<annhontrandi, eennhontrahas. Verbs in san add di for
the infinitive, and for the future affirmative they change n
into s, as, .a7‘asan—take from the top ; ar‘asandi, e,er‘asas.
Verbs in si, Asi, and gi, become relative by adding for the
infinitive ndi, and for the future affirmative by changing the
last syllable into sen, as, ater‘akasi—to mark ; ater‘aksindi.
E.ater‘akasen. Ontrahsi—to put within; ontrahsindi,
e,ontrasen. Except endeohsindi—to infect; future, e,en-
devhas, ,arihsanderai—to fish; arihsandera,indi. Erths-
anderasen.

Add to these verbs in ¢i, because ¢i is changed for the
present into s, as, ,andasati—to dig whence, ,andasatindi,
endasasen. Thus, ,aenti—to finish; ,aeritindi, eensen.—
Ksatonti—to be many in doing the same thing; keatontindt.
Abonatonsen—many put themselves together to anoy him,
or to help him; in like manner, envi—to leave, and its
compounds, ,asenri—to leave his plate ; asenrindi .¢,esensen.

Verbs absolute in /ei add ndi for the infinitive, and for
the future affirmative, change 7 finalinto as; as, ,astaenxet
—to make; present, astaenxynidi ; future, e,estaenxsas.

Verbs in on become relative by adding’di for the infini-
tive, and for the future affirmative ons ; ahiaton—to write;
ahiatondi; future, e.ehiatonhons ; except atendotor, which
in the future has e,atendoton; it may have in the infinitive
atendotondi. Ondi and ori, with their compounds, when
they become relative, change that ondi for the infinitive

Huron Language. 163

into onni anni, and ori into oranni, and for the future
affirmative into eonnien and eoien. Add to these eren—
to make; relative, ,aerandi; future, eieren. Atonnhien
—to deny; atonnhiandi; future, e,atonnhien, atro.en—to
make love; atro,andi, e,atro,as. Ataien—to smoke;
Ataianni, e,ataias. ,Anda,en—to sow; ,anda,andi, future,
enda.as. But ,aron,en—to listen, has ar‘on,asennik, future
e€,aron as.

Verbs in ent, add for the infinitive andi, and for the
future has, in place of the last letter ¢, as, ahaehent—to
hold acouncil; ,ahachentandi, eehhachenhas. Atrendaent
to pray God ; atrendaentandi, future e,atrendaenhas. tient
—tosit down ; atientandi, future, e,atienhas. Add to these
aen—to put, and its compounds ,aentandi, future e,ienhas,
.arihientandi—to relate it to some one ; future erihienhas,
endi,onr‘aen—to deliberate ; endi,onr‘aentandi, future,
e,endi onraenhas.

Other verbs in s become relative by adding for the infin-
itive andi, and for the future has, as, ateiachivt—to be in
trouble, ateiachistandi, future e,ateiachisthas, or rather
e,aleia hisgas. Andandet—to reply, to redouble; ,an‘dun-
détandi, future e,endandejas. Atsat—to show ; atsatandi,
e,atsagjas. Aa‘kont—to hang to something ; ,aa‘kontandi,
eia‘kongas.

_ The remaining verbs, from being absolute and primitive,
“become relative by adding enni to the termination of the
_ present, and rejecting that enni for the future, as, atrios—
she is fighting ; atrosenni, future, e,atrios—I will fight her ;
aaens—she goes out; ,aaensenni, future e,ia,ens.—
- O'ker‘ons—she draws for herself ; ofker‘onsenni, eo‘ker‘ons.
the same manner these become relative, atsihenich—
burns ; ,atsiheniesennik, future c.etsiheniens, negative

164 Grammar of the

senihe. Oharek—she washes ; ,a,asek—she rows.

Some verbs, that they may become relative, not only add
enni to the present, but also change its final syllable in
en or on into a, as atehens—she is ashamed ; atehasenni,
future, e,atehas. Aseiachens—she is in a passion, of the:
third conjugation, aseiachiasenni. Enheons—she is sick ;
enheasenni, ,annh‘atsskaron—she lops the branches from
the trees ; ,annhatss, karasenni, by contraction for, ,anmn-
hatsskarasenni. ‘Thus, onharons—she weeds ; onr‘asenni.
,Aencchon—to flay; .aenchasenni. Remark that all the
aforementioned verbs agree with each other, as 4o the
infinitive, present, imperfect, perfect, pluperfect, the
negative, personal mood and the future negative, and are
thus inflected, present ndik, or nnik, imperfect nditnk or
nnihik, the perfect ndi or nni, pluperfect, nd‘innen or
nnin‘nen, future negative, ndihe or nnihe, future of con-
tinuation ndihi or nnhi, future negative removed, ndihi-
chenk or nnihi,echenk. The negative personal mood, ndi-
henn or nnihen, also the improper aorist, as, askagara-
tandiska—thou hast thought me obliged.

We use relative verbs doubly under a different sense, as,
ha.e§cja—he pounds or he tramples upon me, and ha,che-
tandik—he pounds something for me. Thus, ha,ienchons—
he flays me ; ha,ienchasennik—he flays for me ; ha,okasi—
he has daubed me; ha,ekasandi—he has daubed something
for me.

The aforesaid rules for the formation of relative verbs
not only answer for derivative and simple verbs, but also
for passive, reciprocal and deponent ones, as, a‘taseti—to
be hid; ‘atasetandi—to be hid from some one; ha,a‘tasé-
tandik—he hides himself from me ; and ata‘tase‘tandi—to
hide from one another. Atiata‘tondi—to wander, to eseape ;

Huron Language. 165

atiata‘tontandi—to escape from some one; ha,atiata‘ton-
tandi—he has escaped from me.

Nearly by the same rules are formed some neuter acqui-
sitive verbs from other neuter absolute verbs, as from
erahens—that boils; orahasennik—the pot boils for me;
ori—that is cooked; onsenni—that is cooked for her;
<4,aonk—that is old ; ,a,aonsennik—that becomes old to her,
In like manner some neuter passives are formed, as, from
otendor‘onasi—that is difficult ; otendor‘on asxandik—that is
impossible for him. Thus otrihsochate—the affair is
spoiled; ofrihsa‘chatandi—the affair is spoiled for her;
ota‘ hahase indi—the road is stopped up for her,

When several persons meet, relatives affixed to the same
verb, as, beseech him for me, they repeat, or they say the
relative verb twice, as, speak to him and beseech him for me,
hesatatia. Ta,ehetsaronhons, aha,iten—speak to each other
or go and exhort N, tell him to have pity on my brother,
in speaking of me or in naming me.

Of Frequentative, Multiplicative, and Augmentative

Verbs,

Augmentatives are made from the present, by only
adding s to skonsan or konnou, it ends in s or ch, as, hota-
tiaskon—a great speaker, from atatiak—he speaks ; asenskon
—he does nothing but say that, from ihen—he says ; hori/y-
_ anderaskon, from horihsoch—great fisher.

Norx.—These augmentativesare always of the paradigma
4, hotendotonskon—great relater ; imperfect and pluperfect,
onnenhotio,askon—great lewduess, from atroen—to make
love; present ora, x being changed into g,

The multiplicative are those which are about a manifold
object; they are formed from the future negative, by
changing ¢ into on, and follow the paradigma of a primi-

166 Grammar of the

tive verb, as, asentenhaon harihsanderaxonk from tehari-
hsanderaxe, it has on in the preterite, in the aorist, future
and imperfect, ononk, and in the pluperfect onk, in the future
negative onde, there is added to these nion, anssi, as, hari-
hsanderaxonneonk, they form their tenses as the preceding?
From these rules, except ateskse-—to grow old; future
tande, multiplicative tan‘nion for tannon.

Other multiplicatives are deduced from verbs ending in z
and multiply the object ; and are formed from the present
infinitive by adding aion, they follow also the paradigma of
its verb. Thus from atit—to embark, is made atitaion—
to embark several, and from aksarit—to embark something ;
aksantaion—to embark several inanimate things ; and from
aatit—to embark an animated thing; aatitaion—to em-
bark several living things. In joke, I would say aatitai-
onnion.

Hence also are multiplied its compound words from vf,
but adding only on, as, onnontst—there is a mountain;
onnontston—there are several mountains ; onnantstonnion
—there are mountains innumerable, may be superadded,
and these derived from the substantive s¢, have om in the
present. Its compounds a,oen—to have, or have any thing
(to have is of paradigma ch, as, 7,aen—there is some) they
have fon for the multiplicative ; to have is of the paradigma
s, as, isaen—thou hast. On‘de‘chonton for ondec‘haenton,
as ondechon for ondechaon.

From ,ontare—there is a lake, is formed ,ontaronksannion
there are several lakes. Jsache—there is water; aehonky-
annion—there is a quantity of water. ‘Thus also from
atendotonk—she says, is formed atendotonksannionk, by k
in the present. From ar,or,ara, is formed ondar—there is
a space, and from this is formed the multiplicative onda‘~

Huron Language. 167

ronnon—several points of space, in space of time or place.
From onnianni—good, is made onnionnihaton—all sorts of
goodness. There are other multiplicatives formed from
the final of the infinitive by adding haton to the final, as,
hatindia,ihaton—those that are married in divers places.

There are also others which signify as it were collection,
as, the Normans, the Gascons, and all the other French ;
aseti de stan agatia sontie d’ hati‘nnionenak, for the feminines,
ahsatiasontie. From annonten is made annonten haron—
to give several things; when it is relative, it is of either
paradigma. There is also another multiplicative or fre-
quentative answering to the French numeral locution, pries
et reprierds-tu?—hate and hate to the end, grudge and
thou shalt be grudged. Asennhaten. Asennhaten—for one ;
for more; atsinnhaten ichien, atsinnhaten. Asatrendaen
ichien asatrendaen, &c. In the passive it is very irregular
which happens in some verbs of the second conjugation,
as, asai—to be killed (of many) from ,achia,i—to kill, to
consume. And asarinn‘on—to be dragged ; from ,acharo
—collar; and from thence to drag, as if it were, to drag
him by the collar.

Of the Reduplicate and Local Particles, “which are
joined to Verbs.

_ The reiteration of action which the French express by
inseparable particles, reconduire, resusciter, redire; we
express also by inseparable particles or letters, like those
which the Latins express by the particles of place, hic, illic,
istic, and the French by the particles depuis que, which we
by inseparable particles or letters prefixed to verbs
nouns, as to the place or time of which we speak.
repetition of action, for its mark in the paradigma
, or in the tenses of the paradigma ch, except the aorists,

168 Grammar of the

the imperative, the personal, and infinitive mood, has s in
singular and in the third person dual and plural, and ¢siz
in the dual and plural. But note lo.—That when that s is
placed in other tenses, in the future it is inserted after the
augment e. 20.—That g¢ following will be changed into f,
whence it is said skarasksas, not s,arascheas. 30.—That
when the third person singular feminine beginning with a
vowel, admit no component particles but insert +, it is not
said st or ¢s, but / is inserted after s, as asksas—she departs
for the second time, not ssarasksas nor sarasksas. 40.—
That one ora double consonant following after ¢s, by
adding 7, it is said ¢st, as, tsitiarasksa, tsiksarasksa, tsits-
arasksa, tsisksarasksa. 50.—That if ¢ pure and short
follow after s, unless the aspirate x be in the middle, it
perishes entirely, but ¢ before h requires ¢, as, tsharaskea,
not shiarasksa. 60.—That when the letters ud joined toge-
ther have ¢ before them, they perish, but if they have s by
itself, s is changed into ¢s, and they perish, say ndehiar‘as
stehiaras, of the repetition of the perfect pluperfect, and of
verbs of the paradigma s, excepting always the aorist, s is
for the first person singular and all the third persons mas-
culine, and for others ¢s, and preserving the rules already
delivered, as, that s following s takes £, because as the first
person of the perfect in composition takes * before se you
say sksa,arasksan, not ssa.arasksan ; hence also is said
tsisarasksan. The mark of repetition for the imperative is
sa, as, sasarasksa. ‘The mark of repetition for the personal
mood is aons, as, aonsa.arasksa, for the aorist it is ors.—
Where observe that the final letters s or ¢ of these particles
as also of the following for locality, they are pronounced
joined with the following syllables, as, aon sa,araskea, not
aons a.arasksa, The mark of repetition for all impersonal

——— ee

7.

EN 2 Pe

Huron Language. 169

verbs, as, isas, astsonrasksrk—they go for the second time.

The mark of locality for the indicative, subjunctive and
optative of the paradimga ch, except the aorist, (et) for
the singular and the third persons dual and plural and for
others, (eti) by preserving those which we have spoken of
above of the particles s, unless ¢ before, g does not require
k, but perishes altogether. Hence it is said, ekarasksas,
not etkarasksas. Moreover (et) or (eti) is always set
before, even in the future. The mark of locality for the
preterite and verbs of the paradigma s, except the aorist
is, et, for the first person singular, and for all the third
persons masculine, but for the others efi. But in the first
person it is said, ekya,arasksan—I am gone from there, for
eta,araskgan, or rather eksa,arasksan.

The mark of locality for the imperative is, a, as, asaras
kxa—go from thence to come here. The mark of locality
for the aorist is ont, for the personal mood it is aont, for
impersonals it is ete. When reduplication and locality
meet at once s is always and every where the mark of
reduplication and prefixed to the mark of locality, e¢, eti,
ont, aont, except one imperative, where it is only sa. See
the examples among the conjugations.

Of the different tenses of a relative verb signifying

reduplication and locality.

Nore lo.—In the present, imperfect, perfect, pluper-
fect, future negative and the personal negative mood,
nothing is changed in affixing the initials, but the finals
only are changed for the diversity of tenses, thus, you say,
onendiba—I beseech you ; onendivak, onendigi, ,onnendi-
te‘nnen, stante, onenditan‘de, te,onenditandenn, where the
initial on isnever changed but only the final as the diversity
of tenses requires.

y

170 Grammar of the

Nore 20.—When the relation isto the feminine of the
singular number, then the persons of the relative verb do
not differ from the persons of the simple verb, and they
admit before them the same particles to signify the aorist,
future, the personal mood, the repetition, locality and
diversion, as if they were persons of the simple verb.—
Wherefore say, a,akaksach—she beholds me; on,akakga—
she has just paid me a visit; aon,akaksa—she ought to
have paid me avisit ; esw,akaksa—she will see me, like the
rule of a simple verb of the paradigma s.

Note 3o0.—lIn the other persons of the relative verb put
for the future e, for the aorist and personal mood the initial
a, as, ahakoksa—lo! I see him; asajaka asa iakaksa—
we both see him; asasakaksa—many of us see him;
ehakaksa—I willsee him, aud axeakaksa—lo! I see them ;
ahechiakaksa—lo! thou seest him, In all persons relating
to others indeterminately which commence with a vowel,
prefix ai to signify the personal mood, as, aiaviaka‘ksa—
we should see them ; aionxiaka‘ksa—we should be seen by
them ; aiestakaksa—we should see you; aietsiakaksa—we
would see you; aion,aka‘ksa—they would see me; aion-
ka‘kea—they would see her ; aia,okaksa—she would see
the world, indeterminately. Thus with reduplication,
aonsaiaxiakaksa—we should see him a second time;
aonsaionxiakaksa, aonsaiesakaksa, aonsaietsiakaksa, &c.
Thus particles of locality, taontaionxiakaksacha—that we
return to see, Yuaontaiesakakeacha, taontaietsiaka‘ksac‘ha.

But in the aorist, onsa only for the reduplication and
onta or tonta for locality is placed before all the relative
persons excepting those which denote the singular number
feminine. These do not follow the rules of the simple verb.
In the imperative say for the reduplication, onsata,akaksa

Huron Language. 171

—look at me once more ; onsata,iakaksu, onsata,sakaksa.
For the locality say, ata,akaksa—look at me from there ;
ata iakaksa, atasakaksa. For locality and reduplication
at once, say fontaha,aka‘ksacha—come from thence to see
me here. Tontata,iakaksacha, tontatasaka‘ksacha; with-
out the aorist, the personal mood affirmative and the
imperative reduplication is expressed by the letter s ; thus
as, when it is prefixed to the letter g, it is changed into 4,
as, skonakakeach—1 behold you another time ; skiaka‘ksach
sksakaksach, from the persons ‘onakaksach, akaksach,
sakaksach. In relation of the second person to the first,
as, skakaksach, skiakaksach, sksakaksach ; in like manner
in anomalies of the second conjugation, beginning with a,and
or ann, ¢ is changed into 4g, and k into x, thus for istontek—
thon givest to me, say isfontenk—thou restorest to me ; eske-
_chiendaen—thou honorest me ; sxechiendaen—thou honorest
“the again, or you render me honor. When it is put before the
‘letter Ait is changed into s pure, pronounced with the aspirate
after s, as sa‘ka‘ksach—I regard you a second time; although
‘it can also be written shaka‘ksach. But when sis said to be
put on the person beginning by s, the new letter s is not
added, as, saciakaksach—we two, we saw him a second
time ; eskennhek—thou shalt swear to me ; eskinnhek—thou
_ we both ; eskeannhek—thou we several. The other persons
beginning with a vowel prefixed to ¢s, as, tsesak‘keach—
we did see you again. Tsetsiaka‘kvach, tsaviakaksach,
- tsonxiahaksach, tson.akaksach.
at Locality without the aorist, &c. is expressed by the
particle e7, in this manner, when g is prefixed, that g is
changed into /, and the ¢ is struck out. Ekonaka‘ksaohu
for etkonakvacho—{ shall come and sce you from there.
_ Ekiakaksacha, cksakaksacha, Whew also it precedes the

172 Grammar of the

letter h, ¢ agreeing with A can be changed into @, as, e§a.a-
ka‘ksacha—he will come to see me from there. But when
it ought to be placed before the person beginning with s,
this supplies instead of ¢, as, eson iakaksacha—he will come
to seeustwo. Esonsakaukaksacha, and the other persons
beginning with a vowel eéi is prefixed to denote the locality,
as, etiesakakeach—they behold you from thence; etioxia-
kaksach—they behold us from thence.
Of the particle ¢e of duality.

What we call particles of duality, division, reciprocation,
and totality, follow the particle of locality, e, by changing
e into a, not in all the tenses but only in the aorist; onna-
konnonron kgannion—behold I am going to honor or salute,
akinnon ronkgannion, &c. In the imperative say titannon-
ronksannion—salute me ; tita innon‘ronkeannion—salute us;
tihestonr‘on ksannion—salute him. In the personal mood,
tahannonron ksannion—let him salute me ; tason,innonr‘on
ksannion—let him salute us two. In other tenses ¢e is to be
placed as tehannonr‘on ksannionk—he salutes us two.

The paradigma of a relative verb with notes reduplication,
and locality, the example of which may easily be
inflected other relatives with a similar mark of locality.
Let it be onta‘annhe—to please any one. See the
conjugations through moods and tenses.

Of verbs assuming fe the mark of duality, of affirmation,
or of totality.

In one aorist the same method is to be preserved as was
observed a little ago in the use of particles of locality. In
other tenses ¢e is prefixed to each person, as, I cry,
te,a°asenxsas, te,hiasenvsas ; imperfect, te,a‘senxeaskea ;
perfect, tesa,asenasi; future, te,a‘senxsa ; negative, tate-
<asenasache; aorist, aka‘senxva, asasenasa, athasenx®a,

ae

Huron Language. 173

akyasenxsa ; dual, atiaia‘senrsa, atitiasenxrsa, atitoasenxsa,
ahiasenxsa, akiasenxsa; plural, atia,sa‘senzxsa, atiksasenzsa,
atisksasenxsa, atho‘nsenxsa, ako‘nsenxsa ; imperative, tesa-
senxa—cry ; titsa‘senzsa ; personal mood, ta,dsenxsa,
tachiasenxsa ; dual, taia,iasenzsa; optative, tate.a‘senx-
sachasen ; in the future, ksasenxsi—to cry. Thus kaia,ri—
to play, kvatrandi, &c. When the particle te meets with
reduplication it is inflected, teskasenzsach—I cry ; tesa‘sen-
xsoch, te sha‘senxsach, by prefixing te to the verb conju-
gated with the mark of reduplication. Aorist, tonsa a‘senxsa
—I am going to cry; the personal mood, ta‘onsa, a‘senxsa.
When the particle ¢e meets with the particle with locality
it is thus said, te ga‘senaxeacha—he will cry; aorist, tonta-
ha‘senxeache—he is on the road coming here to cry. When
the particle ¢2, negative, precedes the particle fe, dual,
nay another which is also ¢e, whether dual or affirmative,
either of locality or distance of time, it is changed into ta,
as, stantatehasenrsash—I do not cry; stantsa‘tentatendi—
he is with no one; .aro te gaseti—he is returned on this
side; stan.aro ta te gase‘ti—he did not return on this side ;
tehotonharen‘ronk—he is sick ; stantatehotonharen‘ronk--
he is not sick; a,endi,on‘rato,endi stihochiatorha—I know
how much pain he feels ; a,endi,onr‘ato,endi. Statehoton-
harenr‘onk—l\ know kow sick he is. In this last example
sti is changed into séa because it follows the affirmative te.

The infinitive of verbs admitting ¢e dual or affirmative
begins in the first and third conjugation by, k+, as, kea-
trandi—to meet some one ; present trach, future traha,
negative trache. Ksenten—to go and come in a day, in
the second and fourth conjugation by k, as, /aiai—to
play ; kenteia,i—to pass a carriage. In the fifth by, ti, as,
tionnhontaon*an—to torment, Te affirmative with verbs

174 Grammar of the

of the paradigma s, as, Asatonharenron—to be sick. It is
thus compounded, present tesa,atonharenr‘onk, tesaton-
harenr‘onk, &c. Aorist, akea,atonharenr‘on atisatonhar,
agotonk, atiotonk. Dual, ation,iatonh, atitsatonh, athon-
datonh, ationdatonh. Plural, ationsatonhatisksatonh, in-
deed it is inflected as the tenses of the paradigma s, signi-
fying locality by placing in the beginning a, of its place.

The personal mood, taon,atonh, taesatonh, tahotonh,
taiotonk. Dual, taionatonh, taetsatonh, tahondatonh,
taetsatonh, tahondatonh, taiondatonh. Plural, taion satonh,
taesksatonh.

Of the Verbs of motion.

Ennon—to come, simple verb, present Jee—I come or

T arrive, here I am come, here I am arrived.

I come—ZJ, ,e, DUAL.
Ichie, Iande.
Thre, Ite.
Tse, Iste,
PLURAL. Inde.
Ta,se, Inde.
Tkse,
Iskse, Ier—they come.
Thende, IMPERFECT.
Isende, Ieenn—I did come.

Iam come, I was come, it is taken for the imperfect ;
perfect and pluperfect, as to termination and signification.

I,enn, Ichien.
A Verb with reduplication.
Iske—1i come again, Ische.
Ise, Ishre, Iskse.
DUAL. PLURAL,

1 and he, Itsa,xe.

Huron Language. 175

Itsande, Itsiksi.

Itsite, Itsiskse.

Itsiste, Itshende.

Isthe, Iksende.

Iste, Ihen—they come again.

Which is in use for the imperfect, perfect, and pluper-
fect in the simple verb, it is also in verbs with reduplication,
in verbs with locality, and in verbs with reduplication
together with locality. There is an exception.

Isken, Isenn.
A Verb with locality.

Eke—1 go from thence DUAL.
Ese, Ekse, Etiande,
Etre, Ethende, Etite,
Etiste,
Ethe, Eksende,
Ete, Etien—they go from thence.

PLURAL, IMPERFECT, &c,
Etiac, &c. Ekeen.
Etikse, Eseen.
Etskse,

A Verb with reduplication together with locality
Teke——1 return from thence.
4 Tese, Tete.

Tetre, PLURAL,
Tekwe, Tetia,se.
. DUAL, Tetikse.
‘ Tetiande, Tetiskee.
_ Tetite, Tehende.
‘ Tetiste, Tekvende.

Tehe. Tehenn,

176 Grammar of the

IMPERFECT, &c.
Tesenn, as the present.
Aroeksa,éti—I am come from thence.—Hence :
Etise‘ti—thou ; ebase‘ti—he.

Etias‘eti—she.

DUAL.
Eteond‘eti—we are come hither we two.
Etiste‘ti—you.

Ethondeti—they, masculine.
Etiondeti—they, feminine.
PLURAL.

Etionseti—we, several.

Etiskgeti—you.

Efond‘eti—they masculine.

Etiond‘eti—they feminine.

Teksa.eti—I am returned from thence.

Tetis‘eti.

Tethas‘eti.

Tetias‘eti.

DUAL.

Tetiond‘eti—we are returned from thence.

Tetisteti.

Tethond‘eti—Tethiondeti.

PLURAL.

Tetionseti—Tethondeti.

Teliskeeto—Tetiondeti.

Aroekta,etinnen—I was come from hence, can be said
either way; «ai,ennsxaeksatin‘nen—I was, or I am come
from thence, which is common to all other verbs of motion,
as, atrenda‘endenn or eksa,atiendaennon‘nen—I was or I am
come to pray to God. Eea,ennon or esaeti—l am gone ;
esen‘non or eseti—thou art gone.

Huron Language. 177

Future, e,et—l will go hither, to express the termination
to which, eent—they will go hither, or it is said, ee, echie,
ehre, ese. Dual, eande, ete, este, en‘de, ende. Plural,
ease, ekse, eskve, ehende, esende, een. Remark, the fol-
lowing future is used with the particles to express the
following, first and second persons. Zeke—I will come or
I will return from hence, ¢ese. Dual, tetiande, tetite,
tetiste. Plural, teliase, tetikse, tetiskse, telien—they will
return, to express the third persons it is said, earo—to be,
he will come here ; ekse—she; efe—they two; ete—they
two; ethende—many; eksende--many. To express the
termination by which it is said a,etande or a,et—I shall go
there ; ,aentande—they will go.

Aorist, a,e, igo, aehie, arse, ave. Dual, aande, ete, este,
ande, ande. Plural, aa,se, ekse, eskse, ahende, asendeaen
—they go; onne, iske—behold I come again; onni i,.e—
behold I come ; onta,e—l come from thence. Impersonal,
ontaen—they come from thence; ¢ontae—I return from
thence ; (showing the place from whence one is gone), as,
whence comest thou? Annenontachie?—I1 come from
Quebec; teatontari conta.e,aen wsa‘ketonta,e—I return from
the fields. But to express, | come or return from hunting,
is used the single word /esa,ate‘ndasachennen—1 come or I
return from hunting, | was gone to hunt. Thus a,atren-
_daennonn‘en—l\ come or return from praying to God; and

yet uw kindred signification of the verb is this, I was gone
‘to pray to God ; a,earohosonnen—I come or I return from
fishing. The present of the verb ennon is sometimes used,
as, onniske d’a,atien daen non‘nen—\ return from praying
God; onne iske d’a.a‘kivannen—\ return from war,
ture in the first and second persons, stantateke‘se‘—I
1 not come, or, I will not return, Svantateses‘e, or,
Zz

178 Grammar of the

stantateka,ennon, or, stantatetisennon—thou ; stantate-
tiondese—I and he; stantateties‘e, stantatetiestet‘e, stantate
tia,ses‘e—we and he; stantate tiksese‘, stantatetisksese‘, or
stantate tisksennon. To express the third person it is said
stante‘tre‘se, stante‘thasennon. Stante‘thes‘e, or, stante-
thondennon they several.

Imperative, se—go, depart ; sarasksa—let him go; ste—
go ye; tsarasksa. To express this sentence, come here, or
this, go from there to come here, @ is prefixed to the
imperative, as, asarasksa—go from there to come here ;
.aroaste, or aoaste—come here; and thus of all verbs of
motion, as, ¢son—enter; atson—enter here; tsion—enter
ye there; atsion—enter here; tontasion—enter, tontas
arasksa—come from there here, go from there where you
were, go to return here.

Notre.—The same verbs of motion as are used to signify
to go, as to signify to come, of the same person, the marks
of locality are prefixed ; but when they express the word to
go, no person is prefixed, as, harasksa—he goes ; etharas-
ksa—he comes from that place; horaskyan—he is gone;
ethorasksan—he is gone from there to come here ; eharasksa
—he has just gone ; ontaharaskea—he has just gone to come
here; aharaskea—let him go; aontaharasksa—let him come
here ; eharasksa—he will go; ethorasksa—he will come
here.

Optative, endi sente,e—that 1 wont go; isasentechie, not
sen‘chri. But to signify that he does not come, it is said
sentetre, as in the manner we have explained.

Mixed difficulties which occur in verbs of motion, occur
then, when at the same time are indicated negation, re-
duplication, and locality, which particles ought to be
place, which follow will be explained by the following

Huron Language. 179

examples: Aarasksach—he goes; stante haraskeach—he
does not go; sarasksach—he goes for the second time;
stante sarasksach—he does not go for the second time;
etharasksach—he comes from that place ; stant etharaskeach
—he does not come here; te tharasksach—he will return
to this place; stanta tetharasksach—he does not return
here ; ontaharasksa—he has just gone to come here $ tonta
harasksa—he set off a second time to return here; stante
thorasksan—he does not go; stantate thorasksan—he did
not set out again to return here; tetharasksachasen—ah
that he did not go from there! tasenle tharaskyach—would
to God that he did not depart; andoron d’arasksan—it is
difficult to go; ,andoron ontasarasksan —it is difficult to
depart from there; andoron d’onsasaraskean—it is difficult
to return there; ,andoron tonsasarasksan—it is difficult to
return here ; sfante.andoron d’arasksan and stante,andoron
onsasarasksan—it is not difficult to return here.

Of the relations which are of the paradigma s. We and
thee in all conjugations are of the paradigma s, however
formed from the second person singular of the paradigma s
by prefixing e, as, satendoton, esatendotondik, sabeti, esabe~
tandik signifies we both, or we more, them, they, thou,
from us both or more, thou from some.

We, you, or we both, more, that they both, more, or
of you, that to you from us, is of the paradigma s,
er it is made a ¢satendoton, by prefixing and inserting
between sand a; thus it is said etsiatendoton, etsidetandik.
Universal rule for all relative conjugations together.
The relation of the third person singular, dual and plural,
the first and second persons singular, dual and plural,
expressed by a verb which ought to be accounted passive,
gh it is not; and inflected like the paradigma s, as he

Nl

180 Grammar of the

me, she me, that is I from him, I from her. Haa,atendo-
tondik is made from the first person singular of the preterite
tense, a,atendoton, by prefixing ha for the masculine, @
simple for the feminine, son,iatendotondik, he to us both,
or us both from him, is made from on,iatendoton, she to us
both, that is, we both from her; from thence it is formed
by adding nothing. Thus son,saten‘dotondik, and on,saten-
dotondik, hon,atendotondik—they me, that is I from them,
is formed from a,atend, by taking away a and prefixing hon
for the masculine, and on for the feminine, which is the
personal and numerical mark; haon,iat—we both from
them; hence it is made by inserting @ between h/ and »,
also .aonia, haon,sat and .aon,sat ; but on,atendotondik—
I from another.
Of frequentative verbs, see page 165,
Of passive, reciprocal and deponent verbs.

Passives are formed from actives by prefixing aé to the
first person of the present indicative by taking away g in
this manner.

Ataseti—to be hid from; ,aseti—to hide, of the first
conjugation. Atchiaton—to be written, from ,ahiaton of
the second conjugation. Atiarondi—to make one’s self a
bag, from .arondi, of the second conjugation. Atrihsaiensti
—to learn, from ,arihsaiensti—to teach, of the second
conjugation, Otendoronksi—the thing is made difficult ;
a.andoronksi—to esteem the thing of importance, ; keaten-
‘nontra—to follow between, from en‘nontra—to follow, of
the third conjugation. dtehien—to give in commission,
from etnei, relative. Otecosan—the water is taken away,
from e,oxan—to remove water. Ocvriti—that is seasoned,
from onti—to season, of the third conjugation. Hotonn-
honti—he is put into the world, from onnhonti—to put

Huron Language. 181

into the world, of the fifth conjugation. hotokakei—he is
daubed, from okaksi—to besmear, of the fifth conjugation,
from whence it is evident that all those passives are of the
first conjugation from what ever relative they are derived,
are excepted from this rule.

lo.—Verbs of the second conjugation beginning with a,a,
as, saka‘keendsten—put your eye there to see what takes
place, for sate,aksendsten, from a,aksenda—the round of
the eye ; sakon‘chioten—show your face, for sateonchoten,
from a,onchia—face.

20.—Those beginning with ah, as a‘xsen‘dori—to beat
about an island, to spear and kill the game that is there,
for atase‘ndori, from ahsendori. Aksichoton—to have
force ; for atehsichoton, from ,ahsichoton—to have force.
Akonande,en—the canoes are near each other ; for atehon-
ande.en, from ,ahonande,en—to put canoes near each other.

30.—Those beginning with as, as ahzendaen—to be
obeyed ; for atesendaen, from asendaen, as honasendaenk—
they obey him. A/vendiosti—to take some one for master.

4o.—Verbs of the fourth conjugation which in place of
at prefix end of the first person singular of the indicative,
by taking away g, as ,endinnonniak—l am making myself
a gown; from ,ennondi—to make a gown. Endisharichiai
—to make one’s self a garment; from ,ensharichiai—to

make a garment.
- Norse.—Some verbs of the second conjugation com-
mencing with ,an by changing their second conjugation
into the third, become passive, as exenntienhichien—the
wheat will be ripe, for exatennenhichien. Some become
passive by adding, besides changing its conjugation, the
syllable di in the middle, as ahendienchasxa~he has descend-
ed from his place, from ,a,enchad.

182 Grammar of the

Nore.—Saskei—shut your mouth, for satechiage ; it
passes from the second conjugation to the first. Most pas-
sives are made in the same manner, as from ,achondi—to
accommodate; achondi—to accommodate one’s self, to
dress.

Reciprocals are formed from those passives by the ad-
dition of another at, as ataseti—to hide one’s self, or, to
hide each other, from afaseti—to be hid. Atatehiaton—to
attach itself to me, from atehiaton—to be attached to me.
Atahihsaiensti—to instruct one another ; from atrihsaiensti
—to study ; atatonnhonti—to give life to one’s self, or, to
give each other life, from atonnhonti—to receive life. But
in the fourth conjugation at is added; but the following e
is changed into a, as ateinditenni—to have compassion upon
one’s self, or, to have compassion for each other, from
enditenri—to have pity. These reciprocal verbs most fre-
quently have in relative verbs an infinitive signification, as
atiesen d’atatehiatondi—it is easy to write back to each
other; d’atatrihsaienstandi—to instruct one another; in
like manner to signify substantives, as ,anderon datatri-
hsaienstandi—instruction is difficult ; te,aenhsi d’atataka-
rata‘ti—I know not how to take care of the others.

The deponent are those which may have the passive
mark of voice, as at; yet an active signification as atehien
—to commission, from the relative chienhaten sens—a phy-
‘ sician; from the relative di,atsente, active, to physic ;
hatennha—he commissions, from the relative, ,annhandi,
hatrios—he fights, from the relative, ario—to fight, to
kill, Atanditenri may signify to have compassion upon
another, and also to lament to one’s self on account of one’s
own troubles, to weep over them, from the verb ,entenri—
to have pity. Moreover what was said of reciprocal or

Huron Language. 183

passive verbs; the same may be said of words placed in
composition whose initials just as if the verbs take at or
atat. Thus from .arihsa—a thing, is made alatrihsa, by
contraction, for alaterihsa, which, if you put with the verb
<annonhsendi, it will become atatrihsa ienstandi—to instruct
one another, from .aienstandi.

Of the Pospositions ti, sli, asi.

These three particles are added to words, to signify
sometimes the cause, sometimes the matter, sometimes the
formal, or efficient, or final, as will appear by the exam-
ples. Moreover, final particles of this sort are not joined
promiscuously to any verb; but ti is placed after some
verbs, sti after others, and 2xwi after others. 7} is placed
after verbs in the following manner.

lo.—Those whose infinitive in e adds & to form the
present indicative, as ,atsiheixe—to burn a field, from
alsiheinek—she burns. Add li, as atlsiheineli—to burn with
that ; thus ohare—to wash ; ohareti—to wash with ; .a,ase—
to row; .a,axeti—to row with.

20.—After those whose infinitive in i changes that into
ch in the present, as arilsandera,i—to fish ; ,arihsanderach
—she fishes ; aridxanderati—to fish in that.

30.—Those ending in vi and Asi, which in the present is
changed into ch. Okaksi—to paint; okach—she paints ;
okati—to paint with that. ~Ariho‘trahvi——to recite ;
Ariho‘trach, ,ariho‘trati—to_ recite with that. Except,
asokevi—he stands ; asohoti—to stand with something.

4o.—Those compounded with ondi—to do, and on—to
move, by adding’ a before ti, as achondi—to do; ,achon-
niati—to do with that, Atori—to startle, to hunt ; ato‘rati
to fly ; ,ator‘aja—she flies with that. Annonhsarori—
to sing ; annon/waroiati—death song, without,

184 Grammar of the

50.—,Ac‘hiati—to consume, to finish, and its compounds
have ,a‘chiati—to finish, to accomplish, from thence.—
Efaonde‘cha‘chia‘te—he has ran over all the earth.
60.—Atati—to speak; .atatiak—I speak; ,atatiaba—I
speak that language there.
70.—An‘diri—that is firm ; ,anditi—to strengthen.
80.—,Aio—to kill; ,aioti—to kill with something.
90.—Verbs in andi, endi, indi, ondi, with the long
penult have déi, eti, or enti, ili, onti, as, ,annandi, .an-
na‘ti to command ; aertendi—to know ; .aente‘ti—to know
by some sign. But, eiachendi—to be angry; etachati-
‘onnhon,endi—to pain ; onnhon,enti, ,aienhsendi—to know ;
aenhseti, akerondi—to be afraid ; a‘keronti. Some in en
take ati, ate,en—to have fire ; ale,ati—to make fire ; ar‘on,en
—to listen ; ar‘on,ati, anda,en—to sow ; anda,ati, orahen—
that boils; ,a,hati—to boil; ,anksaehen—a bad thing ;
arihs‘achate—to make a thing a bad. ,Annonr‘a,andennen to
be foolish ; ,annon‘ra,andendati—to make a person become
foolish ; Aaxen—to be joined together; kaxati—to join
together, to compare ; ,ataien—to smoke tobacco ; ,alaiati
—tosmoke with something ; ,aeriken—to cure one’s self
with some cure. ,Aeren—to make ; ,aerati—to make with
something ; _arannonen—to be wet ; .arannnonasti, and not
_arannonate—to wet, also from atonesen—to thank ; atonesti
—to thank for something ; katen—to steal ; katensti, ,ahsan-
nhen—to tie, to bind; ahsannhasti, andiannhen—to tie
round the finger ; andiannhasti from ,andia—finger.
100.—Relative verbs in senni take li, as, eiachasenni—
to hate ; eiachasenniti—to hate on account of something.
llo.—Acquisitives in ande, endi, indi, ondi, with the
short penult borrow particles of quality from its primitive
derived from the simple by adding to them the final figura-

;
3

Huron Language. 185

tive mark of relation which is in andi, as, ate,atandi—to light
a fire for any one, it has recourse to its derivation ate,ati,
which has ateate‘ksi, and by changing ksi into kandi,
forms ate ata‘ksandi—to light a fire for any one from some
material ; endihendi—to borrow from any one ; endihatandi
——to cause that some one borrow from some one, from the
primitive endihati, anhsandera,indi—to offend any one;
anhsanderalandi, ,askarardi—to spread for some one ;
askaronksandi—to spread something for some one.
120.—Verbs in san, kyan and xsan, have sa‘ti, kea‘ti,
Leali, as, alesan—to fly ; atesatm—to take to flight ; kakean
—to take with some one or on account of some one ;
ksan—to plunder ; ,aksali—to plunder on account of or
with. Verbsending in @i or sti have in the present, 6a,
0a, in the future ¢, st, in the future negative, tandi, stande.
Those ending in ksi have in the present and future kea, in
the negative ksande. Some in on which for the future is
changed into a or i, take ali, as, enheon—to die 5 eenhei—
she will die ; ,enheati, .a,arennion to turn aside ; a.arennioli.
| Stiis put after—lo, verbs in ¢i which to form the present
indicative is changed into s, as ,andasali—to dig ; ,andasas
she digs, or she digs with that ; arati—to lie down 3 aras—
she lies down, from thence arasba—she lies upon that, that
is, her bed. Except, atsendi—to think, which takes,
jfeei, not ti, .atsentaksi, not atsenti, which in the present
“would have ,atsens—she thinks.
_ 20.—To those compounded with ia, signifying magnitude
as, arendis—the great voice, the mistress ; akendiosti,
relative, to take for the mistress. , Ariheio—a thi ng, a thing
of importance ; ,arihsiostito put a thing in condition, to
lify it, exaggerate,
» 80.—To some verbs in the present having ens, as ondd-
2A

186 Grammar of the

a.endi.onrato,ensba—that is what makes me now ; ondete-
tsonto.ensfa—they unmarry themselves on account of that,
also from atia,e—to make water ; atiaesfi—to cause to
make water; ,annhaten—to regret ; annhatensti—to cause
to regret.

Xvi is put after—lo. verbs whose infinitive is in a, as,
,ara—to be above; ,arakyi—it is upon that some one is;
orfa—to be hafted, whence or‘aksi—it is then a thing
hafted.

20.—Verbs whose infinitive and present indicative end
in e, as, onnhe—to live; onnheksi—it is on that we live;
haatate—he is present ; haatateksi—he is present for that.

30.—Verbs in on whose present indicative is in onk, as,
ahiaton—to write ; ,ahiatonk—she writes ; ,ahiatonksi—to
write with that. Except, ,aton—to be lost; aton—to
become, saying taon—to arrive, which add # to them-
selves, not xsi, thus it is said ‘atonti—to mislead some one,
not ‘atonksi. dionto—to cause to become; ,aonti—to
make a person come in.

4o.—Verbs whose infinitive ends in ¢ after which is added
abefore ksi, as, atrendaent—to pray; atrendaentaksi—to
pray for that; ahachent—to hold a council; ,ahachentaksi
—she holds a council for that.

50.—Verbs whose present is terminated in $a, as, ,abeba
—she pounds ; a§cfakyi—to pound with that. ‘Two of these
particles are sometimes put after the same words, as,
ate,en—to have fire ; ate,ati—to make fire, and ate,ataksi
—to make fire with something.

Various significations of the particles (2, sti, xvi.

Andachiahaeraba—he does with a knife, from .a,eren—
to do, the instrumental cause ; sendat hatatiafa—he speaks
Huron, from ,afati—to speak. The manner is expressed

ere Gee +

Huron Language. 187

by ,hate,aja—he makes fire, from ate,en—to have fire,
again ond¢éhate,a‘daksa—he makes fire with that. Whence
Ga, signifies the efficient cause and kva the material.—
Ondéa,akeron§a—behold what makes me afraid, the ob-
jective cause, ondéarihsiostaksi—there is why I believe it,
the final cause, tetiechonniada—where one makes satisfac-
tion, purgatory.

Ti, da, t, tande—little; sta, st, with stande—little, sti,
from kei, ksande—he denies ; ksa, present and future.

Besides they signify celerity of action, aharihiagja—he
might read immediately ; onsaa,ent—he went out again
immediately, or ehaxenhoati, eoonti—they arrive in a day,
from ,aon—to arrive.

They signify also perpetuity, ehandareksi—he lives
always. Khentrontaksi—he is always, that is at the lodg-
ing ; chonnheksi—he laughs always. They signify that
which is said in French, he goes saying, doing as fast
as, &c. as, ekahiaton‘keande—he goes writing as fast as
one dictates to him. Orasanehksatontan‘de—we become
better as fast as we do well. Signify that which we say,
do this and that, that at once all in are float, by the same
journey; achiatrendaenta‘ksan‘de—you go by the same
means to pray to God, (you that is, iu a place that is on the
other side of the church,) ahaiatan‘de—he goes a hunting
taking a journey. Those joined to the negative signify
impossibility, as, stanhotirilsiostateen—they will never
believe. Stanharihsanderagate,en—he is not to fish ; stan-
ajiheateen—I| am not to die; slanhotrihctiastate,en—he is
not to listen,

Norz.—Also the following, onnhatenstandi—a thing
worthy of being regretted ; hotanditenstandi—a man worthy
of compassion, from atanditenri—to have compassion, to

188 Grammar of the

be merciful ; oteia‘chistaksandi—a thing that deserves well
that we be in trouble about it, from the verb; ateiache’t—
to be in trouble. Aonesksat—an agreeable thing, from
the verb, onesksandik, or onesksan—to please: Haseia-
chiat—an angry man that deserves to be hated, an irritating
man, from eiachendi—to be in a passion. Hosksahat—he
is bad, worthy of aversion, from asksandi—to have aver-
sion. ,Ata‘k—a thing to be eaten, from .a—to eat, and
the like which seem to supply particles and other words
derived from verbs, as, to be loved, lovely, the Hurons
want this and—onhierihatande—that which is reasonable,
from onhierihen—a just thing, a thing concluded as good;
satatanhatan‘di--the fever, from oatatarihafa—she has the
fever, and oatatarihen—she is warm; atanksstaksande—
cold, from ,aataindssti—to be cold. Orihsanderataneti—
fishing, from the verb, ,arihsanderai—to fish. Also the
place is signified by particles of this sort, bohatientakea—
he lives there; etiasatsataionksa—we were speaking to
one another here within.

_ Observe from the iollowing examples may be seen that
we use ksi not kyia, ti, not 6a, when the place is immo-
veable §oston,seiachiontaksi—where we have the heart, for
the place is immoveable, not depending upon art but upon
nature. Thus askati ,onadasateksi—on the other side of
the river; on‘da‘onnentaksi—where the river descends ;
haienhsitiona‘te—at his right. But when the place depends
upon the will of aman, we ought to use 6a. sda or ksa not
ti, sti or ksi, as, Qoichienhandalare§ja—it is the place where
he visits ; 9ohe‘iefa—it is the place where he goes; Gokea-
enchefa—to the place where we go for our requisites ;
oksa‘tia.esta—where we make water.

ee ee ee

=

Huron Language. 189

The third part of grammar—Of Syntax.
- The Hurons sometimes add the particle de to substantives,
which answers to the French de or du, as, i,iehsad’onnenha
I carry wheat; ehasid’annenha—l bring back wheat;
texaciend’ onnenha—I have no wheat ; ,andeiad’oensa—it is
fine tobacco; o,arhied’oensa—it is strong tobacco.

Two substantives joined together are thus expressed,
hechonhorihsasxan—Hechon’s book, asif it were, Hechon
has that book in his power, for san, signifies the master,
arihsa—the book, Hechon hondaon—Hechon’s house or
rather Hechon lives there.

The materials of which any thing is composed of is thus
rendered, .a‘riotahaoten,annonchia—stone house, the same
that is of stone; Aaoten, which is ohvistahaotencandahia—
iron knife, or ohsista a.asetsten—a metal flagon, from
aseta—bottle.

_ The place from whence any thing is brought, as, French
bread, an‘nonhakehaon ,ondataiondi. An asnien—blanket ;

gannien ehaon, enonhara, Appellatives are thus expressed,

hatennion,enhakhonenda,er‘ati—the captain of the French,
the French have him as captain—Hechon’s nephew,
hechonharenhsaten—Hechon’s brother—This Hechon and
he are brothers; /hechonhiataren—the enemies of the
French, the same French and they fight; atin‘nion-
enhakhontrioch.

_ National names are formed from the proper name of the
nation by adding r‘onnon, as from annonta,e,onnontaeron-
non & Gaiosen, Gaioxenronnon. Verbals as love, fear, &c.

are expressed by the infinitive, as God hates sin, disho-

chiensennik arilwankerai, or by the impersonal, as disho-
chiensennik d' anhsanderach—God hates that we sin, or by
the personal, dishochiensennik d'asacihsanderach—God

190 Grammar of the

hates that we sin.

Those derived from adjectives, as beauty, ugliness,
riches, are thus rendered, axinnon hsed caksastis—we love
beauty; avinnon konba d’iea‘tachensa—we despise ugly
persons ; namely by the impersonal of adjectives, which
signify handsome and ugly.

Nore,—But as much from adjectives as from verbs are
sometimes formed true substantives, as from sk‘ao‘ta—a
beggar; skwocha—beggary. From hannaendae—proud;
<nnaendaecha—pride ; from ,ahiaton—to write, ,ahiatoncha
—writing. Aksanr‘ai—to rob; daksanr‘acha—theft, lar-
ceny. Atsir‘andi—to be poor; .asinacha—misery; ,ann‘-
enhsak—to have a father-in-law ; ,ann‘ensae‘cha .a,isten—
to be a father; ,a,istenha—paternity ; andsen—to be a
mother ; andsencha—maternity ; from thence a,ennhsaeehen
—I have a father-in-law; a,e,iste‘nchen—I have my father.
Sometimes also they form substantives from appellatives,
as from onnhe‘tien—woman 3 onnhe‘tiencha—that savours
of woman. Some derivatives, whether from substantives
or from verbs, are formed by adding cha, whence also
other verbs are formed, by changing cha into chen.

The Syntax of substantives with adjectives.

Since some substantives undergo composition, others not
at all, a different syntax is to be used. Substantives which
are compounded in this, only agree with the adjectives to
which they are joined, that they take the nature of their
paradigma, as ,annonchia—hut; if it is compounded
with ,asasti—beautiful, you say ,@nnonchia‘sasti—a beauti-
ful hut, of the paradigma ch, because sasti is of the para-
digma ch ; but if it is compounded with the adjective ondiri
—strong, you say onnonchio‘ndiri—a strong hut, of the
paradigma s, because ondiri is of the paradigma s,

<=

Huron Language. 191

Substantives which are not compounded in number,
gender, and person, agree with their adjective, atieronksa
—robust ; if it adheres to the substantive hern‘diahaon—a
male, you say hatie‘ronksa, with the initial h, which is
the mark of the third person masculine ; but if the word
onnhe‘tien be the subject of the predicate, you say atieronkya
without A, because it is the third person singular feminine.
If you wish to express in Huron, thou art a strong woman,
you say chiatieronksa de sannhetien, the substantive agree-
ing with the adjective as to person, not as to paradigma.
Chiatieronksa de chion,se—thou art a strong man.

Nore.—That when with one single substantive capable
of composition, are joined two words, of which the one is
an adjective, the other a verb, that it is compounded with
both separately, as, | have found a fine hut, the word
<annonchia—hut, is twice used and joined both to the verb
orendi—to find, and .ayasti—fine ; thus, ,ann‘onchia sasti
ann‘onchiorendi. ‘Thus, thou hast a fine knife—,andahia-
va‘sti sandahien.

Nore 20.—That when a substantive cannot enter into
composition with an adjective which is applied to itself,
often the generic name of the same substantive is put with
that adjective ; as, a fine oak—,ar‘ontasa‘sti ,ero‘hi, where
we take the name of the kind, and ,aronta—a tree, which
we join with ,avasti—fine, and then we add ,ero‘he—oak.
Thus, an ugly child—Aaatachen d’achiaha, or, ,aata—
animal, is joined with ,achen—ugly, because achiaha—
infant, is not compounded.

Some things are to be observed in the composition of a
substantive with adjectives and verbs.

lo.—The substantive always goes before.

20,—The last vowel of a substantive perishes, and the

192 Grammar of the

consonant of the adjective or verb, which is initial, is
struck out.

30.—A substantive follows the nature of the adjective or
verb as to the paradigma, not as to conjugation, as, enta‘
—a day, whether it is compounded with the verb ,asan—
to belong, or the verb ondi—to do, it is always of the third
conjugation ; that which has ,asav is of the second, and
ondi is of the fifth; but because ,asan is of the paradigma
s, and onde of the paradigma ch; therefore enta joined
.asan is conjugated like the paradigma s, and is joined to
the verb ondi, inflected like the paradigma ch.

4o.—If an adjective taken out of composition begins
with another vowel than that which is proper to the infini-
tive of its own conjugation, then that it may be properly
restored to composition with the proceeding substantitive,
it ought to take the vowel proper to the infinitive of its own
conjugation, as, on‘diri—strong, of the second conjugation ;
that it may be compounded with a substantive, it ought to
change the initial on into am, as, onnonchia‘ndiri—a
strong hut, but not annonchiondiri.

50.—Words of the third conjugation when they undergo
composition in place of the initial of the nifinitive take the
third person singular of the paradigma s, as, hokaochasei-
chiat—the angry beggar, from okaocha—beggars, and era=
chiat—angry. Thus, ho‘atasendi—something has happened
to him, from ,aataandendi—to arrive. In like manner,
tsaonhsentsasentondi—-the country is repeopled, from
onhsenha—country, and entondi—to encrease.

60.—Many verbs when compounded with a double vowel
change the first vowel into 7, as, ,aai—to cut, if it is.
compounded with ,aenta—a stick, is ,aentiai—to cut a
stick, not ,aentaa.

Huron Language: 193

7o.—Sometimes a double or triple vowel is thrown out
in a substantive, as, ,arihia,i—to tear a paper, a book, for
arisiai. Thus, orihierihen—the affair is concluded, for
orihsinhen—from ,anhsa, .aai, and ,aenhen.

80.—Contractions of one or more syllables are ofien
made, as, hauksasti—he is handsome, for haatasa‘sti.—
Thus, ,annonsksei—a hut shut, for ,annon‘chiasei. Also,
hiennonste,en—they have their huts near one another, for
tehiennonchiande,en, from ,annonchia and ande,enhoae‘te—
he carries a bag, for horaae‘te,aara—a bag in composition,
out of composition, ,aznenhsan. Onde‘chen for ond‘echaen
—there is a farm.

90.—A verb is not compounded with another verb or
with an adjective, as, I look at the writing, you do not
say, akensahiaton, but ,ehiatoncha,enk or atehiatonchakensek,
Akense—to look, requires the passive in composition.

100.—There are some verbs requiring the passive voice
in nouns joined to them as atiahetati—to load one’s self
with a bag, from ,aara—bag, and ,a,eti. Atondechataksan
to make the round of the earth. Ennonchion,otan‘nen—to
walk round the hut; X+atiataton—-to surround some one;
ksenditio‘ksaton—to surround a gang ; afonennendataton—
they have beseiged the town.

Of comparatives and superlatives.

We must use circumlocution to express the comparative
and superlative, thus, Hechon is more liberal than you,
also Hechon is liberal, you are stingy, Hechon, honuesen,
isas annonste, or Hechon is liberal, thou art not so.—
Hechon, Aonsesen, stante chionsesen desa. Uechon is
Jarger than you, also Hechon is large, you are littlek—
Hechou hasanne, isa sukenie, ‘or Hechon ha,sanne, stante
chia wannedesa. Also Hechon is the most liberal of the

an

194 Grammar of the

French, all the French are not liberal, Hechon only is so.
Stante hennonsesen hatiseti d’hatinnionenhak, haonhsa— ov
honsesenhechon—or the French are stingy, Hechon alone is
liberal ; hotinnonste a hatinnionenhak, haonhsahonsesen
hechon, or rather all the ecclesiastics are liberal, but
Hechon is so above all; haviseti hennonsesen d’hatit. si hen-
statsi onekichien chiaat, and sondera‘ti de hechon. Also the
superlative is expressed very well by particles, arazQotz, or
araifochien joined to an adjective, as, arailotia,ondi.onr‘a-
chens—we are very sad.
Of prepositions.

From Huron particles which answer to prepositions in
Latin some put before, others after. Of those which are
put before some are separable, as, efa‘.e—beneath ; achazi
--~above, upward—others inseperable, as,

lo.—S, which we call a particle of repitition, unity and
excess.

20.—T, which isthe mark of distance of time or place.

30.—Te, the affirmative of duality, division or perpetuity
and totality, &c. Zo, at, in, are expressed by some one
of the absolute particles, .e, ke, ske, nde. In words ending
in tor k, ke is put after in place of the said letters, as,
stentske—at ; handotonk a,atonnhatake—at the end of my
life; ,ah‘achenke—during the council ; orihsentandi,e—at
the end of the affair. With those ending in sor cf, in
place of these is put; skeandachiake—at ; andachiach‘s.—
In other words having other terminations, at one time .e
at another zdeis put after them, as, hechonde, onden‘de,
onsasatatronsandi,e—in confession. To the four questions
of place, where, whence, whither and which way, it is
answered in the same manner by that final, ,andata,e ex, as,
an‘nenihentron—where is he? ,andata,e—he is in the vil-

——>

Huron Language. 195

lage; ann‘entontar‘e—whence comes he? ,andata,e—from
the village ; Annena‘retan‘de—where does he go? anda-
ta,e—to the village ; ann‘enar‘endi—by which way has he
gone? ,andata,e—by the village. By the same particles
are often expressed under, within, above, as, ,annenhsan-
,eisal—that is in the bag ; ,annonchia,ei,an‘a—on top of the
hut; asen.ed,oha—that has just fallen into the water ;
vatsesta,eaontaha—that has fallen into the fire ; onden“deaten-
trontaha—he reposes on land. ‘The same particles are
affixed to names of things which are numbered, as, tesenta,e
—two days; achinkasentae—three days ; ndaki,anno‘nske
—four huts, for i,annonchia.e; asenio,a‘ke—ten stitches,
for io.dra,e—within, inside; ,anda,on, without composi-
tion ,aon, in composition, as, chiata,on or chiesksaon—in
your belly ; annona,on—under water, in the bottom of the
water; ,arhaon—in the wood; ,annonskon for ,annon-
chiaon—in the house. When, a,on requires the para-
digma s, it signifies vacuity, as, ¢,onnondé—that is empty,
but we say aseld,onio—there is some liquour in the gourd.
Without he.enk beyond chi, as, chihotonnhon,annondi—he
was determined to that before we spoke to him of it.—
Before and in preference to chi, as chihentron—he is before
all ages; chiaia,ehie‘raha or ndherenaontaia ehier‘aha—he
must beware ; chie,ontontona‘ti—before you; aondechenhaon
abatien—he is from all eternity ; ondée§arontio or e§asendio-
he is lord above others, (a name) ; ebaalsinnen—he was
called before, (naming him); ondé d’efeehon—he that was
called Hechon ; efonnontio—the former governor ; onde-
ekvaen—this 1 have before said ; stanteksarandinnen—l
was unwilling before. Chi—beyond, as, chi,a‘ndasati—
beyond the river ; ,aro—on this side, as, ,aroa,an‘dasati—
on this side the river.

196 Grammar of the

Tiskehen—near ; ontaonriohe—I am on the point of
being killed 5; onta,iheonchieg—I am going to die; ti,an-
datata—near the town; ti,annonchiata—near the hut.—
Stantioskehente, arihsate—there is no likelihood of such a
thing happening ; tioskehenichie de chrihsiost—thou wilt
soon believe; chi—ata distance; ,annene§aatate d’ihsiost
—he is far from believing ; nderenekatede,arihseosti—faith
is very far from him ; tachitsokar‘at‘ati—she kept that no
morea longtime since. Ata, final, about, as, ,andasatatie
—along the river ; annentratatie—along the shore. In the
middle ¢eondo,en, akanho,enhatie satiendaen—pray to God
between two. After and afterwards, d’asesksak—after,
afterwards, behind ; aoskea,teskachitenhsis skon sali d’aves-
ksakhaon—thou wilt bring me a hind foot of elk of the left
side; sehen echiarasksa—thou wilt go after; ,echio,atenk
behind me; sehwende,ihei—after my death, (name) ; andia-
xe e‘saon—after N shall have returned ; ona‘ti—towards;
candaxsate‘ksionati—towards the river, on the side that looks
to the river ; ondataenta‘ksionati —on the side where the
town is; tesatoxrs‘aa onati—towards the west ; rakeatona'ti
towards the east; entrekona‘ti—towards the south ; asi-
hi‘seona‘ti—towards the north; chietenhsitionati—to the
right, towards thy right side ; boichtenetiesendraksiannien.e
—we are of the side of; anne,ronnons—we are for them ;
oea xetonta,ann‘rontie—we are going to the side of the
year.

Under, or beneath—e‘la‘e; above, within—,anda,on ;
under ground, in hell—onde‘chon ,enonharo ,ennen ; wader
the the blanket—,ahsen,aro,ennen hota‘se‘ti; he has hid
himself under the table—chie,annen etivrannen tai—that is
much below in matter of price; above, upwards—achasi ;
endicha.ei,ara—that is upon the sideboard ; hechon ahoat-

es

sae”

Huron Language. 197

dnnonnen, or, ahoatannonhscha—the lot has fallen to
Hechon.

Of from; ,andata,e tontu.e—I come from the village ;
,anniohake haon—from France ; ahsendo,e—from England ;
hechon.e eksa,iaen dinnen—I had come from Hechon’s
house. As to how much, ,andaksa,e haon; as to the im-
purity, ,andaksa,e aliaondi ,ienten—as to impurity, I know
not what it is ; hechonde—as to Hechon, where is he?

* Until etheivbo esartheios tihatie—I will preserve faith until
death. Up to, ehiate ennontetsi io‘ndste~there is water up to
my leg; §o io‘ndste ti e‘ndiasont—as far as the neck ; tate
edtiai ion‘dste—water up to the middle.

Without, 0,0n nondaie—that is without any mixture.—
Oskena,on, sagennité—without fish, without seasoning ;
aondechon for aondecha,on—country without people; ¢e,aatra
nondeé—without that, or, that is not; stante esenditi—we
will do without you.

With, onde teandi aekse—come with us ; ondé asentenhaon
i‘ndes—he goes always with him.

Before, techie, an‘rak, or chie,atak, or chiatrak, or chi-
tontak—you seeing or being present.

With the knowledge of, 0,on,e ahente—that is in the
sight of all.

Without the knowledge of, ,anda,on, or otase‘ti,e hosa-
vennen halie—he goes in secret; hatsah‘on keindeba—he
speaks in secret, according to custom ; ventendi, or, a‘oht,
or, ¢,en‘takwe—that is usual ; ahaxendsten—it is his manner
of speaking ; ahaiendsten—it is his manner of doing ; endi-
ha echenniandik—he works for me.

From, annionhakehaon—from France ; iso‘onhaon, or,
tisoon—since he has arrived ; ennhickhaon—since last year ;
tesenta.e ekxa.einnen—l have not eaten for two days.

198 Dissertation sur

Against is expressed by the word ha,esksahens—he is
against me; harasennik—he is for me, that is, of my
opinion; ha,er‘esaga, or, ha,enda‘chiodagja—he is not of my
opinion, he reproves me, he contradicts me.

For, is not expressed but by the words onde, aondi—it is
for that ; sonksaachierhon—it is for the love of you; saras-
ksasen ta‘itenr—go, I pray you, do that for my sake. Why
hast thou come hither ? because I said I would come—ondé
aondi aro etsise‘ti stisa.en .ao aset, onde xaio‘ ti, or onde
zo‘ti—it is for that.

DISSERTATION sur le CANON DE BRONZE
trouvé en 1826 sur un banc de sable, dans
le Fleuve Saint Laurent, au devant de la
paroisse Champlain, District des Trois
Riviéres, par AMABLE BerTHELOT, Ker.

Je divise cette Dissertation en deux parties. Dans la
premiére j’entreprends de prouver que Jacques Cartier n’a
pas fait naufrage sur la roche de Jacques Cartier. Dans
la seconde je conjecture que ce canon a appartenu a
Vérazani.

Mr. Neilson, dans sa Gazette de Québec du 23 Avril,
1827, annonce que Mr. Chasseur a dans son Musée un
canon de bronze d’une forme extraordinaire, qui a été
trouvé, l’automne 1826, 4a l’embouchure de la riviére
Jacques Cartier. Charlevoix ayant dit que c’était, dans
le pays, une tradition que Jacques Cartier avait perdu un

le Canon de Bronze. 199

de ses vaisseaux en cet endroit, on en a conclu que ce canon
avait appartenu ace vaisseau. L/inscription gravée depuis
sur ce canon l’explique ainsi. Observons d’abord que ce
n’est pas a la rivitre Jacques Cartier que ce canon a été
trouvé. Mr. Colin Campbell, qui ena fait présent a Mr,
Wood, informa Mr. Chasseur le 28 Juillet 1828, que c’¢tait
sur un bane de sable, vis-d-vis de la paroisse Champlain,
qu’il avait trouvé cette pice. Ce canon peut étre un grand
témoin; nous linterrogerons. Commengons par en faire
la description.

Cette pitce a une ouverture a la partie supérieure de la
ceulasse, dans laquelle on place une chambre mobile, des-
tinge 4 contenir la charge. Cette chambre est fixée par
une cheville de fer ; l’Ame ou l’ouverture du canon a trois
pouces de diamétre; l’ouverture de la chambre mobile, ou
du cylindre destiné a contenir la charge, est d’un pouce et
demi; la longueur de la piece est de trois pieds quatre
pouces et demi; la longueur du levier en fer, placé a la
eulasse, au lieu du bouton, pour pointer la pitce, est de
dix pouces trois quarts mesure frangaise. Ce canon est fixé
sur une chandelle qui se divise en deux branches comme
sont en général les pierriers; le fer en est profondément
rongé par la rouille. Cette pidce est d’un trés beau métal,
mais elle est si irrégulitvement formée, en comparaison
des canons de bronze que nous voyons de nos jours, qu’il
parait évident qu’elle appartient a l’enfance de l'art de la
fonderie des canons,

Premiere Partie.—Champlain dit que le 3 Juillet 1608,
il arriva & Québee, od il chercha un lieu propre pour son
habitation. Que proche de ce lieu est une riviere agréable,
od anciennement hiverna Jacques Cartier. C'est aussi
opinion de La Potherie qui était & Québec en 1698.—

200 Dissertation sur

Cependant il parle comme Charlevoix d’un naufrage de
Cartier, sur la roche de Jacques Cartier.

Charlevoix dit, que de l’ile de Bacchus, ou d’Orleans,
Cartier se rendit dans une petite riviére qui en est éloignée
de dix lieues, et qui vient du Nord: il Ja nomma riviére
Ste. Croix, par ce qu’il y arriva le 14 Sepembre 1535,
{aprés beaucoup de difficultés de la part des Sauvages
comme nous le verrons ci-aprés,) il partit de Ste. Croix le
19, avec la grande Hermine seule et deux chaloupes, lais-
sant les deux autres navires dans la riviére Ste. Croix, ot
ja grande Hermine n’avait pu entrer. Dans une note il
ajoute, “ Champlain dit que cette rivitre est celle de St.
* Charles: mais il se trompe, puisque des batimens beau-
** coup plus grands que Ja grande Hermine entrent fort
** bien dans celle-ci, quand la marée est haute. C’est qu’il
* comptait les dix lieues du bas de I’Isle. Je trouve dans
* quelques mémoires, et c’est une tradition constante en
** Canada, qu’un des trois navires fut brisé contre un rocher,
** qui est dans le fleuve St. Laurent, vis-a-vis de la riviere
* Ste. Croix, et que la marée couvre entiérement lors-
* qu’elle est haute, mais la relation d’ou je tire ce récit ne
* dit rien de cet accident.” Dans une autre note il ajoute,
cette roche s’appelle encore présentement la roche de
Jacques Cartier.

Charlevoix reproche 4 Champlain de n’avoir pas bien
compris le récit de Jacques Cartier. Voyons d’abord ce
récit, aprés quoi nous tacherons d’apprécier la traditon.—
Consultons Lesearbot. Cet écrivain, d’aprés ce qu’en dit
Charlevoix, dans sa liste des auteurs sur l’histoire de La
Nouvelle France, parait sincére, bien instruit et impartial.
Lescarbot copie le récit du second voyage de Jacques
Quartier, (que nous écrivons maintenant Cartier,) de

bs Soe ee Se

Se ra

le Canon de Bronze. 201

Yoriginal présenté au Roi, écrit Ala main et couvert en
satin bleu. A la page 268 it dit que d’abord il avait résolu
de ne donner qu'un abrégé de ce voyage, mais que pour
l'avantage des navigateurs ille doune en son entier. En
effet la différence du style de Cartier et de Lescarbot est
trés sensible, et en plusieurs endroits Lescarbot explique
des expressions de Cartier qui avaient déja vieilli de son
temps. Lescarbot aprés avoir rapporté la découverte que
Cartier fit de Ile aux Coudres le 6 Septembre 1535, le 7
il Ven fait partir et le fait arriver 4 quatre iles distantes de
V'Lle aux Coudres de sept a huit lieues, ‘* desquelles (dit-il)
* ily ena une grande, environ dix lieues de long et cing
*« de large. Le 8 Septembre le dit capitaine fit apporter
** nos barques pour passer outre, et aller 4 mont le dit
* fleuve avec le flot pour chercher hable et lieu de sauveté
** pour mettre les navires, et fumes outre le dit fleuve
* environ dix lieues cotoyant la dite Isle, et au bout d’icelle
** trouvames un affource d’eau fort beau et plaisant, au quel
* lieu il y a une petite rivitre, et hable de barre marinant
** de deux 4 trois brasses, que trouvames lieu a nous pro-
“ pice pour mettre nos dits navires A sauveté. Nous nom-
“ mames le dit lieu Ste. Croix, parce que le dit jour y
* arrivames—apres avoir visité le dit lieu, et trouvé étre
* convenable, se retira le dit capitaine et les autres
* dedans les barques pour retourner aux navires,”’

_ L’escarbot dit dans une note en marge “ hable de barre”
cest-i-dire, bavre qui asséche de basse mer, II faut que
le mot affourc ow affourg fut encore familier de son temps,
puisqu’il ne le définit pas ; mais il est hors d’usage aujour-
d'tui, fourque et forcat sont des termes de marine de nos
jours, Vhomonymie dit a une oreille frangaise que lon

entendait du temps de Cartier par le mot foure ce que nous

2c

202 .. Dissertation sur

entendons de nos jours par celui de fourche: ce qui cor-
respond parfaitement 4 la fourche d’eau que présentent a
la vue le havre de la riviére St. Charles et le fleuve St.
Laurent entre Québec et la pointe Lévi, lorsque l’on entre
dans le bassin de Québec par le chenal du Nord de I’Ile
d’Orléans. Ces expressions de Cartier ne peuvent certaine-
ment pas s’appliquer 4 l’entrée de la rivigre Jacques Cartier.
Quant au mot marinant il faut supposer qu'il était trés
familier du temps de Lescarbot puisqu’il n’en donne pas la
définition, mais dans la circonstance ou il le place il exprime
indubitablement le mouvement de |’eau pendant le reflux.
Cartier de retour a ses navires, visite cette Ile qu il estime
avoir environ douze lieues de longueur. [1 la nomma Tle
de Bacchus 4 raison des vignes qu’il y trouva, et Lescarbot
dit dans une note marginale que c’est Ile d’Orléans.—
Cartier se rendit ensuite avec ses navires “ au dit lieu de
** Ste. Croix, le 14 Septembre. Le seiziéme du dit mois
‘© nous mimes nos deux plus grands navires dans le dit
“* hable et riviére, ou il y a de pleine mer trois brasses, et
« de basse eau demie brasse, et fut laissé le gallion dedans
“Ja rade pour mener 4 Hochelaga.” Ce gallion était
V’Emérillon du port d’environ 40 tonneaux. Les deux
autres vaisseaux étaient la grande Hermine d’environ 120
tonneaux, et la petite Hermine d’environ 60. Le 19 Cartier
part pour Hochelaga, depuis nommé Montréal, avec le
gallion et deux barques. Au lac St. Pierre il laisse le
gallion, parce que dit-il il n’y avait pas assez d’eau; mais
il nous est permis de croire que c’est parce qu’il n’en con-
naissait pasle chenal. I] poursuit sa route avec ses barques
et se rend A Hochelaga. Le 4 Octobre il revient au lac
St. Pierre avec ses barques et y retrouve son gallion. Le
5 ilen part avec le gallion et ses barques, et Cartier ajoute

le Canon de Bronze. 203

* Le lundi onziéme jour d’Octobre nous arrivames au hable
** de Ste. Croix, od étaient nos navires, et trouvames que
** les maitres et mariniers qui y étoient demeurés avoient
** fait un fort devant les dits navires tous clos de grosses
** pieces de bois plantées de bout joignant les unes aux
* autres, et tout A l’entour garni d’artillerie’—Cartier
ajoute ‘‘ il y a aussi és environs du dit Canada, dedans le
** dit fleuve plusieurs Iles tant grandes que petites. Et
* entre autres il y en a une quicontient plus de dix lieues
* de long, laquelle est pleinede beaux arbres, et- force
“ vignes. Ilya passage des deux cdétés d’icelle; le meil-
* leur et le plus sur est du cété devers le sud, et au bout
“ dicelle ile vers l’ouest y a un affourq d’eau bel et délec-
** table pour mettre navires: auquel y a un détroit du dit
* fleuve courant et profond, mais il n’a de large qu’environ
** un tiers de lieue: le travers duquel y a une terre double
* de bonne hauteur toute labourée, aussi bonne qu’il soit
** possible de voir, Et 1a est la ville et demeurance du
* Seigneur Donnacona et de nos hommes”’ (deux sauvages
qui ne voulurent pas suivre Cartier 4 Hochelaga) “ qu’a-
** vious prins le premier voyage: la quelle demeurance ”
** se nomme Stadaconé, Et auparavant qu’arriver au dit
** lieu y a quatre peuples y demeurant, sgavoir, Ajaouasté,
* Starnatam, Tailla, qui est sur une montagne, et Stadin,
** puis le dit Stadaconé, sous la quelle haute terre vers le
* nord est la rivitre et hable de Ste. Croix: auquel lieu
* avons été depuis le quinzitme jour de Septembre jus-
* qu’au sixitme jour de Mai mil cing cent trente six:
* auquel lieu les navires demeurerent & sec, comme cy-
** devant est dit.”

_ Vient ensuite le récit de ce quise passa pendant Vhiver ;

du scorbut dont les Frangais furent attaqués. Sur cent dix

S04 Dissertation sur

il n’y en avait que trois ou quatre de sains. Vingt-cing
moururent et furent cachés sous Ja neige: et afin que les
sauvages ne s’appercussent pas de l'état déplorable des
équipages, Cartier défendait aux sauvages l’accés aux
yaisseaux, et lorsqu’ils en approchaient, on’y faisait le plus
de bruit qu’il était possible, pour leur faire accroire que
tout le monde était en ouvrage. Donnagaya indiqua 4
Cartier un arbre avec lequel il s’était guéri lui méme, car
laméme maladie s’était répandue parmi les sauvages.—
Charlevoix dit que cet arbre est I’épinette blanche.—
Approche enfin le temps du départ. Voici le texte de la
relation. “ Ce que nous était de nécessité : car nous étions
affoiblis, tant de maladies, que de nos gens morts, qu’il
‘ nous fallut laisser un de nos navires au dit lieu de Ste.
“ Croix.’? Ensuite Cartier dit que ce navire fut abandonné
a ceux de Stadin pour en avoir les vieux cloux. Vient
enfin le départ. “ Le Samedi sixi¢me jour de Mai nous
“ appareillames du havre de Ste. Croix, et vimmes poser
* au bas de I'He d’Orléans environ douze lieues du dite Ste.
* Croix.’ On voit de plus que Cartier avait ramené en
France le petit gallion appelé l’Emérillon, dans lequel il
n’ était allé que jusqu’au lac St. Pierre.

Qui d’aprés ce récit fait au Roi par Jacques Cartier peut
avoir le moindre doute que ce Capitaine n’ait passé VPhiver
de 1535 et 1536 dans la riviére St. Charles, située au nord
de Québec, qu'il n’ait été & Hochelaga, ou Montréal, qu'il
n’en soit revenu dans |’Emérillon depuis le lac St. Pierre
sans accident, et que s’il laissa un de ses vaisseaux a Ste.
Croix dans le havre de la riviére St. Charles ce fut, non
pour l’avoir perdu sur la roche de Jacques Cartier, mais 4
raison de la foiblesse “de ses équipages : que quand il dit
qu'il laissa ce vaisseau pour que ceux de Stadin en eussent

le Canon de Bronze. 205

les vieux cloux il n’en avait pas enlevé tous les canons, les
agrés et autres choses qu’il lui importait de prendre. Quel
intérét pouvait il avoir de déguiser le vérité quand tant de
témoins oculaires pouvaient le démentir et le perdre.
- Maintenant examinons de quel poids peut étre la tradi-
tion dont parle Charlevoix. Cette tradition en Canada n'a
pu étre transmise par des Européens, depuis 1536 apres le
départ de Cartier, jusqu’en 1608 que Champlain s’établit a
Québec. Sil y eut une telle tradition, elle v’a pu parvenir
que par des sauvages des environs. Champlain nese rendit
sur les lieux parcourus par Cartier, qu’envirou 72 ans apres.
‘Charlevoix n’alla & Québec que vers 1720; c’est-a-dire,
environ 180 ans aprés Cartier. Lequel des deux pouvait le
mieux ¢tre guidé par les traditions des sauvages? Cham-
_ plain était contemporain de Lescarbot: revétu comme il
était de la commission de fonder une colonie sur les bords
du flev ve St. Laurent, peut-on supposer qu'il n’ait pas eu
aeces a la relation du second voyage de Cartier, aussi bien
que Lescarbot. On doit penser que Champlain a suivi les
traces de Cartier. De plus Champlaia a pu voir plusieurs
sauvages qui lui ont dit avoir vu des hommes de son espice,
blanes et barbus, hiverner au nord de Québec, c’est-a-dire,
& la viviere St. Charles. Ainsi Champlain doit avoir fondé
son opinion et sur le récit de Cartier qui est trés explicite,
et peut étre aussi sur le rapport de vieux sauvages, témoins
oculaires du séjour de Cartier a la rivitre St. Charles. Il
est bien clair que Charlevoix s’est trompé en disant que
Cartier partit pour Hochelaga dans la Grande Hermine —
passage ci-dessus de Cartier dit positivement la con-
- Hae cite qu’en gros des mémoires et une tradition
lui a rapportée en Canada, pour prouver que Cartier
un vaisseau sur la roche qui se trouve vis-a-vis sa

206 Dissertation sur

prétendue Ste. Croix. Mais il déclare lui méme qu’il ne
trouverien de cela dans les mémoires sur les quels il nous
donne le second voyage de Cartier. Ce fait, encore une fois,
he peut avoir été transmis que par le récit des sauvages des
environs. Lorsque Champlain fonda Québec, il y avait
déja72 ans que Cartier avait fait son second voyage sur le
fleuve St. Laurent. Plusieurs années se passérent avant
que le Canada eut des missionnaires ou des Frangais capa-
bles de converser avec des sauvages, et avant que des
sauvages eussent appris le Francais assez bien pour s’ex-
pliquer clairement. Ainsi en admettant cette tradition
comme vraie en général, j’ai le droit de dire qu’elle n’est
pas applicable a Jacques Cartier, puisque sa relation dit
positivement le contraire. Qui niera qu’un fait vrai, ne
puisse, en trés peu d’années, étre surchargé de circon-
stances étrangéres, N’est-ce pas ce qui arrive tous les
jours. On ne me persuadera jamais qu’au bout d’environ
un siecle qui dut s’écouler avant le récit de ce naufrage,
les Sauvages eussent conversé le nom de Jacques Cartier.
Tout le monde connait leur habitude de donner des noms
de leur propre langue aux ¢trangers, par la raison qu’il
est plus facile de se souvenir d’un mot familier que d’un
mot étranger. Ce ne fut que de cette maniére qu’ils dési-
guérent ceux qui firent naufrage sur le fleuve St. Laurent.
Ils ne purent aprés tant d’années indiquer l’époque d’un

naufrage que d’une maniére vague, mais peut-étre quiils ©
la désignérent d’une maniére a faire soupgonner qu'il —
pouvait s’agir de Jacques Cartier. En Canada on ecruta
ce naufrage d’un des vaisseaux de ce capitaine parce qu’il ’
n’était retourné en France qu’avec deux vaisseaux, Et —

faute de pouvoir consulter son second voyage, qui parait
n’avoir jamais été publi¢é en Frangais, que par Lescarbot

:

le Canon de Bronze. 207

on aura cru que cette rivitre que nous appelons Jacques
Cartier est la rividre ot il hiverna et que ce fut Jui qui y
fit naufrage.

Seconpz Partie.—Je crois que l’on doit regarder comme
certain qu'un vaisseau, avant le second yoyage de Jacques
Cartier, a fait naufrage dans le fleave St. Laurent. Mais
voyons s’ilest permis de faire une conjecture et de lier
Vidée de ce naufrage au voyage de Verazani, qui me parait
étre dans ces. tems, le seul voyageur malheureux auquel se
rattache ce naufrage.

Charlevoix dit que Verazani étant au service de Frangois
I, aprés avoir fait en 1523 un voyage pour découvrir
l’Amérique Septentrionale revint a Dieppe ; qu’il en sortit
en 1524, pour aller en course contre les Espagnols ; que
Verazani découvrit Vile de Terreneuve, od les Bretons
faisaient la péche long-temps avant 1525, Que peu de
temps apres son arrivée 4 Dieppe, il fit un nouvel armement
adessein d’établir une colonie dans V’Amérique. | * Tout
“ ce qu’on sait de cette entreprise (dit Charleyoix) c’est
“ que s’étant embarqué il n’a point paru depuis, et qu’on
“ n’a jamais bien su ce qu'il était devenu: car je ne trouve
“ aucun fondement A ce que quelques uns ont publié,
_ “ qu’ayant mis pied a terre dans un endroit ov il voulait
“ batir un fort, les sauvages se jeterent sur lui, le mas-
* sacrérent avec tous ses gens et le mangérent.”’

_ Lesearbot nous met un peu plus sur la route, en nous
disant “ Quelqu’un dit qu’étant parvenu au Cap Breton
qui est Tentrée pour cingler vers la grande riviere de
“ Canada) il fut pris et dévoré des sauvages, Ce que dif-
* ficilement puise-je croire, puisqu’il fit la relation susdite
_ “ deson voyage au Roi,” (c’est-i-dire, d'un voyage an-
j térieur) “ et attendu que les sauvages de cette terre JA

208 - Dissertation sur

“© ne sont point antropophages et se contentent d’enlever la
“ téte de leur ennemi. Bien est vrai que plus avant vers
‘* Je nord il y a quelques nations farouches qui guerroyent
“ perpétuellement nos mariniers faisant leur pécherie.—
** Mais j’entends que la querelle n’est pas si vieille, ains
** est depuis vingt ans seulement que les Maloins tuerént
“ une femme d’un capitaine, et n’en est point encore Ja
“* vengeance assouvie. Car tous ces peuples barbares
“ généralement appétent la vengeance, laquelle ils n’ou-
** blient jamais ains en laissent la mémaire 4 leurs enfans.”

Ici Charlevoix rejéte ce genre de mort de Verazani, faute
de preuves, mais considérons qu’en ce cas nous sommes
réduits 4 de simples conjectures. I] n’est point si difficile
lorsqu’il nous dit que Ja riviére Ste. Croix ot hiverna. Car-
tier, est la méme que celle que nous appelons maintenant
Jacques Cartier, sans autre preuve que la tradition dont
nous avons parlé. A bien peser ce que disent ces auteurs,
le doute serait si les Sauvages enlevérent la téte de Verazani
et de ses gens ou s’ils les dévorérent.- Ce que l’histoire
nous a appris depuis cette époque, nous prouve qu’ils étaient
également capables del’un etde l’autre. Le genre de mort
de Verazani est caché dans la nuit des temps. N’aurait il
pas pu périr par le Scorbut avec son équipage? II pour-
pait aussi se faire que Verazani et son équipage affoiblis par
le scorbut auraient été les victimes de la colére ou de la
cupidité des Sauvages, et le second voyage de Cartier nous
fait voir les appréhensions ou il était qu’un semblable
malheur ne lui arrivat.

Examinons quelques autres autorités sur le sort de
Verazani.

Lescarbot dit que l’objet de Cartier était de continuer les
découvertes de Verazani dans le dessein de fonder des
colonies en Amérique.

le Canon de Bronze. 209

Lahontan, qui était 4 Quebec en 1683, dit que Vérazan,
ou Vérazani fut le premier qui découvrit le Canada, mais
A son malheur, car les sauvages le mangérent. Remar-
quons que La Hontan vécut plusieurs années parmi les
sauvages et qu’il apprit leurs langues. La Potherie qui
était en Canada en 1698, dit que Jacques Cartier fut plus
heureux que Verazani, ce qui revient a peu prés A la méme
chose; cet écrivain a vécu plusieurs années en Canada.

Le Beau qui vint en Canada en 1729, en parlant de la
découverte du Canada, dit que Verazani, natif de Florence,
en prit possession au nom de Francois I; Qu’il eut le
malheur d’y étre mangé par les sanvages sans avoir été
aussi avant que Cartier qui alla jusqu’’ Montréal. Le Beau
ne dit point sur quelle autorité il fonde cette opinion, mais
comme il passa plus d’ une année chez les R.R, P.P.
Récollets de Québec, qui furent le premiers Missionnaires
de ce pays, il me parait probable qu'il tenait d’eux cette
opinion.

Dans quelle partie du fleuve St Laurent Verazani périt-
il? J’ai des autorités a produire pour soutenir ma conjec-
ture que ce fut plus haut que Stadaconé ou Québec, et
moins haut que Hochelaga ou Montréal.

Le Beau que je ne puis m’empécher de considérer comme
‘nous transmettant Ja meilleure tradition sur cette question,
vient de nous dire que Verazani n’alla pas aussi avant dans
Je Canada que Cartier qui alla jusqu’a Montréal. Par ces
expressions je congois que Verazani remonta le fleuve St.
Laurent assez haut pour ¢tre jusqu’A un certain point un
objet de comparaison avec Cartier. Que le lecteur veuille
bien se rappeler qu’une tradition bien constatée affirme
qu'un vaisseau fit naufrage sur la roche de J, Cartier, et
que j'ai prouvé que ce vaisseau n’était pas un des trois de

2D

210 Dissertation sur

Cartier. Les deux sauvages qui ne voulurent pas accom.
pagner Cartier dans son voyage 4 Hochelaga ou Montréal,
étaient Taiguragni et Domagaya habitans de Stadaconé ou
du promontoire de Québec, lesquels Cartier avait emmenés
en France dans son voyage de l’année précédente a l’em-
bouchure du fleuve St. Laurent, et qu’il ramena en 1535,
ai la plus grande satisfaction de leurs compatriotes. On
peut juger du peu de progrés quils durent faire dans la
langue francaise. Leurs expressions ne devaient guére
s’étendre au déla des premiers besoins de la vie. Solicité
par Cartier de monter 4 Hochelaga “ fut par Taiguragni
“ dit au dit capitaine, que le dit seigneur (Donnacona, chef
de Stadaconé) ne voulait point que lui qui parlait allant
avec lui, comme il avait promis, parce que la riviére ne
valait- rien.’ (C’est une facon ce parler des sauvages,
** pour dire qu’elle est dangereuse, comme de vérite elle
* est passé le lieu de Ste. Croix.’’)

Cherchons maintenant quelle pouvait étre la raison pour
Jaquelle Donnacona, Taiguragni et Domagaya s’opposaient
a l’exploration du fleuve Saint Laurent au-dessus de Stada-
coné ou de Québec. Lescarbot ne peut dire pourquoi ces
sauvages ne voulaient pas que Cartier allat ’ Hochelaga.—
** Néanmoius (dit-il) je pense que c’étaient leurs ennemis,
* et pour ce n’avaient point ce voyage agréable: ou bien
* jls craignaient que le dit capitaine ne les abandonnat et
qu'il n’allat demeurer 4 Hochelaga.”” Revenons au
récit de Cartier, ce récit contient une pantomime que cet
habile navigateur ne comprit pas, sans doute, faute de
connaitre le climat du Canada.

** Le 18 Septembre pour nous cuider toujours empécher
“ daller 4 Hochelaga, songérent une grande finesse qui
“ fut telle: ils firent habiller trois hommes en la fagon de

le Canon de Bronze. 211

* trois diables, lesquels étaient vétus de peaux de chiens
* noirs et blancs, et avaient cornes aussi longues que le
: * bras, et étaient peints par le visage de noir comme char-
* bon: et les firent mettre dans une de leurs barques a
- € notre non sceu. Puis vindrent avec leur bende comme
“ de coutume, auprés de nos navires et se tindrent dedans

** le bois sans apparoitre environ deux heures, attendans

** que l’heure et marée fut venue pour l’arrivée de la dite
© barque, a laquelle heure sortirent tous, et se présente-
* rent devant nos dits navires, sans eux approcher ainsi
qu ils souloient faire. Et commenga Taiguragni a saluer
* le capitaine, lequel lui demanda s’i/ voulait avoir le
“ bateau. A quoi lui répondit le dit Taiguragni que non
* pour l'heure, mais que tantot il entrerait dedans 1é dits
* navires. Et incontinent arriva la dite barque ot étaient
** lédits trois hommes apparcissant étre trois diables ayans
“ de grandes cornes sur leurs tétes, et faisoit celui du
© milieu, en venant, un merveilleux sermon, passtrent
** Je long de nos navires avec leur dite barque, sans aucu-
* nement tourner leur vué sur nous, et allerent asséner et
“ donner en terre avec leur dite barque, et tout incontinent
* le dit Donnacona et ses gens prindrent la dite barque,
© etlé dits hommes, léquelz s’étaient laissé choir au fond
* Wicelle, comme gens morts, et porterent le tout ensem-
* ble dans le bois, qui était distant dédits navires d’nn jet
“ de pierre, et ne demeura une seule personne que tous ne
* se retirassent dedans le dit bois. Et eux ¢tans retirez
* commencerent uve prédication et préchement que nous
_ © oyons de nos navires, qui dura environs demie heure.—
© Apres la quelle sortirent lédits Taiguragni et Domagaya
dudit bois, marchans vers nous ayans les mains jointes
i leurs chappeaux sous leurs coudes, faisans une grande

212 Dissertation sur

£6
«¢
oe
ce
é¢
“é
6
«é
6e
ce
ee
ée
se
“ce
ee
“ce
6e
sé
“se
«¢
ee
66
“ec
€e
“
“ee
“
“se

“ce

admiration. Et commenga le dit Taiguragni a dire et
proférer par trois fois, Jésus, Jésus, Jésus, levant les
yeux vers le ciel. Puis Domagaya commenga 4 dire,
Jésus Maria, Jacques Quartier regardant le ciel comme
lautre. Et le capitaine voyant leurs mines et cérémo-
nies leur commenga a demander qu’il y avait, et que
e’était qui était survenu de nouveau ; léquels répondi-
rent qu’il y avait de piteuses nouvelles, en disant, Nenni
est il bon, c’est-i-dire, qu’elles ne sont pas bonnes.)—
Et le capitaine leur demanda derechef que c’etait. Et ils
lui dirent que leur Dieu, nommé Cudouagni avait parlé
i Hochelaga, et que les trois hommes devant dits étaient
venus de par Jui leur annoncer les nouvelles, et qu’il y
avait tant de glaces, et deneges, qu’ilz mourraient tous.
Desquelles paroles nous primmes tous 4 rire, et leur dire
que Cudouagni n’était qu’un sot, et qu’il ne savait ce
qu'il disait, et quils le dissent 4 ses messagers, et que
Jésus les garderait bien de froid s’ils lui voulaient croire.
Et lors ledit Taiguragni et son compagnon demandérent
au dit capitaine sil avait parlé a Jésus. Et il repondit
que ses Prétres y avaient parlé, et qu’il ferait beau temps.
Dequoi remercicrent fort le dit capitaine, et s’en retour-
nerent dedans le bois dire les nouvelles aux autres, les
quels a linstant sortirent dudit bois feignans étre joyeux
desdites paroles. Et pour montrer qu’ils en étaient joy-
eux, tout incontinent qu’ilz furent devant les navires,
commenctrent d’nne commune voix a faire trois cris et
hurlemens, qui est leur signe de joye, et se prindrent 4
danser et chanter comme ayaient de coutume. Mais par
résolution lédits Taiguragni et Domagaya dirent au dit
capitaine, que le dit Donnacona ne voulait point que nul
deux allat 4 Hochelaga avec lui s’il ne bailloit plege qui

le Canon de Bronze. 213

** demeurat a terre avec le dit Donnacona, A quoi leur
* répondit le capitaine que s’ils n’etaient déliberez y aller
** de bon courage, qu’ilz demeurassent, et que peur euz ne
** jairroient mettre peine a y aller.”

Ces sauyages disant que la riviére au-dessus de Québec
était dangereuse, ont ditvrai. La prédiction faite a Cartier
que la quantité de glaces et de neige les ferait tous périr,
eut bien été accomplie si Domagaya n’eut indiqné a Cartier
larbre qui devait rendre la santé & son équipage. S’ils
n’ont pas parlé de maladie, c’est sans doute qu’ils n’avait
point d’expression pour cela, mais Domagaya en con-
naissait le reméde. Comment ces sauvages ¢taient-ils si
bien instruits sur les dangers que couraient les Frangais en
hivernant en Canada plus haut que Québec? Je présume
que c’était par l’expérience, je conjecture qu’ils l’avaient
acquise par la connaissance du sort de Verazani. Les
sauvages par leurs mains jointes, par ces mots gue larividre
ne valait rien et par ce nenni est il hon, démontraient a
Cartier qu’ils le suppliaient de ne pas partir, et leur répu-
gnance 4 remonter le fleuve avec lui, quoiqu’ils eussent déja
affronté la mer sur ses vaisseaux, prouvent la parfaite con-
naissance qu’ils avaient du danger. L’invitation qu’ils
faisaient 4 Cartier de rester chez eux ne peut étre attribuée
& la crainte qu’ils ne se joignit A leurs ennemis, puisqu’il
laissait ses deux plus grands vaisseaux a Ste. Croix, et qu’il
ne parait pas qu’ils fussent en guerre avec Hochelaga, En
outre Stadaconé était un lieu cultivé et aux environs duquel
on faisait la péche et la chasse, qui offraient aux Frangais
des ressources qu’ils ne pouyaient peut-¢étre pas trouver plus
haut. Je erois que leur conseil était amical, comme leur

_ eonduite subséquente le démontra, en indiquant le remede

contre le scorbut, et en fournissantaux Frangais des vivres,

214 Dissertation sur

comme le récit de Cartier Je mentionne.

Voyons la pantomime. Cette berge ou canot qui frappe
sur lerivage représente un naufrage. Ces trois hommes si
étrangement vétus signifient des ¢trangers. La couleur
noire indique la nuit oula mort. Ils passent devant les
vaisseaux sans les regarder, ceci indique qu’ils ne connais-
saient, ou ne voyaient rien. Celui du milieu qui parle
indique le chef du vaisseau. Ces trois hommes tombent
comme morts dans le canot, ceci semble indiquer que ces
étrangers moururent. L’enlévement de ces prétendus
morts dans le canot, indique que les sauvages avaient
recueilli ces étrangers gprés leur mort et s’étaient emparé
du vaisseau, dout nul vestige ne resta. Ces sauvages étaient
convaineus que les Frangais mourraient tous, s’ils hiver-
naient plus haut que Québec, et faute de pouvoir s’exprimer
assez bien par la parole, ils eurent recours ace langage
d’action.

Ot le vaisseau de Verazani fiit-il naufrage? D’aprés
tout ce que nous avons dit ci-dessus, et d’aprés cette
tradition qui rapporte un naufiage sur la roche de Jacques
Cartier, je conjecture que ce fut 1a ob Verazani fit naufrage
Mais y perit-il? On peut croire qu’un aussi habile marin
put y réparer son vaisseau, et qu’ensuite il aura pu remonter
plus haut jusqu’a Champlain ot il aura subi le méme sort
qui menagait Cartier.

Revenons a notre canon. D’aprés toutes les informations
que j’ai pu recueillir, il parait que ce n’est gue dans
l’Amérique Espagnole que l’on rencontre des canons de
bronze de ‘cette espéce. Un officier Anglais a dita Mr,
Chasseur en avoir vu de semblables 4 Buenos Ayres qui
étaient hors d’usage depuis trés longtemps, et dont les
insurgés de cette ville se servaient faute d’autres pieces.

le Canon de Bronze. 215

Un capitaine de vaisseau a dit ’ Mr. Chasseur en avoir vu
aussi dans ’Ile de Cuba. Verazani était alors au service
de Frangois 1: Et ce fut le 24 Février 1525 que ce Roi fut
fait prisonnier 4 Pavie par les armées de l’empereur Charles
Quint, avec qui il ¢tait en guerre. Ceci explique pourquoi
Je Gouvernement Frangais oublia Vinfortuné Verazani qui
périt cette année, ou dans le cours de Vhiver suivant.

Ce fut probablement dans une de ses courses contre les
Espagnols de l’Amérique, que Verazani s’empara de cette
piéce sur un des vaisseaux de Charles Quint.

L’histoire de notre pays ne mentionne aucun naufrage
dans des temps si reculés, d’ou je conclus que ce canon est
Ala fois et le témoin des victoires de Verazani sur les
Espagnols de l’Amérique, et du lieu de sa fin tragique.

Cette Seconde partie de ma dissertation n'est qu'une
conjecture que je donne afin d’exciter les savans 4 répandre
leurs lumiéres sur un sujet qui intéresse Vhistoire de
ce pays.

Extracts respecting this Paper and the Canon.

Chambered pieces for throwing stones called ‘ Canon Perriers” ( vulgarly
Pattereras,) port pieces, stock fowlers, sling pieces, portingale bases,
martherers, were about this time (1521) much used in small ports and on
ship board, Grose’s Mitivany AntiQusrigs, vol, I. p. 384,

Inthe page above cited there is a plate of the “ Canon Perriers,” which
isan exact representation of the piece of ordnance mentioned inthis paper.

216 Country between the Rivers

Remarks on the Country lying between the
Rivers St. Maurice and SAGuENAY, on
the North Shore of the St. Lawrence, by
Lieut. INGALL, 15th Regt.

Ir was not until a very recent period that the extensive
tract of country comprised between the River St. Lawrence
and the mountain ridge forming the land’s height, towards
the north and north-west, became at all known, either
with respect to its natural history, or its capabilities for
settlement ; nor have the public at large, to the present
day, been made acquainted with the results of the various
examinations of this portion of the lower province.

Many of the surveyors who have been employed, were
engaged by private individuals; and the reports of those
sent out by the government, were of necessity confined to
the circulation of a few copies for the information of the
Legislature; and, with the exception of that excellent
paper on the ‘Geognosy of the Saguenay Country,” by
Lieut. Baddeley, published in this society’s first volume,
I know of no other authentic account of the country in
question.

{ have already had the honor of laying before the society
my observations on the country contained between the
rivers St. Maurice and Aux Lievres, as far as the junction

y

siete

|

St. Maurice and Saguenay. 217

of that river with the Ottawa. I shall therefore confine
myself in this paper to that interesting portion contained
between the St. Maurice and Saguenay.

Having in my possession several private journals of
Surveys, as well as the maps and reports of the few public
expeditions which have traversed this section of the country,
I hasten to lay before the society my gleanings from the
works above alluded to, trusting the few observations I
have made may be the means of eliciting still further infor-
mation on a subject that must be of the deepest interest to
every well wisher of Lower Canada.

The accompanying map I compiled from. plans of actual
surveys, as well as various Indian documents, and I trust
it will be found sufficient to answer the purposes of this
paper.

Tradition states that as long since as the time of the
Jesuits, the country between lake St. John and Quebec
contained foot-paths frequently used by the early French
settlers, but if this be correct, the minds of these men were
so intent on the fur trade, then in its prime, that they
cared orknew little about the agricultural resources of the
country through which they travelled. Geological science
at that period was so far behind the present day, that little
on that head could be hoped for from the few Europeans
then thinly scattered along the shores of this noble river.

_ Atlength the attention of the Provincial Government
was called to this important subject, by the circumstance of
the amazing influx of intelligent, enterprising emigrants,
who annually arrived at Quebec, and almost invariably
_ bent their steps either to the United States or the upper
province.

Fully aware of the superior healthiness of the Lower

28

218 Country between the Rivers.

province over the generality of the cultivatable lands in
Upper Canada, the Legislature determined upon ascertain-
ing whether a sufficient quantity of land fit for forming
settlements, and of a quality equal to that in the upper
province, did not exist in rear of the old French seigniorial
grants, and extending from their line, to the foot of the
mountains; and also, whether there was not a level tract
of cultivatable land within that range of mountains.

Accordingly several sums of money were placed at the
disposal of His Excellency the Governor in Chief, who
nominated Commissioners for carrying the wishes of the
House of Assembly on this subject, into effect.

In the years 1828 and 1829 expeditions were fitted out to
explore—first in 1828, the country comprised between the
rivers St. Maurice and Saguenay; and in 1829 to ascend
the St. Maurice to its supposed source and examine the
large tract of country lying between it and the Aux Liévres
descending that river into the Ottawa.

Besides these two expeditions others were fitted out on a
smaller scale to explore the country lying between the St,
Lawrence and the line marked out to be pursued by the
two principal parties. Having, as above stated, laid my
remarks before the society, on the Montreal district—f
shall proceed with a description of the district of Quebec.

The lands situated within the seigniories lying on the
shores of the St. Lawrence, from the river St. Maurice to
the city of Quebec are alluvial deposits of good soil, similar
to that existing on the shores of the Ottawa and in the
neighborhood of Montreal :—with the exception of that
great sand formation at the mouth of the St. Maurice. This
silecious sand deposit extends a few leagues to the north-east
and spreads a few miles into the interior, when the land is

St. Maurice and Saguenay. 219

again observed to improve until it meets the ridge of high
hills running from near the Grand Pille rapids towards the
river Batiscan.

A great proportion of good land has been discovered to
exist in the valleys of the Batiscan and St. Anne extending
as far as the river Jacques Cartier, capable of supporting a
large population. This tract contains but few swamps
and is well watered with numerous lakes and rivers.—
These rivers, after leaving their native mountain heights,
enerease in size and flow through a country well covered
with hard-wood ; but the land in the immediate neighbor-
hood of the hills is encumbered with the bowlder-stones so
common in most parts of Lower Canada.

In following the course of these rivers to the lakes from
which they derive their source, a wild and rocky country
is entered, abounding in steep precipices and ranges of
high hills covered with a light sand. The hollows between
these hills almost invariably contain lakes, formed by the
expansion of the rivers passing through them; the timber
growing around their shores, as well as on the sides of the
hills, consists of birch, poplar, and balsam, with occasion-
ally some pine, and a slight mixture of maple. The
small rivers and streams, tributary to the Batiscan and
Jacques Cartier, are full of heavy rapids, and these rivers,
for a considerable distance into the interior, have occasion.
ally small strips of what is termed interval land, reaching
from the shores to the foot of the mountains, but decreasing
in quality and growth of timber as they recede from the
valley of the St. Lawrence, Around many of the lakes not

— far within the mountain ridge a sprinkling of hard-wood,

such as young beech, black birch, elm, and black ash, are
now and then discovered among the young growth of

220 Country between the Rivers

timber; but these spots of good land are of such small
extent, as to be, at the present day, of little or no value.

It may not be amiss to observe that the Jacques Cartier
river derives its source from a series of small lakes in the
immediate vicinity of those which pour their waters into
the Saguenay and Lake St. John. These lakes are repre-
sented by the Indians (and it is only from them we can at
present obtain any information on the subject) as being
situated among a series of barren mountains, thinly covered
with a light sand, bearing birch and poplar; but as these
mountains are not far from the rich valley of St. John, we
must be cautious of placing implicit confidence in what
they say, particularly as their contempt of all agricultural
pursuits is proverbial.

On looking at the range of mountains seen from Cape
Diamond, they are observed to stretch in an irregular
circle from Cape Tourmente below the Island of Orleans,
sweeping round towards the River St. Lawrence, several
leagues above Quebec. On the south side of the river they
again make their appearance in asemicircular form, at the
distance of forty or fifty miles, but gradually approaching
until they terminate on the shores of the St. Lawrence
nearly opposite Cape Tourmente, enclosing within their
vast circumference an alluvial deposit, which may justly
be classed with the richest soils in America. The land in
this tract (which we may term the valley of Quebec)
is observed to rise gradually from the St. Lawrence to the
foot of the mountains on either side of the river, and is well
watered by numerous small rivers. In this paper I must
strictly confine myself to the North Shore, although the
south side of the St. Lawrence would be found equally
interesting to the agriculturist or geologist.

i oar ed

me
“re

hate

St. Maurice and Saguenay. 221

From the middle of this valley rises Cape Diamond, a
rocky hill of clay slate, lying in distinct strata, the inter-
stices filled with calcareous spar, and containing small
portions of rock crystal, from whence the Cape takes its
name.

It is a favourite opinion that a portion of the waters of
the St. Lawrence formerly flowed through the small valley
of Cap Rouge, and rejoined its parent stream through the
valley of the River Charles, thus forming an island of what
now constitutes a cape of the main land. It would require
no very great stretch of fancy to call to mind the period
when the whole of the valley of Quebec was submerged
as far as the foot of the circular range of mountains,
forming a yast lake, whose waters seem to have retired
gradually, without leaving behind any of those tremendous
marks of violence, which appear to have been the result of
the rushing of the waters from the mountain heights.

We may very fairly come to the conclusion that these
extensive basins retained the waters in a quiescent state for
many ages subsequent to the first convulsion, gradually
depositing the carbonate of lime, which was held in solu-
tion, and which enclosed in the operation, the numerous
marine animals now found embedded in the limestone
formation, such as are found in the lime rock of Montmo-
renci;—this must have been previous to the last great
catastrophe, as we find howlder-stones of an enormous
size lying on the surface of the secondery formation. It is
worth mentioning that many of the lakes in the interior are
gradually decreasing, but in no instance has any depost,
but of sand, been the result.

The rocks, in situ, found in the section now under
notice, are grey-wacke, clay-slate, and limestone ; but this

222 Country between the Rivers

part of the subject has been so ably handled by Mr.
Baddeley, that nothing more need or can be said on that
interesting branch of science. I will merely, in quitting
this digression, state that bowlders of considerable size are
found scattered over the summit of the cape; these stones
are of sienite, sienitic gniess, and a beautiful black sienite,
(hornblende in excess) containing minute crystals of man-
ganesian garnet. Not any of these rocks are found, in situ,
nearer than the range of mountains situated to the north
of Quebec.

The soil in the immediate neighborhood of the cape,
forms a thin layer over the surface of the rock; in the
valleys is marshey and cold, improving as the land rises
towards the foot of the mountains, and again falling off,
until it becomes more or less sandy and encumbered with
rocks.

The mountains which recede far back in the rear of
Lorette, an Indian village to the north-west of Quebec,
contain a continuation of good land as far as the forks of
the river Jacques Cartier, in the township of Stoneham, and
extending into part of Tewksbury. This rich country is
generally known by the name of “ Val Cartier.”

As the township of Stoneham is ascended towards the
river St. Annes, in a W. N. W. direction, it becomes more
hilly, and the soil consists of light sand much covered with
stones. In this direction spots of land are occasionally
seen on the shores of the small lakes and streams, which
might be cultivated ; but they occur detached and of small
extent.

A singular rock existing in this part of the country was
described to me by my friend Mr. Adams, an accurate ob-
server of the beauties of nature. He described it as exhibiting

%

‘

St Maurice and Saguenay. 223

a front of clear vock, about sixty or seventy feet in width,
glittering in the sun with a brilliant whiteness which
rivalled the purity of crystalline marble, and conspicuous,
towering above the adjacent hills for a considerable dis-
tance. Onapproaching its base, Mr. Adams discovered it
to consist of pure white quartz and felspar, the latter some-
what in astate of decomposition ; it had all the appearance
of having formerly been the bed of a cascade, in which
case the waters must have fallen from a height of at least
five hundred feet into the valley below, where are now
situated three lakes, St. Thomas, St. Vincent, and
William. Indeed the shores of many of the numerous
lakes and rivers in this part of the country, are composed
of rocky precipices or bluff head-lands, giving to the
scenery a degree of wildness peculiarly characteristic of
the mountain regions of Canada. Nor are these stupendous
precipices confined to the shores of lakes and rivers ; they
are found existing in various situations where water does
not occur in the dreary tract extending to the height
of land.

Near the last great fork of the Jacques Cartier river, the
country consists of a chain of almost inaccessable mountains
extending to the north-west and sweeping round until they
join that broken chain of conical shaped hills lying to the
northward of Quebec ; and through whose passes, tradition
says, a road to lake St. John formerly existed.

It is generally observed that the south-east sides of the
lakes and rivers situated in the higher parts of Stoneham,
are of superior quality of soil and less elevated character
than on the north-west. The country comprised between
lake 8t. Thomas and the last branch of the St. Annes river
is generally mountainous, and the soil sandy, but on the

224 Country between the River's

sides of the hills, hard-wood is occasionally discovered;
interspersed among other timber. To the westward of
this tract the hills.become more rocky and barren. This
chain of hills are not less than eighteen hundred or two
thousand feet above the level of the St. Lawrence, at
Quebec, and not distant more than forty or fifty miles from
that city. To the south-east of this range of mountains near
the small river Ki,a,los,ko,to,so, an extensive valley occurs,
but the soil is poor and the timber small. The sides of the
hills bounding this vailey are full of dangerous chasms
rendering their ascent difficult, even to the Indian hunters.

Between lakes William and the township of Tewksbury,
ifwe except about a mile of swamp, the land is tolerably
good and level, but much covered with bowlders : this
tract may be considered as a continuation of the upper parts
of “ Val Cartier.”

The north-east branch of the Jacques Cartier is the
boundary of the moderately good land towards the north
east. Several mountains of a conical shape having the
appearance of extinct volcanoes are seen in this part of the
country, but 1am not aware of lava orany vitrified rock
having been noticed—when the country becomes more
traversed, doubtless important geological discoveries on this
subject will be made.

The character of the land in the township of Stoneham,
may generally be applied to ‘Tewksbury, as far as the point
where that township is clipped in by the range of hills
which form a part of the great mountain chain.

I shall now proceed to a description of the small portion
of the country that has hitherto been explored lying
between Cape Tourmente and the river Saguenay as far
back as lake St. John. Our knowledge of this section is

=——v

r

“St. Maurice and Saguenay. 22:

very circumscribed—but it is to be hoped the necessity
will be seen, of acquiring an accurate knowledge of every
league of this extraordinary part of the district.

The coast from Cape Tourmente to St. Paul’s Bay,
exhibits a series of high capes and head-lands, gradually
diminishing towards St. Paul’s Bay, which is encompassed
by gentle hills. The land is considered, for some distance
back, as tolerably good, and in rear of the Petite Riviére, a
quantity of good land is found extending round the valley
of St. Urbain. In the interior, to the rear of St. Antoine,
after gradually ascending for a few leagues from the
seigniorial line, and thence descending from the summit of
the range of hills for a league, a level tract of land is fallen
in with, extending for about six miles in every direction ;
beyond this valley, towards the south-west, the country is
known only to the Indians, who represent it as moun-
tainous and covered with a light sand, bearing spruce and
birch, and much encumbered with rocks. Towards the
West, mountain is seen to succeed mountain, as far as the
eye can distinguish from the most elevated spot. Great
fires appear to have occurred ata recent period in this
part of the country.

The range of hills between the Eboulements and Malbay

_ are extremely steep, but more in the interior extensive
devel tracts are found, consisting of a black vegetable mould
overlying sand. The country dividing the St. Anne’s from

the Cui,gat,chou,an river, is described as being a series of
barren rocky hills and swampy valleys full of lakes.

In the immediate vicinity of the upper part of Malbay
fiver, a range of steep and rugged hills occur, totally unfit
for cultivation, extending far to the west and north-west,
‘but in the neighborhood of the Malbay lakes some extensive

2¥

226 Country between the Rivers

tracts of level land are found. In a north direction towards
the little Saguenay river, and about ten miles in rear of the
seigniorial line, an extensive piece of burnt land is met
with bearing a young growth of birch, balsam and spruce ;
but around Lac. Neir some high rocky land occurs,
and the country in a south-east direction towards the St.
Lawrence becomes mountainous. The rocks in this part
of the country are sienites.

Although an opinion very generally prevails, borne out
by tradition, that an active volcano is somewhere in exis-
tence among these mountains, still it wants the confirmation
of occular proof—for not one of the Indians who traverse
these dreary regions in pursuit of game, have ever seen the
slightest appearance of fire issuing from the earth; nor
have I ever heard of any scorex or other vitrified rock
having been discovered in the country now under obser-
vation. Without doubt the coast between Cape Tourmente
and Malbay is frequently troubled with shocks of earth-
quake, but whether these shocks are occasioned by the
workings of some neighboring volcano is a matter of mere
speculation. Nor does the appearance of the land bear
evidence of there having ever existed a volcano to the south
of the river Saguenay, or from the well known fertility of
decomposed lava, we should find a very different kind of
soil from that hitherto discovered. Ifa volcano is at the
present period in a state of active operation, I should be
much more inclined to suppose it seated among the
unexplored mountains of the Labrador, to the north-east
of the Saguenvy, or the gulph of St. Lawrence.

To the north of the river Noir as far as the river Saguenay
the country is hilly, terminating in the stupendous -preci-
pices which form the coasts of the latter river. The

St. Maurice and Saguenay. 227

vallies between these hills are of the poorest description of
soil, and encumbered with the debris of the adjacent hills,
The land around Bai des Roches is likewise hilly, “but
decreases in height in the neighborhood of the river aux.
Canard, where some good soil is found; a flat tract also
exists behind L’Anse St. Etienne, surrounded by high hills,
the soil a mixture of clay and sand, consequently of
agricultural value. Another level is found extending in a
zigzag form between the mountains, from near the
mouth of the river aux Foin towards the little Saguenay, the
soil good but much encumbered with stones. Several other
level spots are found between the river St.John andthe little
Saguenay, but near the junction of these rivers with the
Saguenay asteep ridge of mountain land occurs. The
timber in all this portion of the country is generally of a
bad description.

~The country from Ha-ha Bay into the interior towards
the west and south-west consists of moderately sized hills
which encrease in height and abruptness toward§ the south-
west. The soil in the valleys for a short distance consists
ofa greyish colored stiff clay ultimately giving place to
sandy land; but from Ha-ha Bay to Chicoutimi is good
ultivatable Jand, which has been traced some miles
owards the south-west, though its actual extent is at
ntunknown. The soil is a good mixture of clay and
d blended with carbonate of lime; and limestone is -
din the neighborhood, For several leagues from lake
. John, to the west and south-west, the soil is capable of
Itivation and fit for immediate settlement. At the old
t establishment on this lake about three hundred acres
re to have been, formerly, in cultivation, but at
ntitis running wild. The soil between the rivers

228 Country between the Rivers

Metabetshuan and Onigatshouan is described as particularly
good. After ascending the Assuopmoussoin for about
thirty miles, the land again becomes barren and moun-
tainous, and between that river and the Mistissinia con-
siderable tract of poor sandy land is met with. Following
the course of the Mistissini, good land is discovered for
about forty miles ; when a range of high and barren moun-
tains again occur, abounding in Jakes and rivers. On the
immediate shores of the lake between the Mistissini and
river Coucouatin, the land is low and swampy. The land
around lake Onigatshouan is hilly and covered with a light
sand; the timber a dwarf growth of spruce, poplar, and birch;
and this character of country continues without intermission
as far as the shores of the St. Maurice, and should a level
spot of interval land be discovered on the shores of the
numerous lakes and rivers which water this part of the
district, it will invariably be found to consist of a light sand
covered with bowlder rocks,

In reviewing the foregoing statement it appears that
there does exist a large portion of very valuable cultivatable
land fit for immediate settlement, amounting to several
million acres, particularly around lake St. John. This
tract possesses the advantage of a remarkably healthy
climate ; resembling, by all accounts, that enjoyed by the
inhabitants of Montreal.

That mineralogical treasures will at some future period
be discovered in Lower Canada can scarcely be doubted,
from the many indications of metallic veins (particularly
common iron ore and carburet of iron, commonly called
black lead,) which have been found in the neighborhood
of St. Paul’s Bay, and also in the back townships to the
north-east of the Ottawa, in the Montreal district.

St. Maurice and Saguenay. 229

As government have paid great attention to the accounts
of the Saguenay country lately laid before them, it is to be
hoped that ere long we shall have the satisfaction of finding
the country around lake St. John yielding subsistence to
a hardy and industrious race of peasantry. But previous
to the formation of settlements in these remote parts, it
appears absolutely necessary that the large tract of country
lying between Quebec and the already explored shores of
lake St. John, should be scientifically examined, not only
that its actual resources should be known, but also for the
purpose of ascertaining the practicability of opening a
road across the country, so that in the event of townships
being laid out on the upper parts of the Saguenay, and
western shore of jlake St. John, the settlers may have
access to a market without encountering the long and
dangerous navigation of the rivers Saguenay and St.
Lawrence. The actual distance, drawing a line nearly north
from Quebec to lake St. John is not more than one hundred
and twenty miles; whereas the route by water would be
nearly two hundred and fifty miles, and this latter course,
from the nature of these rivers, would be closed during the
winter mouths, the precise season when the settler could
best spare time from his farm, and when he could convey
his produce to market by means of sleighs with the greatest
possible facility.

Doubtless many interval spots of tolerably fair land
would be found on the shores of the lakes and rivers
bordering such a road, which would be speedily settled
from the circumstance of their being situated ona great
thoroughfare,

It ust also be borne in mind that the full extent of
good land on the Chicoutimi has not been fully ascertained,

230 Dark days of Canada.

and it may, upon a closer examination, be found to extend
between the ridges of mountains ina southerly direction
much nearer to Quebec than is at present imagined.

At all events it would be attended with highly beneficial
results, were a party sent overland from Quebec, to explore
more closely the intervening country. Certainly great
difficulties would be found in providing a sufficient supply
of provisions, but by sending two parties of trusty Indians,
the one from Chicoutimi and the other from Lorette,
depéts might be formed on the shores of some well known
lakes, sufficient to supply the wants of an exploring party.
Were no other object attained by sending out such a party,
the additional geographical knowledge which would be the
result, would amply compensate for all the labor and
expense employed on the occasion.

A few Notes upon the Dark Days oF
Canapa, by the Honorable Chief Justice
SEWELL, President of the Soctety.

Amonc the atmospherical phenomena of Canada, the
dark days of October, 1785, and of July, 1814, appear
worthy of notice. They were remarkable for their pecu-
liarity of character, and for the circumstances by which
they were accompanied ; and as an attempt to explain the
cause of the remarkable obscurity by which they were

eS ee

~ hed

Dark days of Canada. 231

more particularly distinguished has never, to my know-
ledge, been made, I propose in the present paper to offer
to the society such accounts of these phenomena as I have
been able to collect, with a few observations, which I hope
will not be thought unworthy of their attention.

The first dark gay of which we have any detailed account,
was Sunday, the 16th of October, 1785. On the ninth of
that month, ashort period of obscurity occurred at Quebec,
about four in the afternoon, and during its continuance
the sky in the north-east quarter below the city, exhibited
a luminous appearance upon the line of the horizon, ofa
yellow tinge. On the fifteenth, about three o’clock in the
afternoon, there was a repetition of the same luminous
appearance in the horizon, in the same quarter, the north-
east, accompanied by a second period of obscurity, some-
what longer in duration than the first. Both of these
periods were accompanied by violent gusts of wind, by
thunder, lightning, and rain.*

The Morning of Sunday, the 16th of October, 1785, was
perfectly calm, and there was a thick fog, but the fog was
nothing more than what is often seen at that season of the
year ; towards nine o’clock, a light air from the north-east
sprung up, which increased rapidly. The fog, by ten
o'clock, was entirely dissipated; black clouds were then

seen rapidly advancing from the north-east, and by half

after ten, it was so dark, that printing of the most usual
type could not be read; this lasted for upwards of ten
minutes, and was succeeded by a violent gust of wind, with

rain, thunder, and lightning, after which the weather
became brighter, until twelve o’clock, when a second

* Quebec Gazette, 20th October, 1785,

232 Dark days of Canada.

period of so much obscurity took place, that lights became
necessary, and were used in all the churches. This period
was rather longer in its duration, than the first; a third
period of obscurity came on at two o’clock, a fourth about
three, and a fifth at half past four o’clock, during which
the intensity of the darkness was very great, and is described
by those who witnessed it, to have been that of perfect
midnight. During the whole of these periods, and of the
interval between them, vast masses of clouds, of a yellow
appearance, which was very remarkable, were driven with
great rapidity from the north-east toward the south-west
by the wind; there was much lightning, thunder, and
rain. The periods of total darkness were about ten minutes
each, and although the intervals were not so dark, they
afforded but little light.

The Barometer was stationary the whole time at 29 5,
and the Thermometer, which stood in the morning at 52°
fell two or three degrees in the course of the day.*

The water which fell from the clouds was extremely
black; and the next day, upon the surface of what was
found in different vessels, a yellow powder was floating,
which, upon examination, proved to be sulphur ; a deposit
of a black substance in powder, was also found in the bottom
of all these vessels, but I am not aware that it was sub-
mnitted to any test whatever.+

Phenomena similar to those which have been described,
took place at Montreal, on the same sixteenth day of October,
but the darkness did not there commence until about two
in the afternoon ; the clouds were of the same remarkable

* Meteorological Journal of the late Rev. Dr. Sparke.
+ Quebee Gazette, 20th October, 1785,—and Dr. Sparke’s Journal.

Dark days of Canada. 233

yellow tinge, and were accompanied by gusts of wind,
thunder, lightning, and rain; there was a_ period of
obscurity at half past two o’clock, a second at a quarter
past three, and a third at five, and during all of them the
: darkness was so intense, thut to use the expression of one
_ who was an eye witness, “jamais nuit ne fut plus obscur.”

A medical gentleman of Montreal perceiving the black
_ ecolour of the rain, collected, upon a strained piece of mus-
lin, a certain quantity of the black pulverised matter with
which it was charged, and by rubbing it between the
fingers, and by ignition, this was found to be strongly
impregnated with sulphur. It does not, however appear
that any other experiment was made with it, so that we
have no further data to determine its qualities,—a circum-
stance much to be regretted.*

I shall now lay before the society some accounts of the
more recent appearances of the 3d of July, 1814, which
will be found to be very similar to those which were
observed on the 16th of October, 1785.

‘These accounts consist principally in four narratives,
which | shall give at large. One from the pen of an Officer
of the Royal Engineers, who is supposed to be Capt. Payne,
describes the appearances at the Bay of Seven Islands,
e Anticosti, on the second and third of July. The
describes the appearances during the second, at
Chat, from observations made by some Officers, who
eon board the Sir William Heathcott, Transport, which
the whole of that day at anchor in the River St. Law-
at that point. The third contains some additional
rvations respecting the appearances on the second of

* Quebec Gazette, 27th October, 1785.
20a

234 Dark days of Canada.

July, made on that day, in another ship which also lay off
Cape Chat; and the last narrative describes the appearances
of the third day of July, upon the Banks of Newfoundland,
of which I was an eye witness. It is taken from a journal
of a voyage to England, which I made at that period in the
Phenix, from Quebec to England.

Before I enter upon these narratives, I beg leave to,
premise that the darkness of the 2d of July, 1814, does not
appear to have extended much beyond Cape Chat. <A
mixture of ashes, and a black substance in powder, fell in
partial showers at Kamouraska; and the day was there
observed to be dull and gloomy,* but it was not considered
to be peculiarly dark, and on this side of Kamouraska it
does not appear to have attracted any particular notice ; at
Quebec also it exhibited nothing extraordinary except
that yellow tinge upon theclouds, bordering the line of
the horizon in the north-east quarter of the heavens, which
has already been mentioned, and is not unfrequently seen
from the walls of the garrison.*

The narrative of Captain Payne is taken from Tilloch’s
Philosophical Magazine, and Mr. Tilloch’s correspondent
makes the following introductory remark upon it :—‘* Your
<¢ philosophical readers will not fail to notice the coin-
« cidence between the phenomena described below, and
€* those which were observed at St. Vincent, and other
** Islands in the West Indies, upwards of a year ago.”

This narrative is entitled :—

«* Remarks on board ship in the River St. Lawrence,
« distant about twenty miles from the Bay of Seven
“ Islands aboye the Island of Anticosti, 3d July, 1814.”

* Information from several persons.

FOR ID ee

Dark days of Canada. 235

* Yesterday morning at six a. M. the weather dark and
® cloudy, with a few drops of rain falling ; winds high and
* variable, chiefly from the eastward, and through the
* day carrying all sail, the sails however of very little use,
* from a very heavy swell of the sea from the westward,
“ which rendered the pitching of the ship very great, and
« nearly endangered the carrying away of the masts and
“ yards ; towards evening the swell abated ; during the
* day the clouds appeared to be coming with great rapidity
“ from the northward ; horizon and atmosphere thick and
“hazy; at night the darknes excessive, the masts and
© rigging scarcely visible from deck ; about nine p. M.a
“ sort of dust or ashes commenced falling and continued
“ during the night; towards the morning the whole
“ atmosphere appeared red and fiery to a wonderful degree,
“ and the moon then at the full not visible, and the
* appearance through the cabin windows and crystal
lights on the deck singular in the extreme, as if sur-
rounded by a mass of fire, the sea sparkling much and
“ in a manner not usual in these latitudes.

* At half-past seven in the morning, candles lighted in
“ the cabin, and the hour by a watch at nine scarcely
visible, the flame of the candle burning ofa bright
- bluish white colour, and the fire in the cook-house the
© same, the wind dying away to a dead calm. ‘Towards
noon to-day, the atmosphere resumed something of its
natural appearance, and the sun visible, but red and
“ fiery, as in the winter season, as if seen through the
darkened glass of a quadrant, and by degrees becoming
“ more of a yellow colour. Weather hazy and sultry, a
“ dead calm, and the sea scarcely agitated. The sea
© covered with ashes, and a bucket of water taken up

236 Dark days of Canada.

«ce

€

"

‘

nN

it

ee

a of

n
-”

66

na
n

na
n

n
nn

“a
n

n
*\

ck

“ec

appeared nearly as black as writing ink, from the
quantity of ashes which had fallen ; they appeared as if
those of burnt wood, and not of a heavy sandy nature,
a strong smell perceptible in the air, and a violent head
ache complained of by many on board.

“ Not having a thermometor on board, the temperature
could not be observed; it did not, although close and
sultry at times, appear to be remarkable for the season
of the year. Numbers of small birds flying about,
seemingly much disturbed. The darkness at 8 a.M.
to-day, as great as is usual in London in the month of
December at the same hour. From the darkness during
the night, the seamen were obliged to use lanterns with
candles on deck to conduct the navigation of the ship.
“ Longitude 65 48 west, and latitude 49 49 north,—
4th July; this day the ashes falling in a small
quantity, and the darkness last night excessive again,
so much so that the hand could not be observed while
touching the face ; at half past three p. mM, scarcely able
to see the hour by a watch. The ashes collected on
deck appeared to be those of burnt wood, but darker
and more heavy than the ashes from a tobacco pipe.—
That collected from the surface of the sea, when dried,
resembled a cake of shoe blacking; several ships in
diflerent quarters of the gulf and river St. Lawrence
observed the same appearance of darkness, which appears
to have been pretty general, although not to the same
degree. No reason can as yet be assigned for this
extraordinary phenomenon,—it is conjectured by many
to be the consequence of a volcano, but the ashes by no
means resembled those thrown up by the volcano on St.
Vincent, in the West Indies, some time since,”

|
:

Dark days of Canada. 237

The narrative of the Officers who were on board the Sir
Wm, Heathcott, Transport, states that on the 2d July, 1814,
there was a heavy fall of ashes and sand, which was succeeded
by a dense haze, which gradually increased until eleven
o’clock in the day, when it cleared up, and the sun was of a
blood red colour. At one o’clock it again became so dark
that the soldiers on board could not see to divide out their
dinners without lighted candles. This darkness continued
until night; and during the whole time ashes fell in
abundance and completely covered the deck. The trans-
port was the whole day off Cape Chat, the wind blew
gently from the north shore of the St. Lawrence. The
people residing down the river declared there had not
been any appearance of fire in the woods.*

The third narrative is as follows :—

* On the second instant (July 1814), being off Cape Chat,
** the sun assumed a very bright blood colour, and at half-
* past two a total darkness ensued, this continued till
** about sun set, when the horizon somewhat cleared, but
“ at nine o’clock it became so dark that it was impossible
“ to observe any object, however near, without the help of
“ Janterns. The ship laid too till two a... when the
** obscurity disappeared. It is difficult to account for this
* phenomenon, as it was not observed beyond fifteen
_ © leagues on either side of the spot where the ship lay.—
“ For three day previous some ashes and smoke had been
“ observed ; but on the second no symptoms of burnt wood
“were felt. It may be presumed that some volcanic

* The above was received from the Officers who were on board the Sir
William Heatheott, by Lieut. Ingall, of the 15th regiment, who favoured
me with a copy.

238 Dark days of Canada.

“ eruption has taken place in a north-easterly ditection;
“ which caused total darkness in a breadth of about fifteen
* leagues from each side of Cape Chat.’’*

The fourth narrative is in these words.—

July 3d, 1814—Sunday.—A most extraordinary day. In
the morning dark thick weather, and fog of a deep yellow
colour, which increased in density and colour until four
o'clock p.m. at which hour the cabin was entirely dark,
and we dined by candle light; the binnacle also was
lighted shortly after. In the evening, at twenty minutes
aftersun set, there was total darkness, so much so that on the
deck a man could not see another at three feet distance, this
continued until the moon arose, when there was some little
appearance of light, but very little; it gradually went off
until it disappeared in the course of the fourth of July.—
The wind during this extraordinary obscurity was westerly,
with some northing, and the Phenix was in latitude 45’,
50", north, and longitude 53’, 12", west.

- The relative positions of the ship in which Captain Payne
was embarked, the Sir William Heathcott, with her
associate transport, and of the Phanix, may be readily seen
upon reference to a map of the gulf of St: Lawrence, and
from inspection it will be perceived that the northerly
wind which blew on the second of July carried the
clouds of ashes, dust, sand, smoke, and vapour across the
River St. Lawrence, in a line from the Bay of Seven Islands
to Cape Chat, and that by the westerly wind which set in,
in the night of the second of July, they were carried, proba-
bly with more of the same description, across the gulf of
St. Lawrence and the Island of Newfoundland, to the place

* Quebec Gazette, July 28th, 1814.

au Ce

| ow tae
eee

a ee ee as |

‘

Dark days of Canada. 239

in which the Phenix then was, and on the ¢hird of July
enveloped her in the same obscurity with which Captain
Payne’s ship, the Sir William Heathcott, and the other
transport were enveloped on the preceding day.

For the phenomena of the dark days of Canada which
have been thus detailed there appear to be but two causes
to which they can be attributed—the conflagration of a
forest, and volcanic action.

As to the conflagration of a forest, the facts of which we
are in possession, do not appear to warrant a belief that
such can be the cause. It seems impossible to suppose that
the conflagration of any forest could have produced a mass
of smoke so dense and so extensive as to overspread (as it
did in October, 1785) the surface of a territory exceeding
certainly three hundred miles in length, and probably two
hundred miles in breadth,* and producing at its utmost
longitudinal extremity, and at mid day, the obscurity of
the darkest night. And as the whole of the cause of this
obscurity proceeded, apparently, from the Labrador country,
where forest trees are few in number, stinted in size, and
spread in small isolated patches over a general surface of
rock, it is the more improbable. In point of fact, such
a mass of wood-smoke could not have been collected

* In October, 1785, the obscurity extended so as to comprehend on one
tide, Fredericton, in the province of New Brunswick, and on the other
Montreal. A ship the Adamant, belonging to the house of Brook,
Watson & Co. in which, itis understood, the late Sir John Johnson was a
passenger, on the 16th of October, 1785, was, in the morning, off the
east end of the Island of Anticosti; there it was then clear weather, but to-
wards the west they saw a heavy black cloud, and by twelve o’clock on the

same day had sailed into it, and very shortly afterwards found themselves

enveloped in perfect obscurity,

340 Dark days of Canada.

without exposing the individuals which it enveloped, to the
danger of suffocation; and it is not said in any of the
accounts which are extant, that this was the case, or that
their eyes were affected, or that there was even a smell of
wood-smoke. Captain Payne, has indeed observed “ that the
dust or ashes collected on the deck appeared to be those of
burnt wood;” but he immediately adds, that they were
darker and more heavy than the ashes from a tobacco pipe,
which are also vegetable ashes, though of another descrip-
tion ; and from the quantity of salts which tobacco contains,
tobacco ashes would probably be found heavier, or at least
as heavy as an equal quantity of common wood-ashes. He
mentions also that the powder which was collected from
the surface of the sea, when dried, resembled a cake of
blacking, and from this circumstance I am led to believe
that what was so collected might be of a bituminous cha-
racter, or possibly the powder of volcanic matter. If it had
been wood-coal in powder, I do not apprehend that it
would have caked when dried; and I may add that there
was no appearance of fire in the woods, and that this fact
was particularly noticed by the inhabitants during their
intercourse with the Officers on board the Sir William
Heathcott, and the third narrative expressly states that
<‘ on the second no symptoms of burnt wood were felt.”
But there are among the facts which are detailed, some
which cannot be reconciled to the supposition that the
phenomena in question were occasioned by the burning of
aforest. LIallude particularly to the presence of sulpbur
among the black pulverised matter which fell on the 16th
of October, 1785 ; and to the precipitation of the latter in
water, from which circumstance it may be presumed to
have been of mineral origin, and similar to that which

—

Dark days of Canada. 241

Was ejected from the Souffrier mountain of St. Vincents on
the 30th of April 1812 ; to the extraordinary swell of the
sea which preceded the appearances which took place on the
2d of July, 1814; to the blueish white flame of the lights and
fires mentioned by Capt. Payne ; to the strong smeil which
was perceived in the air, and which, without affecting the
eyes, produced violent head ache ; and to the shower of
sand mentioned by the Officers who were on board the
Sir William Heathcott.

These facts appear to me to render it necessary to impute
the phenomena of the dark days of Canada to volcanic
action—and to indicate strongly the existence of a volcano
(not yetextinct) in the Labrador territory. An inference
which is strengthened by these considerations, viz: That
on the second of July, the Bay of Seven Islands and Cape
Chat were enveloped in the darkness of that day bya
northerly wind, and that on the third of July, while the
weather was clear at Cape Chat, the Bay of Seven Islands,
and that part of the Atlantic Ocean which lies in latitude
45’, 50”, north, and longitude 53’, 12”, west, (the position
of the Phanix on that day) were enveloped in similar
darkness by “ a westerly wind with some northing ;” for if
a map of the gulf of St Lawrence and the adjacent coasts
be inspected, and the position of Captain Payne’s ship, of
the Sir William Heatheott, transport, and her consort,
and of the Phanix be considered, it will be evident that
the wind as well on the second as on the third of July,
traversed the Labrador territory, producing in two differ-
ent directions from that territory, the same effects.

The existence of volcanoes in the north of Europe, parti-
eularly Hecla and Jan Mayen, affords ground for the belief,
that volcanoes may also be found to exist in the north of the

20

2A2 Bark days of Canada.

American continent. The north shore of the St. Lawrence
appears also to exhibit proofs of volcanic action. Malbaie,
the Eboulements, and perhaps the promontory of
Quebec, may be cited in support of this assertion, and
the frequent recurrence of slight shocks of earthquakes in
the places first enumerated, may be mentioned as facts
from which a continuance of this volcanic action may be
inferred. There is, moreover, a good deal of coincidence
in the facts stated in the preceding narratives of the dark
days, and those which are stated by Charlevoix, in his
description of the earthquake in 1663, which is generally
supposed to have been of voleanic origin.

“ A Tadoussac” (says he) “ I] pleut de da cendre pendant
six heures.” —Tom. 1. p. 367.—And in page 366, he adds,
* Une poussiere qui s’eleva fut prise pour une Fumee, et
“* fit craindre un embrasement universel.”

I will only add, that among the Indian tribes on the
north shore of the St. Lawrence a traditional belief of the
existence of a voleano in the Labrador country is said to
prevail ; but of the truth of this assertion, common report is
the only evidence I can offer ; except, indeed, to those who
may still be inclined to believe that basalt may ultimately
be found to be a volcanic and not an aqueous production,
for by such persons the recent discovery of basaltic columns
on the coast of Labrador, described in the first volume of
the transactions of this society,* may be considered to
afford some further proof of the authenticity of this
tradition.

* Page 71 to73.

Topographical Notices. 243

Topographical Notices of the Country lying
between the Moutu oF THE RIDEAU and
PENETANGUISHINE, on Lake Huron, by
ALEXANDER SHERRIFF, Esquire.

Tue extent of country along the Ottawa River, above its
present settlements, and stretching from thence to Lake
Huron, forms perhaps the most important portion of Upper
Canada, yet to be explored with a view to settlement,—
Inhabitants on the Ottawa are particularly interested in
ascertaiaing the nature of this region, as the future pro-
gress of improvement of every kind, in this part of Canada,
evidently depends mainly upon it. For some years back it
has been a subject of regret that the settlements in the
neighborhood of this fine river, after thinly extending
along the lake of the Chats, have nearly come to a stand,
The chief cause is evidently the inaccessible nature of
the country beyond that lake, from the obstructions in
the navigation, and the total want of good roads in the
direction of the vacant lands; and another circumstance
which has silently operated in causing a remissness with
regard to removing these obstacles, is a general opinion
(too hastily taken up from people caring little about the
_ extension of population) that the nature of the country on
- the higher parts of the Ottawa is not such as to warrant
any unusual exertion to forward its settlement,

244 Topographical Notices.

It is certainly true that there is a considerable extent
of barren ground along the Ottawa. The mountain ridge
which narrowly skirts that river, from the Long Sault
upwards, occupies a great portion of its northern shores, and
while these barren heights are almost constantly in the view
of the traveller, it is also true that there is seldom any where
much display of fertility immediately along the water, the
good tracts being generally lined with strips of drowned or
stony land. Notwithstanding these appearances, however,
there continue to be, far above the present settlements,
very extensive tracts of excellent soil on both sides of the
river, sufficient, without looking far into the interior, to
render it a subject of interest, by what means they may be
laid open for settlement.

As to the main body of the country between Lake Huron
and the Ottawa, its southern extremity from the Simcoe
water's to the last surveys on the Ottawa, has been traversed
by two exploring parties, and in this direction a barren
rocky range of high lands is described to extend nearly
across the whole. Respecting the lands north of this, it
has hitherto been very difficult to obtain any distinct intel-
ligence, as they have been frequented only by a few illiterate
servants of the traders. But it appearing almost certain,
from various corroborating reports, that immediately to
the north of these explored tracts, the country became less
elevated and more fertile, the journey, of which the follow-
ing observations are the result, was undertaken in order
to examine into these important circumstances,

The nature of the country as far as a journey of this kind
could ascertain it, though differing materially from what
report had described, has far exceeded my most sanguine
expectations. From the unfavourable accounts which

, [am <—

Topographical Notices. 245

travellers have commonly given of the Nipissing route to
Lake Huron, we had confined our hopes to finding merely
a narrow, low, and fertile tract to the south of that route.
—This however, is far different from the reality. About
the sources of the Madawaska, near latitude 45’ 45"', the
interior of the country forms a great table land, gradually
declining towards Lake Nipissing, and consisting almost
uniformly, as far as I have been able to ascertain, of hard-
wood lands, of more or less fertility.

Along the south-westerly route of the Nesswabic and
Muskoka, this description of country extends from within
thirty miles of the Ottawa to the immediate vicinity of Lake
Huron, a distance by the usual route of at least one hundred
and forty miles ; along which, excepting a few miles at the
height of land, there is almost constantly in view a vigorous
growth of hard-wood. ‘Towards Lake Nipissing, I was
assured by various persons well acquainted with that
neighborhood, that the country continues much of the
same nature as far as the lake, round its southern and
eastern extremity, and along the upper parts of the little
river.

The Nipissing route is undoubtedly the lowest which
will be found from the Ottawa to Lake Huron. With
regard to the country in this direction, the greatest mis-
conceptions have been prevalent, not only as to the nature
of the lands, but as to distances and elevation. Contrary
to every opinion which I had previously formed, I have
now hardly a doubt, that on a proper examination, this
route will be found to combine the greatest facilities for
effecting a navigation between these waters. But I shall
how proceed to state in detail the information obtained
on my journey.

246 Topographical Notices.

The interruption in the navigation of the Ottawa, imme-
diately above the entrance of the Rideau Canal, extends
about five miles, in which, besides the Chaudiére falls,
there are three short rapids—the Petite Chaudiére, the
Remmok, and the Des Chenes, all running over a bed of
dark blue limestone, and making together, a descent of
from sixty to seventy feet. Between these rapids are short
spaces of navigable water, which it seems practicable to
connect without meeting with any unusual obstacle.

It has, however, been suggested that the best plan to
improve this part of the river, would be by connecting the
Chaudiére lake (which commences above the rapids) with
the Rideau Canal, thereby attaining the necessary elevation
by means of the first eight locks on that work. In the view
of affording a communication between the Rideau line of
navigation and the upper parts of the Ottawa, it is evidently
the preferable method to form the junction before descend-
ing to the foot of the Chaudiére rapids; and ‘there is also
every reason to believe that this would be much the cheapest
mode of improvement. I have attentively examined the
ground between the head of the rapids and the reservoir at
Dow’s swamp, about two miles up the canal, from which
the cut would naturally be led off. Throughout the whole
distance, of about six miles, the ground declines gradually,
or in small sudden descents towards the Ottawa, without
any hollows or cross ridges whatever; so thata branch
might be formed from the swamp to the Chaudiére lake,
requiring little more excavation than the necessary depth,
and without much winding. The Rideau Canal, at. the
swamp, is about fifteen feet above the lake, which would
allow of the cut being kept entirely apart from the rock
near the rapids; and this level may be continued along

Topographical Notices. 247

a ridge of deep soil to the bank of the lake, where of
course a lock would be required. ‘This lock, and an
excavation of the above description, can hardly be con-
ceived to require half the expense of a separate cut near
the rocky shores of the rapids, with the necessary lockage
of sixty or seventy feet. Keeping in view therefore, the
locks at the entrance of the Rideau Canal, the improve-
ment of this formidable interruption may be considered as
half completed.
The Chaudiére lake extends about thirty miles in rather
a circuitous course, winding southward towards the upper
end, and is from one to two miles in breadth. On the
north shore, the land is remarkably fine for the first ten
miles ; they have been surveyed and partially settled for
many years, and the remaining lots are fast filling up.—
_ Beyond this, the north coast is low, and I believe generally
poor, excepting some small tracts at the foot of the hills,
which here approach within four or five miles of the river.
On the south shore the soil is better, though there is a space
of an indifferent quality about the centre of the lake,
stretching some miles into the country. The whole bedy
of land extending southward from this lake to the Perth
and Richmond townships, has been surveyed, and in course
of settlement for some years.

Towards the head of the Chauditre lake, the lands are
fertile on both sides, and it is abruptly and finely termi-
nated by a precipitous range of rocks, down which the
river descends in fifteen distinct falls, averaging about
twenty-five feet in height, and extending a mile and a
half from the Upper to the Lower Canada shore. The
_ Beenery is singular and beautiful, and will not fail to attract
; tourists when there is a steam boat on the lake, which some

z

248 Topographical Notices,

enterprising individuals are proposing to establish next
summer. Its support is chiefly looked for in the increasing
lumber trade of the river, the settlements alone being insuf-
ficient to afford an.inducement ; but the undertaking itself
will have a great tendency to increase the population.

Immediately above the falls is a continued heavy rapid,
amidst numerous islands, for nearly two miles, the whole
interruption going by the name of the Chats Rapids, and
making, it is supposed, a descent of fifty or sixty feet.—
Apparently these rapids form a very serious obstacle to the
future improvement of the river; but I have good hopes
that on examination they will be found capable of being very
easily surmounted, by taking advantage of a detached
channel on the south side.

The Mississipi river enters the Chats lake a mile or two
above the rapids, and this channel, popularly called the
Mississipi Snigh, (chenal) leads from the backwater near
its mouth, to the foot of the rapids ; the supply of water
being entirely regulated by the level of the lake. Along
the basin below the falls, the main shore consists of a steep
bank of compact blue clay, about thirty-five feet high,
which sweeps round (towards the Mississipi Snigh) almost
on a complete level, and joins it about half a mile from
the basin. On this channel the remaining ascent, probably
about fifteen feet, is accomplished in a mile, or so, of little
detached rapids, and it then presents a run of smooth water
to the mouth of the Mississipi; the whole distance from
the Chaudiére to the Chuts lake being about three and a
half miles. I ascended the river by the common route,
through the middle of the rapids, and returned by the
Mississipi Snigh, which, when the Ottawa is at a medium
height, affords the easiest and safest route in descending.—

Topographical Notices. 249

The breadth of the channel varies from fifty to near one
hundred feet.

The stone of the Chats rapids, and for thirty or forty
miles farther up the river, is chiefly a soft, white, coarse-
grained limestone. It appears to wear fast where exposed
to the action of the water, and generally near the rapids
lays in large disjointed angular masses. It would afford,
every where, an excellent material for rough work ; and
no doubt, solid quarries of the species could be found, fit
for any purpose whatever.

The Lake of the Chats, commencing from the head of
rapids, is from one to two miles broad, and about sixteen
miles long, nearly in a straight direction north-west by
west. Besides the Mississipi, two considerable rivers flow
into the Chats lake from the south,—the Madawaska,
passing through the township of M‘Nab, and the Bonne-
chere, through that of Horton. These townships have a
fine bold coast along their whole extent on the Ottawa, on
which are some good farms of considerable size; their
interior, however, is yet but thinly peopled, and is commonly
reported to contain a great proportion of indifferent land.
Much, however, of what is now rejected, as | am credibly
informed, consists of a serviceable clay soil, principally
covered with the fir species, and which will be found
acceptable enough when population increases about the
river.

It is a common opinion that land without a growth of
hard-wood is unworthy of occupation ; but this idea, though
it may generally hold good farther south, should be entirely
lost sight of in exploring these northern parts of Canada,—
The white pine frequently forms the main growth on excel-
~ dent clay soils, with but a small mixture of hardwood, and

21

250 Topographical Notices.

sometimes none whatever The red pine, also well known
to be so abundant on the Ottawa, is by no means so infallible
a sign of inferior soil as is generally asserted. It certainly
grows to a considerable size on almost bare rocks, and on
arid sands, it is seen in places the sole tree for miles. But
it is on strong clays that the red pine is found in the greatest
perfection, and here it is usually accompanied with white
pine or other firs, and frequently a mixture of hard-wood.
On the north shore of the Chats lake, towards the upper
end, the lands have a very good appearance, and they are
described to continue of a fair quality to the farther side of
the township of Clarendon, situated here, and which is
better inhabited than the opposite ones of M‘Nab and
Horton. No settlement worth mentioning has been formed
on the Jower part of the lake, on the north side’; and, in
fact, the land here, and (as before stated) for some miles
extending down the Chaudiére lake, is too poor to admit
of much population in the present state of the country.
The scenery of the Chats lake is very pleasant, being
diversified with a number of small islands, and from its
straight form, nearly the whole extent is seen at one view.
At the head, the lumberers have placed a permanent boom,
extending across diagonally about three quarters of a mile,
and secured midway by two anchors. It isa strong com-
plete piece of work, consisting of long pieces of the largest
pine, the ends of which are placed between a double set of
other pieces somewhat shorter, and the whole jointed
together with huge pins, in sucha manner that the boom
is flexible vertically, but immoveable sideways. There is
not an ounce of iron in the whole structure, and yet it has
withstood wind, ice, and flood for two years; nor is there
any apprehension of jts giying way. The situation is

Topographical Notices. 251

peculiarly well adapted for it, there being a small island
near the north shore, to which the boom is attached, and
between this and the main, there is a good channel for
boats in the driest season, which is sufficiently out of the
current not to admit of the timber escaping. Formerly
the raftsmen were under the necessity of putting their
timber together several times between this place and the
Grand Calumet rapid, about fourteen miles above ; but it
is now allowed to drift along that space, the only trouble
being to push it out from the eddies and shores. Beyond
the Grand Calumet, rafts may be floated for eighty miles
without breaking up, so that this simple improvement of
the boom has proved a most essential benefit to the whole
trade.

There are several situations where booms of a durable
nature would greatly assist the labours of the raftsmen ;
and in other places, in the smaller rivers particularly,
a few pounds might be most beneficially expended in
removing projecting rocks, against which the timber is apt
to lodge, and so bar the passage for all that is behind,
sometimes until the season is entirely lost, as occurred last
year with some hundred thousand feet. But it can hardly
be expected that improvements, even of this partial kind,
will be accomplished by the lumberers, without the inter-
ference and assistance of Government.

_ It is now only four years since the procuring of lumber

from the crown lands along the Ottawa, has been rendered

a legal occupation. This branch of the timber trade has
increased rapidly, and now forms a principal support of
the Canada shipping. The stock of red pine in the upper

Ottawa countries is probably inexhaustible ; it begins to
- be a common growth about the head of the Chats lake, and

252 Topographical Notices.

the region favorable to its production, by all aecount,
extends some hundred miles northward. The Grand river,
which traverses this region, with its numerous tributaries,
promises to afford the means of obtaining the pine for
market, from an almost indefinite extent of country; and
in which we may expect the growth of the timber to be
more than sufficient to keep pace with the annual cutting.

In all likelihood, a great proportion of these northern
pine lands will be found unfit for settlement; but, con-
sidering the great support and encouragement which the
timber trade of the Ottawa must afford, both to the
agricultural and mercantile interests of the colony, the
existence of this accessible red pine region unquestionably
is a most favorable feature in the country, more so,. per-
haps, than if its place were occupied with the most fertile
hardwood lands.

The passage of the timber down the various rapids and
falls does not form the chief obstacle in prosecuting this
business. In such a flow of water as the Ottawa, there is
always to be found some method of passing it, either in
cribs or single pieces, without much damage or extraor-
dinary delay. The grand obstacle consists in the difficulty
and expense of providing the provisions, grain, &e. neces-
sary for the winter’s operations, at a distance beyond the
settlements, and with the interrupted channel of the
Ottawa alone as a means of conveyance. The survey and
settlement of what eligible lands may be found along the
river, is one evident means of assisting the trade in this
important particular. Indeed the unusual value of every
species of produce in the neighborhood of the lumbering
establishments has induced a number of people, at every
risk, to occupy and clear lands at various places above the

=

Topographical Notices. 253

present surveys, which extend no higher than the Chats
lake.

In no view are the advantages of a navigation between
Lake Huron and the Ottawa more evident than with
regard to the lumber trade. By such a communication the
winter supplies of the timber cutters would be obtained
from the fertile countries south and west of that great lake,
at one-third the cost now incurred in procuring them from
Montreal, and the certain result would be an ample and
steady supply of timber below the lowest of the present
varying prices. If, therefore, there was no other object in
view, but that of insuring a regular supply of necessaries, at
the cheapest rate, for working the great red pine fields of the
Ottawa, it is highly interesting to ascertain what natural
facilities may exist, for a communication between Lake
Huron and the upper waters of that river.

Above the Chats lake, the Ottawa completely changes
its character, being, for fourteen or fifteen miles, com-
paratively narrow, swift, crowded with islands, and
frequently interrupted with rapids. Immediately on leaving
the lake, is the swift water of the Chenawx, which can hardly
be termed an interruption in the navigation, being merely
a smooth strong current, requiring the use of the line or
pole, for one or two hundred feet. At this place, anda
few others of a similar nature, I think the water wheel
might advantageously take the place of the hand line, as
has often been before suggested, for the improvement of
such obstructions. Where the rapid is moderate, short, and
deep, I do not see why this simple machine should not an-
swer every purpose. A water wheel of twenty feet diameter,
having twenty superficial feet of float-board to the current,
and with its lever power increased about six times, by a

254 Topographical Notices.

proportionate wheel and pinion, would be sufficient to tow
up any vessel likely to be used on the river. To prevent
delays from repairs, two wheels could be made use of,
which might both be placed on the same race.

Above the Chenauz, the navigation is good, though with
considerable current, for five or six miles, to the Portage
du Fort, at which is the commencement of a chain of
rapids, forming the principal obstacle to be overcome in
the improvement of the Ottawa. First at this portage is a
heavy, though not a continued rapid, for about a mile; a
league, or so, more of hard paddling, brings us to the des
Sables Portage, only a few hundred feet in length, past a
short rapid, easily run down by canoes. Below this, the
tiver forms two channels, enclosing the Grand Calumet
island,—the south, and by all accounts, the largest division,
is called the Rocher Fendu. It is seldom followed by
canoes, on account of its rapids being spread over a much
greater space than on the north channel On the latter
about a mile above the Sables, is the mountain‘ fall, about
ten feet high and two hundred feet in breadth, a heavy body
of water descending in a smooth unbroken sheet, with a
short rapid below. The portage is hardly a quarter ofa
mile, and notwithstanding the name, there is no eminence
of any consequence near it. A mile farther, with a mode-
rate current, is the Derangé rapid, a strong rush of water
for rather more than a furlong, which, however, canoes
run down. Beyond this, about three quarters of a mile, is
the Grand Calumet rapid, the least and longest in the
range, and in which are several falls. The portage is a
full mile in length, uneven and rocky. The extent of all
these rapids, by the course of the river, which is very
circuitous, appears to be about eight miles. I could form

Topographical Notices. 255

little idea, in going up the riyer, as to the amount of the
fall on this part of it, but having returned by the route of
the Musk-rat lake, in which direction the whole descent
of the ridge is comprised, within the space of a mile or
two—I think it may be from ninety to one hundred and
twenty feet.

It is impossible to ascertain any thing of the nature of
the lands hereabouts, merely from passing up the canoe
route ; the shores are hardly ever discovered with certainty,
on account of the great number of islands, which appear
nearly all of a very rocky nature, and are covered with a
dense growth of pine, cedar, &c, This is also the growth
of the main shores, where they can be distinguished; no
hardwood being visible from the Chenaua upwards, except>
ing on one or two low islands. I was informed, however,
by some people who have taken up their residence at the
mountain fall, that on the north side, behind the fir-tim-
bered shore, a good level tract of land extends from the
Portage du Fort, to the neighborhood of the Grand Calumet
rapid, and for many miles into the country. Oa the south
side of these rapids, the Grand Calumet island presents a
very barren appearance, nor, by all accounts, is therea
great extent of good soil on any part of it; it has, however,
been rich in red pine—many large rafts have been taken
from thence, nor is the island yet exhausted.

The south shore of the river, from the Chenauz to the
Portage du Fort, is composed of a pine-timbered ridge,
which, in viewing from the water, I had noted down asa
barren height ; but having occasion to traverse it in
returning, I found it to consist of a good strong clay, the
growth being principally large white pine, with some
hardwood, The ridge, apparently not exceeding one

256 Topegraphical Notices.

hundred and fifty feet in elevation, is the continuation of
the one forming the great range of rapids above described.
About a mile from the Chenaux the ground begins to fall
away to the westward; so that from this singular formation
of the country, the waters which take their rise a mile or
two from this part of the Ottawa, after making a circuit by
the Musk-rat and des Allumettes lakes, of nearly one
hundred miles, again approach within a few hundred yards
of their source.

The Musk-rat lake lays about eight miles south-westerly
from the Portage du Fort. A good road has been opened
for several years from the portage to the lake, which,
with the river of the same name, affords from the end of
the road, a smooth uninterrupted navigation, nearly to the
upper des Allumettes lake, the last two miles along only
being rapid. This has long formed the winter way of the
lumberers to the higher parts of the river. The whole
distance from the Portage du Fort to the mouth of the
Musk-rat river (about three miles from foot of the des
Allumettes) does not exceed twenty-eight miles, which is
little more than half the length of the route between the
same points, by the Grand river.

The comparative ease and expedition with which the des
Allumettes lake may be reached by this route, even in
summer, by using small light canoes, has given rise
to the idea, that it affords a very favourable opportunity
for surmounting the rapids on the neighboring parts of
the Ottawa, whenever their improvement shall be seriously
contemplated. In returning 1 ascended the Musk-rat
river and lake, and leaving the Portage du Fort road
to the left, followed up the lake waters eight or ten miles
farther, along a chain of smaller basins, from which, by

a

Topographical Notices. 257

a long portage we gained the Ottawa, about four miles
above the Chenaux. The Musk-rat route is certainly not
a favorable, and, perhaps, hardly a possible one, for a
eanal. The Lake is probably a sufficient reservoir to
supply a lockage both ways, or might easily be made
so by feeders from the Bonnechere; but its surface is
thirty or forty feet higher than that of the upper des
Allumettes, which would of course occasion an extra
lockage of twice that height above the necessary ascent
on the Ottawa. SBesides this, it does not appear to be
practicable to lead the Musk-rat waters towards the
Portage du Fort, from the elevation of the intervening
ground; and as to the chainof small lakes, extending in
that direction, the stream through them is evidently
insufficient, and at two great a height to be increased from
any source which could be depended on.

The most favourable route for improving this part of the
Ottawa, will probably be found on the Lower Canada side,
through the hard-wood lands, extending from the Portage

; du Fort, towards the Grand Calumet rapid. Through
this tract also, the indefatigable lumbermen have opened a
road, as far up as the Derangé rapid; and this being only
four or five miles in length, the direct extent of the whole
interruption, including the Grand Calumet, cannot much
exceed six miles. Along this shore (as far as I could see

_ from the canoe route), there is no appearance of a ridge
of land; indeed, as before mentioned, the main shore can
seldom be distinguished from the islands, so that the
ground probably has a gradual slope from the river, which
shape would afford every facility for leading the water
along at the required elevation, whatever it may be.

The chief difficulty on this route would probably be

2K

258 Topographical Notices,

at the Grand Calumet rapid, which is lined on both sides
by high rocky shores. To the south of the portage,
however, in the island, there is a hollow extending the
whole way to the still water above, along which it appears
practicable to effect a lockage. ‘The chief rock about here
is still the white coarse limestone, admitting, I think, of
being easily quarried; this species of stone is seen no
farther up the river. With the exception of some detached
masses of the granite kind, it appears to form the channel
of the various rapids from the Chats thus far-—its character,

however, varies much along this extent: commonly it is:

large-grained and brittle; in a few places 1 observed it
forming almost a complete flint, and in others its nature is
that of a coarse marble, well adapted for any purpose of
building. een

In comparing this route, by the Ottawa, with that of the
Musk-rat lake, in point of distance, we shall find no very
essential difference in favor of the latter, if we extend our
view to the head of the great island, des Allumettes, and
consider the channel to the north of it, called the Quelle Butte
Snigh (chenal), as a part of the Ottawa route. A strong
reason in favor of keeping by the Grand river seems this:
—Were the Musk-rat lake and river chosen as the line of
improvement, the whole of the north channels of the
Ottawa, from Portage du‘Fort to the head of Quelle Butte
Snigh (chenal), a distance of fifty miles and upwards, along
which there are many fine tracts of land, which would be
left entirely in the back grownd, and little benefitted, being
shut up at every point by rapids, from what would then be
the navigable channel. Whereas, were the thoroughfare
established along the northern runs of the Ottawa, (these
rapids being necessarily improved) the country along the

:
:
,

Topographical Notices. 259

des Allumettes and Musk-rat lakes, would almost equally
partake in the advantage, in addition to the facilities of
their natural route by the latter lake.

Were it only sought to pass by the formidable obstruction
of the Calumet rapids, by a railway, or good common road,
certainly no other line could enter into competition with
that by the Musk-rat waters. The road from the Portage
du Fort to the lake, though | did not pass along it, is well
known to run over a suitable and level soil, and from every
account, might be continued on favorable ground to the
foot of the upper des Allumettes, bringing us at once to
the uninterrupted navigation extending near fifty miles
along that lake and the deep river. This road would be
about twenty-five miles in length, and mostly through
lands fit for cultivation. As far as 1 could ascertain, nearly
the whole of the considerable space between the Musk-rat
run of water and the great bend on the Ottawa, is fit for
settlement. Along the Rocher Fendu there is said to be a
wide extent of hard-wood land. The large point between
Coulonge lake and the lower des Allumettes, is known to
be almost throughout of the same nature, and on the lower
part of the des Allumettes, the soil is also generally good.

_ From the head of the two mile of rapids near its mouth,
the Musk-rat river forms a deep still winding channel,
gradually widening from one to two or three hundred feet,
and at lastspreading into an extensive muddy pond, covered
with weeds and wild rice, about which I saw more wild
ducks and geese than in all the rest of the journey. Leavy-
ing this pond, the river continues in a fine broad channel
about one mile and a half farther, when the Musk-rat
lake opens to view nearly from one end to the other,
extending remarkably direct to the 8,$,W. nine or ten

260 Topographical Notices.

miles, and with a very uniform breadth not exceeding half
a mile.

The lands all along the Musk-rat river seem to be of
excellent quality, though not chiefly timbered with hard-
wood. A good clay soil prevails on both sides of this stream,
(amidst a variety of other trees) the finest red pine, and
constituting from situation, soil, and timber, the most
valuable land in this part of the country, before the lum-
bermen had commenced their operations upon it; but the
full grown red pine is now mostly cut away from the
vicinity of the water. The finest square timber which has
yet descended the Ottawa, and nearly all the red pine
spars (for which the choicest trees only will answer) have
been cut in this neighborhood, and from actual examination
I am convinced that much of the land producing this
valuable commodity in such perfection, is suitable for
cultivation.

About the great rice pond, and the channel leading from
it to the Musk-rat lake, the lands are fertile. Several
farms have been commenced in this neighborhood, one of
which is not less than fifty acres in extent, and a road has
been formed to a large bay on the lower des Allumettes,
only two or three miles distant, on which also there is
some settlement.

On the Musk-rat lake, the lower part of the eastern
shore is formed of low rocky hills, with a growth principally
of poor red pine, which, however, from every account,
does not continue far from the water. About the head of
the lake is some of the finest land I ever saw, a strong free
clay, and yet with a moderate growth of timber. This tract,
extending several miles along and back from the eastern
shore, is in a fair way of being settled. There is already a

a

Topographical Notices. 261

considerable clearance at the extremity of the Portage du
Fort road, where two families reside ; and one of the men
informed me that he expects eight neighbors by the spring.

The western shore of the Musk-rat lake, along its
whole extent, consists of a slightly rising ground, covered
near the water with a stout forest of white pine. I have
not been able to get much information with regard to the
country between this side of the lake and the Bonnechere
river, about ten miles distant; but at least a considerable
portion of it is composed of hard-wood lands, lying along a
stream called the Snake Creek, which winds through this
tract, almost on a dead level for many miles, and enters
the Musk-rat lake a little above the outlet.

Along the chain of small lakes, extending between the
Musk-rat lake and that of the Chats, the lands are poor ;
on the north shores, little is seen but light sand and red
pine; on the south, the soil is somewhat better, bearing
good white and red pine, with a mixture of hard-wood.

The nature of these little lakes is very singular, the
whole bed of their waters being composed of a substance
which I take to be the finest marl. It appears to have been
formed by a vast deposit of shells of various sorts. ‘They
are yet but partially decomposed in many places, the mass
being half made up of larger and smaller fragments. In
other places it is soft, unctuous, and remarkably white,
resembling the finest lime plaster ready for use. It evi-
dently forms the main bed of the lakes, being visible ut the
bottom entirely throughout the small ones, and in the
larger to a depth of twenty or thirty feet. The shores,
however, are not uniformly composed of the marl, being,
in places, lined with a deep mud, of such a consistency,
that it is very difficult to get a canoe to or from the solid

262 Topographical Notices.

bank. In other places, a singular tough moss of a redish
colour, forms a quaking precarious wharf, extending many
yards into the deep water. Where the shells are least
decomposed, a strong unpleasant odour is emitted from the
moss; the water, however, has merely a slight earthy
flavour, is remarkably clear, and abounds with several
kinds of fish: the surface, when viewed either near or at a
distance, has a bright green appearance, quite different
from that of any other I ever saw.

These ponds commence about a mile and a half from the
Musk-rat lake, and as far as I followed them, extend about
seven miles south-easterly ; there being in this space nine
basins, one or two of them upwards of a mile in length,
and frequently separated merely by reedy flats or narrow
sand banks. A few days labor only is wanting to complete
the canoe route along them, as we found, nearly through-
out, old timber roads leading from one basin to the other.
The portages are all short, excepting the first from the
Musk-rat lake, and the last to the Ottawa, which is nearly
three miles, both being, however, along level and firm
roads.

This chain of small lakes does not end where we left
them, but, taking a southerly direction, they continue into
the surveyed lands of Horton,—the tract along which they
extend is the highest, and probably most fertile, in this
part of the country. From hence towards the higher parts
of the Bonnechere, the ground declines, so that between
that river and the Musk-rat lake, the lands are low and
level. This is evident from what is known of the Snake
creek, which forms a still winding channel, from the
vicinity of the Bonnechere to the lake.

_ Lhaye been particular in attempting to giye an idea of

Topographical Notices. 263

this section of the country, as it undoubtedly forms one of
the most eligible positions for settlement in this part of
Canada. The whole tract to which I allude, extending
south-westerly from the Ottawa, across the Musk-rat
waters to the Bonnechere, and north-westerly from the
lake of the Chats to that of the upper des Allumettes, may
contain from three to four hundred square miles—through-
out the whole, limestone is abundant.

As long, however, as the Chaudiére and the Chats rapids
continue unimproved, we can only hope to see a slow and
partial settlement of the finest townships above these points.
The fine navigation of the Chaudiére and Chats lakes, is
rendered nearly unavailable by these interruptions ; and as
to roads, passable ones at least, are hardly known on the
Ottawa, from Grenville upwards ; a proof how little is to
be expected from them towards the settlement of the more
interior parts. Had there been no Grand River in the
country, we should, probably by this time, have seen a
good main road somewhere near the ground which it
occupies ; but as it is, whilst there is 2 possibility of seram-
bling up the rapids, nobody will trouble their heads about
any thing of the kind.

At the Chaudiére, as before explained, the work of
improvement is half completed, or will be so with the first
two miles of the Rideau canal. Both there and at the
Chats, | am confident that the necessary works will be
found remarkably easy of accomplishment, considering the
formidable appearance and actual-elevation of the rapids.—
In order to obtain the full advantage of these two improve-
ments, a plain timber rail-road would probably be found
requisite, from the Portage du Fort to the upper des Allu-
mettes lake, which, in addition to the Musk-rat country,

264 Topographical Notices.

would lay open for settlement, a considerable extent of
fertile lands, touching upon the fifty miles of smooth water
immediately beyond that tract. Considering the great
space of new country which would not fail to be rapidly
peopled, and also the fine districts, near the proposed line
of operation, already partially settled, particularly along
the Mississipi, there can hardly be a doubt that the con-
veyance along it, would soon reimburse the outlay, without
taking into account the sale of the wild lands, and the
revenue from the crown timber, which would be greatly
increased by these improvements. I shall, however,
return to the description of the Ottawa, being convinced
that correct information, with regard to the whole country,
cannot fail to lead the public mind to something far beyond
these partial improvements.

At the head of the Grand CaJumet rapid, the Ottawa, in
its northern channel, again assumes a new character.—
This branch is now of a uniform breadth, generally under
a quarter of a mile, free from islands, with a strong steady
current, and apparently of equal depth from shore to shore.
This description holds good for about fifteen miles, to the
head of the Grand Calamet island. For the first four or
five miles, the river is hemmed in by precipitous rocky
shores, frequently, on the island, presenting a solid per-
pendicular face, eighty or one hundred feet in height.—
Above this, the appearance of the country becomes more
encouraging. A great part of the Lower Canada shore
consists of level hard-wood lands, circumscribed, however,
by fir-timbered hills and ridges, seldom more than two
miles distant from the river. On the island, there also
appears to be some great tracts of land along the shore, on
-which, at one place, is a considerable clearance, occupied

es

Topographical Notices. 265

by two or three French families. About the middle of
this run, the great northern range of hills comes once
more into distant view. Near the upper end is the Grande
Marais, an open marsh, extending several miles north-west
from the river, and which, when overflowed in high
spring waters, affords, with a portage of half a mile, a
short passage to lake Coulonge.

Thus far, the course from the Grand Calumet is about
N.N.W. and very direct; the channel, notwithstanding
its narrowness, being frequently within view for miles.
From the Grande Marais, it winds westerly, for about two
miles to the head of the island. Here the water scene
suddenly expands, We enter, as from a branch, the main
body of the river, the channel of the Rocher Fendu
extending in view to the left, three or four miles, and
upwards of a mile in breadth; the main river spreading
_ its channel a considerable distance to the right, amidst
some rich looking islands. At the upper end of the Grand
Calumet island, appears to be a tract of good land; and
on the Upper Canada shore, the whole extent in view is
fertile, judging from the nature of the timber, which is
seen, from the gradual rise of the ground. On this shore,
a little above the division of the waters, is the la Bosse
settlement, cousisting of a narrow entrance, about a mile
in length, with eight orten huts. The poor unprogressing
appearance of the place, at once marks it as a nest of
old trading people—French, or Bois Brulées,

Passing the islands near this settlement, we suddenly
come in view of the Coulonge lake, and the northern bills
immediately beyond it, which are now seen gradually to
close upon, and follow up the river, presenting a bold
swelling face, five or six hundred feet in height. Below

2.

266 Topographical Notices.

these, on the north bank of the lake, is the Company’s
establishment, called Fort Coulonge, a double row of neat
white-washed buildings, contributing much to enliven the
scecery. Lake Coulonge is about seven miles long, and
in some places, nearly two broad. Along its Upper Canada
shore, the lands continue to have a most favorable appear-
ance, gradually ascending from the water, with a flourish-
ing growth of hard-wood, anda little white pine. On this
side, opposite their station, the Company have a farm of
sixty or seventy acres, and a little below this are two small
clearances lately commenced. I have already mentioned
that the space of country between this lake and that of the
lower des Allumettes, consists, nearly throughout, of hard-
wood lands. This tract is now well known, and uniformly
spoken of as being of the best quality. The Upper Canada
coast, on this part of the river, is almost entirely hard-wood
land, for nearly thirty miles. Commencing some where
near the middle of the Rocher Fendu, it continues of this
nature, with very little interruption, to the mouth of the
Musk-rat river, on the upper lake des Allumettes.

On the Lower Canada side, the river being now closely
skirted by the hills, the appearance of fertility becomes
more rare. The barren aspect of these heights, towards
the Ottawa, has atendency to convey discouraging ideas of
the country beyond them; but from every thing I could
learn, there is no reason to infer that this sterility extends
to any great distance. It is, indeed, very difficult to
obtain distinct information respecting this back country ;
but as even the- vague account I may furnish of this subject,
is better than none, 1 will here sum up the chief particulars
which I have gathered concerning it.

From the Grand river, these northern heights have every

Topographical Notices. 267

appearance of being a distinct range of hills; excepting,
however, where evidently detached, they form merely the
face or ridge of an elevated tract of country, watered by the
Gatineau river and its tributaries, there being generally
very little abrupt descent to the north, and freqnently none
whatever. These high grounds almost every where seem
to incline towards the Gatineau, nearly from the extremity
of the ridge. From the mouth of that river, a little below
the Chaudiére falls, to lake Coulonge, there is not a single
stream from the northward, which can be supposed to
extend beyond the foot of these heights. The small river
Coulonge enters the lake of the same name, and about ten
miles farther up, there is another considerable stream
ealled the Black river. The valley which these waters
occupy, must extend some distance into the highlands, and
forms the only exception to their general lay towards the
Gatineau.

Near the Chaudiére lake, the nature of these elevated
tracts is well known. On ascending them, about ten miles
below the Chats rapids, a table land is met with, and
several small lakes not far from the ridge. From these,
the waters run to the Gatineau, on approaching which, the
lands are good.

Every thing I have heard favors the idea that along the
whole of these heights, the lands improve and become
habitable, soon after beginning to decline towards the
Gatineau. About one bundred miles from its mouth, this
river is joined by a considerable tributary from the north-
west, called les Deserts. For upwards of forty miles, I am
assured, the course of this river is through open plains,
from one to three miles in breadth, and of the richest soil,
beyond which, forests of maple, elm, and basswood,

268 Topographical Notices.

indicate a continuation of fertility. The Deserts runs in a
direction about parallel with the Ottawa, and at no great
distance from it, as the Indians pass with their canoes from
the one to the other in the course of a day anda half. Their
route is by the Coulonge river, which probably affords the
best access for exploring these parts of Lower Canada.—
The route by the Coulonge must be very difficult for some
way; but when once the eminence is fairly gained, the
different branches of the Gatineau present the means of
penetrating the country easily in various directions.

By ascending the Deserts, canoes may pass with great
celerity to the head waters of the Ottawa. On leaving that
stream, a large lake with numerous islands, is traversed,
called Lac des Ecorces, probably the source of the small
river du Moine, flowing into the Ottawa, about sixty miles
above lake Coulonge. Northward from Lac des Ecorces
a day or two’s journey, is the grand reservoir of the Ottawa,
called, by the traders, the Grand lake, which, from all
accounts, must be nearly half as large as Lake Ontario.—
There has been a trading establishment for many years on
the south coast of the Grand lake, which is consequently
well known to many connected with the trade. It is
decidedly spoken of as exceeding forty miles in breadth,
the shores being entirely out of view of each other, and the
length, extending chiefly east and west, is said to be at
least one hundred miles. I was informed by a person who
had performed the journey, that light canoes may pass
between the Grand lake and the Gatineau, by the route of
the Deserts, in four days. If this be the case, that great
sheet of water must extend, inconceivably, nearer to the
settled parts of the country, than the course of the Ottawa,
as fav as itis known, would lead one to conjecture.

Topographical Notices. 269

On leaving lake Coulonge, after passing some low
islands, we arrive at the foot of the great island des Allu-
mettes, about two miles distant from the lake, by which
the waters of the Ottawa are again divided for many miles.

At the point of division, the whole of the surrounding
shores have a fertile appearance, though no very extensive
view of them is obtained. For a little way below the Island
the river is not much more than a furlong in breadth and
the current very strong. Here Mr. Simpson, Governor of
the Company, passed us in his return from a northern tour,
impelled by the strength of the stream and ten or twelve
stout paddles, almost with the velocity of the wind. Im-
mediately after, we fell in with a very different personage,
a settler, who had made his selection on the Lower Canada
side, apparently but a day or two before, his family and
luggage being still scattered among the bushes. The
adventurer was standing on the beach very composedly,
with his hands in his pockets. His intention, he said, was
to clear land and lumber some; and, he might have
added, to keep a rum and whiskey shop, when he could
obtain a supply. Certainly, no better situation could have
been pitched upon for this junction of occupations.

1 had no opportunity of seeing the southern division of
the waters, from this point to the upper des Allumettes
lake, but the following is the general description of it:—
Nearly from the foot of the island, this part of the river
forms a swift current or gentle rapid, for three or four miles
amidst numerous islands. Beyond this is the lower lake
des Allumettes, a fine piece of water, upwards of ten
miles long and two or three broad. Between it and the
upper lake, is a moderate rapid, a mile in length, easily
descended by canoes. Along the island, on the lower lake

270 Topographical Notices.

des Allumettes are some hard-wood lands, but the principal
timber is the red pine.

The north channel, called the Quelle Butte Chenal, has a
pretty direct course, nearly west, about eighteen miles,
being reckoned about eight miles shorter than the route by
the lakes, and is always followed by the voyageurs. For
the first two or three miles, the channel is uniform, seldom
more than a hundred yards wide; and it then opens out,
forming a succession of small lakes, which afford a variety
of pleasant scenery. The hills are constantly in view,
sometimes approaching to the edge of the water; their
usual dark woods of tamarac and pine, varigated by the
light foliage of the dwarf birch, and a few of the hills
entirely covered with the latter.

On the north, the hard-wood land continues along the
Chenal for a few miles, after which, the stony heights
closing in upon the shore, there are no farther signs of
fertility on that side. Along the island we see little but
red pine sands for half the way, when there is a change
for the better, and the lands possess a very favorable
appearance, nearly to the head of the island.

About half way up the Quelle Butte Chenal there is a
swift rush of water, for one or two hundred feet, called the
Chapeau rapid, hardly sufficient, however, to arrest
the course a steam-boat. In fact one of our canoes
ascended it by the force of her paddles alone. There is no
further obstruction, till we reach the Quelle Butte rapids,
within two miles of the head of the island; so that with the
above trifling exception, this channel completes an un-
broken navigation, from the head of the Grand Calumet
rapid, of about forty five miles.

The Quelle Butte rapids consist of two short interruptions,

Topographical Notices. 271

about half a mile apart. The first is a moderate rapid,
between one and two furlongs in length, which we ascended
by dint of poling and towing. Heavy canoes must, however,
discharge half their cargoes for a short way. The upper
rapid is shorter, but bas a small fall at the head. After
poling some way, there is a sudden turn to the right, intoa
little still recess, and from it, the canoes are lifted a few
yards over a bare solid rock, into a circular basin about a
furlong in diameter, from which no outlet can at first be
perceived. ‘Ihe water of this basin is eight or ten feet
higher than that of the rapid, and on a level with the lake
des Allumettes ; a very trifling excavation would lead it
over the rock. In every respect this is naturally the most
complete mill-seat I ever saw. A deep narrow channel
leads out of these curious recesses, when the upper coasts
of the des Allumettes immediately open tothe view. The
head of the island is between one and two miles distant,
andthe Chenal gradually widens, until it unites with the
the lake, here, about two miles broad, and containing
numerous islands.

The upper lake des Allumettes continues nine or ten
miles above the island. Near the head, it makes a com-
plete bend northward, to the foot of that section of the
Ottawa called the Deep river, when the course turns
abruptly to the north-west. A little below the Quelle
Butte rapids, the hills recede from the shore, leaving
towards the lake, a wide level space, extending to the
Deep river, chiefly hard-wood lands. ‘The coast, however,
as is usually the case, gives no indication of fertility, being
along the whole of this tract poor and stony.

At the foot of the Deep river, the heights at last com-
pletely close upon the Ottawa, forming along its channel,

2712 Topegraphical Notices.

a continued range, from five to seven hundred feet in
height, and shutting out all further appearance of fertility
on the north shore, as far as i ascended, fifty miles above
this point. The Upper Canada shore also, along this space,
has a very discouraging aspect, being generally composed
of pine-timbered ridges, fifty to a hundred feet high,
evidently of a sterile nature, which, however, on the
greater part of the distance, do not continue far into the
country, a3 I shall have occasion to remark immediately.

The scenery of the Ottawa, now becomes very striking ;
the tourist, at least, will little regret the want of fertile
coasts amidst the succession of romantic views, which
every mile of the river presents along these high lands,—
From a hill about five or six hundred feet in height, at the
foot of the Deep river, is a prospect, which I have no where
seen surpassed. The portion of the Ottawa within view
is, perhaps, the most remarkable and beautiful in its whole
course. To the right is the Deep river, extending upwards
of twenty miles along the base of the heights, in the
straightest possible course, and yet lined with the most
uneven succession of rugged points. To the left, is the whole
of the spacious winding of the upper lake des Allumettes,
with its numerous islands, and a part also of the lower lake,
is visible beyond the great island. Several smaller lakes are
seen on both sides of the river, and among the rest, one
singularly situated half way up the hill from which the
prospect is obtained.

The view south and westward, into the country we were
about to penetrate, is also very extensive, and was of course,
peculiarly acceptable ; though the elevation was not suffi-
cient to enable us to trace the waters very far amidst the
forest. A very good idea, however, is here obtained of

Topographical Notices. 273

the general form of this part of the country. From the
foot of the Deep river, the bed of the Ottawa lays between
west and north-west, for at least fifty miles, as may be
distinguished from the northern heights. About the end
of this space, we can perceive that the ridge extends across
the river, with an inferior height, and takes a southerly
direction, gradually rising again to an elevation equal to
that on the Lower Canada side. A great branch of these
barren highlands extends in a gradual slope, quite to the
lake des Allumettes, occupying ten or twelve miles of its
southern coast, above the Musk-rat river. This extension
of the heights forms, with the main ridges on both sides of
the river, a great semi-circular valley, stretching about
forty miles up the channel, and near twenty miles into
the country, at the broadest place. Excepting a rough
ridge along the Ottawa, this valley appears to be fertile as
far as the nature of the timber can be distinguished from
the hill. About the middle and broadest place, it presents
a very gradual ascent to the heights, so that there is hardly
any decided ridge for some miles; and at this point, as [
afterwards ascertained, the interruption of rough country
towards the interior hard-wood lands, cannot exceed six
or eight miles.

A considerable bay extends into this valley from the lake
des Allumettes; and it is penetrated for several miles
farther, by a singular channel of still water, forming a
succession of narrow straits and small lakes, which are
only separated from the Ottawa, by a little fall one or two
feet in height, at the head of the bay. Into this channel
flow two streams, the largest proceeding from a piece of
water, three or four miles long, called the Maskinongé
lake, which, as near as I could learn, lays about ten miles

au

274 Topographical Notices:

west from the des Allumettes, and is but a few feet above its
level. The inlet which these waters afford for several
miles, will, no doubt, be found of considerable importance
when the settlement of this part of the country is seriously
undertaken ; as it is apparent that the only eligible route
for a main road from the Ottawa to the great hard-wood
table land, is through the Maskinongé valley.

Thad entertained hopes of being able to make my way
towards lake Huron, up the valley, and so obtain a more
distinct knowledge of this interesting line of country ; but
after attempting it for five or six miles, we found it impos-
sible, there being no canoe route whatever through it to
the westward; and indeed the run of water seems quite
insufficient to admit of one. From the appearance of this
great hollow, one would expect it to be a main conductor
from the inland lakes. The waters, however, not only
from the interior, but from the vicinity of the higher parts
of the Ottawa, are carried round the extremity of the yalley,
forming, with streams from other points, a large river,
which continues its course in a singular manner, closely
along the verge of the heights, and enters the des Allu-
mettes, about five miles below the outlet of the Maskinongé.

This river, as far as I have seen, is the largest of the Upper
Canada tributaries. With little exception, it traverses
the whole country, inclining towards the Ottawa, from the
Musk-rat to the Little river, a distance of nearly one
hundred miles by the parent stream. The water which it
discharges is of course yery considerable, nearly equal, L
think, in the autumn, to that of the Rideau, in the ordinary
flood of the spring. About six miles from the mouth of
this river, there isa large branch to the south-west, called
the Pittoiwais, on which is a considerable lake of the same

Topographical Notices. 275

hanie, situated betwen the sources of the Madawaska and
the Bonuechere. The main river continues a westerly
course, in an undivided channel, to the verge of the elevated
table lands, when it branches out ivto a number of streams,
forming an infinity of small lakes in every direction. I
could hear of no distinct name for the lower main channel
of these waters ; but the branch extending farthest into the
interior, is called by the Indians, the Nesswabic, which,
therefore, may be considered as the proper designation of
the whole river.

' Along the Nesswaliic is the only canoe route from the
des Allumettes towards the Huron rivers. This route is
one of the utmost difficulties for the first forty or fifty miles,
the river being, as far as the level country, almost a
constant succession of rapids, which cannot be ascended in
less than seven days, by a light canoe in the dry season,
and is hardly ever attempted at any other time. The upper
parts of the Nesswabic, however, may be reached without
the arduous ascent of its main channel. As before noticed,
some of its branches make a near approach to the Ottawa,
beyond the Deep river, and by these there is more than
one route into the heart of the country. Among the rest is
one leading from the neighborhood of the Deux Rividres
rapid, about fifty miles above the des Allumettes, of which
I was fortunate enough to procure a chart from some
Indians at the lake. We could not expect to save much
time or labor by following any of these routes, which
require much portaging, and are of course circuitous ; but
they afford the advantage of a much more extensive survey
of the Ottawa than I had expected to obtain, and also the
preservation of our bark canoes, on which every thing
depended, made it in a manner necessary to avoid the

276 Topographical Notices.

rapids of the lower Nesswabic for the present, which f
therefore resolved to do, and resumed the ascent of the
Ottawa on the 27th of August.

On the upper des Allumettes are two trading houses, one
belonging to the Company, called Fort William, and the
other to some private traders. At these stations we had
made little doubt of obtaining some distinct accounts of the
country towards the Hurons, and also of procuring a guide
acquainted with it, in our intended direction, at least until
fairly past the division of the waters; but in both these
particulars I was disappointed. The lands of the Algonquin
Indians frequenting the Ottawa, do not extend quite to the
height of land, at least on the Nesswabic ; and the traders
on the Grand river, have no communication with the
Mississaguas, who hunt beyond the Algonquins. All the
information obtained, therefore, amounted to this, that
along the upper waters of the Nesswabic was a great extent
of fertile level country, and that by following up the mest
westerly branch of this river, canoes could pass to the
streams running in an opposite course. We had previously
received information of a considerable river rising in that
direction, and flowing south-westerly to lake Huron; but
whether it was this or some other that might be reached by
the above route, I could not ascertain.

As to a guide, after some fruitless enquiry, I was obliged
to be satisfied with an Indian canoe-man, in the employ of
the traders. He had travelled no part of our intended
route, but was an expert tracer of hunting tracks and
portages, and could act as interpreter, in obtaining
information from the Indians we might fall in with.

From the lake des Allumettes, the Deep river continues
to form a fine navigation, for about twenty-five miles. I¢

EEE

Pg oe |

Topographical Notices. 277

is so remarkably straight, that even from the surface
of the water, at the foot of the channel, twenty miles
of this distance is completely within view, though at
various points the breadth does not exceed one quarter of
a mile, frequently, however, spreading out to half a mile
and upwards. Notwithstanding the inconsiderable width,
there is hardly, on account of its depth, a perceptible
current in any part of this water, and it is therefore
appropriately termed the Deep River. The northern ridge
continues to afford the finest views along the whole extent.
For some miles on the lower part, it presents a precipitous
face to the water, in places quite perpendicular to a height ~
of two hundred feet and upwards, About midway, the
heights fall back a little from the river, and form detached
hills free from timber of any kind, being covered for miles
with a close carpeting of blue-berry bushes. Bevond this,
the range again approaches the channel, apparently higher
than ever, presenting now a steep face towards it, six or
seven hundred feet in elevation.

The Deep river is terminated by the vreviia of the Deux
Joachims, This is a heavy continued rush of water, for up-
wards of amile, forming a circular sweep to the southward.
The point thus formed is penetrated by a small bay, from
which a ravine continues for some way along the base of
the heights towards the upper still water. The portage is
commenced from this inlet, and at about half way is
interrupted by a considerable pond, so that the carrying
altogether does not much exceed half a mile. On thé
whole, the vicinity of this rapid appears very favorable for
improvement.

_ Above this rapid, the river forms a smooth channel for
ten or twelve miles, though with considerable current,

278 Topographical Notices.

the breadth seldom equalling half a mile. The nature of
both shores here is much the same as on the Deep river;
the hills continuing-closely along the north side, and the fir-
timbered ridge on the south. The Jatter is interrupted a
little above the Deux Joachims, by a stream from the low
lands, before mentioned to extend in this direction. The
appearance of the timber about the ravine of this stream,
is rather more favorable, and I think it very probable, that
on proceeding inland,. good soil will be found on the upper
part of this great valley. About the middle of this stream,
the river du Moine enters with a rapid channel from the
north. It appears about the size of the Rideau and descends
to the Ottawa through a deep narrow valley appearing to
extend some way into the country. Above the du Moine
the north highlands assume the most pleasing appearance,
forming long swelling hills of great elevation, covered
frequently to the top, with the light green dwarf birch,
and interspersed with different kinds of fir, which, at
intervals, along the extreme verge of theheights, are seen
ranging far above the low birch growth.

At the head of this smooth water, are the Rocher Capi-
taine rapids, the lower part of them going by the name of
the Caribou. They form altogether an interruption of about
a mile anda half, in which, however, there is some smooth
water, nor is the rapid generally very heavy, being
ascended by canoes, excepting one or two furlongs near
the middle, where there is a portage on the south side.—
At the lower end of this portage is one of the finest scenes
of rapid water on the Ottawa. The whole of its waters
are, for some distance, condensed into a channel four or
five hundred feet in breadth, the foot of which is crossed
by a range of rocks, extending from the north shore, and

——

Topographical Notices. 279

terminated by one of superior size, about un acre in extent.
Against these the river is precipitated with a force which
completely curves the surface of its channel several feet
from the horizontal, and thus forced abruptly to the right,
it descends in great heavy swells, through a pass two or
three hundred feet wide, curling up into fierce breakers,
when fairly clear of the strait. Below this, is a smooth deep
basin, of a circular shape, by which the water, now
streaked with foam, wheels swiftly round the Rocher Capi-
taine, and recommenees its rapid course along the base of
the rocks,which had intercepted its progress.

Above the Rocher Capitaine, is a free navigation about
ten miles to the Deux Riviéres rapids, the character of both
the river and the shores continuing much the same as
before. Towards the upper end of this stream, the channel
gradually narrows, until it is scarce a furlong wide ; wind-
ing along the base of the ridge, which is here precipitous
to the heiglit of four or five bundred feet immediately from
the water. For a short space here, ice never forms, which
is rather unaccountable, as the current is not of remarkable
strength. The channel must of course be very deep, and
it is strewed with bowlders, some of which, from the depth
at which they approach the surface, appear of immense
size. Beyond this confined place the river widens, a
little below the Deux Rivieres rapids; and we find that we
are no longer skirting the foot of the heights, but fairly
proceeding into the heart of them, the channel being now
lined with high barren bills on both sides.

At the Deux Rivitres, the Ottawa breaks through the
ridge, along the base of which, it afterwards flows for
about one hundred and fifty miles. It cannot be said to
descend from these heights, as the wliole fall here is cer-

280 Topographical Notices.

tainly not more than forty feet, and above this the channel
is smooth for upwards of twenty miles, so that the separation
of the Upper and Lower Canada highlands is complete.

The main descent at the Deux Riviéres is in a heavy
continued rapid, for about one-third of a mile. Above this
are two or three short detached rapids, for about a mile
and a half, which are ascended, without a portage, except-
ing the last, called the Dicharge of the Trou, where part of
the lading is carried. We did not pass up to the still water,
our inland route striking offa little below the Trou. I had
however, the satisfaction of a distant view of the rough
water there; the last until we approach the mouth of the
Little river, which forms the eastern part of the Nipissing
route to Lake Huron. This point, (about twenty-five
miles above the Trou) is commonly called the Matawoen,
or forks, from the particular form of the neighboring parts
of the Ottawa. Above the Deux Riviéres, the heights fall
back from the water on both sides, and the whole vicinity
of the Ottawa appears to part with much of its rough and
sterile aspect; but the view of the lower grounds was too
imperfect to enable me to speak decidedly as to their
nature.

In case of the navigation ever being completed on this
line to the Huron, the improvement of the four rapid spaces
between lake Coulonge and the Little river, will probably
form the most difficult portion of the undertaking. The
obstacles, however, do not appear to be unusually great,
notwithstanding the mountainous nature of the country.—
On both sides of the different rapids, are generally spaces
of low ground, the stone near the surface appearing chiefly
to consist of bowlders, so that the necessary excavations
would not be very deep, or of the most difficult nature.—

Po

Topographical Notices. 28t

The rock along this part of the route, is of the same des-
cription as that of the neighboring heights, which appear
to be entirely composed of varieties of granite. Near the
river it differs much in its appearance, being sometimes
round and solid, often broken and craggy, and in some
places lying in regular beds, dipping towards the water.

The distance of the Matawoen from Bytown, (by the route
of the Quelle Butte,) 1 conceive to be abount one hundred
andeighty miles, which would, of course, make the whole
distance from Montreal not more than three hundred. It
has hitherto been commonly stated to be four hundred
miles, but there has been a most extraordinary system of
exaggeration, in estimating every inch of this route. The
Deep river, for example, which is called twelve leagues,
we only took seven hours and a half to ascend, paddling
leisurely ; and therefore 1 am confident it is not more than
eight and a half, for the stream is less rapid here than in any
part of the river, and, as may be expected, the exaggerations
increase with the current.

_In this space of one hundred and eighty miles, we have
seen that there are seven main interruptions. First, the
Chaudiére rapids, in all five miles; the Chats, two miles;
the Calumet rapids, about six and a half miles, and per-
haps two more by the channel; the Quelle Butte, about
one mile and a quarter; the Deux Joachims, about three
quarters of a mile, by the portage; the Rocher Capitaine,
about one mile and a half; and the Deux Riviéres, two
miles.

If there is any use in guess work, I should say that the
descent of the four last meutioned is rather less than that
of the three first, and does not surpass two hundred feet.
The Quelle Butte has decidedly the smallest fall of the

aN

282 Topographical Notices.

four ; and the three higher rapids appear to divide the
remaining ascent pretty equally. The particular distribu-
tion of the declivity along the Ottawa, is not, however, a
very material point of interest. From every account of the
Nipissing route across the country, I am satisfied that the
Ottawa, near the Matawoen, is yet below the surface of
lake Huron; so that, be the respective heights of these
rapids more or less, they still form but necessary steps in
this grand natural stair, to the level of the western waters.

From the foot of the Deep river, the Ottawa averages
nearly an E.S.E. course to the Deux Riviéres, above
which, as I could see from the range of the heights, it
flows much in the same course for many miles, continually
narrowing the Huron side of the country, until reaching
the Matawoen, where the River takes an abrupt and
decided turn, in a more northerly direction ; thus, as it
were directing towards the true point of its junction with
the waters of that great lake.

Before leaving the des Allumettes, I had not the smallest
Idea of the Ottawa forming, above that point, a practicable
route for navigation to the westward; but after passing
through the country from the Deux Riviéres to Penetan-
guishine, and returning across the sources of the Mada-
waska to the des Allumettes, I can say without hesitation,
that it is vain to look for any other northward of the Rideau.
From the Deux Riviéres, the high stony ridge (which
is merely the face of the elevated interior lands) continues
‘without interruption far to the south, presenting, every
where, a hopelesss barrier towards the Huron, at least for
the common system of lockage. The passage through this
ridge, by the Ottawa, has of course its minor difficulties ;
but in the grand essentials of a proper elevation of channel,

“ou

Topographical Notices. 283

and suitable direction, this fine river, without a doubt, is
almost every thing we could wish. The adoption of this
route would lead to a part of lake Huron, considerably to
the north of that, towards which researches have not yet
been directed ; but this surely is no objection. Asa point
of general communication, the outlet of the French river
appears unequalled on the lake; and the route, from its
northern direction, would benefit a much greater portion
of the country than any other line of improvement which
has been contemplated.

When once the ridge of the heights is fairly passed by
the gorge of the Ottawa, there is every reason to believe
that no insurmountable obstacles remain, For many
miles on the Upper Canada side, the highlands are nearly
in the same form as on the other, soon declining back from
the ridge seen from the Ottawa and of course to lake
Nipissing and the sources of the Little river, both of which
receive considerable accession of water from the south.—
From the general figure of the country, therefore, we may
expect these waters to occupy a comparatively low line
through it, and every information I have been able to
obtain, has contributed to confirm this idea. I saw ne
partof the Nipissing route, but after traversing the high
country in the direction of Penetanguishing, my inquiries
were naturally turned to the northward, The following
particulars are the result, and may be depended upon as
generally correct, having been corroborated from various
quarters,

On the French River, there are only three obstructions,
where it is indispensible to make portages. The first is the
Recoliet, eight to twelve miles from the outlet. It is a fall
fifteen or twenty feet high, with hardly any addition of rapid

284 Topegraphical Notices.

water. The Parisienne is the second, ashort heavy rapid,
the portage of which is not a furlong in length. And the
Chaudiére, consisting of several small falls, immediately at
the outlet of lake Nipissing. Besides these, are four
rapids, which are generally ascended without carrying the
canoes, and always run down. From every thing I can
learn of these interruptions, they cannot altogether form a
descent of one hundred and fifty feet. East of lake
Nipissing, the route leads over a level fertile tract, about
eight miles to the Turtle lakes, two considerable pieces of
water, which form the chief sources of the Little river.—
At each extremity of this distance, are carrying places,
between one and two miles in length, called the Portages
de Vase ; and along the intervening space, a small stream
is rendered navigable for canoes by a dam a few feet in
height, which throws back the water for five or six miles.
This circumstance goes far to prove the flatness of the
tract, and the name of the two portages gives an idea of
their nature. They are invariably described as leading
over a rich deep soil, with little sensible elevation either
way. The portage leading to the Turtle lakes, of course
forms the height of land, which cannot be supposed to be
fifty feet above lake Nipissing, and the whole ascent from
lake Huron would thus appear to be under two hundred feet.

I may here remark, that whatever be the exact elevation
of this summit, it certainly is not one-third of that sixty or
seventy miles southward, on the route of the Nesswabic
and Muskoka, which I followed in crossing the country.—
On the latter river, there are not less than thirty-five
portages, at three of which are falls, of about seventy,
fifty, and thirty feet, besides not less than a dozen falls
from ten to twenty feet in height. The source of the

Topographical Notices. 285

Muskoka, is probably between six and seven hundred feet
above the level of lake Huron. From the descent of this
river being chiefly in falls, 1 had, with the assistance of a
pocket level, a good opportunity of forming an opinion.
From the ‘lurtle lakes to the mouth of the Little river,
are about ten portages, all of moderate length. At two of
them, are said to be falls of fifteen or twenty feet, and the
rest are along the side of small falls and rapids, which, at
several places, would not occasion any carrying, if there
was a larger stream of water. In addition to these, are
three or four more gentle rapids, ascended by polling. The
whole together can hardly fail to compose a somewhat
greater descent than those on the western side of the route,
and therefore the smooth water of the Ottawa, above the
Deux Riviéres, is, with little doubt, below the surface of
lake Huron.
- The length of the French river is stated to be seventy miles;
the route, through lake Nipissing, thirty to forty miles;
and from thence to the Ottawa, about fifty. But here also,
the actual distances will probably be found much less than
usually stated by common account. On the latest charts,
the mouth of the French river appears nearly in latitude 46°
and longitude 80° 45’. From various data, the Matuwoen
cannot be far from latitude 46° 30’, and longitude 78° 45’,
With a considerable allowance, then, for winding, though
the route is said to be generally a direct one, it cannot
altogether much exceed one hundred and twenty miles;
making the whole distance on this line from Montreal to
the Huron, under four hundred and fifty miles.
_ The country along the Nipissing route, will, I am per-
suaded, be found of a very different nature from what has
been commonly reported. To the south particularly, the

286 Topographical Notices.

greatest part of the distance, from every thing I could
learn, consists of good lands extending far up the country,
in fact to the neighborhood of the line in which I crossed it.
It is probable enough that the immediate coasts along the
route are generally rough; but this affords no proof that
the country beyond them continues so for half a mile.—
Even the shores, however, are not often visible along lake
Nipissing and the French river, on account of the numerous
islands. The latter, in particular, which has usually a
channel of great breadth, is described to be full of rocky
islands nearly from one end to the other, which may in
some measure account for the character of peculiar sterility
which it has received. But even here, 1 am assured, that
good soil is found along the bays, and appearing to extend
far inland.

Of the country farther eastward, I have been able to
obtain more distinct information. To the south of lake
Nipissing is a great level tract, abounding in a rich heavy
soil, and extending, with little rise, many miles southward.
These lands are traversed by two considerable streams, the
largest, called the South river, entering lake Nipissing,
not far from the outlet. As far as I could hear, this river
has a course, of eighty or one hundred miles, nearly
north. The source is near that of a northern branch of the
Muskoka, and by this route canoes sometimes cross the
country towards Penetanguishine: about four days are
required to reach the source of the South river... The first
fifteen or twenty miles is described to be without rapids ;
and through very fine lands, which, indeed, continue more
than half way up its course, and on the upper parts of the
river, the lands, though inferior, are said to be still per-

fectly habitable.

Topographical Notices. 287

The accounts are not so favorable of the north shores of
lake Nipissing, though there are said to be some consider-
able tracts of good land towards the eastern end. On the
upper parts of the Little river, a great proportion of the
lands will be found fit for settlement, particularly in the
neighborhood of the Turtle lakes. The nature of the route
leading between them and lake Nipissing, has already been
described, and a little to the north, between the same
lakes, is a winter path about fifteen miles in length, also
through a fertile level tract. A rich deep soil is said to be
generally prevalent in these parts, timbered chiefly with
maple, bass-wood, and elm.

Had I obtained no distinct account of these lands, occu-
pying the great valley of the Nipissing, it would seem hardly
possible to conceive them to be generally barren (as is
commonly stated), when we know that after gradually
ascending southward, to a superior elevation, of at least
four hundred feet, luxuriant hard-woods are found to
extend uninterruptedly across the country.

1 now proceed to describe the routes which we followed
between Penetanguishine and the Ottawa.

From the Deux Rivitres, which I left on the 30th of
August, a gradually rising tract of barren sand is crossed,
by a most harrassing portage of three or four miles, which,
in many places, can hardly be traced through the thickets.
It leads to a small lake, the water of which runs to the
Deux Rivitres rapids. This was the only place in the
whole journey, where I observed leeches; they were in
great abundance of two kinds, one of a dark red colour,
the other greenish, with yellow spots on the back. After

making another portage of about half a mile, thesame stream
of water, is followed three or four miles through a large

288 Topographical Notices.

beaver meadow. The stream is only about fifteen feet in
breadth, excessively winding, and so overgrown with alder
bushes, as to require almost constant exertion to force a
eanoe through them. From this stream, a portage of
about a mile, over a nearly barren hill of solid granite,
brings us fairly to the top of the ridge, and to the first
waters of the Nesswabic, which are not more than ten
miles distant from the Ottawa, It occupied us, however,
nearly three days to reach this point; such was the diffi-
culty both of finding and following this almost trackless
route. |
From this to the main channel of the Nesswabic, the course
of the water is very direct, about fifteen miles, consisting
of a succession of small lakes and ponds, with short swift
channels between them, there being ten portages altogether
from the Ottawa, all little tracked, and most of them with
rough and dangerous footing. The appearance of some of
these lakes is pretty enough, but all around denotes
barrenness. The route continues from the Ottawa, closely
along the ridge of the highlands, to the Nesswabic, which
is entered at an oval extension of its channel, near three
miles long and one and a half broad, called the Trout
Lake. Still no good Jand is in view; but near the verge
of a moderate rise, along the west side of the lake, the
hard-woods commence, and continue inland with little
interruption. The immediate shores, however, of the
river, are barren for some miles farther.

The Trout lake lays about thirty-five miles, nearly west
from the head of the lake des Allumettes. By the river,
the distance appears to be about fifty miles, in which there
cannot be less much less than six hundred feet of fall._—
Canoes can easily descend from the Trout lake to the des

—

————

a Sy

soe ee le

Topographical Notices. 287

Allumettes in two days, and on my return I followed this
route. There are about twenty short portages altogether,
eleven of which are within eight miles of the Trout lake,
passing a number of small falls and some rapids. The
remaining descent is almost entirely in rapids, forming an
expeditious route downwards, but rather hazardous, from
the rugged nature of the channel. About fifteen. miles
from its mouth, the river forms a smooth broad channel,
ten or twelve miles iu length ; and, about ten miles below
the Trout lake, another expansion for four or five miles,
called Lake Traverse. With these two exceptions, there
is not tiree miles together of quiet water in the whole of
this river.

From Trout lake half way down, the Nesswabic winds
its course entirely through masses of rock. Nearer its
mouth the banks are less elevated, with some soil of a poor
sandy nature. Both above and below the Trout lake, the
shores of this river present a considerable elevation towards
the Ottawa. About the outlet of this piece of water, for a
short way, there is very little rise visible in that direction,
nor can there be much, as the Maskinongé valley is only a
few miles distant. This seems to be the only pass through
the ridge by which a communication can be easily formed
towards the interior. :

Ten miles below Trout lake, the north shore rises into
steep hills of solid, and often bare rock, upwards of three
hundred feet high, which closely follow the river for about
twenty miles. From one of these hills, about half way to
the des Allumettes, L obtained an extensive view to the
south. Ivery where appears a succession of small round
hills; rock, or sand at the best, densely covered with fir,
chiefly red pine and tamarack, thinly iaterspersed with

20

288 Topographical Notices.

birch and oak bushes, which, in autumn, assume tints of
the brightest yellow ,and ,red. The highest and most
distant land in view was to the south-west, some where
between the Pittowais lake and the Madawaska river.

The view towards the Maskinongé valley was confined
by the neighboring heights, but the high northern shores
of the Ottawa (about the head of the Deep river) were
visible for a short way, ranging nearly parallel with the
Nesswabic, and to my surprise not more than fifteen miles
distant. 1 was not previously aware of the great proximity
of the two rivers, which, in fact, are never more than
twenty miles asunder, until the Nesswabic spreads itself
over the table lands, and this sight at last fully convinced
me of the futility of searching for canal routs up these
furious mountain streams, while the spacious channel of
of the Ottawa, calmly dividing the highlands far below
any of them, continues its course nearly direct from the
desired point.

From the Pittowais upwards, the Nesswabic is joined by
no stream of any consequence, for probably forty miles,
until within three or four miles of the Trout lake. Here a
small tributary flows in from the south, on which, about
twelve miles distant, is a eonsiderable lake called la
Vieille, and by these the route strikes off which crosses the
sources of the Madawaska. The Vieille branch forms
hereabouts, nearly the division between the hard-wood and
fir countries. No good lands, indeed, are seen on the
stream, but they commence at no great distance from it,

From the Trout lake, the Nesswabic continues in a
westerly direction amidst broken stony shores, and inter-
rupted by several heavy rapids, the ascent being hardly
less than eighty or ninety feet, in the space of four or five

“~~
-

Topographical Notices. 289

miles, which brings us to the Cedar lake. This piece of
water may be considered the grand reservoir of the river,
the main channel terminating here, and several inferior
streams branching off in various directions, collecting the
waters of numbers of smaller basins. As far as 1 could
ascertain, the south-western branch, which we followed,
is the largest, but it does not appear to discharge one-third
of the water which flows from the outlet of the Cedar
lake.

Our route did not enable me to see more than twelve
miles of the length of this lake, but it has the appearance
of extending much farther than this, in a winding course,
generally about westerly, and from one to two miles in
breadth. On the lower part of the lake, the lands, which
now form a gradual ascent from the water, are still covered
with pine, cedar, &c. but on proceeding upward, this is
succeeded by considerable tracts of hard-wood, which are
separated by other spaces covered with fir, and this seems
to be the general character of the western end.

At the Cedar lake, I remained nearly three days, partly
delayed by bad weather, but chiefly waiting the arrival of
ason of the Algonquin chief, named Constant Pennaissez,
who had established his hunting winter quarters here.—
From him I received an excellent chart, which delineated
the route as far as his hunting bounds extended, nearly to
the source of the Nesswabic; but he could give no distinct
information as to the the situation of the portages crossing
the height of land. From Constant 1 Jearned that there
was a much better route from the Ottawa thus far, than
that which I had followed. It is by a stream entering the
Cedar lake, from the north, and communicating with
another, called after the Indian who hunts upon it, Map di

290 Topographical Notices.

Fong’s creek, flowing into the Little river. This, though
the longest, is much the smoothest route, and is always
followed by the Indians passing between the Ottawa and
the Cedar lake, with loaded canoes. It would have been
much the most interesting route for me, had 1 known of it
in time.

One of my men having become quite lame from a hurt in
his foot, was obliged to remain at the Cedar lake. This
determined me to proceed with the four remaining hands
in one canoe, taking only about twenty days provisions,
and otherwise as light as possible. [ was in hopes of being
able to return in that time, but the man was instructed not
to move farther than the Trout lake with our provisions
and canoe for at least thirty days, and if we had not then
made our appearance, he was allowed to make the best of
his way. In the mean time his quarters were comfortable
enough, being on a most excellent fishing station, and in
the neighborhood of the friendly Pennaissez.

There is still a continuation of rapids for four or five
miles on the small river, which we now began to ascend.
To surmount these, a good wide portage road has been
formed north of the channel, through a stony hard-wood
tract, in which three small lakes are crossed, and this at
length brings us to the elevated country. Hard-wood now
appears to be the general growth wherever a view is
obtained a few hundred yards inland beyond the firs and
cedars, which here, as in other parts of Canada, commonly
skirt the waters. -

There is, however, little extent of rising ground to be
seen from this stream of water, the hollow which it oceupies
forming but a trivial interruption to the general level face
of the country, Ina few miles it ceases to have a regular

Topographical Notices. 291

river channel, being merely the connection of a range of
lakes, extending nearly south through the table land. Of
these, there are four principal, and several smaller ones,
some of them only separated by narrow still channels, and
others by short swift streams of inconsiderable descent.—
The largest of these lakes do not appear to extend six miles
in any direction, though the route did not always enable
me to judge exactly of their size. They vary mueh in
shape, several being deeply indented with bays, and others
finely checquered with islands. The shores are invariably
bold, though hardly ever precipitous, but rising one or
two hundred feet into gentle hills, and long swelling
ridges, covered with the finest hard-wood, generally with
a small mixture of white pine.

‘Lhe scenery is of the most pleasant and inviting nature,
totally differing from the wild romantic views along the
Ottawa, and indeed from any thing I had before seen in
the country. Itis rare, in the uncultivated parts of Canada,
to see beauty and fertility combined. Generally the
richest lands have a dreary, and, often too truly, an un-
healthy aspect. Here, amidst the most enlivening scenery,
there is every appearance of fertility ; and both from the
nature of the soil and waters, an assurance of the country
being of the most healthy nature.

White pine abounds across the whole country in the
greatest perfection. Red pine is not seen on this route
after leaving the Cedar lake; nor did I observe a single
white oak, from the neighborhood of*the Ottawa, until
approaching lake Huron. Maple is the principal tree
about here, perhaps composing half the forest. Birch and
beech are in about equal proportions, and bass-wood and
elm rather more rare.

292 Topographical Notices.

The whole of the lakes, not only here but in every part
of our routes, are deep and clear, (shoal, or rushy shores
being seldom seen) and they seem generally to be stocked
with fish of various sorts and excellent quality. In this
particular, the waters of the Nesswabic surpass those of
any other river I have seen in the country. In its larger
lakes, eels and catfish are taken, of a size and plumpness
seldom seen in the Ottawa; but the most noted fish is
called the white trout, which is caught in abundance, both
winter and summer, frequently forty pounds in weight.
It is of a light silvery hue, and cream-coloured in the flesh,
but in shape and flavor resembles the common speckled
trout, which is also plentiful in the same water. Neither
of these kinds are found in the Grand river.

The range of lakes above described continues for about
twenty-five miles, beyond which the stream winds through
an open marsh of considerable size, and the first thing of
the kind we had met with. Here it divides into two
branches, and our chart directed us up the most northerly.
About two miles from the swamp, this channel begins to
make a considerable ascent, being interrupted by several
small rapids and a fall twelve or fifteen feet high, within
the space of a few miles. The route here is extremely te-
dious, from the scarcity of water, and number of fallen trees.
To the south of the stream, the shores are broken and fre-
quently swampy: but we were now close upon the divi-
sion of the waters, and some interruption to the fertility
was to be expected. On the north side the lands still con-
tinue good. Five or six miles from the swamp, after as-
cending a steep rise, upwards of one hundred feet, I found
a plain of excellent loam, and apparently very extensive.

At length the stream opens into a deep round basin, about

Topographical Notices. 293

a furlong across, and from this, a long straight passage,
with bold hard-wood shores of the finest foliage, gradually
tapers to the breadth of thirty or forty feet, through which, at
the distance of about a mile are seen the shores of a more
extensive sheet of water—altogether it is a curious and
beautiful scene. The northern shores of this lake have
even a richer appearance than any thing I had yet met
with. After rising somewhat abruptly to a height of sixty or
eighty feet, they continue in a level sweep round the lake,
covered with the most luxuriant maple woods, and without
any pine. Though the bed of the water has here risen consi-
derably, yet the adjoining land is not higher than that along
the range of lakes farther down the river; and there is every
appearance of the ground to the northward continuing on
a fertile level, to the streams flowing towards lake Nipissing,
which are only a few miles distant.

The lake which we had now reached, is within the
Mississagua hunting bounds, and along the south shore,
1 was directed to look for the portages leading to the
Huron waters. From the Cedar lake, thus far, it had
proved a three days’ journey, travelling leisurely, though,
by the help of Constant’s chart, without much delay in
tracing out the route. After a little searching we found
a portage-path which led to a small lake, and from thence
ascending a brook still belonging to the eastern waters, we
soon arrived at another carrying place, which, from its
westerly direction, and being distinctly tracked and marked,
1 did not doubt to be the proper route. Having proceeded
along it nearly a mile, we were met by an Indian, only the
second we had scen since leaving the Ottawa. It could
not have occurred in better time, for | now found that we
had missed the main route, and begun to follow an interior
hunting track.

294 Topographical Notices.

After retracing our way for a little, the Indian conducted
us to an extensive piece of water, which he called Otter
lake. Its waters run into the Nesswabic by the most
southerly of the two branches, meeting at the swamp before
spoken of, and which is only five or six miles distant from
Otter lake. Of course this southerly branch should have
been our route ; but I had no reason to regret our wander-
ing, as it was the means of throwing us in the way of this
Indian, without whose information we must have incurred
much more serious delay.

He was one of the Iroquois tribe, who reside with the
Algonquins, at the Lake of the Two Mountains. They are
generally robust enterprising fellows; and, having no
hunting territory of their own, frequently ascend the
Ottawa, and passing over the grounds of their Algonquin
friends, make free with the beavers and otters, on those of
the Mississaguas. These lroquois, from their roving habits,
are the best guides through this part of the country. The
hunter we had fallen in with, and his father, had been
rambling round this neighborhood for a twelve month, and
described it as bonne terre partout partout, and every where
abounding with small lakes. A few hours journey north-
ward from the lake, on the northern branch of the Ness-
wabic, (and the shores of which are above described as
peculiarly fertile) he says the streams run off in a north-
westerly direction, and no doubt it must be to the south
river, so that it seems almost certain that there is no
material alteration in the nature of the country, before
reaching the waters running into lake Nipissing. Indeed,
from every thing that came under my observation, there
appears to be no distinct continuation of heights dividing
these level tracts, either towards the north or the west,

_

Topographical Notices. 295

A few weeks previous to our meeting with the Iroquois,
he had made an excursion to Penetanguishine, and I now
learned that a few miles more would bring us to the head
of a considerable river, running in that direction. With
the lowest part of this river, however, he was not acquains-
ed, having left it some distance above the mouth, by aroute
crossing to the Severn. I procured from him a chart of his
whole journey, as near as he could recollect it, and also a
sketch of the various streams of waters forming the heads
of the rivers, running both ways from this vicinity.

Round Otter lake the lands have very little rise and are
timbered with hard-wood and a considerable mixture of
white pine. Where we chanced to encamp, the soil was
very good and free from stones. From this lake their is no
further ascent on the waters, in the direction we now pro-

‘ceeded. A still channel, in places scarcely twice the

breadth of the canoe, winds for a mile or two through a
tamarac swamp, and ends iu a basin of a remarkably cir-
cular shape, near a quarter of a mile in diameter. I think
it probable that, at some points, this swamp continues un-
interrupted to the first western stream, not a mile distant ;
but, on the route, the marsh is crossed by a sandy bank,
twenty to thirty feet high, and about fifty paces over, and
close to the round pond, from which is a miserable sinking
portage, of half a mile to the first Huron water, a deep
pool two or three acres in extent. The surface of this was
raised to its utmost brim, by a beaver dam near the outlet,
which accounted for the wet and yielding nature of the
. The beavers have, in fact, nearly effected the
junction of the Huron and Ottawa waters.
After crossing this pond, there is a further portage of
about three quarters of a mile, over an uneven rocky tract,
aP

296 Topographical Nolices. :

to a lake appearing to be of considerable extent to the
right of our rout, and from which flows the river which
was to bear usto lake Huron. It is here a fine clear stream,
with a gravelly channel, twenty or thirty feet wide, and
already with sufficient water, even in the dry season in —
which I passed, for the easy navigation of a three-fathomed
canoe, excepting at afew rippling shoals. This river, by
the traders, is called the Muskoka, after the Mississagua
chief, who hunts in some part of its neighborhood. The
Indians have some other name for it, which I could not
learn.

The nature of the rock thus far across the country, is
much the same as on the ridges along the Ottawa, and on
the Muskoka it continues so quite to lake Huron; the
shores and numerous islands of which, near the mouths of
this river, as far as I can judge, being of the same granite
composition as the Ottawa heights. The different parts of
the routes, however, present considerable variety in the
yock. On the lower main channel of the Nesswabic, it
generally lies in round compact masses of a redish hue,
without any regular vein. On approaching the Cedar lake
it is dark coloured, and strewed along the shore in angular
fractures. From that lake to the height, the surface stone
near the Nesswabic chiefly consists of dark coloured
bowlders. On the Peonga (or Madawaska route), more
solid rock is met with, still of the same kind, but various
in its appearance,

On the western descent of the country, there is yet more
variety in the granite. It assumes different shades, is

sometimes craggy and angular, but more frequently, as on
the Huron shore, lying in round solid masses. Nearly
from the source of the Muskoka, it is seen at intervals in

Topographical Notices. 297

smooth beds, or layers, from six inches to four feet thick,
and generally dipping to the south-west. I observed no
limestone on any part of these routes, from the Ottawa
until reaching Penetanguishine bay, where it appears in
abundance.

About the first lake on the Muskoka, the shores are
rocky and fir-timbered, and they continue so for a mile or
two farther down the stream. In half a mile it touches
upon another piece of water, extending to the left, anda
mile further, after passing a fall two or three feet high,
is a very picturesque lake, extending also to the left,
apparently several miles. Here the country resumes its
fertile appearance, and retains it, with some inconsiderable
exceptions, to the mouth of the river. Immediately
beyond this lake, is a short rapid and portage, a little
below which, the river is joined by a considerable stream
from the north, and soon after enters a fine open piece of
water, about two miles in extent. Within three miles
below this, are two more small lakes, and from this point,
which is about twelve miles from the first basin, the water
ceases to widen out in this way, now forming a regular
river channel, in which are only three more lakes on the
whole course.

A little above the lowest of these basins, the Madawaska
route, by which we recrossed the country, strikes off from
he channel of the Muskoka, and to prevent recurrence
may be here described.

On leaving the latter stream, this route follows a chain
of small lakes, extending nearly eastward. The height

viding the waters of the two rivers, is between the second
and third of these ponds, only about four miles from the
Muskoka ; and to this point the ascent appears yery con-

298 Topegraphical Notices.

siderable, probably exceeding one hundred and fifty feet.
The stream from these lakes is soon joined by another
from the south, and forms a western branch of the Mada-
waska, which is followed for some way. On this part of
the route, the country is very pleasant, consisting of a
succession of hard-wood hills of moderate declivity, and
the portages are generally over an excellent soil, though
often encumbered with loose stones. As we descend the
waters of the Madawaska, these favorable appearances
begin to give way. Swamps and rocky ridges become
frequent near the river, and the pine gradually thickens
on the hils. In short, the whole country seems decidedly
to change for the worse.

About twenty miles from the Muskoka, the route leaves
this branch, and bearing more northerly, proceeds seven
or eight miles across a poor stony tract, by several small
lakes and rough ill tracked portages. The last of these,
not less than three miles long, over rather better soil,
conducts to the Abeunga, or, as commonly pronounced,
Peonga lakes, which are among the finest in the interior,
and form the principal reservoirs of the Madawaska river.
The first lake of this name extends northerly, in a winding
direction, one or two miles broad, but of the length I could
form no idea, as the route only passes up it, about four miles
to the outlet, near which there is a trading house belonging
to the Company, occupied in the hunting season. After
gliding down a swift clear stream, for two or three hundred
feet, the second Peonga lake opens to the view, four or
five miles in extent, to the north-east, and with a consi-
derable breadth, though its appearance is much diminished
by a hard-wood island, containing some hundred acres,

To the north of these lakes, are long, sloping, rising

oe

Topographical Notices. 299

grounds, between one and two hundred feet high, and of
the most fertile appearance. ‘To the south, the country is
much in the same form, but covered with firs and birch.—
Indeed this route, by the Peonga lakes, with the exception
of the first fifteen miles from the Muskoka, appears to be
nearly the division line between the hard-wood and fir
regions.

There is still another lake of the same name, separated
from the others in a similar way, by a short swift stream ;
but we did not enter it, our route leading off from the
middle basin. North-westerly, through two small lakes,
still discharging into the Madawaska, and from thence, by
a portage of four miles, over a miserable soil, we reached
the waters of the Nesswabic at lac Clair, a pretty piece of
water, but with sterile looking shores, and appearing to
extend about four miles north and south. This is only
separated from lac la Vieille by a stream and portage not
a furlong in length. The route passes closely up the
eastern side of the Vieille lake, about three miles to the
outlet. The lake appears to extend much farther to the
north ; but from the numerous islands, I could obtain no
distinct view of its size, in any direction. To the north
and west the lands appear good, and here also are some
trading huts, only occupied in the winter. As before
mentioned, the Vieille stream joins the Nesswabic about
twelve miles below this lake. In this space it forms no
basins of any consequence, and has many rapids. In one
place there is a portage of more than two miles, cutting
off a great rapid bend in the stream.

On the whole, the Peonga route is a most harrassing
one. It leads over much higher ground than the more
northerly route, by the source of the Nesswabic, and jis in

300 Topographical Notices.

every respect less eligible. The whole distance from
where we leave the Muskoka, to the mouth of the Vieille
stream, appears about fifty miles, and in this space there
is no less than three dividing heights of land, and altogether
thirty portages, three of them between two and four miles
long, and several exceeding one mile. Nineteen lakes,
great and small, are crossed.

I now return to the Muskoka :—As already noticed, this
river ceases to widen out into lakes, about twelve miles
from the first one on the route, and from this point it con-
tinues to flow in a regular channel for about twenty miles.
On the first seven or eight miles of this space, there are
several small rapids, and for the ensuing ten or twelve,
is a smooth stream, winding in a most extraordinary man-
ner, through a level sandy valley, timbered chiefly with
balsam, tamarac, and poplar, beyond which, however, the
hard-wood rising grounds are seen, seldom a mile distant
on either side. The river here is of a very uniform breadth,
from sixty to eighty feet ; the depth is six feet and upwards
quite across the channel, and the current about one mile
per hour.

This winding channel is terminated by a great and
sudden descent in the river. First is a little rapid water,
and then succeeds a fall, nearly perpendicular, of about
thirty feet. Below this are some rapids, for halfa mile,
which suddenly and in a great slanting fall, descending
perhaps fifty feet. Neither of the portages at these falls
exceed a furlong in length. On the lower one is a curious
variety of the rock. When broken, it is of a light carmine
colour, and resembling free-stone in the grain. Not much
of it is seen above ground, but it appears to be in regular
beds, three or four feet thick, and though rather hard

Topographical Notices. 301

near the surface, it would probably be found, on more
thorough examination, a fit and beautiful material for
building.

These falls may be considered as the western verge of
the interior table lands. In a direct line this point is pro-
bably about twenty miles from the division of the waters.
The route of the Muskoka, thus far, continues nearly in the
same direction as that on the upper parts of the Nesswabic,
and the whole direct breadth of the level country on this
route appears to be about fifty miles. The perpendicular
rise within this space, from either side to the height of land,
I should not suppose to exceed seventy feet.

The streams running in every direction from these
uplands, have a much more steady supply of water, and
are far purer than the lower tributaries of the Ottawa.
The channels are generally very moderate in breadth,
appearing to be little troubled with floods, which, from
the marks along the shores, seldom seem to rise above two
feet (perpendicularly) in the streams, and fifteen or eighteen
inches in the lakes. These favorable distinctions are
readily accounted for in the form and nature of this interior
country, consisting of a vast level, generally with a light
free soil devoid of marsh, and interspersed with hundreds
of small deep reservoirs, retaining and refining the water
again and again, before it passes to the main rivers.

The singular facilities which this plain country possesses
for water communication, within itself, must be evident.
Were there any possibility of leading a population into it,
the channels and basins of still water, intersecting it in
every direction, might quickly be completed into a rami-
fication of water ways, which for general utility, and
natural beauty could scarcely find a parallel. Sufficiently

302 Topographical Notices.

deep and expansive for the largest steam-hoat, and yet too
small, or too well sheltered by the bold shores, to be
dangerous for the smallest skiff. But without some main
line of navigation from the inhabited parts of Canada, this
pleasant and commodious region must, for obvious reasons,
remain a desert.

In less than half a mile below the great fall, a narrow
lake is entered, which appears to extend a number of miles
north and south, along the base of the ridge, but we saw
neither extremity, merely passing with the flow of the water
about a mile across the middle of the lake. From hence
the river continues a rapid descent for abont eight miles,
through fine hard-wood forests to the next lake. In this
space the fall, which must be considerable, is principally in
rapids, it being the only part of the river where there is
any considerable descent of this kind.

The piece of water to which this leads, with its surround-
ing shores, is the finest in appearance which we met with.
It extends about ten miles nearly south, and towards the
lower part is a wide inlet to the east, much farther than I
could distinguish. Several islands of various sizes, rise
boldly from the water, andin the entrance of the great
eastern bay, just mentioned, there is one appearing to
contain three or four hundred acres of good land. On the
west, the shores rise quickly to a considerable height,
timbered with hard-wood and white pine. On the east,
they form a long gradual slope of the richest appearance,
and without a fir for miles.

A large southern branch of these waters flows into the
eastern arm of this lake. Its course is through several
considerable lakes, and by it canoes may pass to the Trent or
lake Simcoe. I did not see this branch, but was informed

a ee ee

Topographical Notices. 303

of it by a trader well acquainted with this vicinity. He
further asserted that saltpetre is found on a certain part of
the stream, not far from its mouth. ‘The fine central basin
which receives these rivers appears to have been longa
principal station of the traders. There are here vestiges
of two old establishments, besides a commodious house in
good repair, but deserted when we passed.

The Muskoka flows from the southern extremity of the
lake, apparently doubled in size. It is now from one to
two hundred feet wide, containing about as much water
as the Rideau, and continually interrupted by small falls,
with here and there a short rapid, among which obstruc-
tions there is seldom four miles of still water together.
The channel between the falls is alternately composed of
sand and a firm compact gravel. The portages, which are
now well tracked, are generally over even ground, the
shores of the river being seldom rough or precipitous, even
near the falls and rapids. Considering the great descent
of the country, the canoe route is as good as could be looked
for, consisting, with little exception, of smooth runs and
short portages, and this continues to be its character to
the end. In returning we made our way up the river
about as expeditiously as we had descended.

This succession ofsmall falls continues for about twenty
miles from the Trading lake, when the river again makes a
great and sudden descent. There are first two falls, from
fifteen to twenty feet in height, and then a sloping fall of
of sixty or seventy, all within a quarter of a mile, andina
straight range down the ridge, forming together a wild
interesting scene. A little below this, the river is joined
bya large branch from the north, and it now winds gently
with a broad deep and still channel to its last and largest

2a

304 Topographical Notices.

lake, about six miles distant from the great fall.

There are altogether fourteen portages on this river, and
the difference in level of the two lakes, is, I think, about
two hundred and fifty feet. The channel here is not
remarkably winding except at two points, for a few miles.
The course continues much the same as on the upper parts
of the river, averaging about 8. S. W. until half way
between the lakes, when it makes a decided turn nearly
westward for the remaining part of the route. The lands
retain their promising appearance along this part of the
river, being almost every where covered with timber of
nearly the same description as that in the centre of the
country. Inreturning 1 examined the vicinity of most of
the portages, and almost invariably found a light soil of
fair quality, though frequently uneven and strong, as might
be expected near the falls.

The large stream which flows in from the north at the
lower part of this run, is the same by which, and the south
river, (as before hinted) there is a canoe route to lake
Nipissing. On a lake about two days journey up this
branch, isa trading station to which the common route is,
not by the Muskoka, but along a considerable river flowing
out of, or through a large lake not far to the westward of
the station, and entering lake Huron, (as 1 am told,) about
thirty miles from the French river. It is called the
Neyetewa, and the country along its upper parts, and on
the northern branch of the Muskoka, is said to be much
of the same nature as that which we passed through.

The last Muskoka lake is a great body of water extending
chiefly north-westerly, and containing hundreds of islands,
some of them very large, but appearing mostly barren.
From the entrance of the river, the route runs westerly

q

Topographical Notices. 305

through the islands, about ten miles to the outlet of the
lake, which we found without much delay, having fortu-
nately met with an Indian, (only the third we had seen,)
the night before, who directed us how to steer, and but for
this, we should, in all probability, have spent days in
searching for it. It was impossible to form any idea of
the extent of this piece of water to the northward, on
account of the multitude of islands. To the south west,
it extends about ten miles from the outlet. In this direction
it is less crowded with islands, and has a fine appearance.
Where the main shores could be distinguished, they
generally seemed to be of a habitable nature, continuing
round the water in an even moderate elevation, with,
however, a greater proportion of white pine than I had
before usually observed. At the lower end of the lake, the
appearance is not favorable, the growth, as far as seen,
being of the fir kind.

From the southern extremity of the lake to the Severn
river, the distance is only eight or nine miles, and over
this space is the common route by which the fur traders
reach the waters of the Muskoka. From the lake is a
portage of about three miles, leading to a rivulet which
passes through two small lakes, and enters the Severn, half
a mile above the fifth portage from Penetanguishine bay.
On my return I ascended the Severn and regained the
Muskoka by this route. The long portage, close to the
large lake, is mostly over a good, though uneven soil, but
from that to the Severn, the country gradually assumes a
barren aspect. Along this river from the fifth portage to
its mouth, a distance of fifteen or sixteen miles, the shores
are uniformly barren, consisting, in fact, generally of solid
rock, even on the smooth water. ‘The limestone of

306 Topographical Notices.

’

Penetanguishine bay does not extend up the Severn, the
stone of this river appearing exactly of the same nature as
along the Muskoka, Both streams evidently flow from the
same ridge of country, though the sources of the Severn,
are without doubt ina much lower part of it. The elevation,
however, of lake Simcoe above the Huron, must be consi-
derable, there being seven portages altogether to this
lake, and five of these which I passed, certainly form an
ascent not far from one hundred and twenty or thirty feet,

At the outlet of the large Muskoka lake, is a fine fall
sixteen or tweenty feet high, with a heavy body of water,
The river now appears to contain considerably more water
than the Severn, and probably three times as much as the
Rideau. A mile or two below this fall, the channel is
divided. The principal branch runs north-westerly, and
enters the Huron at Moose point, said to be about thirty
mils from Penetanguishine, The lower branch appearing
to lead off about one third of the water, continues in a
westerly course thirteen or fourteen miles to a small
sequestered bay on the lake, about ten miles north of the
same place,

We followed the lower stream. ‘There are on it ten short
portages chiefly passing moderate falls, which, with some
rapid water, form adescent from the Muskoka lake, of
probably about one hundred and fifty feet. The breadth of
this channel is very irregular, particularly towards its
outlet, where it spreads out into ponds full of rocky islands,
‘The lands along it continue good, and even appear to
increase in fertility as we approach the lake. The soil at the
portages is richer than I had generally observed close to
the river, and often free from stones to the brink of the
falls and rapids, Within three or four miles of lake

——

:
|
j

Topographical Notices. 307

Huron, a sudden change takes place, and nothing is now
seen but low, solid, and frequently bare masses of rock.
We reached the immense expanse of water the seventeenth
of September, the eighteenth day from the Ottawa, and
a long swell from the boundless north-west drove our now
little canoe speedily into the bay of Penetanguishine.

No contrast can be more complete than that of the fine
sloping hard-wood lands surrounding this spacious inlet,
and the bleak granite coasts and islands immediately to
the northward. Proceeding down the bay, we soon per-
ceived that the settlement of its shores was in the act of
commencement, At various points were small new inroads
into the forest, with buildings apparently but of a few
days standing. On approaching one of these, a voice in the
broad Yorkshire dialect, directed us round a point into the
smaller cove on which is the naval station.

One cannot view this noble bay and its vicinity, forming
a position at once beautiful, fertile, and central, between
the older settlements of Upper Canada, and the great
western navigation of the lakes, without feeling a surprise
that it should have remained in a state of nature to so late a
day. Asa port, however, Penetanguishine seems to have
one serious disadvantage. From its retired situation at
the bottom of the Georgian bay, and the prevalence of strong
north-west winds at particular seasons, it is often a matter
of the greatest difficulty for vessels to gain from hence the
body of the lake. The master ofa schooner which happened
to be at the station, informed me that in the previous
autumn he had spent twenty-five days in attempting to
beat round Cabot’s head, and, if I remember right, was
obliged after all to winter his vessel in the bay.

In returning, I fell in with the man who had remained

308 Topographical Notices.

at the Cedar lake on the twenty-fifth day after leaving him.
He had procured a chart of the lower part of the Nesswabic,
and was prepared to start punctually on the thirtieth day.
It was well for him that we had not been delayed beyond
that time, as his safe descent, alone and inexperienced in
such achannel, would have been almost impossible.

It occupied us altogether twelve days to repass from
Penetanguishine to the lake des Allumettes. Our travelling
was not expeditious, the men being obliged to pass twice
over the portages, and it being often very difficult to get
our three fathomed canoe through the uncleared tracks.
—Had I kept my old route instead of ascending the
Severn, and afterwards turning south by the Madawaska
waters, we should probably have regained the Ottawa in
ten days. By the sources of tle Nesswabic, a good route for
canoes (considering the elevation of the country) might be
easily opened the whole way from lake Huron to the Cedar
lake. Little rapid water is encountered on this route, and
none of the portages, in all about forty-five, exceed three
quarters of a mile. Ifthese were widened where necessary
and some fallen trees and drift wood removed. from the
upper parts of the rivers, a well manned canoe might pass
between the two points in four or five days. From the
Cedar lake to the Ottawa, the various routes are difficult or
circuitous, as before explained, and the only apparent way
to obtain expeditious access here, is by a road up the
Maskinongé valley.

From every appearance of the country along the upper
parts of the Nesswabic, and the whole of the Muskoka
river, I have no doubt that a fair proportion of it is fit for
settlement and cultivation. On this. line, the lands
throughout appear to be composed of the lighter soils, and

Topographical Notices. 309

are well elevated above the waters. My opportunities of
examining them were chiefly confined to the neighborhood
of the falls and rapids, where, of course, we may expect
to find the inferior portion of the soil; but even in these
places 1 frequently found excellent loamy lands, and seldom
any that are totally unfit for cultivation. If, however, this
line of country cannot be considered as the richest in
Canada ; its considerable elevation, free soil, and pure
waters, ensure it as being unsurpassed, and perhaps
unequalled, by any other section of the country, in the
important requisite of healthiness.

With regard to the nature of the whole body of the
country, extending from the sources of the Madawaska to
lake Nipissing, and from lake Huron to the Ottawa, I
cannot, from merely passing through it in one or two lines,
pretend to speak with certainty. The central part, how-
ever, of this wide region is, without doubt, generally
_ good, there being, as already stated, every reason to
_ Suppose that the soil increases in fertility as we descend
from the elevated tracts on the head waters of the Nesswa-

bic and Muskoka, towards lake Nipissing. As to that part

nearer lake Huron, and south of the French river, I have
obtained but little distinct account, which is favorable,

however, as far as it goes. On the whole, every thing I
“ have seen or heard, enables me at least to state that in this,

hitherto, unnoticed part of Canada, a fine habitable country

will be found, to the extent of millions of acres; and I have
now only to express my hope, that it will, ere long, be
rendered accessible to population,

310 Canadian Teatile Substances.

ees

Notes respecting certain TEXTILE SUBSTANCES
an use among the North American INDIANS,
by W. Green, Esqr.

Tue Indians of North America were found, by the
Europeans, in possession of the means of manufacturing
cordage, and of making a variety of articles of fine thread,
both by ingenious plaiting, and by weaving in its simpler
modes. it does not appear that, for these purposes, they
used the flaxen and hempen fibres which we employ ; nor
does it appear that the phormion tenax, (if, indeed, this
continent or its islands produced that plant, so abundant
in New Zealand, and elsewhere in Polynesia,) nor that the
nettle, [wrticu] each of them so much superior in strength
and elasticity to hemp, were known to the Indians as
textile fibre. Sinew and hide were among the substances
extensively used by them, and preferred for many purposes
for which their superior strength and the minute divisibility
of the former peculiarly fitted them. The flax and hemp
introduced from Europe, have by no means, even now,
and among those Indians whose domestication has given
them the readiest access to European productions, super-
seded the use of the substances employed by their ancestors :
and, if this retention be not merely a consequence of
partiality for that which is derived from the remote past—

oo! bP ers

a = he I el

AS” Sq_eee

Canadian Teatile Substances. 311

but be founded on a knowledge, either of the sufficient or
the superior fitness of the articles to the end of their appli-
eation, or on the facility with which, from their abundance,
they may every where be procured, it may be useful to
record what are the substances, and what the process by
which they are prepared, in the hope of enlarging our own
list of materials useful in manufactures and arts.

The inner bark of the more slender branches of the elm,
of hornbeam ([carpinus], of American walnut [juglams
cinerea], of linden [tilia], of bois de plomhb [ ? J, being
stripped from the wood, and the outer bark scraped off, is
macerated in ley of wood-ashes, and boiled in it, then
rinced in pure water ; and, for many purposes, such as
the making of various ligatures, no other preparation than
merely twisting it to increase its flexibility, (as is done
with withs in the same intention,) is used. But for plaiting
and weaving, the bark having been treated as above, is
beaten with a mallet, until its separated fibres become of
the required tenuity. Among the articles made of these
filaments, are the bands which, passing round the head
and shoulders, sustain the weights the Indians have to
carry in their excursions. The strain these bands bear on
such occasions is very great. They are ingeniously plaited,
often highly ornamented with embroidery, are two or three
inches in breadth, are divided at the ends into narrow
strips, for the more convenient attachment of the suspended
baggage, and they are as soft and pliant as any thing made
of flax can be.

For coarser purposes the bark of white cedar [thuya
occidentalis), is used. It does not undergo the preparation
stated above, but is merely supplied by twisting. All the
above materials may be procured several feet in length.

26

312 Canadian Textile Substances.

For stitching the sheets of birch bark, of which their
canoes are made, slender roots of the spruce tree are used.
The root is merely slit longitudinally into strips, as thick
as packthread, moistened, twisted and applied. The
sewing is then payed over with resin extracted from pine-
knots by boiling them in water.

The phormion tenax, although so exceedingly strong,
contains some principle soluble in weak alkaline ley and
even in soap and water, the removal of which principle
reduces its strength below that of most other fibres, very
much limiting its utility. The fibre procured by the
Indians, in not being weakened by these menstrua, has
some advantage over that otherwise invaluable filament.

It cannot be doubted that every textile fibre of vegetable
origin would be a fit material for paper—and it is probable
that the toughness of that article, which ought to be
extreme, might be made as nearly equal to that of the
original material as is consistent with its nature, by
reducing it to pulp by sufficiently pounding it, instead of
hashong it, (as is usually done,) into particles having little
more coherence than is afterwards supplied by sizing the
sheet.

Letter on Witchcraft. 313

Autograph Letter of Corton MATHER, on
Wircucrart, presented to the Literary
and Historical Society, by the Honorable
Chief Justice SEWELL.

17 6", 1692.
Ss,

You would know whether I still retain my opinion about
y® horrible Witchcrafts among us, and I acknowledge that
I do,

I do still Think That when there is no further Evidence
against a person but only This, That a Spectre in their
Shape does afflict a neighbour, that Evidence is not enough
to convict y* of Witchcraft.

That the Divels have a natural power w® makes them
capable of exhibiting what shape they please I suppose
no body doubts, and I have no absolute promise of God
that they shall not exhibit mine.

It is the opinion generally of all protestant writers that
y® Divel may thus abuse y* innocent, yea, tis y° confession
of some popish ones. And o* Honorable Judges are so
eminent for their Justice, Wisdom, & Goodness that what-
ever their own particular sense may bee, yett they will not
proceed capitally against any, upon a principle contested

34 Letter on Witcheraft.

with great odds on y® other side in y* Learned and Godly
world.

Nevertheless, a very great use is to bee made of y°®
spectral impressions upon y* sufferers. They Justly Intro-
duce, and Determine, an Enquiry into y® circumstances of
y° person accused ; and they strengthen other presumptions.

When so much use is made of those Things, I believe
y® use for w y® Great God intends y™ is made. And
accordingly you see that y® Eccellent Judges have had
such an Encouraging presence of God with them, as that
scarce any, if at all any, have been Tried before them,
against whom God has not strangely sent in other, & more
Humane & most convincing Testimonies.

If any persons have been condemned, about whom any
of y° Judges, are not easy in their minds, that y° Evidence
against them, has been satisfactory, it would certainly bee
for y° glory of the whole Transaction to give that person a
Reprieve.

It would make all matters easier if at least Bail were taken
for people Accused only by y® invisible tormentors of y*
poor sufferers and not Blemished by any further Grounds
of suspicion against them.

The odd Effects produced upon the sufferers by y* look
or touch of the accused are things wherein y* Divels may
as much Impose upon some Harmless people as by the
Representac6n of their shapes.

My notion of these matters is this. A Suspeeted and
unlawfull com*union with a Familiar Spirit, is the Thing
enquired after. The communion on the Divels part may
bee proved, while, for ought I can say, The man may bee
Innocent ; the Divel may impudently Impose his com*union
upon some that care not for his company. But if the

Letter on Witchcraft. 315

com union on y* man’s part bee proved, then the Business
is done.

1 am suspicious Lest y* Divel may at some time or other,
serve us atrick by his constancy for a long while in one
way of Dealing. Wee may find the Divel using one
eonstant course in Nineteen several Actions, and yett hee
bee too hard for us at last, if wee thence make a Rule to
form an Infallible Judgement of a Twentieth. It is o* sin-
gular Happiness That wee are blessed with Judges who
are Aware of this Danger.

For my own part if the Holy God should permitt such a
Terrible calamity to befal myself as that a Spectre in my
Shape should so molest my neighbourhood, as that they
ean have no quiet, altho’ there should be uo other Evidence
against me, | should very patiently submit unto a Judgment
of Transportation, and all reasonable men would count
o' Judges to Act, as they are like y* Fathers of y* public,
in such a Judgment. What if such a Thing should be
ordered for those whose Guilt is more Dubious, and uncer-
tain, whose presence y* perpetuates y°® miseries of o' suffer-
ers? They would cleanse y* Land of Witchcrafts, and yett
also prevent y* shedding of Innocent Blood, whereof some
are so apprehensive of Hazard. If o' Judges want any
Good Bottom, to act thus upon, You know, that besides
y® usual power of Govern™, to Relax many Judgments of
Death, o' General Court can soon provide a law.

Ss,

You see y* Incoherency of my Thoughts but I hope, you
will also some Reasonableness in those Thoughts.

In the year 1645, a Vast Number of persons in y* county
of Suffolk were apprehended, as Guilty of Witehcraft;
whereof, some confessed. The parlament granted a special

316 Letter on Witchcraft.

comission of Gyer « Terminer for y° Trial of those Witches;
in w" comission, there were a famous Divine or two,
M' Fariclough particularly inserted. That Eccellent man
did preach two sermons to y* Court, before his first sitting
on y° Bench: Wherein having first proved the Existence of
Witches, hee afterwards showed y* Evil of Endeavouring
y® Conviction of any upon Defective Evidence. The Sermon
had the Effect that none were Condemned, who could bee
saved w'*"' an Express Breach of y* Law; « then tho’ t’was
possible some Guilty did Escape, yett the troubles of those
places, were, I think Extinguished.

O' case is Extraordinary. And so, you and others will
pardon y* Extraordinary Liberty I take to address You on
this occasion. But after all, I Entreat you, that whatever
you do, you Strengthen y* Hands of o' Honourable Judges
in y‘ Great work before y". They are persons, for whom
no man living has a greater veneration, than

S‘,
Your Servant

C. MATHER.
For
the Honourahle
John Foster Esq.

—_-

317

NN,

PLAN RaIsonneE’ d’EpucATION GENERALE ef
PERMANENTE, /e plus propre a@ faire la

- prosperité du Bas-Canada, en égard a ses

circonstances actuelles, par Joseru Frs.
PERRAULT, ct-devant Président de deux
Sociétés d’Education et fondateur d’une
Ecole Elémentaire Francaise & Québec.

Ayanr vu dans le Star du 15 de Septembre 1830, l’an-
nonce de la Société Littéraire et Historique de Québec, et
la promesse “ d’une Médaille honoraire d’argent pour le
* plan raisonné d’éducation générale et permanente, le plus
“ propre a faire la prospérité du Bas-Canada, eu égard a
“ ses circonstances actuelles,”’ je me suis cru appelé, nom-
mément, a entrer en lice sur cet important objet, qui m’oc-
cupe depuis plus de vingt ans, et sur lequel j'ai déja émis
mon opinion.

On peut comparer I’éducation dans ce pays, a une terre
qui est A ouvrir et exploiter.

Pour le faire, avec succes, on doit y procéder avec cir-
conspection ; de méme qu’un bon Cultivateur fait le tour de
sa terre, en examine le sol dans toute son étendue, pour
connoitre les endroits propres aux semences qu’il se propose
4’y répandre, a la saison la plus propice pour le faire ; de
méme on doit s'enquérir des sites les plus convenables pour

318 Plan Raisonné

ériger des Ecoles, des Séminaires, des Colléges, des Univer-
sités, &c. convenir de l’instruction que l’on donnera dans
chacun de ces établissements ; le mode d’enseignement que
Yon adoptera ; la qualification des maitres et précepteurs
que l’on exigera ; les recettes et dépenses de ces divers éta-
blissements ; et enfin la surveillance du tout, eu égard aux
circonstunces ou se trouve actuellement la Province du Bas-
Canada, a cause des différentes professions de foi de ses ha-
bitants,

J’exposerai succinctement ces requisitions, que j’estime
essentielles, dans des chapitres distincts et séparés ; afin
d’établir l’éducation, dans le pays, sur des bases solides,
substancielles et permanentes, comme on le demande.

CHAPITRE I.
Des Sites des Etablissements d’ Education.

Il est évident que des Ecoles, des Séminaires, des Col-
léges, des Universités ne peuvent étre érigés en méme quan-
tité et méme dimension, étre placés, de proche en proche, les
uns comme les autres ; le bon sens veut que le tout soit pro-
portionné aux besoins ; en conséquence que des écoles élé-
mentaires soient érigées, dans les Paroisses ; les Séminaires
et les Colléges dans les Comtés, et les Universités dans les
chef-lieux des Districts.

La meilleure échelle de proportion pour l’érection d’un
tel établissement est, sans doute, la population.

En conséquence il devroit étre réglé, qu’il ne sera érigé
une école publique d’éducation élémentaire que dans l'en-
droit le plus central, o& se trouveroient au moins quatre
cents péres de famille,

Que les Séminaires et Colléges publics ne seraient éta-
blis que dans Jes comtés dont la population donneroit trois
mille péves de famille.

a ie

d’ Education Générale. 319

Que l’on ne batirait d’Universités que dans les villes et
cités des districts, contenant au moins six mille péres de
famille.

Les écoles ¢lémentaires devraient étre érigées sur un
terrein, d’aumoins deux arpents de terre en superficie, afin
a’y faire cultiver un jardin potager, par les écoliers, et les
initier par ce moyen dans la connoissance de ce que l’on
appele la petite culture ; tout en apprenant a lire, écrire et
compter.

La maison devroit étre au moins de trente pieds sur
toutes faces, avoir douze A quinze pieds d’élévation entre
les deux planchers, avec une porte A deux battants sur le
devant, et une allée de sept a huit pieds de large conduisant
a l’estrade du maitre dans le fond, avec aussi deux fenétres
sur le devant et autant derriére, de sept pieds de haut eta
quatre pieds au dessus du _plancher de bas ; une cheminée
dans un des pignons pour recevoir le tuyau d’un poéle ; si
cette maison est distribuée, comme celle que j’ai batie
au Fauxbourg St. Louis, elle contiendra deux cents enfans.

Les Séminaires et Colléges dans les Comtés devroient
étre des édifices 4 deux étages de cent pieds de long, sur
quarante de profondeur et étre bAtis sur une terre de qua-
tre vingt A cent arpents ; pour, outre les connoissances que
Yon donne ordinairement dans ces maisons, y faire un cours
théorique et pratique de la grande culture.

Les Universités doivent étre baties, sur quatre faces,
comme le Collége des ci-devant Jésuites A Québec ; étre
vastes, pour y avoir des appartements séparés, dans chacun
desquels on enseigneroit les hautes Sciences ; on feroit les
expériences, on placeroit les instruments ; on feroit les ob-
servations astronomiques, &e. ke, &e,

25

320 Plan Raisonné

CHAPITRE II.

De l' Instruction que Von doit donner dans les Etablissements publics
d Education.

Comme il ne peut y avoir de bonne éducation que celle
qui est fondée sur la morale chrétienne, on doit l’ensei-
gner dans tous les établissements d’éducation publique dans
le pays ; régler ensuite que, dans les évoles élementaires de
paroisses, on y montrera, outre les priéreset le catéchisme,
a lire, écrire et compter, et de plus, ajardiner ; en consé-
quence que Je jardinage se feroit a la fraicheur du matin,
depuis huit heures jusqu’a dix, et du soir depuis trois jus-
qu’a cing.

Que |’on distribuera les heures d’étude et de travail dans
les Séminaires et Colléges des Comtés, de laméme maniére,
autaut que faire se pourra, dans le cours de |’année ; excepté
dans les temps de semence et de récolte ot le travail du de-
hors sera prolongé.

Que ces établissements doivent étre fournis des instruments
aratoires analogues aux travaux qui doivent s’y faire, ou des
matériaux mécessaires pour les faire faire par les éléves ; ils
doivent étre aussi pourvus d’animaux propres a l’exploita-
tion des terres, qui y seront logés, nourris et soignés par
les écoliers, afin de les instruire dans l’économie rurale et
Vart vétérinaire.

Les Universités doivent étre pourvues d’habiles profes-
seurs, dans les différentes branches d’instructions que l’ona
coutume de donner dans ces sortes d’établissements, des
ingrédients et instruments nécessaires pour les expériences
et observations astronomiques ; dont l’époque de ces divers
cours sera fixée par les Directeurs, ou Superintendans de

ees maisons.

—aeo

d’ Education Générale. 321:

CHAPITRE Il.
Du mode d’enseignement a adopter.

L’enseignement mutuel, c’est-a-dire : le sistéme Lancas-
terien, étant universellement reconnu étre le meilleur, sera
celui que vraisemblablement on adoptera; mais comme il
y a été fait plusieurs améliorations, il est 4 désirer que.la
Société Littéraire depéche quelques uns de ses membres
pour visiter les écoles tenues 4 Québec d’aprés ce mode, et
dans quelques unes des quelles il a été fait de grandes amé-
liorations, tant dans la quantité d’exercices que l’on y fait
pour instruire, que dans la diminution des dépenses pour y
parvenir.

Afin de mettre la Société en état de juger des améliora-
tions faitesA ce mode d’enseignement, il lui soumet son
manuel pratique et l’invite 4 se transporter 4 son Ecole
Elémentaire Francoise située au Fauxbourg St. Louis, pen-
dant sa tenue.

CHAPITRE IY.
Des qualifications des Maitres et Précepteurs.

Si l’on yeut introduire l'uniformité dans l'éducation a don-
ner a Ja Jeunesse du pays, il faut non senlement adopter un
mode d’enseignement, mais encore former des Précepteurs
et des Maitres qui puissent le propager ; pour ce faire il faut
les obliger 4 suivre un cours dans les meilleurs écoles des ci-
tés, érigées dans les districts de la Province ; ne les point ad-
mettre 4 tenir des écoles publiques, a moins qu’ils ne soient
munis de certificats de capacités, de ceux quisont a la téte
de ces écoles.

On ne peut se promettre de l’uniformité dans lenseigne-
ment, ni la certitude d’une bonne éducation que par ce
moyen ; pour quoi je prends la liberté de le recommander
comme une mesure essentielle.

~

322 Plan Raisonné

CHAPITRE V.

Des receties et dépenses des Etablissements d’ Education.

il sera bon de faire supporter la dépense des ¢tablisse-
ments d’éducation par les habitants qui les demandent,
ainsi que par ceux chez qui il sera jugé 4 propos d’en éri-
ger ;et ce dela méme manitre qu’ils coopétrent, ou sont
forcés de coopérer, pour la bitisse et réparation de leurs
Eglises et Presbytéres.

Alors on les verra y prendre intérét et se glorifier d’avoir
les plus beaux édifices, les meilleurs maitres, la plus
grande quantité d’enfants dans ces écoles, &c. &c. &e.
comme ils font pour leurs Eglises et Presbytéres.

Comme les péres de famille sont aussi bien tenus de
donner de I’éducation a leurs enfants, que de leur procurer
la nourriture et l’entretien, ils doivent non seulement con-
tribuer 4 l’érection et entretien des batiments, mais encore
au salaire des Maitres et Précepteurs.

Par ce moyen la Province se trouveroit déchargée d’un
fardeau qui tét ou tard lui sera trés-onéreux; se réservant
toutefois le droit d’accorder des suppléments et de donner
des gratifications aux Maitres, Précepteurs et Professeurs,
dans des cas privés ; afin d’encourager |’émulation.

CHAPITRE VI.
De la surveillance du tout.

Comme il y a tout lieu de présumer qu’il y aura, un jour
avenir, un grand nombre de ces établissements, dans une
Province aussi étendue qu’est le Bas-Canada, il est essen-
tiel de les organiser de maniére qu’on en puisse suivre le fil
et les surveiller.

La division de la Province en Paroisses, Districts et Com-
tés nous doit naturellement fournir ce moyen d’organisation;

"=

Fe a=

d’ Education Générale. 323

on devroit lone dans la principale cité de chaque District
former wh Bureau central qui auroit la direction et surveil-
lance des établissements d’education faits et A faire dans les
Paroisses et Comtés et leurs arondissements.

Chacun de ces Bureaux devroit ¢tre confié, soit A une
seule personne (ce que je préférerois) soit a plusieurs.

On devroit s’adresser 4 ces personnes pour tout ce qui
concerneroit |’érection, l’entretien et la police des établis-
sements d’éducation ; la nomination et fixation des salaires
des Maitres et Précepteurs ; la surveillance et repression
des abus ; la promulgation des régles et réglements.

C’est aussi 4 ces personnes que devroient étre faits les re-
tours du nombre de ces ¢tablissements, dans les Paroisses,
Comtés et Villes des Districts, de la quantité d’éléves qu’ils
contiennent, de leurs dépenses et recettes.

Chacun de ces Bureaux devroit étre tenu de faire le ta-
bleau général de son District d’aprés ces divers retours, le
remettre a qui lui seroit ordonné, ou le faire imprimer dans
une Gazette, pour l’information publique.

Etant spécialement donné en charge par la Société d’avoir
égard aux circonstances actuelles du Canada ; et les cir-
constances ou il se trouve, par rapport aux trois professions
de foi qui y sont reconnus, demandant des dispositions, qui
préviennent les animosités, et donnent A chacune d’elles
des suretés qu’elles ne seront point troublées dans les ex-
ercices et propagation de leurs croyances respectives, il
devroit étre formé, outre les Bureaux centrals de Districts,
des Bureaux particuliers de membres de chacuue de ces
professions de foi, qui auroient la direction et superinten-
dance des établissements de ceux de leur croyauce seule-
ment, et séparément de ceuxd’une autre croyance ; en avoir
seuls l’érection, |’entretien et la police ; la nomination et

324 Plan Raisonné

fixation des salaires des Maitres et Précepteurs ; la réfor-
mation des abus ; et la promulgation des régles et régle-
ments : dont et du tout ils devront faire rapport au Bureau
central de leurs Districts respectifs.

Les Bureaux centrals devroient étre autorisés 4 former
des Bureaux particuliers dans les Comtés de leurs Districts
respectifs, quand le cas le requérera, ou qu’ils en seront
sollicités ;4 en nommer les membres, a leur donner des
régles et 4 en recevoir les retours des écoles et autres éta-
blissements publics et privés de leurs Comtés respectifs.

Comme il y a des sectes de l’Eglise Anglicanne et Pres-
bytérienne qui désireroient avoir des établissements d’édu-
cations particuliers, pour élever leurs enfants dans leur
croyance, ils devront s’adresser au Bureau particulier de
V’Eglise Anglicanne ou Presbytérienne, dans lequel ils ont
plus de confiance, pour étreautorisés a les ériger, les entre-
tenir et les surveiller eux mémes ; 4 en nommer les Maitres
et Précepteurs, a leur fixer leur salaire et 4 leur donner les
régles et réglements qu’ils jugeront convenables pour l’en-
seignement et la police de ces softes d’établissements.

II seroit trés a propos d’empécher qui que ce soit d’ouvrir
des établissements publics, ou privés, d’éducation et ensei-
gnement quelconque,a moins que la personne qui se propose
de le faire n’obtienne d’un Bureau central, ou particulier,
du District o& elle veut s’établir, un certificat de bonnes
meeurs et de capacité ainsi que la permission de le faire.

Je ne puis terminer l’appergu de ce que je congois étre
le plus propre 4 propager |’éducation dans le Bas-Canada,
eu égard 4 ses circonstances actuelles, sans suggérer a la
Société Littéraire et Historique de Québec, le besoin d’ex-
citer 1’émulation des écrivains sur le mode d’enseignement
le plus expéditif et le moins dispendieux pour le pays ;

ad’ Education Générale. 325

)

ainsi que sur la méthode théorique et pratique de la grande
et petite culture convenable au Bas-Canada.

Quoi que chacun des chapitres que j’indique soit suscep-
tible d’une plus grande extension, je n’ai pas cru devoir le
faire ; j’ai préféré la laisser A la pénétration et sagacité des
Membres de la Société et me restraindre 4 ne donner qu’un
appercu des bases, sur lesquelles, on devroit, & mon avis,
appuyer l’enseignement de |’éducation, dans le pays ; pour
le rendre solide, substanciel et permanent.

>

3
Sa ie i, ;
Pid poems ts |
eg Batis doles ba .

“Suoielting 19
MEL Th AtES M wo “gy wy. At i Mee to

t vehi, sb ye the mech a E eet IGiry Avail yay
ee fdr ee a th He Res repent, ees ee shot Anise laity
Gisioy wariont, Gite wait alien age Hiab

ies SAP th ri

ss The, a, ‘ wry mn! & ao rece:
1 ‘> be m % Piemat y
’ Berit ion a. an Re Rs aay a i ie
fm “ Sach eee: a Ry PS ats cary Ais ahh

ate ene 1 oa 4 << a) smn

ea : Haley
Gain’ aan ine ares raed AHA

'
5a afiv« “eb iteeesiee aa Pee ar oe me a | ihe! Lins Rarit

. ed, fil ty, itt Lig Th Baas aghtae alles: spaseud ay Nate
isa tees he a ' & pH & ee bea ale ear,
1 aoe
fot mt stint anes PAS a sas ae pe ae re ayes
.

o rv wey eee aM sereer Ue sys ATES 3
gape Uo - h ae a
i maps 0” Is oe TS wa pass i Par? {
+ aoe ee se ll
Mines: Pe ee head, cc a salah e

a
*

ma °

,

With: (fies ' tae Se

meee tat we Pee

ey 1. CS Sethe

327

<r

Remarks on the Stoves used in Russia for
warming dwelling houses, with a Plan and
Model, by the Honorable Chief Justice
SEWELL.

Ix every climate which in severity is equal to that of
Canada, whatever tends to promote ceconomy in the article
of fuel, and to enable the inhabitant to keep his habitation
warm and comfortable at a diminished expenditure of
wood or coal, deserves attention. ‘The Russians and the
people in the north of Germany are liable to the effects of
as great a degree of cold as we are in Lower Canada, and
they have, fora series of years, endeavoured to obtain the
greatest quantity of heat from the smallest possible expen-
diture of fuel, and have ultimately adopted and maintain in
general use, stoves of a peculiar construction, which appear
from the accounts which are given of their effects to
answer the purposes for which they were intended. Of
these stoves I have the honor to submit to the consideration
of the society, a model and two drawings with sections
horizontal and vertical.

The model represents such a stove as is used in an
ordinary peasant-house in Russia, and is said to be in
geueral use in the hospitals of that country. This stove
consists of a small iron oven, surrounded on three sides

27

328 On Russian Stoves.

with a wall of brick or tile, arched. Between the walls
and the exterior of the oven, there is a space, into which
the common air of the room is admitted through apertures
which are placed in the brick wall on the level of the
hearth ; it there mixes with the heat which it imbibes from
the oven, and becoming sufficiently rarified ascends through
the pipes, which are placed in the arched covering of
brick, to the top of the room, from whence it is diffused
through the whole apartment or carried into other apart-
ments, at the option of the owner. The smoke descends
from the interior of the oven into a flue which surrounds
it, and passing through that flue ascends and escapes by a
chimney.

This description will be better understood by references
to the model, in which

(A) is a foundation of brick or stone, on which the stove
stands. .

(B) the grate on which the fire is made.

(C). a wall of brick surrounding the grate.

(F) the oven, which is of wrought or cast iron.

(D) the passage to the smoke flue or chimney.

(O) the external wall of brick which surrounds the oven
with apertures at the floor to admit the air.

(G) the arch turned over the oven.

(P. P) the pipes through which the heated air ascends
into the room.

(H) the door of the oven.

(I) the chimney, or smoke flue by which the smoke
escapes, in which there is a regulator, which is nearly
closed when there is no smoke.

There is annexed to this model, a scale of English feet

On Russian Stoves. 329

by which the exact size of any particular part of this stove
can be immediately and correctly determined.

The drawings represent two Russian stoves of a different
description, intended for entrance halls, parlours, dining
rooms, &c. The first of these drawings delineates such a
stove as is usually placed against the wall, in the centre,
between the two extremities of the room. The other, such
as is usually placed in the corners of two contiguous apart-
ments and is intended to warm both.

These stoves are not calculated to heat a current of air,
passing through the stove, and to disperse it through the
apartment by rarefraction ; on the contrary, they are design-
ed to warm the circumambient air within the room, by heat
imbibed by the air from the exterior of the stove, and for
this purpose they are lofty, and the flame, heat, and smoke,
are made to circulate through several flues which are formed
within the stove, before they are suffered to escape by the
chimney, in which there is a regulator, to be nearly closed
when there is no smoke, as in the common stove.

The figure (D) inthe drawing exhibits the exterior of
the first of these stoves with the stove-door (m) and two
smaller doors, (a)—(a) which afford access to the dampers.
The dotted line cd is the line of the horizontal section of
this stove delineated in the figure (A) and the dotted line
S g& is the line of the horizontal section, delineated in the
figure (B).—The figure (C) is a vertical section of this
stove, and the dotted lines a b—on the figures A & B—
show the line of this vertical section which cuts the front
flues in the centre.

In all these figures the brick work is represented in red,
the external ornamental covering in yellow; and the walls
‘of the apartments and of the chimnies in black.

330 On Russian Stoves.

The construction of both these stoves is alike.—Both
rest upon a brick foundation, on which a hearth stone is
placed, on these the fire place, the flues, and the exterior
walls are raised, and to the latter the ornamental covering
is united by iron clasps.—Three rows of tiles lying one over
another, and two rows of bricks, form the ceiling of this
stove and a double superstructure of the ornamental
covering terminates the whole.—This is shown in the figure
(C)—The space p g e wu (figure A) is the fire chamber
arched to ¢ 7 (as shown in the figure C)—From the open
arch at ¢ r (figure A) the flame, heat, and smoke rise into
the flue (o) and ascend through it to the ceiling of the
stove, and there enter through an aperture of the same
diameter as the flue (0) into the flue No. 1, descend again
to the level of the hearth, and there pass through a similar
aperture into the flue No. 2—then fall into No. 3—rise
again into No. 4—fall into No. 5—rise again into No.6—
fall into No. 7, and descend till they reach the arch of the
fire place from whence they ascend through No. 8, into the
chimney.—The passage of the flame, heat, and smoke
through the flues Nos. 6, 7 and 8, is particularly delineated
in the figure C and the lines? & s g in this figure exhibit
the aperture by which they pass from No. 5 into No.6.

As soon as the wood in the stove is reduced to charcoal
and there is no more smoke—the heat is retained by nearly
closing the damper in the flue No, 8. which is shown in
figure C, This damper is removed through the door (a)
(figure D) before the fire is lighted. The damper is some-
times placed in No. 6, at the spot where the other small
door (a) appears in the figure D,

The figure (H) in the drawing exhibits the exterior of
the second stoye with the stove door (m) and the damper

On Russian Stoves. 331

door (a)——the dotted line c d is the line of the horizontal
section of this stove delineated in the figure E—and the
dotted line f g—is the line of the horizontal section deli-
neated in the figure F. The figure G is a vertical section
of this stove, and the dotted lines «@ } on the figures E & F
show the line of this vertical section which cuts the front
flues in the center. The letters w p r ¢ in figure E, is
in this stove the arched fire chamber, out of which the flame
enters into the flue (o)—rises therein falls into No. 1], rises
into No. 2, falls into No. 3, rises into No. 4, falls into No.
5, rises into No. 6, falls into No. 7, and passes from thence
into the chimney at Z. It must be remarked that the
figures, 9 and 10 in figure F only denote empty spaces.
Great care must be taken in heating these stoves; in
Russia, birch wood is generally used for this purpose, but
the damper must not be closed, until the ignited wood has
become completely charcoal. If there be a piece of wood
in flames when the damper is closed, suffocation may be the
consequence. The exterior of these stoves is made in
Russia of white glazed tiles, It is however, probable, that
soap stone may be used with great advantage in the con-
struction of these stoves throughout, but especially for the
exterior, and if so, it would supply the want of tiles.
There is a scale of English feet upon the drawings of
these stoyes by which the dimensions of each of them, or
of any part of either of them, may be readily ascertained.

332

The following Essay was written by Lieut. Bappety, R. E, as a
candidate for one of the prizes offered by the Society for the best
treatise on the subject to which it relates, and which was unani-
mously awarded to that gentleman at the general annual meeting
of the Society on the first Tuesday of December, 1830.

An Essay on the localities. of MrtTa.ric
MINERALS in the Canavas, with some
notices of their Geological associations and
situation, §c. by Lieut. Bappety, R. E.

INTRODUCTORY.

Having observed among the subjects upon which the
Council of the Literary and Historical Society of Quebec,
is desirous to obtain information, one which my previous
studies and inquiries have rendered me somewhat familiar
witb, I presume, emulous of the Society’s honorary award,
to rank myself in the list of competitors for so desirable a
mark of its notice.

The subject to which [allude is thus described: “On
the deposits of ores along the coasts of the St. Lawrence,
within the limits of the Lower Province.”

In obeying the call of the Society, I trust it will not be
deemed a liberty if, in conveying to it the information I

-

On Metallic Minerals. 333

possess on this subject, the prescribed limits be broken
down and the field of research carried into both Provinces.
To do so, it is proposed to make use of all the information
which can be obtained, either from the reports of credible
eye witnesses, or from that which is to be found already in
the hands of the public.* This, joined to what little
original matter I may have myself to communicate, will, it
is hoped, as a compilation merit the approbation, as I know
it will receive the indulgence of that Society, whose efforts
to collect and reduce the ore of intelligence which exists
in the country, claim not only the encouraging notice of
its inhabitants, but that of the whole civilized world.

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.

I propose to commence this Essay with some general
observations upon those ores which are either known to
oceur in this country or which have been reported to do
so. Among the former iron ores rank first as much on
account of the profusion in which they are distributed over
many portions of the two Provinces as because of their
superior usefulness to all other ores.

ORES OF IRON.

Seven species of iron ore have been noticed in Canada,
viz. the magnetic oxide, specular iron ore, the red oxide,
the brown oxide, the argillaceous oxide, the carbonate of
iron, (sparry iron ore,) and the sulphuret of iron, (iron
pyrites). To these, for the sake of analogy, lam disposed
to add an eighth—the carburet of iron, which, indeed,

» pe ago I presented a paper to the members of the Viterar
and Histo Society, entitled ‘* Localities of Canadian Minerals,” which
they did me the honor to have published; from this, either in form or sub-
stance, my principal extracts will be taken.

334 On Metallic Minerals.

although containing very little iron and placed by most
mineralogical writers under the class ‘‘ combustible mine-
rals,”’ is by some introduced among the iron ores.

MAGNETIC OXIDE OF IRON.

As yeilding the best iron and in greatest quantity, merits
the first attention.

The magnetic oxide of iron has been found abundantly
in Canada, but only in one place where it has been smelted ;
at least I have no certain knowledge of more than one,
although it is reported that a portion of the ore formerly
employed to supply the furnace, at that period in operation,
in the seigniory of Batiscan, L. C. was of this species
of ore. :

The quantity of this description of ore in the township of
Marmora and Belmont, U. C.is probably inexhaustible.—
Its quality is generally good, in many instances excellent,
and a large portion of it can be brought by water to the
smelting works situated on the Crow River, at a com-
paratively trifling expence.—(Note 1.)

About four leagues in rear of St. Paul’s Bay, L. C. there
is another considerable deposit of the black oxide of iron or
magnetic oxide. It was known and partly explored,
according to Charlevoix, when the French were in pos-
session of the country, but I believe no smelting furnace
was ever established in the neighbourhood.—(Note 2.)

In the townships of Houghborough and Camden, U.C.
it issaid to occur in great abundanee ; as also at Hull on
the Ottawa.—(Note 3.)

As an alluvial sand it is often found forming ripples and
ridges at parallel levels, and distances on the shores of
rivers, particularly on the shores of those rivers in the
districts of Quebec and Three Rivers, which have their

On Metallis Minerals. 335

estuaries on the northern shore of the St. Lawrence.—
(Note 4.)

Magnetic oxide of iron in situ is characteristic of primary
formations and is, when met with, generally perceived to
form beds in granite or gneiss, or mica slate, or chlorite
slate, or serpentine, or greenstone, (primary,) or sienite.
It is with the two last that is has been observed to be
associated in this country. Rocks abounding in hornblende,
and such are many of those in Canada, often contain it.—
According tosome authors it has been observed in transi-
tion and even secondary rocks, but such an occurrence, I
believe to be very rare, if it be even well established as a
fact. The Swedish bar so much esteemed every where is
manufactured from this species of ore.

SPECULAR OXIDE OF IRON.

From the mines close to the establishment at Marmora
is taken an ore, which I consider as belonging to this
species. It is believed to be the only place in this country
where it has been found in any abundance. It occurs
associated with red and yellow ochre, sparry iron, and
argillaceous oxide of iron, near the junction of the primary
and transition rocks, forming discontinuous veins or beds
in the former, asienite. No information can be giyen as
to the quantity which remains, as the spot which has been
opened in exploring it and the other ores with which it is
associated, is now, apparently, exhausted; but there is
great probability that more would be found if sought for.—
It is with difficulty extracted. The splendent lustre and
pavonine tarnish so frequently present in this species of ore,
and from which circumstance it has been named, is absent
from the ore in question, but all its other characters agree.

aU

336 On Metallic Minerals.

The geological position of specular iron ore is generally
among the primary formations, but sometimes also with
transition. The largest known deposit of this ore is in the
Island of Elba, where it forms mountain masses. It has
been long known and admired for its splendent lustre and
for its beautiful pavonine tarnish. It is considered, when
abundant a profitable and valuable ore. ‘It furnishes
good iron both cast and malleable, but the latter is said
to be harder than that obtained from magnetic iron. It
generally yields from 65 to 75 per cent.” —CLEAVELAND.

RED OXIDE OF IRON.

This ore has been noticed in two or three places in
Canada, but most abundantly in the neighbourhood of
Henderson’s Lake, on the Gannanoqui, where it forms
apparently an extensive bed in a ferruginous sandstone
(old red sandstone).—(Note 5.)

At the Furnace Falls about three miles below this deposit
there was formerly a smelting establishment, where some
few articles were manufactured, not however from the
ore above alluded to, as that was discovered long after these
works were deserted, and none of it appears to have been
smelted for any other purpose than experiment, which is
said to have been favorable.

The red oxide of iron (red ochre) found at Marmora
associated with sparry ore &c. is like the latter used as a
flux for the more obstinate ores.

On the Magdalen Islands, in the Gulf of St. Lawrence,
a very fine description of red ochre is obtained well adapted
for a pigment.—(See Ist vol. of the Transactions, p. 44.)

The position of the Furnace Falls is one higbly favorable
for the establishment of a smelting furnace, and if there be

On Metallic Minerals. 337

an abundance of ore of a good quality in the neighbourhood,
which I cannot, however, take upon myself to say there is,
it well deserves the notice of government, or that of some
monied company or individual. I have been informed that
with very little expense, the river might be rendered
navigable from the head of these falls to the Rideau.

BROWN OXIDE OF IRON.

I have not seen any other variety of this species than the
ochrey or yellow ochre and umber. The first is, like the
red ochre, found always associated with other ores of iron,
from which, like rust from malleable iron, they seem to
have hac their origin. As a stain upon rocks the two
oxides are often seen here as elsewhere. There appears,
however, to be an independent bed of it at St. Augustin,
Lake Calvaire, L.C. and in the parish of l’Ancienne
Lorette.—(see Ist vol. Transactions, p. 44.)

Captain Bayfield noticed “ brown iron ore crystallized
and otherwise,” on the islets of Gargantua, Lake Superior.

Umber, which is a variety of this species, is so named
from the circumstance of its having been first noticed in
the dutchy of Spoletto, anciently called Umbria. It has
been found at Beauport, near Quebec, on land belonging
to Sheriff Sewell.

Umber has been sometimes classed with earthy minerals,
very erroneously, I think, as it contains 48 per cent. of
iron, and 20 per cent. of manganese. Its use as a pigment
is well known, and for that purpose it is brought princi-
pally from the Isle of Cyprus, where it occurs in beds.

ARGILLACEOUS OXIDE OF IRON,

The argillaceous oxide of iron, which is next in abun.
dance in this country to the magnetic oxide, and from

338 On. Metallic Minerals.

which it is probably derived in a great measure, is found
abundantly in many places in the two provinces, particu;
larly in rear, of the two seigniories of Batiscan ,and
Champlain, L.C. where, and in the neighbourhood, of
which seigniories it is procured in considerable quantity.—
It is the only extensive deposit of this species of ore, which
has yet been worked in Lower Canada, and the furnace at
the forges of St. Maurice is entirely supplied by it. It
belongs.-to that variety of the argillaceous oxide called bog
ore.—(Note 6.) ’

Bog ore is characteristic of an alluvial formation, indeed
it is one itself, as no doubt exists of its being a deposit from
water holding iron in solution. The supposition that it
grows is a very vulgar error.

«¢ The iron obtained from bog iron ore, is what is termed
cold short, and therefore can rarely be used for plate i iron,
—never for wire.’’—PHILLIPs.

CARBONATE OF IRON.——SPARRY IRON ORE,

The carbonate of iron is found in the immediate neigh-
bourhood of the works at Marmora, where it is associated,
as has been said, with the red and brown oxides of iron,
and specular iron ore. Avein of it has been worked
chiefly as a flux for the furnace. The vein has been found
to be continuous, but the ore is not easily extracted.

A vein of the carbonate of iron, with pearl spar, has
been observed to traverse grey wacke at Dr. Mills’s quarry
at Cap Rouge.

‘¢ Sparry iron is a very valuable ore, more especially as
it is readily converted into steel, and is hence sometimes
called steel ore,”~-CLEAVELAND.

On Metallic Minerals. 339

SULPHURET OF IRON,—IRON PYRITES.,. |)

No mineral appears to be more generally distributed over
the world than sulphuret of iron, and. it has, of course,
been frequently met with in this country. It is seldom,
however, found in any considerable quantity in one spot,
when this is the case it is important, because at a trifling
expense it can be converted into an article of commerce
called copperas or green vitriol, which is a sulphate of iron.
The process is, I believe, as follows: the iron pyrites are
gathered together in heaps six or eight feet high upon
platforms, these are exposed to the action of the atmosphere
for about a twelve month, when they are found to have
undergone a spontaneous decomposition and a sulphate of
iron has been formed. This sulphate of iron being soluble
in water has, a large portion of it, been received into
troughs communicating with the platforms by pipes or
drains. The liquid thus obtained is afterwards evaporated
and sulphate of iron in a concrete state is formed. This
species of decomposition is effected in the following manner,
the sulphur combined with the iron to form ‘iron pyrites
attracts oxigen from the air and passes into sulphuric
acid which acting upon the iron forms sulphate of iron.
Some varieties of pyrites require to be roasted before this
decomposition will take place.
_ Iron pyrites is never smelted as an ore of iron. unless
it be intimately mixed with other ores so as to be insee
parable, such is the case with much of the ore at Marmora.
Its presence is considered injurious to ores.

Five considerable deposits of iron pyrites have been
noticed, viz. on an island on the south shore of Drummond
Island ;* on another island off the north coast of the same

* This island has lately passed from under the British dominion,

340 On Metallic Minerals.

island; on an island in the eastern part of Neepigon Bay,
Lake Superior ; and at Becketts Mills, Short Hills, Niagara
district, and in the township of Elizabeth.

No copperas works have yet been established ; but in the
United States there are several, and one at Strafford in New
Jersey is said to have yielded three tons of copperas in
two days.

Sulphur is sometimes extracted from iron pyrites by
sublimation.

Iron pyrites has been often mistaken for an ore of gold.
Its superior hardness and unmalleable character will distin-
guish them. It is true that the former does sometimes
contain gold, but never, I believe, in sufficient quantity to
render its extraction profitable.

The sulphuret of iron is found in all formations from the
oldest to the newest, but the magnetic variety or proto
sulphuret occurs only among rocks of the primary order.

GRAPHITE.—CARBURET OF IRON.—PLUMBAGO.

This, as has been said, is more usually classed with
combustible minerals, but from its chemical name and
from its being found in some abundance it is here introduced
as a metallic one.

According to reports there is a large supply of this
mineral in the township of Houghborough, also at Hull on
the Ottawa, where it is mixed up very plentifully with
magnetic iron. Between these two places it occurs fre-
quently disseminated through many rocks and minerals.—
The names of plumbago and black lead, which are so
frequently given to this substance, encourage an erroneons
opinion to prevail that it is an ore of lead, with which it
scarcely possesses one character in common. Carbon and

~ an, ae eee

On Metallic Minerals. 34]

iron are alone its constituents, the former at the rate of
from 91 to 96 per cent.

Besides its other well known uses, graphite has been
lately employed to diminish the friction of wheel work, &c.

ORES OF MANGANESE.

In the state of an oxide, manganese is almost as univer-
sally distributed over the globe as iron, though mines of
the former are much more rare than those of the latter.—
It exists in variable proportions in the garnet,’ schorl,
epidote, augite, &c. &c. but particularly in the brown and
sparry iron ores; also in bog ore. In this country it has
not been frequently noticed, and only, as I am aware, in
the lower province; but I believe that it has been often
overlooked, as it is not probable that it will be found to be
rare in a country abounding so much in iron, its constant
associate elsewhere.

EARTHY OXIDE OF MANGANESE,—WAD

One sub species of the earthy oxide only, has been
observed, that provincially named wad. It occurs, as bog
ore often does, on the banks of a small stream, and is
evidently a recent alluvial formation.—(Note 7.)

The oxide of manganese, is more frequently found in
primary and transition rocks, than in secondary, but the
earthy variety is probably forming daily.

ORES OF SILVER,

Reports have been received frequently respecting the
discovery of silver ores, but 1 believe them all to have
been erroneous. Silver, indeed, has been found in the
galena from St. Paul’s Bay in sufficient quantity, as it is
said, to be worth extracting ; but admitting this to be the

342 On Metallic Minerals.

case, the quantity of the galena itself is insignificant.—
(Note 8.)

All the sulphurets of lead (galenas) contain a portion of
silver, and where that portion is large, and consequently
worth extracting, they are called argentiferous, from such,
a large proportion of the silver of commerce is extracted.

That ores of silver should be found in this country, is by
no means improbable ; its rocks are precisely those for the
most part in which they occur in other countries, such as
granite, gneiss, micaceous and argillaceous slates, green-
stone (primary), sienite, hornblende slate, gray wacke,
compact limestone, and secondary slates. They should
not be sought for above the mountain or carboniferous
limestone which, in the lower province at least, appears to
be the last rock deposit that has taken place.

ORES OF COPPER,

Ores of copper have not been found in Canada in such
portions as to indicate its presence in abundance. Forming
insignificant veins in and coatings upon rocks, principally
of the trap formation, copper has been seen; also distri-
buted in grains, plates, and wires, through angular detached
masses of porphyritic trap.—(See Ist vol. of the Trans-
actions, pages 23 and 39.)

These traces, however, together with the large detached
masses of native copper, which have been noticed by
Schoolcraft and others, as occurring in the neighbourhood
of Lake Superior, may lead, one of these days, to the
discovery and successful exploration of copper mines in
that section of the country.

On Metallic Minerals. 343

It is almost exclusively the native copper which has been
observed in this country. The sulphuret and carbonate
have heen noticed, but it only appears in mere specks and
thin coatings. On the south side of Lake Superior, and
consequently withia the boundary of the United States, a
vein of malachite has been noticed, which may, upon
examination prove of importance.—(See Ist vol. of the
Transactions, pages 26 and 36.)

Ores of copper are much more usually found in primary
than in secondary rocks.

ORES OF GOLD.

Gold has not been noticed in Canada, but so near the
frontier as to induce me to give the following extract from
an American paper, the particulars of which there appears
to be no reason to question the accuracy of :—

** Venmont Gotp.—We some months since noticed the
discovery, in Vermont, of several specimens of the precious
anetal, and now learn, from the Boston Traveller, that it
has been analized by General Field, who has forwarded a
specimen for the Havard University. The Zraveller states
that ‘the gold was found in the high way, deposited with
a quantity of clay, sand, and gravel; the soil was alluvial,
and upon examination it appeared to have been brought
down and deposited by a small rivulet, from a high hill. The
specimen of gold when found, weighed 84 ounces, was of
a conical form, and had firmly adhering to its base a num-
ber of small transparent rock crystals, The gold is soft,
ductile, flexible, and malleable. Specific gravity 16-5,
and the lustre that of virgin gold. The soil of the region
is argillaceous, affording beds of excellent potters clay,
and the rocks in sitv, are all of the primitive class.’

2x

344 On Metallic Minerals.

Professor Eaton says in No. 1 of the 18th vol. of Silliman’s
Journal, page 52 :—“ If General Field’s specimen of gold,
found in Newfane, Vermont, was a native specimen, we
may anticipate the discovery of gold in the talcose slate,
from Georgia to Canada, along the east side of the green
mountain range.”—(Note 9.)

Gold is far from being of rare occurrence; it is said
indeed, that the sand of few rivers is entirely free from it,
although the proportion, in almost all cases, is so small as
to be undeserving of notice, in a commercial point of view.

Mica and tale often resemble in colour, external lustre,
and flexibility, the native ores of gold and silver. The
former earthy mineral is sufficiently distinguished from
these, by its elasticity, specific gravity, and want of the
true metallic lustre. Talc is distinguished from them by
the two last characters.

Gold, in situ, is almost entirely confined to primary
rocks ; it has been observed, however in secondary. But
it is among the alluvial deposits that it is more generally
found.

ORES OF ANTIMONY.

Antimony, as an ore, has been said to have been fre-
quently met with, but I know of no locality. it has been
supposed to exist in the neighbourhood of St. Paul’s
Bay, L. C.

ORES OF LEAD.
SULPHURET OF LEAD.—GALENA.

Lead, as a sulphuret, has been found in many places,
particularly near Lake Memphremagog, L. C. where it is
said to occur in great abundance. Silver also has been
reported to exist in the same place, put there appears to be
much greater certainty of the presence of the former than

On Metallic Minerals. 345

of the latter, as a distinct ore.—(Note 10.)

The Indians are said so know of several localities of lead
ore; but there appears to exist a tradition among them,
which is inimical to their making disclosures on such
subjects. Many individuals have seen fragments of ore
which the Indians bring down the Gannanoqui. Those I
have seen, however, myself, were small and unpromising
in their aspect. Some of the Indians are said to supply
themselves with bullets from the ore they find, but this is
very doubtful.

Native lead, a very rare ore, has been said to have been
observed in Ohio, near the mouth of Au Glaize River,
where it is described as occurring in slips, or slender
prismatic masses in crystallized galena.

Ores of lead hold much the same geological position as
those of silver, and may therefore be also expected to occur
frequently in these provinces.

ORES OF ZINC,

Ores of zinc, in small disseminated portions, are not
uncommon in the country. It is the sulphuret of that
metal which is usually found, the black, and more rarely the
yellow, blende. It is worthy of remark that, at Kingston,
the sulphuret of iron, the sulphuret of zine (Note 1),
and sulphuret of strontian, are often associated together in
the same hand specimen.

The red oxide has been named as a Canadian mineral,
but its locality is not described.

These ores are found usually in primary rocks, but they
occur also in transition and secondary, particularly in
compact limestone. ‘The yellow sulphuret is supposed to
belong to the oldest formation of zine.

346 On Metallic Minerals.

ORES OF MERCURY. 7

No ores of mercury have been observed in the Canadian
territories ; but on the shores of Lakes Erie and Michigan,
in the United States, it is said to occur as a sulphuret,
mixed up with sandy alluvium.— (Note 12.)

Mercury is found sparingly in clay slate and secondary
limestone,—most abundantly in the sandstone and shale,
of the coal formation; and, as in the present instance,
sometimes in alluvial deposits. It isamong the most recent
of ores ; iron, and perhaps manganese being the only two
which had been deposited subsequently.

————) ..; eee— e

ee a

On Metallic Minerals. 347

LOCALITIES OF METALLIC MINERALS,

IRON.
IRON, OXYGEN.—(NOTE 13.)
Magnetic Oxide of Iron—is abundant in the townships of
Marmora, Belmont, Camden,
and Houghborough, U.C.

aK Age at Hull on the Ottawa—abundant.
ee ap in the rear of St. Paul’s Bay, L.C.
—abundant.
in the rear of the Seigniory of
Batiscan.

y in granite, nearTadousac(Note] 4)
(tron sand) on the shore of the St. Maurice,
above the forges, L. C.—in

profusion.
oe on the shore of the St. Lawrence,
between Tadousac and Moulin
a Baude.
ee oe near Kingston, on the northern

shore of Lake Ontario—yery
fine, with garnets.
ve .o in profusion on the north-eastern
shore of Lake St. John, L.C.
Specular oxide of Iron—in sienite at Marmora.

IRON OXYGEN WATER, &c.

Red oxide of Iron, (pisiform)—on the eastern shore of
Beverley or Henderson’s
Lake, on the Gannanoqui
river, U.C.—a large bed,

348 On Metallic Minerals.

Red oxide of Iron, (compact)—north east of Lake Eche-
min, L.C.

.» (black hematite) Encampment Douce, Lake

Huron.
oe (scaly) same place.
“ (red ochre) on Lake Superior.

Marmora Works.
with the pisiform variety, on
the Gannanoqui.

Brown oxide of Iron “ crystallized and otherwise,”
is met with on the islets of
Gargantua.

.. (yellow ochre) | Marmora Works.
St. Augustin, Lake Calvaire.
on the Magdalen Islands.

IRON, OXYGEN, MANGANESE.
oe (umber) atBeauport near Quebec,L.C.

IRON, OXYGEN, MANGANESE, PHOSPORIC ACID, &e.

Argillaceous oxide of Iron (bog ore)—township of Marmora.

seigniory of Champlain.

seigniory of Batiscan.

: oe River du Loup (upper
end)

06 ve a3 in rear of St. Paul’s Bay.

(Extracts from Gourlay.)
at Charlotteville, eight

miles from Lake Erie,

—abundant, (Notel5.)
township of Trafalgar,

U. C.—much.
township of Bertie, do.

es oe se

ee ee eee ——

On Metallic Minerals. 349

4rgillaceous oxide of Iron (bog ore)—township of Stam-
ford, U. C.

2s ee ee township of Grantham,
—great plenty.

o. oe oe township of Pelham—
a little.

ve an os township of Crowland,
—-a little.

+ ee 2° township of Canborough
—some.

A variety of the argillaceous oxide of iron is found at
Marmora, in a thick bed in sienite.
Iron Ores, (species not mentioned)—in the townships of
Westminster and Dorchester; also in great
abundance in the township of Leeds.

IRON, OXYGEN, CARBONIC ACID.

Argillaceous oxide of Iren,—(clay iron stone) is found half
an inch thick, forming a vein
traversing Amygdaloid, at
Point Mamaise, Lake Superior.

There is said to be a rich ore of iron at the base of Long

Point, (U.C.) but its species has not been named.

CARBONATE OF IRON.—SPARRY IRON ORE,
IRON, OXYGEN, CARBONIC ACID,
Sparry Iron Ore,—Marmora Works, U. C.

es with pearl spar, forming a veinin grey
wacke at Dr. Mills’s quarry at Cap
Rouge, L.C.

‘e (pseudo volcanic) in the township of
Yonge, U.C.

o° in sienite or greenstone, Kingston Mills.

350 On Metallic Minerals.

SULPHURET OF IRON.—IRON PYRITES.
IRON, SULPHUR.

Only the most remarkable deposits of this species will
be mentioned.

Sulphuret of Iron,—An island on the south shore of Drum-
mond’s Island, Lake Huron, has been
described as almost entirely composed
of it. It is also found in large quan-
tities on an island off the north coast
of Drummond Island.

uy on an island in the eastern partof Neep-
igon Bay, Lake Superior.

ie at Becketts Mills, Short Hills, Niagara |
District—a large bed. :

ee in the township of Elizabeth—a large bed

a in the township of Yonge, U.C. (Note 16.)

44 on Lake Ontario near Kingston, with
sulphuret of zinc and sulphuret of
strontian.

with magnetic iron, in the township of
Marmora, U. C.

in a course limestone conglomerate,;which
forms a precipice on the northern side
of the town of Quebec, the three follow-
ing varieties of iron pyrites are found,
viz :—lIst, polyhedral shaded masses,
about the size of a bullet.
2d, radiated iron pyrites.
3d, hepatic iron pyrites. ‘These varie-
ties are found in a species of shale,
much decomposed, which often sur-

On Metallic Minerals. 351

Sulphuret of Iron,—
rounds the blocks of limestone in this
Yoiirais conglomerate. The hepatic variety
partakes sometimes so much of the
“£0080 general decomposition of the shale it is
found in, as tohave lost its metallic
lustre and specific gravity.
oe twin crystals of cubic iron pyrites have
been observed disseminated through
some of the clay slate in the district of
Quebec. If one of two cubes of metal
of the same dimensions, be cut in a
particular manner, it is possible to put
the other through it; the appearance
of these twin crystals is similar to what
would be observed in trying this
experiment, ,
oe a large deposit associated with gypsum,
on the Magdalen Islands.

» . PLUMBAGO.—CARBURET OF IRON,.—-GRAPHITE,

CARBON, IRON.
Carburet of Iron,—in the township of Houghborough.

tlintes os at Hull on the Ottawa, mixed up with
yy maguetic iron,
awe >< disseminated through several of the rocks
ou between these two places,

o- o0 on the shores of the Gannanoqui, and in

some other places, chiefly in the east-
ern section of the Upper Province.

+ allie in amygdaloid at Point Marmaise, Lake
Superior.
ee ve Hawksbury on the Ottawa,

y

352 On Metallic Minerals.

Carburet of Iron,—in a creek near Kingston—query,
what creek ?
.» (graphite slate)—on Judge Taschereau’s seigniory
of St. Mary’s, L. C.
sy ut near the Furnace Falls, on the Ganna-
noqui.

MANGANESE.
OXIDE OF MANGANESE,

MANGANESE, OXYGEN, WATER, &c.

Earthy oxide of Manganese,—(wad ?) at Sillery near
Quebec.

COPPER.
NATIVE COPPER.

COPPER—PURE.

Native copper in large detached masses near or upon the
southern shore of Lake Superior. This is obviously not a
Canadian locality, but it and similar notices should not
be omitted in a compilation like the present.

Native. Copper,—disseminated through tabular masses on
the beaches of Isle Royale, in small
plates, grains, and wires. From the
appearance of these masses, Captain
Bayfield, R. N. supposes them to have
originally formed veins in a dark brown
porphyritic trap, and from their untra-
velled form, that they are near the
parent rock.

in small masses on the beaches of Point
Keewowanan Lake Superior.

On Metallic Minerals. 353

SULPHURET OF COPPER.—COPPER PYRITES.
COPPER SULPHUR.

Sulphuret of Copper,—in small quantity in a confused mass
of quartzy veins at the bluff at the
lower end of the narrows of Pelletau,
Lake Huron.

ee oe in smull quantity in argillaceous
schist at the mountain portage
above Lake Superior.

ee oe in amygdaloidat Point Marmaise, Lake
Superior.
ve ee encrusting the sides of an empty vein

in greenstone near Michipicoten.

CARBONATE OF COPPER.
COPPER, OXYGEN, CARBONIC ACID,
Carbonate of Copper, (green)—in amygdaloid at Point
Marmaise, Lake Superior
oe ee o% on the north shore of Lake
Superior, many frag-
ments of an impure
green carbonate of cop-
: per, of an untravelled
aspect, are found.

ee oe ee as a trace upon many of
the rocks in these pro-
vinces.

o* Po y) in a vein of considerable

dimensions on thie’ east
point of Copperas Har-
bour, Point Keewawo-
nan, south shore of Lake
Superior.

354 On Metallic Minerals.

ZINC.
ZINC OXYGEN.
Oxide of Zinc; (red)—it has been he that this variety has
been. meet with in Canada, no
locality however is given.

SULPHURET OF ZINC.—BLENDE.

ZINC, SULPHUR.

Sulphuret of Zinc, (black mein aaah fine radiated sul-
phate of strontian, sul-
phuret of iron and

_ flesh-coloured calca-
reous spar, in a com-
pact silico alluminous
limestone on the north-
ern shore of Lake On-
tario, near Kingston,

; (yellow) do. do. not so common.
sie ce le in black and grey lime-
stones, from Bytown,
it is disseminated in
very small crystals ac-
cording to Dr.Holmes.
a on (black) in calcareous spar, do.
LEAD.
SULPHURET OF LEAD.—GALENA.
Sulphuret of Lead,—in the township of Patton, near
Lake Memphremagog.
* Ane one mile upwards from where Craig’s
road crosses the river Nicolet, in the
township of Chester, L. C.
(argentiferous) in a white marble, mixed with
chlorophane from St, Paul’sBay, L.C,

On Metallic Minerals. 355

Sulphuret of Lead,—
-. (common galena) Hawksbury on the Ottawa.

oa .. Fort Wellington, U. C.
north-west of Lake Huron.

ae de somewhere on the shores of the Gan-
AULY nanoqui.

TITANIUM.
TITANIUM OXYGEN.
Oxides “8 Titanium,—it is probable that this mineral enters
a Yo v into the composition of much of the
teno-t| n magnetic sand of this country as it
frequently does in others.

TITANIUM OXYGEN SILEX LIME.
Silico calcareous oxide of Titanium, (sphene)—is found,
eens according to Dr. Holmes, at Gren-
de ville, on the Ottawa

ows : MERCURY.

ois 0! MERCURY, SULPHUR.
mes eet of Mercury,—on the shores of Lake Erie and
Michigan, in the American terri-

tories.

356 On Metallic Minerals.

NOTES

ON THE

LOCALITIES or METALLIC MINERALS 1n CANADA.

NOTE1.

The iron establishment in the township of Marmora is
situated at the upper end, or north-western extremity of a
peninsula, formed by the Bay of Quinte on the south-east,
the Moira on the east round by the north, and the Trent
on the west and north-west. The mouths of the Trent and
Moira, on the Bay of Quinte, are about ten or twelve
miles asunder, but in the latitude of the Marmora works,
owing to two branches diverging from the main course of
their respective rivers and approaching each other, there
are only three or four miles of interval between the two
waters. That branch alluded to which diverges from the
Trent about forty miles from its mouth, is called the
Marmora or Crow river, and it isupon the left bank of this
river, about nine miles upwards from its junction with the
main branch, that the works are situated.

The Moira river is one succession of rapids and falls, and
is the principal seat of the mills in that part of the country.
It cannot therefore be looked to as affording any expectation
that it will ever be rendered navigable. To render the
Trent navigable would not be attended with so much dif.
ficulty, but it would still be considerable, for although no
falls occur for thirty-five or forty miles from its mouth,
there are several rapids and shallows, which would require
the construction of locks and dams, and the lowness of the

On Metallic Minerals. 357

shores are unfavourable to the erection of such works.—
Bearing in view this latter circumstance, the difficulties to
be overcome will be better understood by introducing here
the following description, for which I am_ principally
indebted to Mr. Manahan, the superintendant and one of
the proprietors of the Marmora works. At its mouth the
Trent is about seven hundred feet wide ; one mile upwards
it ceases to be navigable even for boats, owing to rapids
and shallows, which continue for eight miles. Mr. M.
thinks that a dam constructed at the foot of these rapids
where the banks will allow of its being twelve feet above
the river would throw two or three feet of water upon the
highest shallows and consequently absorb the rapids ; that
is, he supposes, that the river has only a fall of nine feet in
these eight miles.* From the head of these rapids the
river is navigable for seven miles, five of which hold the
same course as before, that is from the north. Here the
river bends suddenly to the westward, which direction it
maintains for perhaps eighteen miles, after which it again
turns to the north and continues with that bearing until it
reaches the confluence of its waters with the Crow or
Marmora river, a further distance of about nine miles.—
From the angle of the first bend, I believe it has been
proposed to carry a canal nearly in a right line to the
works, distant about sixteen miles. Beyond the seven
miles which have been described as navigable, a small
rapid occurs commonly called Chisholm’s Fall. Here much
of the water is diverted by a bay, the daming up of which, it
is thought, will throw sufficient water on these rapids to
render them navigable for boats. For sixtcen miles further

* This fall of nine feet is assumed merely on estimation, it may be more.

358 On Metallic Minerals.

to the “* Percey Landing” the river is navigable for steam¢
boats; here shallows and rapids again occur: for’ three
miles to what are called the “ Big Falls,’ on the Trent.
A navigable channel for boats, through these rapids, ‘might
be obtained, it is said by the removal of some of the many
boulders which here crowd the stream. In all the course
of the river thus far there is not one very favorable:sitvation
for the construction of a dam, the most so is that which has
been mentioned, near the mouth of\the river. ‘The ** Big
Falls” are occasioned by the river running over/a ledge of
limestone rock about eighteen feet high—above the falls
the river is one continued rapid to the ‘* Middle Falls’ .a
distance of five miles, these falls are at the foot of Crow
Bay, about one mile or more from the confluenceof the
two rivers. Pursuing the Marmora or Crow river? to the
right it is navigable for two miles, where a succession of
rapids and falls continue for one mile. Hence itis navi~’
gable for two miles further, after which a winding rapid of
about one hundred and fifty yards in length is met with.
A farther? distance of two miles of navigable waters brings
you to the first falls below the iron works, and distant from
them about two miles, which are navigable. The main
branch of the Trent to the westward communicates with the
Rice Lake and Otonibe river, interrupted by one» a
fall called ‘“‘ Healey Fall’ and partial shallows.

The general character of the soil between the Trent: and’
the Moira is good, which is sufficiently indicated by the’
description of timber upon it. As the works are approached,
however, a considerable change for the worse is perceived.
The limestone which had been previously well covered/up
by soil, gradually obtrudes itself upon the eye, until at last
little is seen upon the surface of the ground besides its dry

On Metallic Minerals. 359

and whitened tables. In other places we meet with swampy
land rendering necessary the disagreeable description of
primitive road known in this country by the name of
corduroy bridge. Indicative of this change the pine anda
seanty herbage takes the place of the elm, the oak, the
beech, and the maple, |

Having afforded all the information I possess respecting
what is generally understood by the term topography of a
place, l proceed to give its geological and mineralogical
characters, as far as my acquaintance with the subject
will permit.

The greatly predominating formation from the Bay of
Quinte to the Marmora works in one direction, and from
the Moira to the Trent in another, is transition limestone,
the same as that found to characterize Kingston and much
of its neighbourhood. A line drawn from the Marmora
works, about thirty miles northward of the mouth of the
Trent, to Kingston mills, five miles northward of Kingston,
would probably passin every part of it, very near to the
line of junction of the primary and transition rocks, and
mark the limits on that side to the limestone I am speaking
of. The characters common to this limestone in general,
at least wherever 1 have consulted them, are, Ist—light
bluish grey colour; 2d—a slight degree of translucency
usually on a thin edge ; 3d—a compact structure in most
eases; 4th—a fracture often approaching conchoidal;
Sth—the odor of flint when struck, and not of bitumen.—
Its organic remains are also characteristic, among these
may be named producta terebratula, orthocerw, trilobites
and encrinites; these are found in the surface and upper
Strata, more rarely below them, and apparently not at all
in the lowermost. The orthoceratites for their size, often

27Z

360 On Metallic Minerals.

demand particular attention—a portion of one in my pos-
session from the surface stratum near Kingston must have
been five feet long and two feet in its greatest circumference,
they are seldom very distinct, and generally occur in a
rubbly limestone on or near the surface. The terebratule
appear to hold the lowest position in a fine semi crystalline
limestone.

The minerals which kave been noticed either imbedded
or disseminated in this formation, are likewise characteristic
of it. The earthy varieties are chert or hornstone,
basanite, chlorite, calcareous spar, and sulphate of strontian.
From the hardness and flinty aspect of some portions of the
strata they appear to be passing into chert, while well
characterized hornstone is occasionally seen forming
prominent concretions on the surface of the limestone.—
On the shore of Garden Island, opposite Kingston, concre-
tions of hornstone looking like blotches of tar or pitch, are
very conspicuous, they have even the pitchy lustre in
fracture, the same as is noticed in the limestone at the
Marmora works, although there the pitchy resemblance is
not so perfect. Ovate convex concretions of basanite are
not uncommon—they are good touch-stones. A green
mineral, supposed to be an earthy chlorite, is often much
mixed up with the ingredients composing the lowermost
strata.

Calcareous spar often forms narrow viens in the middle
and uppermost strata and rounded concretions in the
lowermost.

Sulphate of strontian occurs like the foregoing, forming
spherical concretions in the lowermost strata.

The metallic minerals. are sulphuret of iron and sulphuret
of zinc, (black and yellow blende). The sulphuret of iron

On Metallic Minerals. 36l

is thickly disseminated through some of the limestones in
the middle of the series, and also in larger crystalline
pieces among the lowermost strata, with sulphuret of zine,
sulphate of strontian, and calcareous spar—the whole
forming rounded nodules in the limestone. These nodules,
often entirely composed of fine light blue radiated sulphate
of strontian, are sometimes as large as a child’s head, and
when detached from the limestone, which they are very
easily, a very fair imitation of a trencher, or soup-plate is
observed. This limestone has the aspect of being more
sileceous and alluminous than that lying above it; and
differs from it also by possessing nothing of a crystalline
ccharacter,* which the other does, for although in both
cases the structure is compact, in the former the fracture
is dull, while in the latter it is glimmering, arising from
the reflection of light from the polished surfaces of minute
lamine.

The limestone formation I am describing, has a stratifi-
cation which is nearly horizontal, except where, by the
apparent upraising of the older rock beneath it, since it
was deposited, a partial uncontinuous dip of the strata is
occasioned. These strata are sometimes separated by thin
seams of shale.t

vd we not crystalline, some of this limestone, as it lies on the shore,
in nearly horizontal strata, resembles basalt in form exceedingly. Mr.
Finch, of New York, now lecturing at Montreal, was particularly struck
with this feature in the limestone.

+ The limestone of Kingston, the groundwork of the foregoing description,
is characterized in some places by a remarkable concretiovary structure,
which may be thus described :— ovate, or rounded portions of the limestone
are separated from the main body, by thin partings : f shale, the wanderings
of the edges of which shale upon the surface of the limestone, has been
aptly compared by Dr. Bigsby, to the sutures of the human skull. These
concretions are easily separated from the main mass, and exhibit the shale
generally surrounding them on all sides except the uppermost. This shale

362 On Metallic Minerals.

It will be perceived that the foregoing deseription of this
formation, contains much which is of a very local nature,
as far as regards opportunities of observation, and this must
be the case with all observations on the same subject for
many years to come, until the clearing of the country shall
open a better view of its geology and mineralogy to the
notice of the traveller. But I feel convinced, in the mean
time, that future examination will not discover any
characters in this formation essentially different from those
here given, although facts of geological and commercial
interest, may doubtless be elicited.

The older rock I have alluded to, as underlying this
limestone, is at all times one of these four—a sienite, or |
greenstone, a sienitic granite, or sienitic gneiss. They
appear to pass one into the other, and to have a contem-
poraneous formation. As hornblende appears to be rarely :
absent, without it be to give place to epidote, the presence
-of which is very characteristic of these rocks, they may be .
ealled amphibolic. As to the question, whether a genuine .
granite occurs within the limits | have described, I am of
opinion that it does not, without it be as veins traversing
the other primary rocks. Mica is a rave ingredient in
them, and it appears to be in almost every case accompanied
by hornblende. As to the stratification of these rocks,
when most assuming that appearance, it is an ambiguous
case, whereas in the majority of instances, no signs of it
exist. Wherever the limestone prevails, the country is flat
and tabular, rising sometimes in terraces, and always |

when first exposed to view, is of remarkably plumbagenous lustre, and being
marked with small pilastres, something like those on a stove, fluted columns
and flat surfaces, its appearance is at once singular and pleasing. Its lustre
however, does not continue without means being taken to preserve it, as
exposure to the air changes its colour to a dull brown.

On Metallic Minerals. 362

4

nearly horizontal. Where the older rocks come in, the
surface is strongly undulated, sometimes rising in mam-
ellary masses of bare rock, at others in higher projections,
but almost always of a rounded form.

Such is a description of a few of the features of this part
of the Upper Province, merely intended as introductory to
a more ample detail of the rocks and minerals in the neigh-
bourhood of the Marmora works, to which I now return.

The Marmora works have been described as being seated

on the left bank of the Marmora river, about thirty miles
by land from the mouth of the Trent. The road between
these two places runs, for much the greater portion of it,
if not entirely, over the transition limestone which has
been described.
_ This limestone in general is tolerably well concealed
‘by a soil, which, in most instances, affords good farms.
—As the works are approached the soil becomes gradually
more scanty and the dough white surfaces of tabular masses
of limestone frequently present themselves to view.—
‘When the visitor approaches within sight of the works little
besides a pavement of the same is beneath him. These
exposed masses separated from one another by small cross
fissures are split and corrugated, and have much the same
‘appearance that fine wheaten dough would have if its
surface were cut and cross cut with an axe or wedge.—
These appearances,* probably the result of frost, are
characteristic of much of the limestone of the district, and
may be seen to great advantage near Kingston.

The limestone immediately at the works forms three

© Small markings on the surface of the limestone like the impressions of
crows feet are not uncommon im the vicinity of Kingston, they may with
probability be attributed to frost also.

364 On Metallic Minerals.

distinct terraces rising one above the other. The lower-
most is nearly on a level with the water—the next, on
which the principal buildings are constructed, is from
fifteen to twenty feet higher, and the third may be about
fifty feet above the river ; on the opposite side of the river
the limestone forms a cliff nearly perpendicular, and of
about the same height. An anonymous writer in No. 2, of
the Canadian Review, states the whole body of limestone
here to be two hundred feet high, this I think greatly
overrated, one hundred is certainly the outside. He also
says that an argillaceous sandstone of a red, grey, and green
colour is found at the lower terrace, forming alternating
layers; this is a mistake, these stratified masses are lime-
stones, as their free effervescence in acid declares them to
be—neither are they seen resting on sienite, although they
may be fairly presumed to do so, as that rock crops out near
at hand. The cascade is caused by its appearance, and it
isseen in many places above on the left bank of the river,
but the limestone conceals it on the right bank. Its consti-
tuents appear to be red felspar and light green epidote.-—
I did not perceive, asin the neighbourhood of Kingston,
the actual contact of the sienite and transition limestone,
although they were separated by a very few feet of soil and
verdure, which of course concealed it, if it takes place ;
neither did I perceive that conglomeration in the limestone
near the sienite, which is so remarkable near Kingston,
where masses of the sienite both round and angular are
found imbedded in the lowermost strata of limestone or at
the junction of the two rocks, (see the 18th vol. of Silliman’s
Journal.) Near this junction and forming a bed in the
sienite is observed a white crystalline marble of a finer
grain than any other I have yet observed in this country, —

On Metallic Minerals. 365

Indeed, the marbles in Canada hitherto discovered, are
generally remarkable for their laminar structure. In
hand specimens, this marble is almost as fine as the Carrara,
but it can not be employed for sculpture, as it does not
appear that solid blocks of itcan be procured. This marble
is again seen forming a mountain mass on the side of Crow
lake, nearest to the works. It is here penetrated by
hornstone, which in consequence of its more durable
character, projects in ribs and concretions from its surface.
If would be desirable to open a quarry here in order to see
if the marble improved upon sinking into it, which is very
probable. It is here associated with quartz rock, of which
the largest portion of the mountain appears to be composed.
This rock is stratified, and its strata are nearly vertical and
directed about north and south.

What geological and mineralogical facts I have further
to communicate will be stated in’ giving a description of
the different ores of which there are at least eight distinct
deposits.

FIRST ORE BED,

Commencing with those ores close to the works, on the
left bank of the river, they may be described as forming a
bed or vein in the sienite. One extremity of the marble
before mentioned falls obliquely upon the northern side of
this vein, which has itself a dip and direction about north-
east. This vein appears to be nearly exhausted, or if not
it offers no sufficient inducement in the present day to
continue its exploration while such an abundance of good
ore can be so much more easily procured.

The ores which have been found in this vein are the
following, specular oxide of iron, red and yellow ochre,
sparry iron ore, and argillaceous oxide of iron.

366 On Metallic Minerals.

MINERALOGICAL CHARACTERS.*
SPECULAR OXIDE OF IRON

Colour on a fresh fracture lavender blue, externally rusty
red——opaque—-structure compact granular~—fracture
uneven—lustre glistening metallic—vields to the knife but
strikes fire under the hammer—colour of powder dark
brownish red—shape of fragments prismatic—specific gra-
vity 4-9 slightly magnetic—not soluble in warm muriatic
acid—infusible alone before the blow-pipe, but with borax
forms a bead coloured by iron.

The characters in Italics have induced me to name
this the specular oxide of iron, although it certainly
possesses nothing of that brillianey of lustre and pavonine
tarnish so frequently characterestic of that ore.

It is found enveloped by the other ores and is the only
one of metallic lustre among them. It should yeild 63 or
64 per cent. by calculation.

SPARRY IRON ORE AND RED OCHRE.

Colour dark red (Indian red,) with yellow laminar parts
interspersed, sometimes these parts form a yellow band in
the middle of the mass, which ona cross fracture by a
strong contrast between the real and the yellow produces a
pleasing effect—opaque—structure between earthy and
laminar, the mass having the appearance of being com-
posed of red ochre and sparry iron. The laminar parts
have about the hardness of fluor, but the earthy portion

* Itis perhaps necessary to say that in giving these characters or others
which may follow, I have been uninfluenced by a communication in the Ist
vol. of the Society’s Transactions, in which the characters of a few of the
Marmora ores appear. Having the advantage of the writer of that article,
which a visit to the spot has afforded, my observations both on its rocks and
minerals, erroneous or not, are at least unbiassed either by that communi-
cation or by any other.

On Metallic Minerals. 367

yeilds to the nail and soils the fingers ; specific gravity,
2-8. It rapidly effervesces and in a great measure dis-
solves in muriatic acid, Blackens in the exterior flame of
the blow-pipe and fuses in the interior into a black scoria,
which is generally magnetic. Sometimes, however, it
requires to be roasted on charcoal with grease to ren-
der it so.—lIt is used as a flux for the other ores.

I observed another excellent variety of this ore cropping
out of the ground near the works, but I cannot say whether
it was a loose mass or otherwise, it had a crystalline structure
and its colour was a mixture of brown and white. If in
abundance it deserves to be explored.

RED AND YELLOW OCHRE,

These ores, or rather pigments, are too well known to
require a particular description. They occur forming the
sides of the vein. The yellow ochre is of an indurated
description of that substance.

ARGILLACEOUS OXIDE OF IRON.

In the excavation a large mass of this may be seen; a
passage has been opened through it, in order to extract the
other ores. It is the predominating ore, but of too poor and
infusible a character to be worked. It looks like some
varieties of trap or shale, and although very tough and
difficult to remove, when first exposed, the action of the
atmosphere renders it very brittle, and even friable.

Colour, greenish black, with seams of a reddish and
lighter green,—opaque,—structure imperfectly foliated,
sometimes curved ; fracture, uneven. It is easily scratched
by the knife, even when hardest ; powder, yellowish green
—no lustre; specific gravity, 3-1]; insoluble in acid;
infusible before the blow-pipe, after exposure to which,

3A

368 On Metallic Minerals.

on charcoal, it becomes magnetic ; to borax it communi-
cates a lively greenish yellow colour.

GRAPHIC SLATE.

Associated with the above, and forming a sort of incrust-
ation upon it, is a mineral which has been confounded with
it. It agrees very closely, in all its characters but one,
with graphic slate. This excepted character is the peculiar
phenomenon which it exhibits when exposed to a candle or
the blow-pipe, and which has not been mentioned by
mineralogists as belonging to graphic slate. ‘The moment it
is exposed to red heat, it expands, exfoliates, curls up, and
rapidly falls into powder. It has been mistaken for graphite,
but the streak it communicates to paper, is very different
to the shining metallic trace which the latter affords. On
the contrary, it is quite dull black, like that of black chalk,
of which species it appears to be unquestionably a variety.
When first collected, it marks paper very freely, but after
keeping it in adry room, it does not do so as readily. Its
specific gravity is 2-6. It is not in the least magnetic after
roasting on charcoal, but to borax it communicates a
yellowish colour, showing the presence of a small portion
of iron.

These ores appear to hold the following relative position,
—the argillaceous oxide forms the walls of the vein; the
red and yellow ochre, with sparry ore, form the lining next
the walls; and the specular ore is found in the middle, not
however, in continuous masses, but rather in fragments.

Chlorite, scaly talc, and quartz, sometimes form veins
in the sienite, which holds these ores imbedded.

SECOND ORE BED.

The next deposit of ore I have to describe is on the right

On Metallic Minerals. 369

hand shore of Crow or Marmora lake, near to the entrance
into it from the works, and a few hundred yards back in
woods. There have been deposited two species of ores—
the magnetic oxide, and the argillaceous oxide, (bog ore.)

The principal spot where the magnetic oxide of iron
comes to day, a term employed by miners, to express its
appearing on the surface, is on the summit of a hill. Here
it may be seen forming a bed of about twenty feet long, by
about three or four feet wide. Whether the rock be a true
greenstone, in a geological sense, or not, I cannot deter-
mine, as it appears to be rather coloured by epidote than
hornblende; it is, however, very tough, compact, and
possesses no appearances of stratification. This bed of ore
has a position nearly due north and south, as regards its
longitudinal direction, and a moderate dip to the north.—
The walls of the bed appear to be vertical, and may proba-
bly sink to the level of the base of the hill, as fixed masses
of the same ore, in the direction of this bed are found there,
according to Mr. Manahan. This ore belongs to that
sub species of the magnetic oxide, called native magnet,
as it possesses not only strong attractive magnetism, but as
strong a repulsive one also; and it is worthy of remark
that in this instance, as in some others which have been
noticed by other individuals, the position of the poles in the
ore, corresponds with that of the bed; thus I invariably
found, after trying the experiment repeatedly, that that
portion of a fragment which had a northern position in the
mass before it was removed, relatively to the opposite
portion, attracted the south pole of the magnet, and repelled
the north, while the opposite portion possessed an influ-
ence upon the magnet, directly the reverse.

370 On Metallic Minerals.

MINERALOGICAL CHARACTERS.

Colour ona fresh fracture, steel grey externally, sometimes
rusted ; opaque; structure, laminarly compact; fracture,
uneven,somewhat conchoidal; lustreshining,almostsplendid
metallic. Its hardness is a little variable ; some portions
yeild to the knife, strikes fire when struck with the
hammer; colour of the powder, glimmering black;
specific gravity 4-6. No change in nitric acid, strongly
magnetic with polarity. Infusible alone before the blow-
pipe, but fuses with borax, in the exterior flame, into a
greenish yellow glass ; if the heat be increased it intumesces
and becomes green, and ultimately when the essay is
sufficient in quantity it forms an opaque black globule.

Sixty per cent. of iron may be expected from this ore.

The difficulty of extracting this ore is considerable, it
would otherwise be better worth exploring than, perhaps
any other in the township.

ARGILLACEOUS OXIDE OF IRON.—-BOG ORE,

Bog ore apparently of the sub species called meadow ore,
is found in alluvium on the banks of a small stream at the
foot of the hill on which is found the ore last described ;
much of it is of so dark a colour and earthy a fracture as to
be mistaken for an ore of manganese, (wad.) It occurs in
bullet shaped and reniform pieces varying from the size ofa
grape shot to that of a large potatoe, mixed up with sand ;
occasionally it resembles the excrement of some animals. Mr.
Manahan informs me that similar deposits exist in several
places in the neighbourhood, but as they have not been
sought for particularly, they are not unlikely to oceur in
many others. In this opinion I agree with him, as there is
not perhaps a portion of any country abounding in rock

re

i i re

On Metallic Minerals. 371

ore which does not contain frequent deposits of that which
we are discussing, I cannot say in what quantity it is found
in this spot, but as Mr. M. found it thickly scattered
throughout the whole depth of eight feet, it must be
tolerably abundant. He also informs me that there is ore,
which upon examination appears to consist of decomposing
epidote and magnetic iron, this is frequently noticed among
the bog ore, a fact of importance, as it seems to indicate
that the magnetic iron of this locale is in some abundance.
The last mentioned ore is very easily fusible, and is found
to improve the working of tke furnace.

THIRD ORE BED.
At the western extremity of Crow Lake, in the township
of Belmont, about four miles from the works, there is
another deposit of magnetic iron, forming a bluff on the
left hand shore. From hence the main supply has been
obtained for carrying on the works. Its quantity appears
to be almost inexhaustible, but the quality of much of it is
not by any means so good as that before described, being
mineralized by sulphur and epidote. There is, however, a
large portion very good, which from that circumstance and
the ease with which it may be procured and broken up, is
at this moment the favourite ore. What this ore bed may
lose with respect to the per-centage of metal it may yield
when compared with the other, it much more than recovers
by the facility with which it may be procured—the ore boat
accompanied hy two or three men provided with a nic-axe,
shovel, and sledge hammer, may go to this bed in the morn-
ing and return in the evening with fifteen tons of ore.
Mr. Manahan has noticed that the ore from this bed
rejected on account of its containing too much sulphur,
does, in the course of two years or thereabouts, become

372 On Metallic Minerals.

greatly improved ; and also that the ore on the top of the
bed, particularly those fragments which have been long
lying detached and exposed to the weather, have undergone
a similar improvement in their quality. This might be
expected to take place a priori because a part of the sulphur
in the ore thus exposed, becomes converted into sulphuric
acid and sulphate of iron, in which state it is washed from
the ore by occasional rains. At some of the ore beds and
among the rejected heaps at the establishment, this change
is actually seen in progress and may be known by a white
powdery coating on the ore, having an astringent ink-like
flavour. I have no doubt that if copperas works were
established here, that article of commerce might be obtained
at little expense, and with considerable benefit to the iron
works, as besides freeing the ore from sulphur, its exposure
to the atmosphere to attain that end would render it brittle
and more easily broken up for the furnace.

With regard to the rock associations of this bed, they are
seldom seen, as the bluff appears to be almost one solid mass
of iron ore, but I believe it to be a compact felspar coloured
by epidote, as a large mass in my possession, from this
place shews that rock traversed by veins of the ore, large
masses of crystalline epidote are also seen. The anonymous
writer before alluded to thinks that ‘* large unrolled masses
** of granular quartz and coloured by epidote bespeak the
* contiguity of that rock in situ,” I suspect that the
compact felspar above mentioned is what has been mistaken
for quartz rock, as of that rock I saw no traces—that which
I have ventured to call compact felspar, is certainly not
quartz, for it fuses easily with intumescence into a
white enamel.

tet neil

On Metallic Minerals, 373

MINERALOGICAL CHARACTERS OF ORES FROM THE
HEAD OF CROW LAKE,

Ist.—A specimen of ore taken from the summit of the
hill where it is found in loose masses detached from the
rock beneath them.

- Colour, on a fresh fracture, steel grey, sometimes much
modified by epidote, which is mixed more or less with all

‘the magnetic ores from this district ; structure, when not

influenced by the epidote, is fine grained ; cross fracture,
uneven, but fracture is effectéd more easily in the disection
of even rusty seams which traverse it, the colour of these
seams is generally red, but sometimes purple; lustre,
glistening metallic. It yields, but with considerable diffi-
culty, to the knife and portions strike fire under the
hammer ; not so frangible as the last magnetic ore examined,
which is owing to the presence of the epidote ; when free
from it the powder of the ore is of a glimmering black
eolour ; specific gravity, an average specimen 4-1. It is
magnetic, but not with polarity; insoluble in nitric acid.
Its blow-pipe characters are much the same asthe last, and
as that is the case with most of the ores I have to describe,
they will not be given again unless to mark an important
difference.

2d.—* The favorite ore”’ differs from No. 1 of the same
bed, in being much more free from epidote and sulphur,
and by occurring under a very slaty or schistose form, both
of which circumstances render it much easier reduced to
fragments for the furnace; it has also a greater specific
gravity, viz. 4-4. It is very absorbent, and produces a
hissing noise, when it is first placed in water.
' d.—This is of a light purplish steel blue colour on the
recent fracture, but like most of the rest, rusty externally.

374 On Metallic Minerals.

It contains specks of iron pyrites, as indeed does most of the
ore from hence, it being under the form of sulphuret of
iron, that the sulphur is present in the bed. Its structure
is fine-grained, and fracture uneven; lustre, glimmering
metallic; yields to the knife; powder, bluish black; no
change in nitric acid; specific gravity, 4-3; magnetic,
&c. &c.

4th.—This is like No. 3 in most respects ; the form under
which it occurs is, however, different. It is found in
parallel layers with rusty surfaces between them. Its
rectangular outline and steel grey lustre gives it the
appearance of a piece of manufactured iron—specific
gravity, 4-6. Mr. Manahan has observed that where
fragments of ores are found of regular forms, they are sure
to be of good quality.

5th.—Occurs as a cellular crust upon some of the other
ores, from one-eighth to one-half of an inch in thickness.
Colour, bluish black; opaque; structure, cellular and
platy, the interstices between the plates forming the cells;
fracture, uneven; lustre, pitchy and glistening; yields to
the knife; very brittle; powder, snuff colour; specific
gravity, 2-8; no change in nitric acid ; magnetic, &c. &c.

The large masses of crystalline epidote which are found
here, deserve some description, but I fear that the little
acquaintance I possess of the crystallographic characters of
minerals, will render it a very imperfect one.

Colour, a greyish or yellowish green ; translucent on the
edges. It occurs in masses composed of an assemblage of
large crystals, crossing each other without order or regu-
larity; these crystals appear to be four-sided oblique
prisms. Fracture, uneven ; lustre, between glistening and
glimmering—some faces of the prisms have a shining lustre.

On Metallic Minerals. 375

It scratches glass easily, but yields to the knife ; a light
grey streak ; powder, grey and harsh to the touch ; specific
gravity, 3-1. In the interior flame of the blow-pipe it
rounds into a shining green, globule, but this depends upon
the size of the fragment, for if it be larger than it ought to
be, as large as a pepper corn for instance, (a favorite term
with mineralogists, the absurdity of which has been
exposed by Griffin,) it will turn brown at the extremity,
but scarcely round at all; on the contrary if a minute fibre
be employed it will form a greenish or yellowish glass, with
intumescence, and this observation applies in substance to
many other minerals.

It appears to be characteristic of epidote that the portion
of the essay in the exterior flame does not lose its colour.—
Could its colouring principle be extracted it would proba-
bly therefore form avery permanent pigment. Iron pyrites
is much mixed up with this epidote.

FOURTH ORE BED,

Beyond the last deposit on a western course at the dis-
tance of about four miles by land, (the water communication
being circuitous and interrupted by two small rapids,) there
is another large bed of magnetic ore situated on Belmont
Lake. Having neither visited this place nor seen any of
its ores, I can say nothing further respecting it.

FIFTH ORE BED.

Due west of the Marmora works, at the distance of three
miles, and on the banks of a branch of the Moira river is
another bed commonly called ‘ Fosters Ore Bed.’ This
deposit has been worked and a considerable quantity of ore
taken from it. I cannot say that much more remains,
because it appeared to me nearly exhausted, but Mr, Mana-

$B

376 On Metallic Minerals.

han, who has had better opportunities of judging, is of
opinion that it is still abundant. As it was necessary to
transport this ore to the works by land, having first
extracted it from a tough sienite, the bed has been aban-
doned in favor of the ore on the Marmora Lake. Much of
this ore is mixed up with calcareous spar, which, of course
acts as a flux and assists its fusion, on this account it
is sometimes used in the operations of the furnace to
produce a hotter cinder.

It contains sulphur, but apparently not so much as the
last bed. Its geological relations are the same, that is to
say, sienitic, but it differs mineralogically in containing,
besides calcareous spar, octohedral chrystals of iron and
garnet. Dr. Bigsby, I believe, says manganesian garnet,
but using a flux of borax and nitre, I never could develope
before the blow-pipe the amethystine tint so characteristic
of the presense of manganese, when in any quantity; the
colour of the globule was always green or yellow, like that
produced by iron alone. Garnet also occurs here in amor-
phous masses, and may be considered an ore of iron,
although, a poor one; it is, however, very easily fusible and
valuable on that account asa flux.

MINERALOGICAL CHARACTERS.

Several of the ores from this bed, so nearly resemble some
of those which have been described as occurring in the
main deposit on the Marmora Lake, that it is superfluous
to describe them, I shall confine myself therefore to those
which appear to differ.

Ist.—Colour, steel grey; opaque; structure, laminar,
the mass having a tendency to break into fragments of a
rhomboidal shape, with smooth sides ; cross fracture,
uneven; lustre, shining, (almost splendent) ; resino metallic.

_—_—_— —_— ~-—

-—

On Metallic Minerals. 377

It resists the knife, but is very brittle, almost friable. It is
powerfully magnetic, but not with polarity; colour of
powder, black ; specific gravity, 4-9. In nitric acid it
effervesces at first considerably, owing to the carbonate of
lime between its lamine. Before the blow-pipe it decre-
pitates like galena, which it more resembles in appearance
than any ore of iron I every saw before, after which it seems
to burn for an instant; in other respects its blow-pipe
characters are the same as the other magnetic ores.

This is an excellent ore, as it bears its flux with it, and
would probably yield 65 per cent.

2d.—Colour, brownish or yellowisi grey; opaque;
structure, fine grained; fracture, uneven; lustre, glim-
mering, resino metallic; yields to the knife, though not
easily, and affords a yellowish powder under the hammer ;
specific gravity, 3-5; not magnetic even after roasting on
charcoal. In the interior flame of the blow-pipe it forms,
like the garnet, a black globule which is slightly magnetic.
It contains crystals of garnet and iron; the latter are
alwayssome modification of the octohedron, the former
are as usual dodecahedral. It is much mixed up with
carbonate of lime, as its free effervesceuce iu acid evinces,
with borax it gives a glass coloured by iron.

This I consider to be amorphous garnet, a dark reddish
brown variety of which is also met with.

The crystals of garnet are sometimes of a red, at others
of a brown colour, but it is generally so intense as to
render the crystals nearly opaque.

1 have only one more observation to make on this bed,
viz. that by a species of desquamation on the thin edges of
the lamine: and along many of the lines of cleavage of the
caleareous spar a peculiar feathered appearance is given to
many of the clusters of its crystals, which, moreover, seenis

378 On Metallic Minerals.

always to accompany a portion of the rock or gangue that
bears a remarkably pseudo volcanic aspect.

SIXTH ORE BED.

Southwestward of ‘‘ Fosters Ore Bed,” about a mile,
another is found on the border of a marsh. It has been
worked and several tons of ore have been taken away, but
like the last mentioned bed it has experienced a temporary
neglect, and for the same reason. Its ore, however, appears
to be much easier extracted, and much niore abundant.—
Large crystals of iron upon the surface of some of the ore,
and the pavonine tarnish on others, characterize this bed.
It is magnetic, but contains mech sulphur, Mr. Manahan,
informs me that some portion of this ore is used in the
furnace as an alioy ore, but other portions which are free
from sulphur are equal to the best.

MINERALOGICAL CHARACTERS.

Ist.—As has been said, some of the ore in this bed is
characterized by having large crystals of iron upon its
surface. These crystals appear, to be always some
modification of the octohedron. ‘The faces of the crys-
tals are oblique rhombs, and are striated in lines parallel
to the longest diagonal. It is seldom that more than
five faces can be seen, as the others are either obliter-
ated by the body of the ore, or what is more probable,
never were formed. This ore is darker than any of the
preceding ; of a compact structure ; very magnetic ; specific
gravity, 4-6, &c. &c.

2d.—A course granular variety of ore is obtained here,
the cross fracture of which shows the pavonine or iridescent
tarnish. It is very magnetic, and has a specific gravity
of 4-9.

Almost all these beds appear to have, as in the present
instance, a dip and direction towards the north.

————————————

On Metallic Minerals. 379 -

SEVENTH AND EIGHTH BEDS.

It is said that on the opposite sides of the marsh before-
mentioned, there are two more beds, affording large
quantities of that ore, which has the pavonine tarnish.

NINTH AND TENTH BEDS.

I heard of these two beds, and saw the ore from one,
which was excellent, but cannot describe their localities.

Before I conclude this note, some notice shall be taken
of two reports which appear to be in circulation. One on
the discovery of copper in the neighbourhood of the works,
the other on the probable discovery of coal, both said to
have had their origin with Dr. Bigsby. With regard to
the first report, it might very well be true, as the geolo-
gical relations of that ore agree with those of the country
it is said to occur in; moreover the native copper of the
copper mountains, in this quarter of the globe, has fre-
quently a matrix of epidote. I, however, saw no copper
ore, neither, I think, did Dr. Bigsby, or he would have
mentioned it in some of his geological papers.

As to the occurrence of coal, one species of it, anthracite,
(the best adapted, when mixed with a little charcoal, for
smelting iron) might be found. I met with nothing, how-
ever, to indicate the probability of finding it. With regard
to bituminous coal, it is very propable that it will be met
with in this part of Upper Canada, if it preserve in this
country the same geological relations itdoes in Europe.

Among the prizes offered by the Society, is one for the
discovery of coal. It would have been within reach, had it
been offered for the best essay on the probability, or the

- improbability of finding it.
However imperfect the foregoing description may be, I

- 380 On Metallic Minerals,

think that a sufficient number of facts, both geological and
mineralogical, have been adduced, to render it highly
probable that the limestone of this district is ef the transi-
tion class, while the crystalline rock below it is of the
primary order; one of the youngest, perhaps, (as Doctor
Bigsby has said of the sienite of Marmora) of the older
class of rocks. Whether the latter is to be called granite
or sienite, appears to be a mere dispute about words, in
which [ shall take no part, conceiving that whatever the
minerals may be which are present, either predominating
or otherwise, that the different aggregates are of contem-
poraneous formation, and pass one into the other.

A question has been mooted out in this country, whether
a genuine granite, that is an aggregate composed exclu-
sively of quartz, felspar, and mica, of a very crystalline
texture, and exhibiting no signs of a mechanical formation
has been observed; as far as my experience extends, such an
aggregate is very rare, nor can I say positively, that I ever
saw such, under any other form than as veins traversing
other rocks. Hand specimens may be frequently seen and
collected, in which the necessary conditions appear to be
present; but no individual, ambitious of being thought a
geologist, will judge from such partial data. Let him cast
them from him, and visit the rocks in situ, before he
presumes to give his opinion; it will then be entitled to
attention though it prove erroneous.*

* Captain Bayfield has, since the above was written, informed me that
beds of genuine granite are occasionally met with on the northern coasts of
Lakes Superior and Huron, although, in general, the granite of those
districts is sienitic,

.
"
|
>
;

On Metallic Minerals. 381

NOTE 2.

For information respecting the ore in rear of St. Paul’s
Bay, I beg leave to refer the Society to my communication
on the subject, in the lst and 2d vols. of its Transactions,
pages 145 and 76.

The only new fact I have to communicate on the subject
is, that a fragment of the ore which has been left neglected
ina dark corner for some time, is now found to possess
polar magnetism, although it previously was found to be
deficient in any kind of magnetic influence whatever, before
it was roasted, and which circumstance was particularly
stated in one of the communications alluded to above.

NOTE 3.

The Gatineau river enters the Ottawa from the northward,
about one mile and a half below the entrance into the
Rideau Canal. It is navigable for steam-boats for about
four miles upwards from its confluence with the Ottawa,—
here rapids occur. About one mile and a half west of these
rapids, a bed of iron ore is met with. It is situated near the
summit of a mountain, in the township of Hull, L.C. and
forms a vein or bed in the former from ten to twelve feet
thick. It appears to traverse the mountain on a south-west
course, having a vertical position as regards the walls of
the vein. On the opposite side of the mountain, at the
distance of upwards of a mile, and in the direction of the
vein, ore was again seen in great abundance. From the
quantity of ore seen in these two places, as well as in other
parts of these high lands, no doubt is entertained that there
‘is a considerable deposit of ore in this portion of Lower

Canada,

382 On Metallic Minerals.

Judging from surface specimens, the rock with which the
iron ore is associated is a friable white marble, containing,
like much of the ore, small particles of plumbago or
graphite.

Wood for making charcoal and limestome as a flux,
abound in the neighbourhood ; and a water power to
almost any extent may be commanded. The ore is often
strongly magnetic.

The substance of the foregoing communication was
sent to me, at my request, by Mr. Burrows, the overseer of
works on the Rideau, who has been before mentioned.

It is very probable that the graphite mixed with the ore
may prove an advantage in its reduction, by causing a
saving in the expenditure of fuel, and also by exerting a
beneficial influence upon the cast metal.

NOTE 4.

Iron sand often exerts a strong cementing power on the
shores of the St. Maurice, &c., there are banks of sand so
indurated by its presence as to resemble sandstone.

I have often observed, as probably others have also, that
rivers which bring down this metallic sand deposit it in
. narrow low ridges upon the shore at higher elevations than
similar deposits of the lighter sand, a fact at first not easily
explained; upon more particularly observing what takes
place, however, it will be perceived that these ridges are
deposited upon the retwrn of the ripple to its bed, conse-
quently that sand of greatest spacifie gravity falling first
will hold the highest position.

BS a gn neha at ace
. ee, Oe

eRe OLS

— + *

On Metallic Minerals, 383

NOTE 5.

The deposit here alluded to is situated on the eastern
shore of Beverley or Henderson’s lake, an enlargement of
the Gannanoqui, in the upper portion of its navigable
waters. It is about one quarter of a mile from the lake,
on the opposite side of a cedar swamp, and on the summit
of a small hill. An inhabitant of Beverley desirous of
ascertaining whether it was in abundance or not, opened a
portion of the ground about ten feet every way, and found
aconsiderable quantity. He seems to have struck a vein
of it at the depth of about eight feet, which dips towards the
north-east. But it also appears in the section he has made
in large heavy blocks on and near the surface. 1 examined
the ground in several places to the northward and east-
ward of this excavation, and always found it near the
surface, it was also met with to the westward. As I
remained on the spot only twenty minutes or half an hour,
it is not possible to pronounce as to the quantity in which
it occurs, it however, appears to be considerable. To
obtain positive information on this point, it would be neces-
sary to cut a few sections or sink a few holes on the hill,
which might be done at a trifling expense—an expense
amply repaid by even the chance of finding an extensive
bed of ore in so desirable a locality,

MINERALOGICAL CHARACTERS.

Only two varieties of ore occur here, red ochre and one
(that predominating,) which possesses the following
characters :—

Some parts are of adark Indian red colour, and others
iron grey ; opaque ; structure, pisiform or oolitic, the mass
being composed of small globules of a reddish colour, and

sc

384 On Metallic Minerals.

unctuous lustre externally ; a fracture shews these globules
on one side, and the rounded concavities they have vacated
on the other, these hollows are sometimes of an iron grey
colour, at others Indian red. The globules resist the point
of a knife, but the mass yields to it a light red streak ; its
powder also is of a lighter red than the mass. The structure
of the globules is hollow, perhaps concentrically so, but
they are so small as not to be easily examined on this point.
The lustre of the ore is between dull resinous and shining
metallic, but glimmering points and small laminze of a
higher lustre are frequently seen. The specific gravity is
various, but it is between 2-9 and 4-6; no change in nitric
acid. Before the blow-pipe it does not fuse, but turns
black and magnetic. ‘To borax it communicates the usual
colour characteristic of iron.

I am not aware that a similar variety of the red oxide of
iron has ever been noticed before. In its structure it
resembles the “ pisiform clay iron stone” of Phillips, but
its frequent metallic lustre distinguishes it. It may be an
intimate mixture of the two. Fluiry’s name of “ fer
oxide globuliferne,” is expressive of its appearance, although
under that head he does not describe the same ore.

It has been said to smelt easily and to make very good
metal. Iam more doubtful of the accuracy of the latter
statement than of the former.

2d.—The red ochre, besides coating the globules and the
external surface of the ore, lines the sides of the veins and
is much mixed up with the soil of the neighbourhood,
indicating the proximity of a more solid ore. It is
remarkable for its unctuousity.

If much ore of a good quality were found, which I am far
from taking upon myself to say is the case, its locality is a

ee

On Metallic Minerals. 385

highly favourable one for working in. A few hundred
yards of land carriage would bring it to the waters edge, from
whence it might be transported down the Gannanoqui to
the Furnace Falls, at which place every facility offers itself
as regards water, wood, limestone and sandstone, for the
establishment of Iron Works. By the construction of one,
or at most two locks, the iron fabricated might be trans-
ported by water through the White Fish River into the
Rideau Canal, below Jones’ Falls. Nor if it were desirable
is the water communication with the St. Lawrence below
the falls of difficult attainment—two or at most three locks
would effect this also.

I propose to close this note with some observations
upon the rocks and minerals met with in ascending the
Gannanoqui.

The Gannanoqui enters the St. Lawrence from the north
ward about twenty-one miles below Kingston. Advantage
has been taken of {a fall at its mouth* to establish saw
and grist mills, which from their favorable position, great
popularity of their owner and the liberal expenditure upon
them of a large capital, are considered to be the most
flourishing works of the kind in the Upper Province.

Upon landing on the right bank of the Gannanoqui, at
its mouth, a conglomerate was first observed, which was
supposed to belong to the old red sandstone formation, that
rock having been subsequently noticed forming a preci-
pitous bank towards the St. Lawrence on the left shore of
the Gannanoqui. This conglomerate however, was not
particulerly observed. The old red sandstone, as it is
presumed to be, has the appearance of being horizontally

* About fifteen feet high,

386 On Metallic Minerals.

stratified, but this feature was not very distinct, owing to
the rugged nature of the section in which it was examined.
The prevailing, though not the essential colour, was here
present in this rock, varying from brick red to yellowish
red passing into yellow. It is also characterized by those
red spots and protuberances, which have been given, though
I believe, erroneously as a certain type of this rock. The
action of the atmosphere causes the exposed surface of the
rock to crumble away leaving in many places where these
spots occur mamillary protuberances : they are sometimes
hollow, and then have the appearance of miniature craters,
occasionally these spots yield to weathering more readily
than the other portions of the rock, in which case rounded
holes on the surface are seen an appearance very common
in the detached masses of this rock, which are found
distributed over the country. The structure of this sand-
stone is generally fine grained, but it is often that ofa
coarse conglomerate. Sometimes coloured streaks or

bands parallel to each other and to the lines of stratification -

are very distinct upon a cross fracture. This formation
appears to be contemporaneously the same as that with
which the iron ore is associated in the higher portions of
the Gannanoqui. It also appears to have been formed from
the debris of a rock common in this part of the country,
the constituents of which are very red felspar; light blue
opalescent quartz; a small portion of green hornblende
with occasionally a little mica. This quartz which is easily
recognised, is frequently seen in the sandstone. The rock
alluded to may be seen near Kingston and at the Furnace
Falls on the Gannanoqui.

Beyond this sandstone, to the eastward, a point projects
out towards the St. Lawrence, (which bathes its foot)

On Metallic Minerals. 387

composed of a very friable limestone, often of so crystalline
a structure as to resemble calcareous spar. It often contains
specks of graphite, and sometimes parts of it are discoloured
by what appears to be the green carbonate of copper. Its
colours are whitish, yellowish, and reddish. Similar
aggregates have been met with in sinking the lock pits on
the line of the Rideau Canal, and in one instance it has
been observed to have a geological position below the red
sandstone.

This limestone is perfectly useless as a building material,
and for lime it would not answer well, because it flies and
falls to pieces and powder in the kiln. When the lime is
required for immediate use, it might answer, but the
quickness with which it would pass from a caustic lime toa
carbonate, would render delay destructive of its power of
fixing in a state of mortar, Mr. M‘Donald, the obliging
proprietor of the mills, procures all the lime he is in want
of from Kingston.

About one mile from the mouth of the Gannanoqui the
navigable portion of it begins, and continues as far as the
“ murble rock or falls,’ a distance of about ten or twelve
miles.* As the geological features of this part of the river
are interesting, | shall endeavour to give some account of
them.

The waters of the Gannanoqui have here apparently
forced a contracted passage through a hill of rock, leaving
a section on either side, varying from twenty to fifty feet
above the river. On the left bank this section is through
talcose schist and serpentine,—on the right it is through
marble, Granite also on the left bank is seen forming a

-— 4

* About five miles by land,

388 On Metallic Minerals.

perpendicular scarp about one hundred feet from the river,
and the same number of feet above its level. The tale, in
the talcose schist, is of that variety called silver tale, and
its lustre is so strongly that of silver, as to be easily mistaken
by the inexperienced for an ore of that metal, (Note 8.)—
In this rock veins of larger crystals of talc, of a light green
colour, and very pearly lustre occur; they vary from half
an inch to one inch in thickness. Other veins about half
an inch wide, also occur of a mineral which possesses the
following characters.
MINERALOGICAL CHARACTERS.

Colour on a fresh fracture, white, which by exposure
becomes yellowish. When dry it is slightly translucent on
the edges, but being absorbent and hydrophanous, it
becomes deeply translucent on the edges after exposure
to the action of water, in which it softens, becomes brittle,
and eventually falls into two or more fragments. Structure,
compact; fracture in the small, either even or flatly con-
choidal; in the large, owing to the interposition of brown
mottled seams of a glistening enamel lustre, the fracture
is undulated. These seams often exhibit peculiar fibrous
markings of a brown colour, occasioned probably by
incrustations of rock cork or rock leather ; they render the
mineral very frangible in the large; in the small, when
dry, it is not so, but when saturated with water, it is even
friable. Its lustre is dull, but it easily acquires the shining
polish of enamel. Itis scratched by calcareous spar, but
not by the nail unless it has been previously soaked in
water and is still moist. It has a slight argillaceous odor
when breathed on, and is slightly adhesive to the tongue,
with the flavor of chalk rather than magnesia.* It has a

* It has been said that the carbonate of magnesia, and the pure earth

On Metallic Minerals. 389

very soft and unctious feel, both in substance and powder
—specific gravity, 2 2-3.

In powder it is partially soluble, without effervescence
in the mineral acids, and their diluted solutions. When
tested with Prussian alkali, or tincture of galls, the presence
ofa proportion of iron, which the low specific gravity, and
pale colour of the mineral in question would not lead one
to suspect the presence of, is indicated. By evaporation
salts of a white colour, acicular form, and the flavour of
copperas, are obtained from its solution in sulphuric acid ;
sometimes a slight acidulous taste like alum is noticed, but
never the nauceous bitter of epsom salts. Its powder in
water communicates a blue colour to test paper. Its solu-
tion in muriatic acid does not redden flame.*

In the mattrass, if not perfectly dry, it decrepitates
violently, and giving out its moisture it turns black.—
Before the blow-pipe, if moist, it decrepitates violently,
otherwise not, and turns black, but not magnetic. A small
thin fibre-shaped particle fuses in the interior flame, into
a dull white enamel, but slowly and with difficulty. A
larger essay is impossible. With borax it forms slowly, a
colourless transparent glass. It phosphoresces a little on a
shovel heated below redness.

From its geological position, and some of its other char-
acters, | was induced at first to consider this mineral to be

have no flavor by which they can be distinguished from chalk, and the fact
that the character of flavor is entirely omitted by mineralogists iv describin
these substances, makes it appear that that opinion is generally entertained
by them. With due submission, however, to such high authority, it seems
to me to be an important character omitted, as I am almost certain that I
could detect these minerals in a state of purity, by this character alone.

* See Silliman’s Journal, yol. 18, No. 2,—‘ On the red colour of flame,”
&e. &c.

390 On Metallic Minerais.

a hydrate of magnesia, but upon a closer examination it

“appears to agree better with that variety of hydrate of
allumine, called heuzenite by Cleaveland. It is just as
likely however, to be one of the numerous family of clays,
a bole, or lithomarge, for instance. It does not forma
paste with water, and is not easily reduced to an impalpable
powder.

A calcareous spar of the lustre of satin spar, and also
sometimes of the same structure is found in thin veins in
the rock. Its usual structure, however, is laminar, and
the lamine appear to be arranged diagonally as regards
the sides of the vein, having their polished faces striated in
narrow blue bands like the water lines on paper, parallel to
the sides of the vein in which direction there are probably
cleavages although none could be obtained.

A species of potstone or foliated soapstone is obtained
under the same circumstances.

Hexagonal crystals of silver mica are found imbedded.

A beautiful enamel coating often fluted and of a purple,
a green, or a reddish colour was seen upon the surface of
some of the talcose schist forming the sides of the veins in
which the supposed liydrate of allumine was obtained, also
upon the satin spar. Advantage has been taken of the fall
and of the rocky elevation on either side of it, to construct
a dam and to establish a saw mill. On the left side of the
saw mill and of the river, the serpentine rock is seen
forming a perpendicular scarp. It is composed of the pre-
cious variety of serpentine, and appears to form a thick bed
in the talcose schist. On the upper surface of this serpentine
is seen in patchesa thin white compact coating of a mineral,
which bears some resemblance to the mineral before
described, but it is found to effervesce and dissolve very

ee

On Metallic Minerals. 391

freely im muriatic acid and to form with sulphuric acid a
thick eurdy deposit of a white colour and perfectly tasteless.
lam disposed to think it an incrustation of magnesian
earbonate of lime, and the curdy matter an artificial
gypsun.

The talcose schist lies between the serpentine and granite,
which last mentioned rock rears it head in one perpendicular
scarp above the others perhaps fifty feet. It is composed of
felspar and quartz, with occasionally, black schorl, but no
mica Such an aggregate is a frequent member among those
rocks in this country which are called granite. It has been
ealled a granite here for want of a better name, but as its
constituents have been given,a name can lead to no
erroneous conclusions. It is yery much to be wished that
geologists would oftener condescend to give the consti-
tuents, &c. of the rocks they describe. In the difficult
science of geology, as yet in its infancy, conciseness is well
sacrificed for a detail which shall render its facts intelligible,

LI have described marble as forming the right bank of the
river at and near the dam; it does not do so, however, ex-
elusively, as talcose schist is also there, but in subordinate
quantity, and a short distance back from the shores granite
is, 1 believe, as on the opposite side, also found. This
marble sometimes spotted by serpentine, forming a verde
antico, at others almost of a pure and brilliant white, forms
an extensive bed some distance below the Marble Falls, but
it is near them that that beautiful variety, checquered by
serpentine has been found; it also oecurs in large nodules
imbedded in the limestone, aud again one part of a mass is
white marble—the other serpentine. This serpentine is of
the purest kind, being of a very vivid green colour and
very translucent, The marble with which it is associated

3p

392 On Metallic Minerals,

is generally of a compactly laminar structure and white
colour. It takes, 1 believe, an excellent polish, and when,
as is frequently the case, the spots of serpentine are round,
smail and thickly distributed, no handsomer material of
the kind can be found, nor one better adapted for many
ornamental purposes. It is so easily worked that rings
have been made of it. Blocks of almost any required size
may, I believe, be obtained, but of this there is no positive
certainty, because no quarries have yet been opened,
although it is said that they are about to be.

But it is not the verde antico alone which demands notice.
A good description of white marble is found also here in
large quantities, and although I have seen none which
would answer the purpose of sculpture, it is very probable
that it may be found, if sought for. Its colour is tolerably
uniform, but some of the marble contains small crystals of
a brown mineral and occasionally parts are grey rather
than white. Its structure, as has been said, is compactly
laminar, the mass being composed of small laminz with
polished faces closely aggregated. It is harder than white
marble usually is, but effervesces freely in muriatic acid.—
It is deeply translucent on the edges. For building, and
for almost every purpose to which limestone is applied, it
would answer well, and judging from what I saw, it would
appear that any quantity might be obtained. About one
mile below the falls it is seen in greatest abundance,
apparently overlying serpentine, and forming with that
rock a perpendicular cliff about twenty or thirty feet high.
In short there appears to be an immense marble quarry in
this part of Canada, the limits of which have not been
ascertained

The water retained by the dam at the marble rock is

On Metallic Minerals. 393

about twenty-five feet above the St. Lawrence and six feet
above its natural level. Above these falls as far as the
“‘ Furnace Falls,’ (about twenty-five or thirty miles* by
water from the mouth of the Gannanoqui,) the river is so
nearly upon a level that rafts will not descend with the
stream unless they be assisted by a favorable wind. The
shores of this river are generally low, and I should conceive
that much the highest portion of the country, at least on
the shores of the Gannanoqui, is on the summit of the
granite aggregate, on the left bank of the river at the
* Marble Falls.”

It has been before said that the rock at the Furnace Falls
is a granite composed of red felspar, bluish quartz and
green hornblende. It forms on the Gannanogui ; here a
cascade of about fourteen feet in height, which gives motion
to a flourishing saw and grist mill. 1 saw close at handa
reddish crystalline marble with points of graphite dissemi-
nated, and J heard of large deposits of excellent sandstone
and graphite slate in the neighbourhood, but being hurried,
the principal object of the visit to these parts, viz. to see
the deposits of iron ore, engrossed most of may attention.—
One deposit only was seen, that which has been described,
but the occurrence of others was mentioned, the localities
of which from description were not of so fayourable a nature
as regards the transport of ore.

At my request Mr. Burrows, an intelligent overseer of
works on the Rideau, lately sent me some notes and spe-
cimens of rocks found near or on the line of the Rideau
Canal from the Cranberry Lake to Kingston Mills. I
propose to condense these notes and combine with them
my own observations.

* Only fourteen by land, so circuitous is the course of this river,

394 On Metallic Minerals.

1st.—Between Cranberry Lake and the strait leading mto
Dog Lake, the old red sandstone, m nearly horizontal
strata occurs. It is described as being in very thick beds,
and to dip away in several directions as south-east, west,
south of west and north-west at a variable angle of from
5° to 10°. 1tisred and white in bands parallel to the
lines of stratification, and resembles very mucha red sand-
stone, which is purchased in the United States for the use of
the iron furnace at Marmora, for which purpose, 1 think it
would answer, but experience must decide that. From the
creeks or south-east outlet of Houghborough Lake, an
inferior sandstone, apparently belonging to the same for-
mation is procured, some of the sandstone from ‘hence is
a species of grey wacke.

2d.—Is a black limestone of a very compact ‘structure,
and somewhat flinty aspect. It is transported from near
Auley Mills to Jones’ Falls, and burnt for the supply of
lime for that place. No limestone having been discovered
nearer ; it is described as being situated on a high ridge.

3d.—Sandstone from a high ridge between the lakes at
Brewer’s upper mill, and the quarries described under No.
1. It is close to the line of the canal, horizontally stratified
or nearly so, and suwperincumbent toa mass of very friable
white and grey crystalline limestone. This sandstone is ‘of
a yellowish white colour.

4th.—Is the friable crystalline limestone alluded to above,
and which, from the looseness of its laminar texture,
friability and colour, resembles some calcareous spars. It
was also alluded to in describing a similar aggregate ‘at the
mouth of the Gannanoqui. It is described as underlying a
sandstone, which I venture to name the old red, ‘simply
from the fact that wherever it is found in this country, it

On Metallic Minerals. 395

appears to be either in immediate contact with primary or
transition rocks or if any rock containing organic remains
is found above it, these remains always indicate an older
formation than the ted marl or new ted sandstenethe only
one it could be mistaken for. Admitting that it is the old
red sandstone and that that rock is the last of the secondary,
the one beneath it must be of the transition class, which its
texture and structure corroborates, the former too loose for
a primary rock and the latter too crystalline fora secondary,
besides which a similar aggregate as has been described,
is associated with graphite, a mineral seldom met with above
the transition class. This limestone possesses one Character
that may be considered some what at variance with these
views, viz. when struck it gives outa strong odour
of sulphur.

5th—In excavating a lock-pit at Brewer's mills, Mr.
Burrows met with the following rocks in the order set
down. He is not positive, however, that some of them were
not boulders, but thinks that if they are they must be very
large ones. The superincumbent rock forms a stratum of
about one foot thick, adapting itself to the shape of the
mass it rests upon. It is a crystalline aggregate composed
of black hornblende, which predominates, mica, felspar and
quartz. The rock it lies upon isa crystalline limestome,
resembling No. 4, but not so loose in its texture. If these
rocks are ix situ and their relative position correctly given,
the fact has very much the appearance of a secondary trap
overlying transition limestone, Large rhomboidal crystals
of felspar were also struck from a rock in place in this pit ;
the whole is crowned by nine or ten feet of very stiffclay.

6th.—On the west side of Cataraqui creek, immediately
opposite Brewer's upper saw mill, very fine specimens of

sve CO On Metallic Minerals.

large hexagonal mica, of a brown colour, and aggregated into
masses, are taken froma rock which, judging from a hand
specimen, appears to be a genuine granite, and is probably
the oldest formation which shows itself in these parts. It
is possible, however, that this mica is from a granite vein,
traversing a younger rock.

7th.—From a quarry situated about five miles to the
south of Brewer’s upper mill, near the road to Kingston,
and on the east side of Cataraqui creek, the main supply
of stone for building the locks at Brewer's mills is obtained.
The little stripping required in quarrying this stone, is the
cause of its being brought a distance of from three to five
miles. It does not appear to be by any means so good a
material for building as No. 1, although it is probably of
the same formation—it is of a yellowish colour. It is the
different state of oxidizement in the iron which is present,
that occasions the difference in the colour of that sandstone ;
when red, the iron is in the state of the red oxide ; when
yellow, it is the brown oxide of iron which affords the
colouring principle.

8th.—The lock pits at Kingston mills had been sunk
through a rock which may be either called a sienite or
greenstone ; so equally are the minerals necessary to con-
stitute those rocks, mixed up with one another. ‘The
felspar is red and sometimes, I believe, predominating,
while the hornblende is dark green, and more usually
prevails. I have not observed either quartz or mica in it,
but I believe they sometimes occur.

9th.—Is limestone from the east side of the creek at
Kingston mills. It is dark and compact. It occurs in
undulated strata of,various thickness. Courses of twenty-
eight inches have been procured at this quarry, for the

On Metallic Minerals. 397

use of the works at Kingston mills. This ridge appears to
Mr. Burrows to be a continuation of the limestone quarries
at Point Henry. It crosses the Montreal road, and, he
thinks, extends within a short distance of the sandstone,
No. 7, where it suddenly terminates.

NOTE 6.

The St. Maurice iron works are situated on the right bank
of the St. Maurice river, about eight miles upwards from
its mouth. They are accessible both by land and water,
but more readily by the former than by the latter. A
strong current, occasional shallows, and one small rapid,
rendering it necessary that in ascending the river, the oars
should be laid aside, and the more tedious process of poling
had recourse to. The strength of the current, however, is
all in favour of descending, and with proper guides, bateaux
of five tons transport cast metal, &c. &c. to Three Rivers,
from whence they return to the works empty, once in the
course of the day. All stores, &c. required for the estabe
lishment, are transported over land from Three Rivers, a
distance of eight or nine miles, upon atol erably good and
level road, across a country composed of a deep ferruginous
sand, bottomed on clay, and consequently presenting a
barren aspect.

From this bank of sand the visitor drops suddenly upon
these iron works, which consist of one smelting furnace,
two forges, one charcoal mill, one saw mill, and one grist
mill, with minor workshops. The whole, including the
domestic establishment of the resident, and the huts of the
workmen, presenting the appearance of a small Village.

398 On Metallic Minerals.

By damming up a small stream running into the river
from the west, ample conveniences for washing the ore
are obtained, and power. sufficient to drive the furnace
bellows, which is moved by a wheel thirty-two feet in
diameter. A grist mill, a forge for drawing bar iron, with
a hammer weighing five hundred weight, a mill for grind-
ing charcoal for the moulding room, a saw mill, and
another forge, having also one hammer of five hundred
weight. The supply of water is constant throughout the
year.

The description of ore made use of is the bog ore, which
is obtained from the neighbourhood of the works, not,
however in the immediate vicinity, as that, although not
entirely exhausted, is said to be scattered over the ground
in such small deposits as not to be worth the expense and
labour of making roads to them, while ore can be procured
in great abundance, in other places though at a greater
distance. The nearest point from which it is brought at
present is six miles, and farthest nine.

This ore is of excelJent quality, and occurs in patches of
different sizes, varying in thickness from six to twelve
inches. It is pa from four inches to one foot below the
surface.

Those places which were exhausted of ore many years
ago, are said to exhibit no appearance of a renewed supply.
It is probable however, that those exhausted spots which
have become filled subsequently with stagnant water,
would, after continuing in that state for some time, afford
some appearance of the kind. This species of renovation
is common to bog ore, and where observed, it has been
often supposed to be owing to the growth of the ore; the
rationale however, appears to be this,—-water combining

On Metailic Minerals. 399

with the different acids and alkalis, which, decomposing
animal and vegetable substances afford becomes capable
of dissolving oxidulous iron, &c. When such waters
become stagnant a precipitation ensues not only of those
minerals, &c. which may have been held in mechanical
Suspension by the water, but also of most of those which
are chemically combined with it. In this manner an
argillaceous and phosphorized variety of iron ore is formed
of a thickness proportioned to the time this reproducing
power has been in action. Indicative of this natural process
the interior of the cells of bog ore are sometimes lined with
ablue phosphate of iron. In the south western parts of
New Jersey, where bog ore occurs in great abundance,
many spots previously exhausted are explored again
successfully, after the lapse of about twenty years,

The iron is probably derived from the ferruginous sand
banks which have been said to characterize this place, and
from deposits of magnetic iron in the primary chain to the
northward, the existence of which the profusion of mag-
netic sand which the waters of the St. Maurice throw upon
ite shores, renders almost certain.

It is worthy of remark that the ore is here said to be
deposited on a coarse while sand and never on clay. The
thin stratum of clay, which it would appear was necessary
to retain the waters, holding the iron in solution sufficiently
long in a stagnant state to allow of its precipitation, (a
purpose coarse sand would scarcely answer,) has perhaps
been converted into bog ore by a species of impregnation
common to this substance, and often decidedly observed in
roots of trees, &c., as it is probable that asimilar formation
has seldom been deposited originally on any other than a
retentive sub soil.

400 On Metallic Minerals.

In one instance a second layer of ore was found beneath
the first, where there are alternating thin strata of clay,
such an occurrence is not unlikely to exist.

As to the quantity of ore to be obtained, it is not possible
without instituting an actual survey for the purpose, to
obtain any other ,information than that of the most general
description. The individuals best informed on the subject,
believe it to be in considerable abundance, if not on the
landileased by Government, on the adjoining seigniories of
Cap de la Magdelaine, Champlain and Batiscan. The
seigniory of Champlain belongs to one of the proprietors of
the iron works, the Honble. Mathew Bell, but the other
two either are or were the property of the Crown.—
Hitherto when one deposit of bog ore has been exhausted
another has been readily found by probing the ground with
ashort pointed piece of iron, when if ore be present it is
ascertained by the gritty metallic sound returned. The
nature of much of the land in these parts swampy, cold,
barren and covered with soft wood, are signs of the proba-
bility of its frequent occurrence. Where hard wood prevails
ore is not found ; hemlock, spruce, sapin and cedar
accompany it—white pine is not found in abundance where
ore occurs.

The credulous workmen are said to be alarmed by the
ignis fatuus which is sometimes seen floating over the bogs
in this part of the country. The appearance of this meteor
should rather be welcomed as a favorable omen than other-
wise, as it certainly proves the presense of phosphoric acid,
one agent, probably by which the iron ore was originally
dissolved, and removed from in some cases remote situations
to others, where under a new form it can be readily worked.
The ignis fatuus is ascribed to a mixture of hydrogen

On Metallic Minerals, 401

ebtained from the decomposition of water with carbon and
phosphorous, from animal and vegetable substances. ‘The
presence of phosphoric acid, however, does not improve the
quality of the ore, as the bar iron made from it is said by
writers on the subject to be often, in consequence, what is
technically called “ cold short,” that is brittle when cold.

This ore is said to afford good pig and bar iron, the
former at the rate of 45 per cent., it is probable, however,
that this is rather overrated, as bog ore seldom yields more
than 35 per cent. No plate iron, wire, nor steel, have been
manufactured ; for the two first, it may probably be too
brittle owing to the presense of phosphoric acid, which is
always found in metal obtained from this ore.

The articles of cast iron furnished by this establishment
are stoves and hollow ware of all descriptions. The former
are cast thick to resist the cold of the climate, and are found
to be less liable to crack than those imported.

During the late war the lake service was supplied with
trucks, shot and other castings by this establishment, and
in the event of a future war, not only the marine branch of
the service, but that of the ordnance also could be supplied
with many articles which the nature of the service might
require, such as gun carriages, shot, shells, &c. &c. the
the price would of course depend upon the state of
the trade.

The quantity of cast iron obtained averages about two
and a quarter tons per day—the result of two drawings in
twenty-four hours, or sixteen tons per week. From forty-five
to fifty hundred weight of bar iron is manufactured each
week for the supply of axes, borse shocs, ploughshares,

~ The growth of timber is, in the swamps, spruce, hemlock,

402, On Metallic Minerals.

tamarac, cedar, sapin, (the pine which yields the Canada
balsam.) On the higher elevations birch, maple and
beech. The quantity is thought not to be sufficient for the
smelting of all the ore. That prefered for making charcoal
is beech, birch and maple. The proportion of coal to ore
is six hundred and forty-eight bushels to three tons. The
charcoal is made in winter and brought to the works a dis-
tance of from four to seven miles.

Some years agoa very fatal accident very nearly hap-
pened at these works. The first layer of coal had just been
put upon the furnace and lighted, when one of the men
seeing scoria sticking to the sides of the furnace, des-
cended to remove it, and while standing ona ladder to do
so he suddenly lost his senses and fell. Another man
seeing the transaction descended likewise, and while
putting a rope round the body of his inanimate comrade, a
stupor came over him and he fell also. A third man now
descended with a rope round his body and succeeded in
getting one of the men out, but not before the gas had
taken effect on himself as he was drawn out apparently
lifeless. The man who first fell was the last who was
taken out, yet he suffered least, and subsequently described
his sensations previously to falling as very pleasurable,
while those of the other two, both before and afterwards
were said to be horrible. One man indeed, was very angry
with the Doctor, I believe, for bringing him to life.

The river opposite the forges, as these works are called,
is two hundred and eighty-eight yards wide. At the mouth
of the river where the ferry is established its width is
according to the ferryman about four hundred and eighty
yards. This river continues navigable for six miles above
the forges, but the eurrent is in some places very rapid—

a

On Metallic Minerals. 403

at least four miles an hour. Where the river ceases to be
navigable, a fall called the Falls of the Greys, occurs and
it is not far from the foot of these falls on the right bank of
the river that the sandstone for building the hearths and
furnace and the limestone as a flux for the ore are procured.
I walked to these quarries by the shore of the river, and
shall attempt to give a geological section of the country
passed through.

No rock appears on the banks of the river for three or
four miles ; its place is supplied by a stiff clay, through
sections in which streams and small torrents descend, the
colour of whose waters often indicate the presence of iron
in solution ; it is less equivocal when, as is also often the
case, a crust of the red oxide of iron is found covering the
rounded stones and pebbles at the mouths of these streams.
About one mile or thereabouts, from the works, a sulphu-
retted spring is met with, rising in the river, and forming
a small jeu d'eau above it. The smell of sulphuretted
hydrogen is so powerful that it is impossible to pass the
place without noticing it. On the dry bank opposite, down
which a small stream is trickling, a white curdy mineral
is observed coating the sides of the bank, and evidently
deposited by the water, which is also sulphuretted. It was
supposed to be either a carbonate of iron, or a sulphate of
lime, but no examination of it was made, to determine that
question. The same appearance is observed at St. Paul’s
Bay, where also chalybeate waters mix with those which
are sulphuretted.

The first rock which was met with, is a fetid shell lime
stone. Suddenly cropping out of the ground—the same as
that in which the quarries ure worked, and which are
situated near the falls, about two hundred yards from

404 On Metallic Minerals.

the river, and perhaps fifty feet above its level. The sand-
stone which is next met with on the shore, about one mile
and a quarter below the falls, is, as I conceive, of the old
red sandstone formation, although its colour is rather white
than red. It forms a low bank, running parallel to the
river, at the distance of about one hundred feet. It dips
with the river, but faster, in consequence of which: it is
soon lost in that direction. Its total depth is about twenty
feet, one half of which is below the surface of the ground
at the base of the section, and about one-third is below
that of the river. It is divided into strata, varying from a
few inches to nearly two feet in thickness. The upper
strata are rubbly, often friable,and of a reddish colour
externally, but the lower turn out some excellent blocks,
and haslars from five to six feet in length, may be obtained,
although not easily. On account of the whiteness of its
colour, the fineness of its texture, but above all, on account
of the obstinacy with which it endures the greatest heat of
the furnace, this stone has acquired a kind of notoriety, and
in consequence, I was sent a few years ago, by order of His
Excellency Lord Dalhousie, to report upon it, withthe view,
that if found to be of a favourable description for building,
permission might be obtained from the proprietor to remove
a sufficient quantity of it to erect a monument to Wolfe and
Montcalm, a work at that time in contemplation. The
report was unfavourable, partly on account of the expense
of quarrying the good material, but more because the best
of it was not considered by any means so well calculated to
resist the disintegrating action of the atmosphere, as the
stone (a grey wacke from Cap Rouge) of which the
monument was ultimately built. It does not follow,
because a stone stands the furnace well, that it should

~~

On Metallic Minerals. A405

resist the weather equally well, or vice versa, as there
is a great difference in the modus operandi of these different
eausese Much depends upon the nature, particularly
as regards the structure of the stones, for instance,
compact stones usually resist the weather well, but will fly
immediately in the fire as flint, quartz rock, &c. On the
contrary, rocks and stones of a granular and slaty structure
will often crumble away in the air, but which would
resist heat remarkably well. But it is ridiculous to
dwell upon so obvious a truth, which would not have been
done if an opinion were not prevalent that any stone which
will endure heat, will also endure what is so very different,
the capricious changes of the atmosphere at all times,—the
combined action of heat and moisture, in the summer, and
the still more powerful combination of cold and moisture
in the winter.

In corroboration of what I have been saying, the sand-

stone in question is by no means extraordinary as a building
stone, but for the particular purposes of constructing the
furnaces and hearths stone, it is not easy to conceive a
better material. Upon examining the sandstone with a
microscope, it appears to be composed of grey grains of
quartz,and a somewhat powdery mineral of a white colour,
which appears to be decomposed felspar. All parts of it
are infusible under the blow-pipe.
_ Above this sundstone lies in conformable, that is parallel
order, and close contact, a dark grey wacke, averaging
twelve feet in thickness, immediately above which rises,
at an angle of about 45° to the height of nearly one hundred
feet, a mass of sandy alluvium. There is not the least
doubt that the limestone before mentioned overlies the grey
wacke ; but whether other intervening strata may not occur
is a question I cannot decide.

406 On Metallic Minerals.

About one mile and a half higher up the river, and about
one quarter of a mile above the falls, another section of
this sandstone is seen,—here the French formerly quarried.
From the circumstance of the strata of sandstone in the
first quarry dipping, as has been described, faster than the
river, I was induced to think that this section would be
deeper than the other, and upon proceeding to the spot,
this was found to be the case. The sandstone here forms a
bank about twenty feet high, and its summit is perhaps
fifty feet above the river ; immediately at its base, a coarse
conglomerate, composed of large rounded pebbles of
quartz in a paste, apparently of indurated clay, was
noticed. I was not able to ascertain what rock holds its
position between this conglomerate and the sienitic rock
below, which forms the falls of the greys, and much of the
shore at its foot; but I think it is a recurrence of the same
sandstone. An interesting geological fact was noticed here,
similar to what has been observed in other places in Canada,
viz. that the primary rock beneath appears to have thrown
up the sandstone, and occasioned an opposite dip; thus
the sandstone below the falls dips down the river, while
that above is inclined the other way.

The profusion of magnetic sand on the shores of this
river in this place has been already mentioned, as well as
the cementing power it exerts.

The sand, or rather loam, which is used in the “ moulding
room’’ for the finer impressions, is procured from England,
as it is said thatan article proper for the purpose has not
been met with in the country; they, however, both at
Marmora and Kingston use a sand for casting stove plates,
procured in the neighbourhood of those places. Sand of
the best description must be of rare occurrence, as we are

OO

pra

On Metallic Minerals. 407

told that there are only three places in England, in which
it has been found, viz. Highgate, Woolwich and Liverpool,
from the last of which places it is obtained for the moulding
rooms in Scotland.

The following characters appear to be necessary to con-
stitute a good moulding sand, viz :—

Ist.—Great fineness in the particles.

2d.—A freedom from any which soil the fingers.

3d.—Infusibility and incombustibility at the temperature
of melted iron.

4th.—Sufficient adhesiveness to prevent the liquid iron
from washiog any of the particles away.

5th.—Porosity to allow the escape of the gas, (hydrogen,)
which is generated when the fused metal decomposes the
slight degree of moisture necessarily present in the sand,
and which gas is observed to burn away with a blue flame
on the surface of the mould. A mixture of silex and
alumine, the former predominating, and both in a state of
considerable fineness, would afford an article which,
judging a priori, would be likely to answer. ‘The presense
of the red or yellow oxide of iron in an ochrey state would
not probably injure its qualities, but all sand containing
carbonate of lime or vegetable substances should be rejected,
as the former, when in contact with the liquid metal, would
actas a flux upon the other minerals, while the latter
would burn away, leaving vacuities, both of which cireum-
stanees would injure the impression ; much of this, it must
be confessed, is conjecture, unsupported by any experiment
with which I am acquainted.

At Three Rivers there is a small establishment for
recasting old iron and pigs brought from the forges of St.
Maurice, which the occurrence of the Sabbath prevented

3F

408 On Metallic Minerals.

from being cast in moulds. It consists of two cupola
furnaces. The mixture of the old and new iron is found to
improve the quality of the recast metal. Here, besides sugar
and pot ash kettles, &c. &c. iron gear for steam boats is
manufactured.

The establishment at St. Maurice was commenced by the
French Government about the year 1737, and a foundary
for cannon is said to have had existed here, but no vestiges
of any operations of the latter description remain.

I will close this report with a short account of the Batiscan
works, &e.

The river Batiscan enters the St. Lawrence from the
northward about twenty miles below Three Rivers. It is
navigable in the spring for schooners, at other times for
boats, nine miles above its mouth, where are the ruins of
an iron foundary established there about the year 1798.

This establishment consisted ofa blast and air furnace, ~
two forges, asaw and grist mill, besides other necessary
work shops and dwelling houses. Both ore and wood are
to be procured here more readily than at the forges of
St. Maurice.

The cause of its failure appears to have been the want of
capital and good management,

The land either is or was, until very lately, the property
of the Crown.

For most of the information, which is matter of fact
contained in this note, Iam indebted to Mr. Greaves and
to Mr. M‘Cauley, who through the politeness of Mr. Bell,
had been requested to afford me all the information I might
require, which they readily did in the kindest manner when
I visited the St. Maurice works.

On Metallic Minerals. 409

NOTE 7.

This mineral is turned up by the plough, and is found
in the water courses of a field, (composed of a stiff clay,) in
rear of Dr. Mill’s house at Sillery, in the neighbourhood
of Quebec.

It occurs under all of the following forms, botryoidal, reni-
form and mamillary, and varies from the size of a nut to
that of a large potatoe. These are incrusted on the outside
by a yellowish white coating. Internally it is bluish black,
though not uniformly so exhibiting when broken red and
yellow parts. Its structure is earthy and it is extremely
friable—very adhesive to the tongue and gives out a strong
argillaceous odour. Its specific gravity is low, but it
absorbs water so rapidly and abundantly, as to hiss, bubble
and have its weight considerably increased after a short
immersion ; it does not, however, fall to pieces in water.
It yields to the nail and receives a polish from it. It is not
magnetic until exposed to a read heat with grease, and then
only slightly. Before the blow--pipe it becomes glazed and
rounded. With borax it forms a glass glohule of the colour
of the amethyst, but the greater part of the essay remains
suspended in the flux. If too much heat be applied, or if
continued long, the colour of the globule is yellow, after-
wards it becomes colourless.

I may be mistaken in calling this “ wad’ but it is
certainly a combination of manganese and iron.

NOTE 8.

Tale and mica, (the silver varieties,) have often been
mistaken for silver. Some years ago, | was invited by the

410 On Metallic Minerals.

Honble. Judge Taschereau, to visit his seigniory of St.
Mary’s, L. C. At that period it was reported that one of
his tenants had deserted his family and home, and had taken
up his residence in the woods, where he was working by
his own solitary manual labour, which he conceived to be
a silver mine. We visited the scene of his operations and
found an excavation about ten feet every way in—talcose
schist. A letter was written to the Priest of the parish to
endeavour to withdraw the poor enthusiast from so ruinous
an occupation.

NOTE 9.

The reader has been referred to Silliman’s Journal, for
information respecting the gold mines in North Carolina.
It is proposed here to give two extracts from other sources
on the same subject.

** The extent and value of the gold mines are becoming
every day more apparent,—of course some mines are larger
than others. The one at Chisholm’s has been found to be
rich for a quarter of a mile up the branch (of the Yadkin
river?) and on each side from ten to twenty yards. Theve
are many spots of from ten, twenty, to one hundred acres,
on which gold can be found, averaging from half a grain
to two grains of gold per bushel of earth. In most of these
cases it is not gold but water that is scarce. Gold has
been found in the neighbourhood of Charlotte ; those mines
are rich, but their extent is not yet known. The gold
found there is in very fine particles, embedded in ferrugi-
nous clay, running in veins. This is taken out, made fine,
then washed down, and the gold amalgamated. Chisholm’s
gold mine is situated two miles above the narrows of the

a eel

On Metallic Minerals. 411

Yadkin river, on Beaver-dam creek, almost one mile from
its mouth. It is on this side we are erecting our steam
engines. If the machinery for working answers, we can-
not fail to do a good business. The gold is there—all that
we want in order to obtain it is labour-saving machinery.”’
—New York Commercial Advertiser.

* In the United States—in North Carolina, in Cabarras
county, on Meadow creek, &c. the gold occurs in grains
or small masses in alluvial earths, and chiefly in the gravelly
beds of brooks in the dry season.—(Gisss.) According to
Mr. Ayres, one mass weighing twenty-eight pounds has
been discovered. The gold of Cabarras is alloyed with
silver, and a little copper. When purest it is twenty-three
carats fine, and is superior in quality to the gold coins of
England and the United States. In 1810, upwards of one
thousand three hundred and forty-one ounces of this gold,
equal in value to twenty-four thousand six hundred and
eighty-nine dollars, had been received at the mint of the
United states.(Bruce’s Min Jour. vol. 1.) It is said also to
have been found on the upper branches of James’ river, and
on the Catabaw, in South Carolina.

** Itappears that most of the gold of commerce is obtained
from auriferous sands. When thus found, it is extracted
by the simple process of washing the sand. When envel-
oped in other minerals, it is extracted by amalgamation
with Mercury.”’—Creavecann.

The geological associations and position of the gold of
the Carolinas, has become a subject of controversy in
Silliman’s Journal. The competitors are the Professors
Olmsted, Mitchell, Eaton, and Mr. Rothe.

Professor Olmsted considers the gold to occur entirely
in a deluyial formation.

412 On Metallic Minerals.

Professor Mitchell considers it to occur as follows:—

Ist.—In veins of quartz, traversing the ancient primitive
rocks, in very small quantity.

2nd—In veins of quartz, traversing more recent primitive
rocks, in considerable quantity.

3d.—In veins of quartz, traversing transition rocks, and
also disseminated in considerable quantity.

4th.—In soil produced by the decomposition of these three
kinds of rocks. }

Sth.—In the sand of a stream running over old red
limestone, in very minute quantity.

Professor Mitchell is therefore of opinion that the gold
is found almost entirely in sitz. ;

Professor Eaton appears to be of the same opinion, and
further that it occurs in quartz veins traversing talcose
schist ; whereas Mitchell considers the rocky matrix to
be an argillate.*

Mr. Roothe is of opinion that the gold occurs both in
situ and alluvium—in the first instance in quartz veins
traversing secondary greenstone and greenstone slate.

The papers containing this controversy are to be found
in the 9th, 13th, 16th and 18th vol. of Silliman’s Journal.

NOTE 10.

** There is a rich lead mine in the township of Potton,
adjoining the boundary line between Canada and Vermont.
In early times the Indians are reported to have got loose
masses of this lead. It is situated at the base of a bold

* Such was formerly Professor Olmsted’s opinion.

On Metallic Minerals. 413

conical mountain plainly visible from Lake Memphre-

~magog. On the top of the mountain which is small but

flat there is a pond from fifteen to twenty rods in diameter.

In the neighbourhood there is a hill with a precipitous
descent, from the summit of which a column of dense smoke
is frequently seen to issue, about one foot in diameter.—
One man gota few years ago, between thirty and forty
pounds of pure lead, (sulphuret of lead,) in one morning
from the mine described.”—WItcox.

“ On an estate belonging to the Seminary of Quebec in
the Bay of St. Paul, a lead mine was discovered some years
ago. The veins which have been traced are slight, but
two Germans who were brought over to the country on
account of like discoveries in the upper country, examined
this and thought it worth the working.”—Gen. Murray’s
Report.

I have seen this lead; it is an argentiferous galena, I
believe, and occurs in veins traversing a white marble,
associated with chlorophane of a beautiful green colour.
Large masses of this marble detached, but of an angular
form, are found lying at the foot of the primary range, on
the right bank of the Gouffre river at St. Paul’s Bay.—
These masses leave specks of galena disseminated in small
quantity, and are traversed by hair veins of the same. The
chlorophane appears to be embedded in the marble in large
distinct masses. We ascended the hill in search of the
vein or bed, but found nothing but bare and whitened
surfaces of primary rocks.—(See page 82, 2d vol. of the
Society’s Transactions.)

414 On Metallic Minerals.

NOTE 11.

Mineralogical characters of the sulphuret of zine found
in the transition limestone of Kingston.

Two varieties are found, the yellow, the lustre,of which
is resinous and the lead coloured, which bears a resemblance
to galena. The structure of the latter to which, I at pre-
sent confine myself, is perfectly laminar, and the faces of
the laminz exhibit the splendent metallie lustre, which,
however, although it does not entirely vanish on being
scraped, is then only glimmering metallic. It is brittle
and easily scraped by the knife, and the powder thus
obtained is of a light grey colour. Its spacific gravity 4-1.
In the mattrass it decrepitates violently. In the interior
flame of the blow-pipe it becomes first yellowish and by
continuing the heat blackish, during which period a sul-
phurous odour is exhaled, and a powder of a lemon colour,
(sulphur,) is deposited upon the charcoal. But its most
distinguishing character is the unpleasant smell of sulphu-
retted hydrogen which it exhates when its powder is
digested in acid.

NOTE 12.

“IT have found a black and garnet coloured sand in great
abundance on the shores of the Lakes Erie and Michigan.
This is a sulphuret of mercury, and yields about 60 per
cent, It isso easy to be obtained and in so convenient a form
for distillation, that it must become an important article of
commerce.”’—Srickney in Silliman’s Journal, vol. l.

Garnet coloured sands are very common in Canada, but
they are composed of a mixture of maxnetic iron and garnet.

On Metallic Minerals. 415

NOTE 13.

if the townships and allotments of land in these Provinces
liave been laid down by compass, they cannot possibly be
correct, for with all the care an experienced surveyor
could bestow, he would not have been able to make the
proper allowance for the degree of local magnetic attraction,
the comparative intensity of which, at different places is so
various and uncertain. We shall! be told that the surveyor,
in running au allotment or township, first commenced his
operations from some plain or bank of a river, far removed
from hills or mountains, (the more frequent depository of
magnetic iron,) and out of the reach of local magnetic
influence ; and that having there laid down a magnetic
meridian he no longer used the compass, but produced his
lines by covering vertical pickets.

This method is perhaps the best that can be adopted in
the absence of all instruments except the compass, but after
all it is very liable to error, for, not to mention the impos-
sibility of always finding a spot free from mountain or hill,
if a plain or bank of a river so situated, be found, who can
be sure that local magnetic attraction does not extend to it ;
who can be sure that it is not itself the seat of that attrac
tion—may not the very sand at your feet or the boulders
on which you are seated be magnetic.

Where primary rocks occur in this country, the presense
of magnetic iron may be suspected. Some of the secondary
trap division are also magnetic. But local attraction is
sometimes so little indicated by external appearances that
the most experienced may be deceived. Mr. Watts of
Cape Diamond, and Mr. Saxe of the Surveyor General’s

Department of Lower Canada, both agree in stating that

the neighbourhood of L’Acadie is remarkable for the local
aG

416 On Metallic Minerats.

magnetic attraction which exists there. I believe no
geologist would suspect its operation upon passing his eye
over the country. As far as I am acquainted with it, the
soil is alluvial, with a topping of vegetable earth and no
rocks or mountains near enough to effect the compass in so
remarkable a manner. The following quotation from
Guillemard is descriptive of the soil in this portion of the
- Province : * La rivigre Sorel aprés avoir quitté le bassin
de Chambly, mouille le pied d’une montagne appellée
Beleil. Entre cette rivitre et le fleuve St. Laurent, est
une plaine immense, sur cette plaine entirement uni, il ne
se trouve point de roche et presqu’aucune pierre. En creu-
sant on trouve jusqu’a une profondeur considerable, des sol
des differentes espéces, du sable, de l’argille, de la terre
bégélale, et dans beaucoup d’endroits, une mitre matiére
bégélal noir, ressemblant beaucoup A une espéce de tourbe
appellée peat,”’ he adds the summit of the Beloeil mountain
is a deep grey and large grained granite ; it contains little
mica, but a considerable quantity of black schorl; the
sides of the summit are principally composed of a greyish
black schistus, very compact, some parts of which resemble
basalt in form and grain. In descending the Sorel, rocks
are no where seen, at Sorel the banks are of a fine clay,
full of mica.

Is it not possible that M. Guillemard may have mistaken
that for granite, which is a trap rock of the same age and
character as the Montreal mountain? Black crystallized
hornblende often much resembles black schorl; basaltic
hornblende is associated with the former in the Montreal
mountain. I have hazarded this conjecture without having
seen either a specimen of the Belcil mountain, or any other
account of it than M, Guillemard’s, because if correct, it

On Metallic Minerals. Al?

renders more probable the following explanation of the
cause of the magnetic attraction in the neighbourhood of
L’Acadie, viz. that it isowing to the reappearance of the
same trap on the surface of the ground which, as in the
instance of the Montreal mountain, is known to be
very magnetic.

‘This mountain has a remarkable action upon the mag-
netic needle. While surveying on its summit some years
ago, I observed a variation of 4° in a distance of one
hundred and seventy feet. At first some error was suspected
in the operation, but by frequent trials and with different
instruments, the existence ef this phenomenon was _ placed
beyond all doubt.

It was a somewhat singular coincidence, that while
employed ascertaining the fact, Mr. Shand, the overseer of
works in the Engineer Department, who had been employed
running a line by compass on a another part of the moun-
tain, joined me to report a much greater deviation of the
compass in his case than in mine, we were afterwards
obliged to work without any reference to a compass, which
is unquestionably the best plan at all times.

Lieut. Luxmoore, R. E. while measuring a base on the
ice opposite Montreal, a few winters ago, found a Variation
of 1° in about two thousand five hundred yards, probably
the effect of the same cause, though weakened by distance,

It is the character of the trap rocks, like the Montreal
mountain, to effect the compass. The basaltic range in
Ireland, called the ‘ Giant's Causeway,”’ does so in a
remarkable degree. This phenomenon is not owing to
these rocks containing beds or veins of magnetic iron, but
to the iron entering into the composition of the rock, being
magnetic ; and as those rocksin many cases are decidedly

418 On Metallic Minerals.

secondary or overlying their supposed igneous origin,
appears to receive additional support from the fact, that
magnetic iron, a mineral so rare among the secondary class
in general should even be characteristic of the trap
species, and which the purifying nature of the heat these
rocks are supposed to have been subjected to, may
account for.

The neighbourhood of Kingston is remarkable for local
attraction, but I believe it is principally confined to the
Point Henry side of the river, where the occurrence of
amphibolic rocks may occasion it. Mr, M‘Donald, in
running the boundary line of the military reserve exper-
ienced it frequently. Lieutenant Wulf, R.E. noticed a
variation of 10° in a distance of about six hundred feet ;
and Mr. Markland, in a general report on Kingston,
writes—‘‘ No mines have as yet been discovered but from
the difficulties which surveyors baye met with, in running
parallel lines, owing to the variations of the needle, there
can be no doubt of the existence of iron mines.”

An opinion is too generally entertained that in places
where the compass is locally effected, mines of iron may
be expected to occur, and that where no such phenomenon
exhibits itself, it is useless to seek iron ore. In by far the
generality of instances, in which the needle indicates the
vicinity of some magnetic body, that body will be found to
bea barren rock, containing iron it is true, but in an
unavailing quantity, disseminated through the rock in
small particles; to obtain which, in a state of pure iron,
the rock itself must be smelted, In the generality of
instances also, in which mines occur, they exercise no
influence upon the compass whatever.

Among the many species of iron ore, there are only two,

On Metallic Minerals. 419

er at most three, which would be likely to move the needle
upon approaching it. One of these enters as a constituent
among many rocks, particularly those of a dark green
colour, or those of a black which are not limestone. It
also much more rarely forms solid beds of magnetic ore,
such as have been described in this essay. To the former
cause I attribute the local attraction near Kingston, in the
neighbourhood of which place many rocks occur, both
fixed and detached, which would be liable to attract the
needle.

Whatever may be the cause, however, of attraction in
any particular case, all authorities agree in stating that
local attraction is very common in Canada; and this fact
should be particularly borne in remembrance by those who
use the compass, either for surveying or for the more
general purpose of security in the woods. It shews that
too much confidence may be placed in this instrument, and
that an implicit reliance upon it for security, while travers-
ing the forest in this country, might prove the destruction
of the traveller.

Besides a natural loca] attraction, or a local attraction
resulting from natural causes, instruments are sometimes
liable to a similar influence from artificial ones, as appears
from Mr. Amos Eaton’s observations in Silliman’s Journal
for March, 1827, p. 14. With the aid of a microscope, he
detected very minute steel scales attached to the limbs of
the instrument, and left there in the manufacture of it.

The theodolite and the sextant are the only instruments
which should be used by surveyors in this country, without
any reference to the compass of the former, but starting
from a true meridian.

420 On Metallic Minerals.

NOTE 14.

In several places along the northern shore of the St.
Lawrence, below Mal Bay, veins of magnetic iron are
found in the rocks, and they are said in consequence, to
exert an influence upon the ship’s compass, in passing up
and down the river. Captain Bayfield, however, never
noticed any thing of the sort, but attributes the observed
difference in the compasses of vessels from the bearings
laid down in correct charts, to the local attraction of the
vessels themselves. This local attraction, which varies in
different vessels according to the quantity and distribution
of iron in the construction, equipment, and cargo of the
vessel, and also according to the situation in which the
compass is placed with respect to the focus of attraction, is
called the deviation. The deviation has but lately been
taken into account, and allowed for in His Majesty’s ships,
and is in general entirely overlooked in merchant vessels.
The error, from this cause, in those latitudes frequently
exceeds a point of the compass.

NOTE 15.

A Mr. Mason appears to have examined the country in
the neighbourhood of Charlotteville with a view to ascer-
tain the quantity of bog ore in it. He says—“‘ The bog
ore is scattered over the whole of the country; but I do
not know any one bed of ore that will exceed one hundred
and twenty-six tons. I spent three months in examining
the country for ore, and J calculate that it will take all the
ore I found within twenty miles of this place, to supply a
small furnace for seven years; but 1 Believe considerable

On Metallic Minerals. 424

quantities, within that space, are not yet found. No rock
ore has yet been found in this part of the province.” And
Mr. M. thinks it uot likely that there will be.-—(See addi-
tional note commencing in the next page.)

NOTE 16.

In the township of Yonge, some years ago. an explosion |
took place in a vein of iron pyrites, of which the following
is an account, from the pen of Dr. Bigsby :—

“ This explosion took place sixteen years ago (1809) in
the township of Yonge, near the Lake of a Thousand Islands,
in the St. Lawrence. At the time, a man was seeking his
cow in the woods, within a short distance of the spot. On
a sudden he was startled by a tremendous explosion,
attended by volumes of smoke and sulphurous odours.—
Three yearssince, upon being informed of these particulars, I
visited the place. It is half a mile within the woods, north of
the road from Brockville to Kingston, near the easternmost
of two creeks, and about ten miles from Brockville. I
found on the summit of a quartzose mound from thirty to
forty feet high, a round cavity twelve feet deep, twelve feet
long, and nine feet broad. Its sides consisted of very
shattered quartz, spotted brown by oxide of iron, and
covered profusely with acicular yellow and white crystals
of sulphur. The lower parts of the cavity were studded
with masses of iron pyrites, of which there is a vein at the
bottom of the cavity. It is a foot and a half thick, and
disseminates itself into the surrounding quartz. This vein
may be seen running east, with a very high dip, to the
distance of a yard and a half.”

Similar phenomeya have been noticed in a mountain in
Vermont.—(See Silliman'’s Journal for February, 1821.)

422 On Metallic Minerals.

Also in the country towards tho head of the Missouri.
(See Travels of Captains Lewis and Clarke.—Geological
Transactions.)

It is remarkable that pseudo volcanic substances, suchi
as pseudo volcanic carbonate of iron, pseudo volcanic
quartz, formerly having cubic pyrites disseminated through-
out, the impressions of which still remain, ure said to occur
in the township of Yonge.

The following additional note, giving an account of the
iron works on Lake Erie, has been drawn up by my friend
Captain BayriEcp, R. N. who, in my absence from Quebec,
has kindly superintended the printing of my paper.

ADDITIONAL NOTE.

The substance of the following information respecting
the iron works in the London District of Upper Canada has
been communicated by Mr. J. Harris, R, N., a correspond=
ing member of the Literary and Historical Society, who
resides on the shores of Lake Erie near the principal known
deposits of the iron ore which is the subject of this note.

The locality of this ore has not, to my knowledge, been
visited by any person possessing the geological and minera-
logical knowledge which would be requisite to enable any
one to give a complete account of the nature, situation, and
‘associations of these deposits of bog ore, or a mineralogical
description, founded on analysis, from which might be
inferred its value, either in regard to its productiveness of
metal or the more or less facility with which it might
be reduced.

In the absence of a more perfect account, the following,
which I have drawn from the information furnished by my

On Metallic Minerals. 423

friend Mr. Harris, may not be deemed altogether unin-
teresting, particularly as | believe, that it is the first notice
which has been taken of deposits of ore, which from their
advantageous situation, on the immediate shore of Lake
Erie, may hereafter prove of much importance.

The first attempt to establish iron works for the purpose
of working this bog iron ore was made at the mouth of
Potter’s Creek, a small river which enters the bay of Long
Point, in the township of Charlotteville, London District,
Upper Canada. Mr. John Mason, an Englishman, had
the merit of this first attempt. In the year 1817, he erected
a blast furnace, of a rude and primitive description, entirely
by the labour of his own hands, with the exception of the
machinery for the blast. The bellows were formed out of
two hollow white-wood trees. It is thus that the spirit of
enterprise and necessity, which has so truly been called the
mother of invention, enables an individual, in this young
country, to overcome difficulties, which in other situations
would be considered insurmountable. Mr. Mason, how-
ever, did not live to complete his undertaking—he died,
after setting an useful example and collecting a few
tons of ore.

In the year 1820, six young and enterprising Americans
came to the country, and under the firm of Capron & Co.
purchased the place from Mr. Mason’s widow :—proceeding
in their Jabours with united perseverance and industry they
soon had a furnace in operation. They commenced by
casting stoves, hollow ware, and other small articles :—also
some potash kettles and mill castings, but are said to have
generally failed in producing good work.

Their machinery for producing the blast was very
defective, and they also found their works to be too con-

au

424 On Metallic Minerals.

tracted to supply the great and growing demand for their
manufactures.

In 1830 the establishment was burnt by accident, but
was rebuilt almost immediately upon an extended scale
capable of doing more than double the work of the former.
In August, 1830, these works were again in full operation
under the firm of Messrs. Joseph and Benjamen Vannorman.
Mr. J. Vannorman by asimple and ingenious contrivance
has much improved the machinery of the blast, which now
consists of an overshot wheel, moving two pistons by a
single crank—the pistons being at right angles to each
other. But still this improvement does not, it is said,
produce that regularity of blast which is requisite to extract
allthe metal and turn out good work, So sensible are
they of this defect, that they save the slag to remelt,
although they have not yet done so, and probably will not,
unless the ore beds in the vicinity should fail, a circumstance
which is not likely to occur for some years, although
Mr. Harris says he is far from considering them as
inexhaustible.

Mr. J. Vannorman has so improved these works, that
besides the articles previously mentioned, he has lately
succeeded in making some excellent mill castings of
large dimentions.

Besides the furnace which I have mentioned, the same
firm has a forge in Woodhouse for making bar iron—not
of a very good quality. Mr. Harris writes thus: “ the
best character I can give it is, an inferior cold short, but I
consider this inferiority to arise in great measure from the
defective mode of reducing the ore. The bar is not made
from pig iron, but from the ore, which is neither washed
or roasted, consequently good iron can hardly be expected.

On Metallic Minerals. 425

There are two other forges, one in Woodhouse, the other
in Dereham, the latter is not doing much.”

The ore which is used at these works, is bog iron ore,
said to be of a superior quality. It is found in the swamps
of Charlotteville, Middleton, and Windham. Houghton,
Norwich, Dereham, and other parts of the London District
of Upper Canada contain ore also, but these deposits have
not been worked. No rock iron ore is known to exist in
this part of the country, but the deposits of bog iron ore
are said to be derived from water, which oosing from the
soil remains stagnant in the swamps depositing the bog
iron therein. Mr, Harris is of opinion that the clearing
of the country from wood will be likely to check the accu-
mulation of the ore.

The soil contains a very considerable quantity of magnetic
iron, disseminated in grains. Mr. Harris has extracted
(he does not say by what means, but I suppose by a
magnet,) thirty or forty grains of ore from one pound of
the soil, in Charlotteville, previously dried. The whole
district is said to contain more or less of ore, particularly
the sandy parts.

Those beds that have been worked have yielded from
thirty to thirty-three per cent. of very soft iron, It may be
presumed that they do not obtain all the metal, as they
neither wash or roast the ore to rid it of its impurities. —
They do not use any flux, it is probable therefore, that the
particles of soil brought in with, and adhering to the ore,
renders any other flux in some measure unnecessary.—
Much metal is said to be lost by its entering into combina-
tion with the silecious and other impurities thus placed
with it in the furnace. The furnace produces from
eighteen to twenty tons of iron per week.

426 On Metallic Minerals.

They at first tried the fire-stone from Dumfries, but it
failed, so far, that it would only answer for lining. They
now obtain their fire-stone from the State of Ohio, of a
good quality.

Moulding sand is obtained on the site of the furnace, and
it is considered good by several English moulders.

Secondary limestone abounds in the neighbourhood con-
taining organic remains, and burning easily into excellent
lime. Fetid limestone is also met with. These limestones,
lam inclined to believe, support the beds of sand, clay,
and boulders, in which the iron is disseminated, from which
the bog iron ore is derived.

Mr. Harris‘says, that boulders abound all over the
London District, but that primary rocks have not been
observed in situ.

Timber for charcoal is abundant and in great variety—
the hard maple is preferred.

With respect to water, they have great advantages.—
Potter’s Creek, although not a large, is a never-failing
stream. The works are situated at its entrance, imme-
diately on the shore of Lake Erie. Hence the great
conyenience of sending off their weighty manufactured
articles, or of receiving any supplies which they may
require, without the expense of land carriage.

Mr. Harris closes his information by the following facts,
which may be interesting to future travellers——“ There is
a petroleum spring at Lobo, on the river Thames; and
there is a remarkable spring, in my creek, in Charlotte-
ville, near where I reside. I have frequently smelt the
vapours from this spring, at the distance of full half a mile;
it deposits sulphur on the leayes, sticks, and stones,
in the stream.”

SINT

a a a

Minerals, Mineral Waters, &c. 427

——S—S———————

Information received by the Literary and
Historical Society, during the last year,
on the localities of Mtnerats, MINERAL
Waters, and other miscellaneous matters.

Copy of a letter addressed by the late Quetton St. George,
Esq. of York in Upper Canada, to William Stanton, Esq,
and communicated to the Society, together with the piece
of virgin copper therein mentioned, on 27th December,
1830, by the Hon. John Hale.

York, 10me. Juillet, 1806.

Monsieur,—Je vous envoye un morceau de cuivre vierge
que je viens d’acheter d'un Sauvage. Je lui ai demandé
dot il Vavoit eu; il m’a répondu qu’il l’apportoit de bien
loin: comme je n’entends pas bien le mississagué, il me
seroit impossible de dire au sQr de quel endroit ; mais au-
tant que j'ai pu l’entendre, je crois que c’est au nord ouest
de cette Ville, ideux cent milles plus ou moins, car il dit
qu'il ya deux jours de marche d’ici A Vendroit ou Ja mine
est. L’on dit qu'il y aun lac derritre la Rividre du 16, le
Sauvage dit que c’est bien au de la de cet endroit, ce quime
fait croire que ¢’est dans le 44me, dégré de latitude ou au
commencement du dime. Je dois vous dire aussi que le

428 Minerals, Mineral Waters, &c,

Sauvage dit qu’il ya une grande quantité a l’endroit ou il
a eu celui-ci.

Je suis faché mon cher Monsieur, de ne pas pouvoir vous
donner d’autres enseignements a ce sujet.

J’ai Phonneur d’étre. &c.
QuetrTon St. GEORGE,
William Stanton, Ecuier.

Nore.—The specimen sent is about two ounces in
weight, and has been hammered flat, as if in the intention
of putting it to some useful or ornamental purpose. It has
the appearance of being virgin copper.

Extract from a letter received from the Rev. Joseph M.
Bellenger, dated St. Paschal de Kamouraska,31st May, 1831.

Monsieur,—J’ai l"honneur de vous adresser différentes
terres ou ocres, assez communes A St. Paschal, surtout sur
la terre d’un nommé Modeste Fréchette. Il y a sept pa-
quets, qui pourroient, je pense, étre reduits a trois.

lo. terre rouge, ou ocre rougeatre.

2o. terre, ou ocre jaunatre.

30. terre noire, propre a peinturer.

Sur la terre d’un nommé Charles Pelletier, on trouve
trois buttes, qui depuis environ trente ans, s’élevent hors
de terre annuellement. J’envois des échantillns de ces
substances, qui me paroissent du charbon de terre (Houille)
pétrifié ou minéralisé.

La grotte de St. Paul de la Valtrie, dont j’ai parlé, il ya
quelques années sur les papiers publics, abonde en stalacti-
ques de figures trés variées, et mérite lattention des natu-

ralistes.

a

]
7
u
:

Minerals, Mineral Waters, &c. 429

Un No. du Mercury du mois de Mai, mentionne une téte
de fiéche indienne, (Indian arrowhead.) présentée par F.
Belanger Ecuier, trouvée dans le chemin de la Valtrie. Mr.
Jos. M. Bellenger, Curé, a envoyé une téte de fléche Indi-
enne trouvée dans un champ de patates, prés de |’ Eglise de
St. Paul, de la Valtrie, la chose en elle méme est de bien peu
de conséquence, si ce n’est que cette fléche fut trouvée prés
de deux pieds sous terre.

Monsieur, Votre trés-humble serviteur,
Jos. M. BELLENGER, Ptre.

Extract of a letter from Jobn D. M‘Connell, Esq.
Collector of Customs at Gaspé.

Fort Ramsay House, Gaspé, 8th Oct. 1830.

Sir,—This will be handed you by Mr. Benjamin Patterson,
who takes with him a bottle of mineral water for the
purpose of being analyzed, the produce of a spring in the
vicinity of Gaspé Basin; he, as well as the neighboring
inhabitants being desirous of ascertaining its medicinal
qualities. I think it a very strong chalybeate.

The Indians have also discovered an extensive spring
here, which emits a liquid bitumen, possessing all the
qualities of the Barbadoes tar ; it is my intention to forward
a sample at early convenience.

I have the honour to be, Sir, &c.
Joun D. M‘Conne ct.
Jonathan Wurtele, Esq., Quebec.

Nore.—The bottle of mineral water did not come to
hand,

430 Minerals, Mineral Waters, &c.

Extract of a letter from Dr. Dorwin.
Machiche, 30th Oct. 1830.

Dear Sir.—The mineral spring respecting which you are
desirous to obtain information is situated in the township of
Fredericton, three leagues from -Machiche Church, on the
bank of the Machiche river, about ten rods from the waters
edge. Itissues from the earth like boiling water, at the
rate of about three or four quarts in a minute, attended by
a crackling noise near the surface of the water, caused by
the escape ofa gas. The result of observations made in a
hasty manner, and without any great attention to accuracy,
lead me to conclude that the water holds in solution several
salts: muriate of soda exists in great abundance and its
taste predominates when drank. Carbonate of iron is
another ingredient, as is also carbonate of lime in conside-
rable quantity, being found deposited as tufa in the bottom
of the fountain. The carbonates of magnesia and of soda
are also found in the water. The gas evolved is a
compound of carbonic acid and carburetted hydrogen, on
the last of which depends its inflammability. Its effects when
taken are much the same as those of the Saratoga waters,
viz., cathartic, diuretic, sudorific, and tonic. It is the
coldest mineral spring recorded, Fahrenheits thermometer
when immersed in it shewing a heat of 45° only,

Mineral springs possessing nearly the same properties as
the one now described are found at intervals of some miles
between this place and the village of L’Assomption.

I have the honour to be, &c. —
Lewis Dorwin.
J. Morrin, Esq.

Minerals, Mineral Waters, &c. 431

Extract of a letter from the Rev. John Jackson.

William Henry, 4th December, 1830.

Sir,—It may be interesting to the Society to be informed
of the existence of certain saline springs in the neighbour-
hood of Varennes ; from which, tradition says, salt used to
be manufactured in the times ofthe French. That may
well have been the case, for the supply of fluid afforded by
them is very abundant, as | myself witnessed when on
going up to Montreal some years ago, | visited the place.
They are situated about midway between the post road and
the St. Lawrence, on a flat piece of pasture ground, and
issue up through several outlets from what I would calla
common reservoir, covered with a thin crust of turf ; the
ground sinking here to the pressure of the foot; but all
around, beyond their immediate locality it is perfectly dry
and firm.

The impression left on my mind is, that the water is of a
milky hue and somewhat of the like consistency.

I remain dear Sir, &c.
Joun Jackson.
Jonathan Wurtele, Esq.
Corresponding Secy, L. & H. S.

Information received from the Honble. Mr. Justice
Taschereau, respecting a locality of slate.

Québec, 3e. Janvier, 1831.

Cher Monsieur,—Je viens d’arriver de la compagne, d’ot
j'ai apporté plusieurs morceaux d’ardoise que vous m'aviez
demandés: il yen a de plusieurs especes, rouge, noire et

at

432 Minerals, Mineral Waters, &c.

bleue ; toutes de la Paroisse Ste. Césaire en ma Seigneurie
Jolliet. I] n’a pas été facile d’en avoir a présent parce que Ja
terre est trop gelée et couverte de neige: mais le printems
prochain je vous en procurerai de plus beaux morceaux.
Je suis trés-parfaitement, &c.
J.T. TascHEREAv.
L’Honorable J. Sewell Ecuier,
Juge en chef &c.

Nore.—The specimens of slate sent resemble the Welsh
slate, and seem equally fit for the purpose of roofing.

The Society has much satisfaction in being able to
announce the existence of steatite, in quantities apparently
inexhaustible; in the township of Broughton, a few miles
south of Quebec: for this information accompanied, by a
sample, the Society is indebted to William Hall, Esq.
of that place.

EE ee

7
:
.
.

ees
LIST OF

DONATIONS

TO THE

LIBRARY AND MUSEUM,

SINCE JUNE 4, 1829.

J. Fraser, Esquire.—Roman Vase from Herculaneum.

Mr. W. Millar.—A Craniological Skull with an explanatory
pamphlet.

Revd. G. Bourne.—A German Atlas by Homana, 1789. A
variety of Geological specimens.

Dr. Carter.—An antique Roman Coin found near Knares-
borough about a century ago. An Anatomical variety
from a Cows throat.

Sir John Caldwell.—A basket of Insects. Specimens
of Fossil remains discovered at the Hog’s Back, on the
Ottawa.

Peter Sheppard, Esq.—Specimen of Lead in natural state
from Indian Cove near Grand Greve, Bay of Gaspé.

Captain Stanworth, of the General Wolfe.—A Tropical
Sea Bird caught on the Equator with a flying fish in its
mouth, on the passage from Buenos Ayres to Bristol.

S. Robertson, Esq.—A cask of Geological specimens from
Great Mecatma, Labrador.

A434 Donations.

Lt. Col. Cockburn, R, A.—A piece of the linen covering of
an Egyptian Mummy.

Mrs. Bouchette.—A large specimen of Coral.

W. Q. Skewes.—A piece of Red Egyptian Granite from the
Pillar called “ Pompey’s” brought to this country by
Captain Hopper of the ship Crown, broke off the pedestal
by his carpenter.

Chief Justice Sewell.—A specimen of Iron Ore from St.
Mary, Nouvelle Beauce. A specimen of Manganesian
Garnet found at Charlesbourg. A Quebec Almanac, 1779.
The original Diploma of Bachelor of Arts conferred
upon an Indian, D. Ludovicus Vincent, by the College
of Dartmouth, in 1731. The Manifesto published by
General Wolfe on his arrival in the St. Lawrence, and
his General Orders issued on board the Sutherland Ship
of War off St. Nicholas the night before the battle of the
13th September, 1759, on the Plains of Abraham. The
Manifesto published by Count D’Estaing on board the
French Ship of War, the Languedoc, at Boston, Massa-
chusetts, 28th October, 1778, addressed to all the ancient
French in North America. Tables by J. Watt of the
Temperature of the Atmosphere at Quebec, for the seven
vegetating months of 1825. Specimen of Anthracite
found between two rocks on Cape Diamond.

Mr. C. J. R. Ardouin.—A specimen of Intestinal Worm.

Dr. Lyons.—A specimen of Intestinal Worm. A specimen
of Carbonate of Copper.

Lieut. Ingall, 15th Regt.—Five cases of Insects and 74
specimens of Minerals collected in exploring the country
traversed by the St. Maurice expedition, in the summer
of 1829.

eee

Donations. 435

F. X. Perrault, Esq.—A Model of a Wind Saw Mill made
by a Canadian country carpenter.

His Excellency Sir James Kempt, G. C. B. & G.C. H—An
Achromatic Telescope by Dolland.

Mr. Robert Symes.—A specimen of Hyppocampus.

Mrs. Sheppard, Woodfield.—A Dipus Canadensis, ‘‘ The
Canadian Jerboa” caught at St. Foi.

Captain Bayfield, R. N.—53 specimens of Minerals from
the Gulf of St. Lawrence. Specimen of Coraline from
do. A specimen of Coral from Anticosti. A piece of oak
being part of the plank of Ship Meteor, Captain Watson,
remarkably perforated by Insects, while lying in a
port six weeks.

Lieut. Baddely, R. E.—Specimens of Minerals from
Kingston.

Revd. Dr. Harkness.—Five old Coins.

Rey. Joseph M. Bellenger.—An Indian Arrow Head found
in a field at La Valtrie in 1829.

W. Henderson, Jr. Esq.—An Indian Arrow Head found
at St. Joachim.

David Stuart, Esq.—An Indian Stone Hatchet.

Dr. X. Tessier, New York.—Begin’s Therapeutics, 1 vol.
translated into English by Dr, Tessier, with additional
notes, The dedication Copy:

Francis Durette, Esq.—A Box Italian Marbles, containing
120 specimens or varieties,

Mrs. Augustin Germain.—A vol. Engravings, “ Recueil
de cent Estampes representant differentes Nations du
Levant gravées sur les tableaux peints d’apres nature en
1707 et 1708, par les soins de M. Le Hay, a Paris, 1714.”

Hon. Mr. Justice Taschereau.—A specimen of Maple
Sugar 46 years old

436 Donations.

Wm. Green, Esq.—An Indian Arrow Head, discovered by
Mr. Murray, Farmer, in ploughing at Beauport. A
piece of Turf or Peat from Ireland.

Joseph Lagueux, Esq.—A Fillet worn by the Jewish High
Priests, containing the Decalogue written in Hebrew on
a slip of parchment.

Mr. R. F. Maitland—A Silver Coin, being a Queen
Elizabeth Shilling.

Mr. Brent.—A piece of Continental money being a ten
Shilling Note of the Virginia Convention, July 17, 1775.

Lyceum of Natural History of New York.—Two vols. Ist
and 2d and two Nos. Ist and 2d of 3d vol. Annals of
the Lyceum of Natural History of New York. Do. do.
2d and 4th Nos. of vol. 3.

Mr. Evans.—Specimens of Limestone and other Minerals
from Shipton and Compton.

Sir Noel Hill—A number of Cannister Shot of stone and
iron, also a Musket Lock, found in 1818, on ploughing
the Plains of Abraham

Mr. Buchanan, Consul, New York.—A Model ofa Rail Road.

Dr. Wm. Fraser, Murray Bay.—A white Mouse.

Mr. Bowen, R. N.—A Snake from Hare Island.

Mr. Légaré.—A large Crystal of Carbonate of Lime from
Cap Rouge.

Mr. David Anderson, Cornwall.—A portion of a cubical
Crystal of Iron Pyrites, extracted entire from the centre
ofa rolled stone; it measured when whole two inches
each side.

Mr. Wm. Hall.—A piece of Soapstone from the township
of Brougham
Mr. W. 8. Chapman.—A Galvanic Battery.

Dr. William Reece.—Munro’s Anatomical Tables.

:

Donations. A437

Albany Institute.—Nos. 1, 2, and 3 of their Transactions.

Dr. Tessier—Dr. Beck's Address to New York State
Medical Society.

G. M. Ross, Esq.—A list of the Recorders of London, from
the year 1295 to 1789.

Revd. Mr. Bellanger.—A box of minerals, ochres, &c.

Revd.G. Bourne.—Combe’s Elementsof Phrenology. Ryan's
thoughts on Education.

Dr. Jacob Porter.—His Pamplet on the use of the chlorides.

W. S. Sewell, Esq.—Head of an Indian Battle Axe, found
at Beauport.

Hayden, Esq.—Specimens of Soapstone and other
Minerals.

Hon. Mr. Justice Taschereau.—A Manuscript vol. contain-
ing an authentic statement of the officers, non-com-
missioned officers and privates of the Militia of Quebec,
during the siege of that city in 1775-76, with a list of
the volunteers engaged therein, and a statement of the
number of deaths during the siege.

Justin Pierce, Esq.—His improved reference map of the
valley of the Connecticut and Western section of New
England.

W. Green, Esq.—Specimen of Anthracite. Specimen ofa
stone suitable to the purposes of Lithography, from the
Island of Anticosti.

J. Bouchette, Esq.—Dr. Marshall's Treatise on the prac-
tical management of Vaccination.

R. D’Estimauville, Esq.—A number of Insects.

Historical Society of New York.—-A complete series of their
Transactions in five vols.

The Hon. Chief Justice Sewell.—Two 4to works, entitled,
Memoires et Instructions pour servir Jes negociations

438 Donations.

et affaires concernant les droits du Roi de France, 1675.
Et Traites des droits du Roi trés Chrestien sur plusieurs
ététs et Seigneuries possedées par divers princes voisins,
&e. 1680.

Sir W. Scott’s History of Scotland.

Specimen of Freestone from Malbay.

Specimens, polished and unpolished of an excrescence said
to be of the beech tree.

Revd. D. Wilkie.—A collection of Botanical Specimens
made by the late Dr. Sparks, M. A.

Felix de Brunner, Ecr. Lt. Col.—Memoire sur l’emploi
des vases clos portatifs pour la fabrication du charbon
végétal, minéral et animal—par Brevet d’ Invention, par
Felix de Brunner, membre correspondant de la Société
d’Encouragement pour l’Industrie Nationale de France.—
Echantillons de toiles imperméables en fil, en coton, et
fil et coton, par le moyen de la gomme élastique, par
un procédé économique. A bottle containing a sample
of Sirop de Patates.

Albany Institute.—Nos. 5 and6 of Ist vol. of Transactions
of the Albany Institute.

Town Major Frost.—A singular specimen of the potato.

James Ross, Esq.—The jaws of a Shark.

Jones, Esq.—A specimen of Portland stone, contain-

ing fossil shells.

W. Sax, Esq.—Two specimens of Serpentine, from the
township of Leeds.

Charles Campbell, esq.—Histoire politique de Allemagne,
par le Vicomte de la Maillardiere.

Madame Gourgaud.—A singular specimen of the Star-fish.

E. C. Dupuis, Esqg.—Two specimens of Otaheitean Cloth.

tel

Catalogue of Library. 439

Dr. Lyons.—Twenty-five Engravings of newly discovered
Plants.

John Adams, Esq.—A specimen of the Wax Plant, (myrica
cerifera.)

Dr. Perrault.—Several articles of Chinese manufacture,
viz.—a mantle, a silk apron, two specimens of paper
made from the papyrus, a fan, and a pair of slippers.

Hon. John Hale.—A specimen of Virgin Copper, said to
have been found in Upper Canada.

CATALOGUE OF LIBRARY.

Atlas, German—1784. 1 vol. folio.

American Journal of Science, Nos. 1 and 2.

Address to the Astronomical Society of London, | vol. 12mo.

American Mineralogical Journal, 1 vol. 8vo.

Annals of the Lyceum of New York, vols. 1 and 2, and
four numbers of 3d. vol.

Almanac, Nautical—1830-31-32, 3 vols.

Tables for ditto, 1 vol.

Animaux sans Vertébres, (Lamarck’s) 8 vols.

Barton’s North American Flora, 1 vol. Ato.
Bonaparte’s Ornithology, 1 vol. folio.

Bon Jardinier, 1825, 1 vol. 12mo.

Baskerville’s Introduction to Mineralogy, 1 vol, 8yo.
Bourne’s view of Quebec. 1 vol. 18mo.

Bouchette’s Map of Canada.

Botany, Drummond's first step to, 1 vol.

Beck’s Address to the New York State Medical Society.

Brand's Tables of definite proportionals,
3K

440 Catalopue of Library.

Cleaveland’s Mineralogy, 2 vols. Svo.

Considérations sur les causes de la grandeur des Romans—
Paris, 1769, 1 vol. 12mo,

Canadian Review and Magazine, Nos. 4 and 5.

Collections of the New York Historical Society.

Carlisle’s Hunterian Oration, 1826, 1 vol. 4to.

Crawford’s Bonapartiad, (poem).

Chlorides, Porter’s translation of Labaraque, on the use-

of the
Chemical Manipulation, Faraday on.

Doctrine and Use of the Lord’s Supper, Old English, 1550.
Daubeney on Volcanos, 1 vol. 8vo.

De la Beche’s Tabular view of Rocks, I vol.

De Candolle’s Vegetabilis, 2 parts.

Extraits, ou Précédents des Arréts de Québec, 1824,
] vol. 8vo.

Entomology, Kirby and Spence’s Introduction to, 4 vols.

Education, Bryan’s thoughts on (poem).

Encyclopedia Britannica, (new,) Ist vol.

Flora, English, (Smith), 4 vols.

Geology of England and Wales, (Conybeare), | vol. 12mo.

Galeries des Antiques, (Legrand), 1 vol. 8vo.

Greenough’s Geology, 1 vol. 8vo.

Geological Memoir, from the Annales des Mines, by
De la Beche, 1 vol. 8vo.

Greenough’s Geological Map of England.

Griffith’s Animal Kingdom, 24 parts.

Hearne’s Journey, | vol. 4to.
Historia Canadensis, F. Cruxio, 1664, 1 vol.
Histoire Politique de Allemagne, 1 vol.

ee

Catalogue of Library. 441

Jean de Lac, Histoire du Nouveau Monde, 1 vol.

Journal of the Academy of Natural Science.

Jamieson’s Mineralogy, 1 vol. 8vo.

Jamieson’s Manual of Mineralogy, | vol.

Journal of the House of Commons, 1643-44-45, 7 vols. folio.

Liber Veritatis, Prints of Lorraine’s Sketches, 3 vols: folio.
Laws of the State of New York, 1 vol. 8vo.

Museum, 15 vol.

Michaux American Silva, 7 vol.

Munroe’s Tables of the Nervous System, | vol. folio.

Mawe’s Catalogue of Minerals, 1 vol. 12mo,

Manuscript Note Book, partly German, 1 vol.

Moh’s Mineralogy, 3 vols.

Mineral and Mosaical Geology, 2 vols. 8vo.

Maculloch’s Classification of Rocks, 1 vol. 8vo.

Mineralogy, Conversations on, 2 vol. 12mo.

Manuscript, containing list of officers, non-commissioned
officers and privates of the Militia in Quebec during the
seige by the Americans in 1776.

Map of the Valley of the Connecticut and Western Section
of New England, by Justin Pierce, 1828.

Map of England and Wales, (Geological.)

Memoires et Instructions pour servir dans les négociations
et affaires concernant les droits du Roi de France, 1675.

Nouvelles de la République des Lettres, 1685, 1 vol. 12mo,
Netury Liceium, Indian Prayer Book, 1769, 1 vol.

Parkinson’s Organic Remains, 3 vols. 4to,
Prayer Book in Mohawk Language, 1 vol. 12mo.
Phillip’s Introduction to Mineralogy, 1 vol.

’ Phillip’s Mineralogy and Geology, ! vol. 8yo,

442 Catalogue of Library.

Pinkerton’s Petralogy, 2 vols. .
Pinkerton’s Fossil Organic Remains, 1 vol. 12mo,
Prints of Eastern Costumes, | vol. folio,
Philosophical Magazine, Tillock’s, 40 parts.
Pearson’s Practical Astronomy, 2 vols.
Phreneology, Crombe’s Elements of,

Quebec Gazette, 15 vols. folio.
Quebec Almanac for 1789.

Recorders of London, List of, from 1298 to 1789,
Reliquiz Diluvianee, Buckland’s, 1 vol. 4to.

Scrope on Valcanoes, 1 vol. 8vo.

Specimens of Printing Types, 1 vol.
Schoolcraft’s Lead Mines on the Missouri, 1 vol.
Science, Edinburgh Journal of, 4 Nos.
Scotland, Sir W. Scott’s History of, 2 vols.

Transactions of the Geological Society, 7 vols. 4to.

Transactions of Society of Arts, Manufactures and Com-

merce, 43d vol.

Traités des droits du Roi trés-Chrétien sur plusieurs. états
et seigneuries possedés par divers princes voisins,

&c. 1680, 1 vol. Ato.
Transactions of the Albany Institute.

View of the Troubles in England, Charles Ist. time,

1681, 1 vol. folio.

Veta Functoreum Statu ex Hebrorum, | vol. 1]2mo.

Vaccination, Marshall on.

Wilson’s Ornithology, 9 vols. folio.

York, (New) Transactions of the Hist, Soc. of, 5 vols. 8yo.

Zoology, Richardson’s, 1 vol. 4to.

id 5

Instruments and Apparatus. 448)

INSTRUMENTS AND APPARATUS,

A Chemical Cabinet.

Pair of 21-inch Globes.

Large Table Air Pump on Stand with Barometer Guage,

Electric Machine.

Electric Cannon.

Insulated Stool.

Set of Electric Bells. ,

Insulated Stand with double jars to ee the F raokininn
_ Theory,

Cases of Chemical Tests, Acids, &c. i hearts

Double register Thermometer, Case and Magnet. . eons)

Four 14-inch Metal Seale Thermometers from 50° =0 to
220°-x 0.

Two plain Barometers with Thermometers.

Sympisometer.

Daniels Hygrometer.

Wollaston’s Goneometer.

Solar Microscope.

Universal ditto.

Glass Prism on ball and socket stand.

Brande’s Scale of Equivalents.

Magnetic Apparatus.

Alkalimeter.

Jointed and universal dischargers and press,

Exhausted Flask.

Magic Picture.

Luminous Bird.

Pair of Hemispheres.

444 Instruments and Apparatus.

Set of Windmills.

Model of Water Pump.

Hand and Bladder Glass.

Filtering Cup.

Double Transferrer.

Receivers for ditto.

Bell Receiver.

Leslie’s Receiver and Disk, Stand and Evaporator for
freezing experiments.

Set of Glass Bubbles for Specific Gravities.

Portable Transit Instrument, with Achromatic Telescope.

Large Achromatic Telescope.

Glass Globes for shewing the unequal expansion of fluids.

Wollaston’s Pocket Blow-pipe Apparatus.
Geometrical Solids.
Galvanic Battery.

:
:

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

List of Officers of the Literary and Historical Society of Quebec.
Preface.
On Coral Animals in the Gulf of St. Lawrence, by Captain
Ig FO Narnig dx ncan oc< bos nphwathn eintanai an swe sc ain
District traversed by the St. Maurice Expedition, in 1829........
Processes used in Dying, among the Huron Indians, by William
Green, Esq... wes deme dce rp ccmped sccdeseccnasimseecede ce
Sketches of the Tete ei Boule “= by J. ahi 1 eS
Notes on some of the Plants of Lower Canada, by W. Sheppard, Esq.

On Length and Space, by the Rev. D. Wilkie.............4. Wee
Additional Notes on the Geognosy of St, Paul’s Bay, by Lieut.
Baddeley, R.E. ....cscccccossees nie nisei ems siv'a sees euwouaiard

Grammar of the Huron Language, by a Missionary of the Village of
Huron Indians, translated from the Latin by Mr. J. Wilkie..
Sur le Canon de Bronze trouvé en 1826, sur un bane de sable, dans
le Fleuve St. Laurent, par Amable Berthelot, Ecr..........
Remarks on the Country lying between the Rivers St. Maurice and
Saguenay, by Lieut. Ingall, 15th Regt. ........... Fpuecin ey .
Notes upon the Dark Days of Canada, by the Hon. Chief Justice
Mes no ov cesvescntagatetebsepesccccsccsccsececune eves
Topographical Notices of the Country wee between the mouth of
the Ridean and Penetanguishine, by A. Shireff, Esq........ .
On Textile Substances in use among the North American Indians,
by W. Green, Esq....0sscccccccscessevses ececcccne eeeeeee
Autograph Letter of Cotton Mather on Witchcraft........ eeeees
Plan Raisonné d’Education Générale et Permanente, par Joseph
H. Perrault, Bor... .cccccvscsescesece aeteewe secweesgeeten
On Stoves used in Russia for warming dwelling houses, by the
Hon. Chief Justice Sewell........++ssee00- ceenes cocctdenel
On the localities of Metalic Minerals in the Canadas, by Lieut.
Baddeley, R.E..cosccsccccess.cosessvces Snevsecese eveeees
Letters on Minerals, Mineral Waters, Ac. &C....0ceeeeeee serene
List of Donations to the Society...... eheaaeurseeccce eucsnanae
Catalogue of the Library. . Jou edaenuocsstcvccceegseeunaee
Catalogue of Instruments as does. becccviuas ereevccese
An Address by Joseph Skey, Esq. M.D.
And—at the end of the Volume, two Lithographic Maps and a Plan,

PAGE.

216

317

327

332
427
433
439
443

ae try i pens in 5 Sm bee od ato Mo: =

+s al
4 a sponsuned 32, Yo Und od ai. ia 2D ote
! ee enc dadetah tuaads ceaenil igo
a TLD WOUEE al aoitibegs® somal atl bono
i P PemailiW eh vanibal novi of goome pitt al
i. ge Pe eopeeseeehetenne rs + Welniig tle ee nn ee
aia riuebA .L yd easthal olnol ob 204
oe pee ragga Ws, shasta x9 wo 0 wtaelt oe t0 omnod
ae lg LES EERE vom CHE orn? bas
2 Petiyh eaabd pet gd ving 28 20. yrperydo, vd spr ast
r iesnrents ee slides «ig cs dines a vA
: fee a pe BE pgengaal nol re
bee reo hd et 16 Mit ed mad aid) ov) Bh fatsabe Si ale on
Petinstaase hile ob saad ity toe OCAT cis Woo emitord ob halal
i Beane. cbxhenl Nata golpdsroM okivart aq amoral pepe
Sie aRareriil aft uoowiod yatel ytaveD arta
eg pian ae Se iyodstt Jlegal Anelt ed: poe
colts Ya OTL oft yd bans to tt fiat outs

r

Yo dicons ad} meswied gaiyl ytianeD “is “Yo eo1t0f
Om Pe pa, Roride A vd ,scideegnstongd bas seolhll
_ ainda ahaivomnA dio% odd gnomta, oe, al sogumiadae, Tt
Ae eee ren eee ea ee ae pet 23D MY ae:
Lat Oop BGS epg \, . Setalodi 0 go Tadinlh nottod 6 vobtond dy bi dun
dqeeol. vq invanurieT te visvieiD wollsouba'h Samoaleth
PERE CMO RR eo ETRE TE shar
ged ed acamosd yriliowh galuciam wit pianos, al bom a
ED: Fey Wb vip «cyte, e8 ven h Veateb eens lew soitent Toit
i tudhl.gd aubenw? od) ui aleroaitt siletolt Yo eaitifzool
i , Neem ReN nema es Yee es + ales phe et ede wawe ued THe ; off
tere ete etme mene e: - oh ot se Swroailh alrianilé a0
“aad 6 seatae@Wenanesess +s .-(ivioe8 odio aepiindod te
cee enee erent eenene’ caps aged a oP eee e CUTE were t
cenene cone wemeeesnns fill aqua bons anomaden! to au golnie
‘ ee LM pt oil dqopot of wan
be os 008» bus eget cg owl \ ectieaeas _

Quebec, dugust, 1830.

it is, no doubt, very generally known that one of the
principal objects of inquiry contemplated by the founders
of the Literary and Historical Society of Quebec, was the
investigation of the Natural History of the Canadas. In
furtherance of this important object, the Class of Natural
History was formed, to which all communications relative
to it are referred.

In my situation as Chairman of the Class, I have bees
requested to draw up an Address, to be circulated through
the Province, inviting attention to the subject, and solicit-
ing communications relative toit. 1 cannot but indulge a
sanguine hope that the attention of the rising youth of the
country in particular, will be directed to this interesting
subject ; it is so admirably calculated to occupy their leisure
hours agreeably and usefully, to embellish and enlarge, as
well as to invigorate their understanding: and above all to
purify their taste, and to awaken in them a relish for some
of the highest enjoyments of which we are susceptible.

The resources of this great country are so imperfectly
known, and its population is so scattered over its vast
surface, that it is by the co-operation only of many indivi-
duals that any approximation to the end in view can. be
obtained ; that insulated and apparently unimportant facts
become valuable when collected and grouped in a common
centre, by which their relations to each other can be
established and their anomalies explained,

The range of observation is a very wide one, ineluding .

It

as it does, all the objects of Natural History, animate and
inanimate; the earth and its rocky basis—its surface, varying
in its qualities and fitness for the endless variety of organized
beings animal and vegetable, which depend upon it for
subsistence ; and capable, as it is, of an indefinite improve-
ment in its productive powers under the hands of a well-
conducted agriculture—the air we breathe teeming with
life, and liable as it is to occurrences pregnant with good
and with evil to us, guided in all its movements by laws,
the mysteries of which we are yet so ignorant of: and that
mainly from the deficiency of facts, on a comprehensive
view of which, and of which alone, we can hope for an
insight into the nature and causes of those wonderful pheno-
mena which are so perpetually occurring, to the terror of
the uninformed ; but tending unequivocally to the well
being of the whole.

This wide range of object, inviting to such an indefinite
variety of pursuits, is most happily adapted to the different
tastes of individuals, so that each may lay himself out for
those inquiries, and furnish those contributions, to which
his wish may incline, or his situation adapt him.

In a communication of this kind it is not possible to
notice in detai] the objects of peculiar interest; but it is
obvious, with reference to inanimate objects, that we are
all interested in obtaining information relative to the
localities and modifications of the more useful rocks and
minerals; of the applicability of the former to building,
and to ornamental architecture; to the mason and the
millwright.

Thus it appears that in the towaship of Broughton a bed
of rock is found which will become of the most valuable
application, since it combines durability with a softness

mat

:
:
:

iit

which renders it almost as workable as wood. It has
become known to the community generally by means of the
Society. Again, in another place, a rock well adapted for
millstones has been found,—in a third locality it is said
that a peculiar combination of iron stone with clay exists,
which may hereafter render the country independant of a
foreign supply of the principal ingredients in a cement,
which will consolidate under water. It is known that irow
ore abounds in the country, but it must be from inquiries
made and specimens furnished, that those of the best quality
and of the easiest reduction can be traced; and it may be
that an enlightened curiosity may detect other mines of
valuable metals : as of copper and of lead.

In a more advanced state of agriculture, the beds of lime
and of gypsum, which no doubt exist, will become of the
greatest use as manures, and for other purposes. The
first step is to ascertain their presence and accessibility ;
their application will soon follow, so as to extend rapidly
the productive powers of the country. In association with
these last minerals it is more than probable that coal and
rock-salt may be found, or at least springs of brine strong
enough to be brought into use, whenevera judicious search
is made for them.

In animal life, the country swarms with it in all the
gradations, from the larger quadrupeds to the minute and
yet unnamed insect. Any facts which develope their habits,
the laws which regulate their increase and diminution, or
their periodical migrations, will always be interesting to
the Society ; and not less so the contribution of specimens,
particularly when new or rare.

Of vegetables, observations pointing out their localities,
their use in the arts, or in domestic life as adding to our

Iv

choice. of food, as applicable from the strength of their
fibres to clothing or to cordage, or to our stock of useful
medicines, will be received with satisfaction. It cannot
be too well remembered that plants which in their natural
state are most noxious, become harmless and even gratcful
under skilful culture: and that others require the aid of
man only; to increase indefinitely the nutritive matter,
which, in a wild state is scarcely traceable in them. ‘Thus
it is, that the most useful grains of wheat, rye, and barley
have, from culture probably, (for their origin is lost in the
depths of antiquity,) swolleninto bulk, and have become
the deposits of a greatly increased quantity of farinaceous
matter ; and the bitter and scanty root of the potato, as it
is found in its natural state, is enlarged to its present
dimensions, and has lost all its disagreeable qualities. Our
finest fruits, in all their rich variety, have arisen from
origins equally simple and unpromising ; all the varieties
of the grape have no doubt originated from a common
stock, and that, austere and anything but grateful to the
taste. It is probable that we are even yet but in the infancy
of our knowledge of the extent and of the variety to which
analogous products may hereafter arrive, so that, to select
one among innumerable instances, it does not appear to be
improbable that such a plant as the well known Indian
rice (Zizania aquatiea) even now the occasional resource
of the aborigines, may hereafter become an abundant source
ofaliment: rivalling in these cold latitudes, its analogue of
the tropics.

The remark applied to this one plant may be extended
very widely, and to objects at present very little suspected
to be capable of becoming useful ;—the reference is made
solely by way of illustration of a most important truth.

!

Vv

As a means of obtaining information so beneficial to hu-
manity, so calculated to enrich the yet scanty agriculture of
this country, and thus to increase her productiveness, the
Society willatall times receive with thankfulness contribu-
tions bearing upon any of them ; its obligations to individual
contributors will be duly acknowledged and widely circula-
ted. Specimens so furnished will be added to the cabinet with
the names of the donors. The collection of the Society is
already become a valuable one, and is rapidly im proving.—
Its utility is incalculably increased by the measures taken
to classify and arrange the specimens, so that in time the
rooms of the Society must become in many branches of
Natural History, as it already is in Mineralogy, a valuable
school of information. Its doors will be widely opened to
all contributors, and these again will thus be rewarded
for the aid they have afforded. There is no doubt also that
the Society will be willing to enrol among its corresponding
members, all who are residing at a distance, and who
prove their wish to carry on its views by contributing their
own observations; and especially those who furnish it
with well authenticated facts, and also enrich its cabinet
by their contributions.

In thus addressing the enlightened portion of the com-
munity, the Committee hope they do not call in vain upon
it for all the aid which can be afforded towards the attain-
ment of an object of such paramount importance, whether
as regards the general prosperity of the country, the
aequisition and dispersion of much useful information, and
the awakening a relish for laudable pursuits generally,

JOS. SKEY, M. D,
Depy. Inspector of Hospitals,

Penal’ pee etter aw heaa .
ce enaarianbing wail sepa py: st a

te “agents eonhadisasl dhigr g#iago aonapia t |
bas B wihabest e208: teri doen, Reene la cag ment y
MEE fra’ Malice ines bof! erste al attraikt oe .
2 4 | abe ailanattonb Sh54 93) t Have be alate
ne it iio sling solaallan WAR arate g Pus
EN ieen Tek aemitvety phy at 3 bakgue sdav Lav ik ‘omtay
H hay: SP 20 veraggeit ebhcpek Speen ai aitolnsieod 4
pi shibpatit: ai tadt oa! aemmloequy*
E W sido rath visite Hivscntogse wire
‘, a sidatiiaen oes aha int bey Aas, COR 14,00 ie
‘y - Lorhsuege y: Sol wade ids asu'9 in: pesmi te akg
: tebisirer, of cad Hirai o7ed? eA _oy esas
: +“ guilt cela tdvobrou ! Porto iY bolradie wast corals ig |
Ks im Paidnot} 2 0g ete tort ut jonas of galitt t ad, rr

besigomnete a a 38! sent ame “ones ody: Bie:

gedtetinsaas ag erat ati a0 oe a f
ht panty ott aye yt ne

Olly,

go drut! p AOR Ge

Errata for Lizor. BappEtEy’s Communications.

Page 82—2nd line, for eastern read weslern—5th line of same
for colorophane read chlorophane.

Page 87—(Note,) for analogies read analogues.

Page 94—9th line, for magnetic iron read magnetic iron ore.

Pages 334, 340, 347 and 394—For Houghborough read Lough-

borough.
Pages 345, 350—For sulphuret of strontian read sulphate of
: strontian, and 6th line from bottom p, 345, for shaded
read shaped.

Page 346—Last line, for had been read have been,

Page 361—(Note,) for basalt read columnar basalt.
Page 862—15th line, for to have read to have had.

Page 366—5th line from bottom, for real read red,
Page 376—13th line, for octohedral crystals of iron and garnet
read garnet and octohedral crystals of iron.

Page 379~-8th line from the bottom, for probable read improbable.
Page 384—12th line, for various read variable.

Page 389—5th line, for impossible read infusible.
Page 390—Srd line, for heuzenite read lenzenite.
Page 410—5th line, for which read what,
Page 412—1 1th line, for limestone read sandstone, 17th line of

same page, for argillate read argillite.

Page 413—2\st line, for leave read have.

Nore.—The graphite mentioned at page 368 appears, upon

r examination, to be an earthy chlorite intermixed with

some black powdery substance ; when dry its powder and streak
“are greenish,

Errata in the Topographical Notices, by ALEXANDER

Page
Page

Page
Page

Page
Page

Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page

‘Page
Page

Page
Page

Suirrerer, Esquire.

254—5th line from bottom, for ‘* least’’ read last.
260—5th line from top, for ‘‘ stream amidst” read stream
producing amidst.

262—5th line from top, for ‘‘ moss’? read mass.

262—S8th line from bottom, for ‘‘ most fertile’ read least
fertile.

264—13th line from bottom, for ‘ equal depth” read great
depth.

264—2nd line from bottom, for ‘ great tracts” read good
tracts.

265—10th line from bottom, for *¢ la Bosse” read La Posse.
265—9th line from bottom, for ‘* entrance’”’ #ead clearance.
269 —12th line from top, for ‘‘ paddles” read paddlers.
275—13th line from top, for “ difficulties” read difficulty.
276—8th line from top, for ‘“‘ Hurons” read Huron.
278—10th line from top, for ‘* stream” read run.
279—5th line from top, for ‘‘ heavy” read heaving.
281—17th line from top, for ‘‘ for the stream” read The
stream.

253—4th line from top, for “have not yet” read read
have yet.

300—7th line from bottom, for “‘ and” read ends.

304— 15th line from top, for ‘* strong’’ read stony.
307—3rd line from top, for ‘the immense’ read this
immense.

a ee er ee

‘ GEOLOGICAL SKETCH

Saint Maurice and aux Lievres

. Lieut Invall’'s: Step

1830 ~

English Mile
g =

Trois Rivieres

a
weve), Wad
> Swwuld derw
axdel wads, J
»

SO. a

wWwetes .

WAS rice a

“ye fiat port ¢
‘

The Ceorgian Bay. Northerly Coast

r 7 0 y 4 Nole- te Otawas R° Mthe Lakes N Rivers
of Lake Ontarto,& the waters conne Turtle % » F

nce Ottawas.&Cloucester May. are dilen
ling the Bays of Quinty,and of Mat v puakes isles
chadash.are copied: by special permis M" Shurteffs Hap.07 Yes
sion-from Cap Bayfidds Survey

down by that Getlanan [rom
WH

nm the spot Lake Nipissing
2 Country between that Lake the livers
Seven AMadacuaska are alse
inserted frome injurmuton of
vartous kinds obtained by ME

$ Ly y : Shirrett ae /429
Rough I a a Ba tee ‘ =e’ aS % WH
fall
Wyn Vrelle L,

(pe
La sl,

Maple Lae

DMalf Moon I

Wingheda P*

[ILA IKIE HH
ie Cabotstlead

| Dver

(No anark

pe

ey
Doviousies

rey

/ ; Wt, Oey < {6G A | 4 fe,
he Tpografhy of thal Country 4 : ; me - Ais
/ / WA -

se = in Xt LE ; 4
Vilustiatiie of Che Difter oP Pp FU, 4 s 4
oaliiv of the Ay

y- sg Q
P41 grr Be

XK TITRE.

AGhanment B
k ae p ae AO Lg Gy niveely
ra 3 * ‘ x Stet RT
Compiled for the 2*Vol Transactions of 3 2s 1 , ; KR il
the Vaterary & Historical Society of Quebec on tL \ os Vicheleons I” \
Way 103/.— by Wi Nenderson - \2 . Or

Prion
Shenk

B. S a
OFas)

or Shirreft’s, read Maskinongé Valley, being so named
in the Notices, AS.

at

<

,, F,

“A bike G

Pa ety at's
Sey ¥

Ae SA ee

aie "4

een

ey DE